
7 *. * ! 






■! 


* 




























WITH v, CLIVE IN INDIA 


THE BEGINNINGS OF AN EMPIRE 


BY 

if A$H 


HENTY 


AUTHOR OF “IN THE REIGN OF TERROR,” “ WITH WOLFE IN CANADA,” 
“ BY ENGLAND’S AID,” “ THE DRAGON AND THE RAVEN,” 

“WITH LEE IN VIRGINIA ” 





* 


NEW YORK 

NEW YORK PUBLISHING COMPANY 

/ 

26 City Hall Place 


0 -2. Z 


113 imK 




\ 































PREFACE. 


( i 'i 


My Dear^Lads: In the following pages I have en- 
deavored to give you a vivid picture of the wonderful 
events of the ten years, which at their commencement 
saw Madras in the hands of the French — Calcutta at the 
mercy of the Nabob of Bengal — and the English influ- 
ence apparently at the point of extinction in India — and 
which ended in the final triumph of the English both in 
Bengal and Madras. There were yet great battles to be 
fought, great efforts to be made before the vast Empire 
of India fell altogether into British hands; but these 
were but the sequence of the events I have described. 

The historical details are, throughout the story, strictly 
accurate, and for them I am indebted to the history of 
these events written by Mr. Orme, who lived at that 
time, to the “ Life of Lord Clive,” recently published by 
Lieutenant-Colonel Malleson, and to other standard 
authorities. In this book’ I have devoted a somewhat 
smaller space to the personal adventures of my hero than 
in my other historical tales, but the events themselves 
were of such a thrilling and exciting nature that no 
deeds of fiction could surpass them. I hope and be- 
lieve then that you will follow the career of my hero, 
Charlie Marryat, with as much interest as you have 
manifested in the adventures of the many characters to 
whom I have hitherto introduced you. 

A word as to the orthography of the names and places. 
An entirely new method of spelling Indian words has 
lately been invented by the Indian authorities. This is 
no doubt more correct than the rough and ready orthog- 
raphy of the early traders, and I have therefore adopted 


IV 


PREFACE. 


it for all little-known words. But there are Indian 
names which have become household words in Eng- 
land, and should never be changed, and as it would be 
considered a gross piece of pedantry and affectation on 
the part of a tourist on the Continent, who should, on 
his return, say he had been to Genova, Firenz, and Wien, 
instead of Genoa, Florence, and Vienna, it is, I consider, 
an even worse offense to transform Arcot, Cawnpoor, 
and Lucknow, into Arkat, Kahnpur, and Laknao. I 
have tried, therefore, so far as possible, to give the names 
of well-known personages and places in 'the spelling 
familiar to Englishmen, while the new orthography has 
been elsewhere adopted. 

Yours very sincerely, 

G. A. Henty. 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER PAGE 

I. Leaving Home i 

II. The Young Writer, 12 

III. A Brush with Privateers, .... 23 

IV. The Pirates of the Pacific, ... 34 

V. Madras, . 44 

VI. The Arrival of Clive, 56 

VII. The Siege of Arcot, 67 

VIII. The Grand Assault, 79 

IX. The Battle of Kavaripak, .... 90 

X. The Fall of Seringam, .... 101 

XI. An Important Mission, 112 

XII. A Murderous Attempt, 125 

XIII. An Attempt at Murder 136 

XIV. The Siege of Ambur, 148 

XV. The Pirates’ Hold, 160 

XVI. A Tiger Hunt, 172 

XVII. The Capture of Gheriah 184 

XVIII. The “Black Hole” of Calcutta, . . 198 

XIX. A Daring Escape, 210 

XX. The Rescue of the White Captive, . . 221 

XXI. The Battle Outside Calcutta, . . . 232 

XXII. Plassey, 243 

XXIII. Plassey — Continued 255 

XXIV. Mounted Infantry, 264 

XXV. Besieged in a Pagoda, 275 

XXVI. The Siege of Madras, 286 

XXVII. Masulipatam, • 297 

XXVIII. The Defeat of Lally, . . . . . 308 

XXIX. The Siege of Pondicherry, . . . . 3 X 9 

XXX. Home 330 

























































































































































, 





































































































WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


CHAPTER I. 

LEAVING HOME. 

A lady in deep mourning was sitting crying bitterly 
by a fire in small lodgings in the town of Yarmouth. 
Beside her stood a tall lad of sixteen. He was slight in 
build, but his schoolfellows knew that Charlie Marryat’s 
muscles were as firm and hard as those of any boy in 
the school. In all sports requiring activity and endur- 
ance rather than weight and strength he was always con- 
spicuous. Not one in the school could compete with 
him in long-distance running, and when he was one of 
the hares there was but little chance for the hounds. He 
was a capital swimmer and one of the best boxers in the 
school. He had a reputation for being a leader in 
every mischievous prank; but he was honorable and 
manly, would scorn to shelter himself under the sem- 
blance of a lie, and was a prime favorite with his mas- 
ters as well as his schoolfellows. His mother bewailed 
the frequency with which he returned home with black- 
ened eyes and bruised face; for between Dr. Willet’s 
school and the fisher lads of Yarmouth there was a 
standing feud, whose origin dated so far back that none 
of those now at school could trace it. Consequently 
fierce fights often took place in the narrow rows, and 
sometimes the fisher boys would be driven back on to 
the broad quay shaded by trees, by the river, and there 
being reinforced from the craft along the side would 
reassume the offensive and drive their opponents back 
into the main street. 


2 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


It was but six months since Charlie had lost his father, 
who was the officer in command at the coast-guard 
station, and his scanty pension was now all that remained 
for the support of his widow and children. His mother 
had talked his future prospects over many times with 
Charlie. The latter was willing to do anything, but 
could suggest nothing. His father had but little naval 
interest, and had for years been employed on coast- 
guard service. Charlie agreed that although he should 
have liked of all things to go to sea, it was useless to 
think of it now, for he was past the age at which he could 
have entered as a midshipman. The matter had been 
talked over four years before with his father; but the 
latter had pointed out that a life in the navy without 
interest is in most cases a very hard one. If a chance 
of distinguishing himself happened promotion would 
follow; but if not, he might be for years on shore, starv- 
ing on half-pay and waiting in vain for an appointment, 
while officers with more luck and better interest went 
over his head. 

Other professions had been discussed but nothing 
determined upon, when Lieutenant Marryat suddenly 
died. Charlie, although an only son, was not an only 
child, as he had two sisters both younger than himself. 
After a few months of effort Mrs. Marryat found that 
the utmost she could hope to do with her scanty income 
was to maintain herself and daughters and to educate 
them until they should reach an age when they could 
earn their own living as governesses, but that Charlie’s 
keep and education were beyond her resources. She 
had, therefore, very reluctantly written to an uncle whom 
she had not seen for many years; her family having ob- 
jected very strongly to her marriage with a penniless 
lieutenant in the navy. She informed him of the loss of 
her husband, and that although her income was suffi- 
cient to maintain herself and her daughters, she was 
most anxious to start her son, who was now sixteen, in 
life, and therefore begged him to use his influence to 
obtain for him a situation of some sort. The letter 


LEAVING HOME. 3 

which she now held in her hand was the answer to the 
appeal. 

“ My Dear Niece [it began] : Since you, by your 
own foolish conduct and opposition to all our wishes, 
separated yourself from your family and went your own 
way in life, I have heard little of you, as the death of 
your parents so shortly afterward deprived me of all 
sources of information. I regret to hear of the loss 
which you have suffered. I have already taken the 
necessary steps to carry out your wishes. I yesterday 
dined with a friend who is one of the directors of the 
Hon. East India Company, and at my request he has 
kindly placed a writership in the Company at your son’s 
service. He will have to come up to London to see the 
board next week, and will probably have to embark for 
India a fortnight later. I shall be glad if he will take 
up his abode with me during the intervening time. I 
shall be glad also if you will favor me with a statement 
of your income and expenses, with such details as you 
may think necessary. I inclose four five-pound bank- 
notes, in order that your son may obtain such garments 
as may be immediately needful for his appearance before 
the board of directors and for his journey to London. 
I remain, my dear niece, yours sincerely, 

“Joshua Tufton.” 

“ It is cruel,” Mrs. Marryat sobbed — “ cruel to take 
you away from us and send you to India, where you will 
most likely die of fever, or be killed by a tiger, or 
stabbed by one of those horrid natives, in a fortnight.” 

“ Not so bad as that, mother, I hope,” Charlie said 
sympathizingly, although he could not repress a smile; 
“ other people have managed to live out there and have 
come back safe.” 

“ Yes,” Mrs. Marryat said sobbing; “ I know how 
you will come back. A little, yellow, shriveled-up old 
man with no liver, and a dreadful temper, and a black 
servant. I know what it will be.” 


4 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


This time Charlie could not help laughing. “ That’s 
looking too far ahead altogether, mother. You take the 
two extremes. If I don’t die in a fortnight I am to live 
to be a shriveled old man. I’d rather take a happy 
medium, and look forward to coming back before my 
liver is all gone, or my temper all destroyed, with lots 
of money to make you and the girls comfortable. There 
is only one thing, I wish it had been a cadetship instead 
of a writership.” 

“ That is my only comfort,” Mrs. Marryat said. “ If 
it had been a cadetship I should have written to say that 
I would not let you go. It is bad enough as it is; but 
if you had had to fight, I could not have borne it.” 

Charlie did his best to console his mother by telling 
her how everyone who went to India made fortunes, 
and how he should be sure to come back with plenty 
of money, and that when the girls grew up he should be 
able to find rich husbands for them; and at last he suc- 
ceeded in getting her to look at matters in a less gloomy 
light. “ And I’m sure, mother,” he said, “ uncle means 
most kindly. He sends twenty pounds, you see, and 
says that that is for immediate necessities; so I have no 
doubt he means to help to get my outfit, or at any rate 
to advance money which I can repay him out of my 
salary. The letter is rather stiff and business-like, of 
course, but I suppose that’s his way; and you see he asks 
about your income, so perhaps he means to help for the 
girls’ education. I should go away very happy if I knew 
that you would be able to get on comfortably. Of 
course it’s a long way off, mother, and I should have 
liked to stay at home to be a help to you and the girls; 
but one can’t have all one wishes. As far as I am con- 
cerned myself, I would rather go out as a writer there, 
where I shall see strange sights and a strange country, 
than be stuck all my life at a desk in London. What 
is uncle like? ” 

“ He is a short man, my dear, rather stiff and pom- 
pous, with a very stiff cravat. He used to give me his 
finger to shake when I was a child, and I was always 


leaving home. 


5 


afraid of him. He married a most disagreeable woman 
only a year or two before I married myself. But I 
heard she died not very long afterward;” and so Mrs. 
Marryat got talking of her early days and relations, and 
was quite in good spirits again by the time her daughters 
returned from school, and she told them what she was 
now coming to regard as the good fortune which had 
befallen their brother. The girls were greatly affected. 
They adored their brother, and the thought that he was 
going away for years was terrible to them. Nothing 
that could be said pacified them in the slightest degree, 
and they did nothing but cry until they retired to bed. 
Charlie was much affected by their sorrow; but when 
they had retired he took his hat and went out to tell 
the news of his approaching departure to some of his 
chums. 

The next day Mrs. Marryat wrote thanking her uncle 
for his kindness, and saying that Charlie would go 
around to London by the packet which sailed on the 
following Monday, and would, if the wind were fair and 
all went well, reach London on the Wednesday. School 
was, of course, at once given up, and the girls also had 
a holiday till their brother’s departure. When the neces- 
sary clothes were ordered there was little more to do, 
and Charlie spent the time when his boy friends were 
in school, in walking with the girls along the shore, 
talking to them of the future, of the presents he would 
send them home, and of the life he should lead in India; 
while at other times he went out with his favorite school- 
fellows, and joined in one last grand battle with the 
smack boys. 

On Monday morning, after a sad farewell to his family, 
Charlie embarked on board the Yarmouth Belle , a packet 
which performed the journey to and from London once 
a fortnight. She was a roomy lugger built for stowage 
rather than speed, and her hold was crammed and her 
deck piled with packages of salted fish. There were 
five or six other persons also bound for London, the 
journey to which was in those days regarded as an ardu- 


6 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


ous undertaking. As soon as the Yarmouth Belle issued 
from the mouth of the river she began to pitch heavily, 
and Charlie, who, from frequently going out with his 
father in the revenue cutter, was a good sailor, busied 
himself in doing his best for his afflicted fellow- 
passengers. 

Toward evening the wind got up, and shifting ahead 
the captain dropped anchor off Lowestoft. The next 
morning was finer, and the Yarmouth Belle continued her 
way. It was not, however, till Thursday afternoon that 
she dropped anchor in the Pool. Charlie was soon on 
shore, and giving his trunk to a porter desired him to 
lead the way to Bread Street, in which his uncle resided, 
for in the last century such things as country villas were 
almost unknown, and the merchants of London for the 
most part resided in the houses where they carried on 
their business. Keeping close to the porter to see that 
he did not make off with his trunk, for Charlie had 
received many warnings as to the extreme wickedness 
of London, he followed him through the busy streets, 
and arrived safely at his uncle’s door. It was now dusk, 
and Charlie on giving his name was shown upstairs to 
a large room which was lighted by a fire blazing in the 
hearth. Standing with his back to this was a gentleman 
whom he at once recognized from his mother’s descrip- 
tion as her uncle, although he was a good deal more 
portly than when she had seen him last. 

“ So you are my grand-nephew,” he said, holding out 
what Charlie considered to be a very limp and flabby 
hand toward him. 

“Yes, uncle,” Charlie said cheerfully; “and we are 
very much obliged to you, mamma and I, for your 
kindness.” 

“Humph!” the old gentleman grunted. “And how 
is it,” he asked severely, “ that you were not here yester- 
day? My niece’s letter led me to expect that you would 
arrive yesterday.” 

“ We came as fast as we could, uncle,” Charlie 
laughed; “but of course the time depends upon the 


LEAVING HOME. 7 

wind. The captain tells me that he has been as much 
as three weeks coming round.” 

Mr. Tufton grunted again as if to signify that such 
unpunctuality was altogether displeasing to him. “ You 
are tall,” he said, looking up at Charlie, who stood half 
a head above him, “ and thin, very thin. You have a 
loose way of standing which I don’t approve of.” 

“ I’m sorry I’m loose, sir,” Charlie said gravely, “ if 
you do not approve of it; but you see running about and 
playing games makes one lissom. I suppose, now that’s 
all over and I am going to spend my time in writing, 
I shall get stiffen” 

“ I hope so, I hope so,” Mr. Tufton said encourag- 
ingly, and as if stiffness were one of the most desirable 
things in life. “ I like to see young men with a sedate 
bearing. And you left my niece and grand-nieces well, 
I hope?” 

“Quite well, thank you, sir,” Charlie said; “but, of 
course, a good deal upset with parting from me.” 

“ Yes,” Mr. Tufton said; “ I suppose so. Women are 
so emotional. Now there’s nothing I object to more 
than emotion.” 

As Charlie thought that this was probably the case, 
he was silent, although the idea vaguely occurred to him 
that he should like to excite a little emotion in his uncle 
by the sudden insertion of a pin, or some other such 
means. The silence continued for some little time, and 
then Mr. Tufton said, “I always dine at two o’clock; 
but as probably you are hungry — I have observed that 
boys always are hungry — some food will be served you 
in the next room. I had already given my housekeeper 
orders. No doubt you will find it prepared. After that 
you may like to take a walk in the streets. I have supper 
at nine, by which hour you will, of course, have 
returned.” 

Charlie, as he ate his meal, thought to himself that 
his uncle was a pompous old gentleman, and that it would 
be very hard work getting on with him for the next three 
weeks. However, he consoled himself by the thought 


8 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


“ ‘ Kind is as kind does,’ after all, and I expect the old 
gentleman is not as crusty as he looks.” Charlie had 
handed to Mr. Tufton a letter which his mother had 
given him, and when he returned from a ramble through 
the streets he found that gentleman sitting by the fire 
with lights upon a small table beside him. Upon this 
Mrs. Marryat’s letter lay open. 

“ So you have soon become tired of the streets of 
London, grand-nephew? ” he said. 

“ There is not much to see, sir. The lamps do not 
burn very brightly, and the fog is coming on. I thought 
that if it grew thicker I might lose my way, and in that 
case I might not have been in at the hour you named 
for supper.” 

“Humph!” the old gentleman grunted. “So your 
mother has taught you to be punctual to meals. But, 
no; boys’ appetites teach them to be punctual then if 
never at any other time. And why, sir,” he asked 
severely, “ did my niece not write to me before? ” 

“ I don’t know, sir,” Charlie said. “ I suppose she 

did not like — that is, she didn’t think — that is ” 

“Think, sir! like, sir!” said his uncle. “What right 
had she either to think or to like? Her duty clearly was 
to have made me acquainted at once with all the cir- 
cumstances. I suppose I had a right to say whether I 
approved of my grand-nieces going tramping about the 
world as governesses or not. It isn’t because a woman 
chooses by her folly to separate herself from her family 
that they are to be deprived of their rights in a matter 
\)f this kind. Eh, sir, what do you say to that? ” and 
Mr. Tufton looked very angry indeed. 

“ I don’t know, sir,” Charlie said. “ I have never 
thought the matter over.” 

“ Why, sir, suppose she had made you a tinker, sir, 
and you turned out a thief, as likely as not you would 
have done, and you’d been hung, sir, what then? Am 
I to have such discredit as this brought upon me without 
my having any option in the matter? ” 

“ I suppose not, sir,” Charlie said. “ I hope I 


LEAVING HOME. 


9 


shouldn’t have turned out a thief even if I’d been a 
tinker; but perhaps it was because my mother feared 
that this might be the case that she did give you the 
option.” 

His uncle looked at him keenly; but Charlie, though 
with some difficulty, maintained the gravest face. “ It 
is well she did so,” Mr. Tufton said; “very well. If 
she had not done so, I should have known the reason 
why. And you, sir, do you like the thought of going 
to India?” 

“ Yes, uncle, I like the thought very much, though 
I would rather, if I may say so, have gone as a cadet.” 

“ I thought so,” Mr. Tufton said sarcastically; “ I was 
sure of it. You wanted to wear a red coat and a sword, 
and to swagger about the streets of Calcutta, instead of 
making an honorable living and acquiring a fortune.” 

“ I don’t think, sir,” Charlie said, “ that the idea of the 
red coat and sword entered into my mind; but it seemed 
to me the choice of a life of activity and adventure against 
one as a mere clerk.” 

“ Had you entered the military service of the coni' 
pany, even if you didn’t get shot, you could only hope 
to rise to the command of a regiment, ranking with a 
civilian very low down on the list. The stupidity of 
boys is unaccountable. It’s a splendid career, sir, that 
I have opened to you; but if I’d known that you had 
no ambition I would have put you into my own counting- 
house, though there, that wouldn’t have done either, for 
I know you would have blotted the ledger and turned 
all the accounts topsy-turvy. And now, sir, supper is 
ready ”; and the old gentleman led the way into the next 
room. 

Upon the following day Charlie was introduced by his 
uncle to the director who had given him his nomination, 
and was told by him that the board would sit upon the 
following day, and that he must call at the India House 
at eleven o’clock. The ordeal was not a formidable one. 
He was shown into a room where eight *or ten elderly 
gentlemen were sitting around a large table. Among 


10 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


these was his friend of the day before. He was asked 
a question or two about his age, his father’s profession, 
and his place of education. Then the gentleman at the 
head of the table nodded to him, and said he could go, 
and instructions would be sent to him, and that he was 
to prepare to sail in the Lizzie Anderson , which would 
leave the docks in ten days’ time, and that he would be 
for the present stationed at Madras. Much delighted at 
having got through the ordeal so easily, Charlie returned 
to his uncle’s. He did not venture to penetrate into the 
latter’s counting-house, but awaited his coming upstairs 
to dinner, to tell him the news. 

“Humph!” said his uncle; “it is lucky they did not 
find out what a fool you were at once. I was rather 
afraid that even the two minutes would do it. After 
dinner I will send my clerk round with you to get the 
few things which are necessary for your voyage. I sup- 
pose you will want to, what you call amuse yourself, to 
see the beasts at Exeter Change, and the playhouses. 
Here are two sovereigns; don’t get into loose company, 
and don’t get drinking, sir, or out of the house you go.” 

Charlie attempted to express his thanks, but his uncle 
stopped him abruptly. “ Hold your tongue, sir; I am 
doing what is right; a thing, sir, Joshua Tufton always 
has done, and doesn’t expect to be thanked for it. All 
I ask you is, that if you rob the company’s till and are 
hung, don’t mention that you are related to me.” 

After dinner was over, Charlie went out under the 
charge of an old clerk and visited tailors’ and outfitters’ 
shops, and found that his uncle’s idea of the few neces- 
saries for a voyage differed very widely from his own. 
The clerk in each case inquired from the tradesmen what 
was the outfit which gentlemen going to India generally 
took with them, and Charlie was absolutely appalled at 
the magnitude of the orders. Four dozen shirts, ten 
dozen pairs of stockings, two dozen suits of white cotton 
cloth, and everything else in proportion. Charlie in vain 
remonstrated, and even implored the clerk to abstain 
from ordering what appeared to him such a fabulous 


LEAVING HOME. 


II 


amount of things, and begged him at any rate to wait 
until he had spoken to his uncle. The clerk, however, 
replied that he had received instructions that the full 
usual outfit was to be obtained, and that Mr. Tufton 
never permitted his orders to be questioned. Charlie 
was forced to submit, but he was absolutely oppressed 
with the magnitude of his outfit, to carry which six huge 
trunks were required. 

“ It is awful,” Charlie said to himself, “ positively 
awful. How much it will all come to, goodness only 
knows; three or four hundred pounds at least.” 

In those days before steam was thought of, and the 
journey to India was often of six months’ duration, men 
never came home more than once in seven years, and 
often remained in India from the day of their arrival 
until they finally retired, without once revisiting Eng- 
land. The outfits taken out were therefore necessarily 
much larger than at the present time, when a run home to 
England can be accomplished in three weeks, and there 
are plenty of shops in every town in India where all 
European articles of necessity or luxury can be pur- 
chased. After separating from the clerk Charlie felt alto- 
gether unable to start out in search of amusement. 
He wandered about vaguely till supper time, and then 
attempted to address his uncle on the subject. “ My 
dear uncle,” he began, “ you’ve been so awfully kind 
to me that I really do not like to trespass upon you. I 
am positively frightened at the outfit your clerk has 
ordered; it is enormous. I’m sure I can’t want so many 
things possibly, and I would really rather take a much 
smaller outfit, and then, as I want them I can have more 
things out from England and pay for them myself.” 

“You don’t suppose,” Mr. Tufton said sternly, “that 
I’m going to have my nephew go out to India with the 
outfit of a cabin boy? I ordered that you were to have 
the proper outfit of a gentleman, and I requested my 
clerk to order a considerable portion of the things to be 
made of a size which will allow for your growing, for 
you look to me as if you were likely enough to run up 


12 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


into a lanky giant of six feet high. I suppose he has 
done as I ordered him. Don’t let me hear another word 
on the subject.” 


CHAPTER II. 

THE YOUNG WRITER. 

For the next four days Charlie followed his uncle’s 
instructions and amused himself. He visited Exeter 
Change, took a boat and rowed down the river to Green- 
wich, and a coach and visited the palace of Hampton 
Court. He went to see the coaches make their start in 
the morning for all places in England, and marveled 
at the perfection of the turn-outs. He went to the play- 
houses twice, in the evening, and saw Mr. Garrick in his 
performance as Richard the Third. On the fifth day a 
great surprise awaited him. His uncle at breakfast had 
told him briefly that he did not wish him to go out before 
dinner, as someone might want to see him, and Charlie, 
supposing that a messenger might be coming down from 
the India House, waited indoors, and an hour later he 
was astonished when the door of the room opened and 
his mother and sisters entered. With a shout of glad- 
ness and surprise Charlie rushed into their arms. 

“ My dear mother, my dear girls, this is an unex- 
pected pleasure indeed! Why, what has brought you 
here? ” 

“ Didn’t you know we were coming, Charlie? didn’t 
uncle tell you? ” they exclaimed. 

“ Not a word,” Charlie said. “ I never dreamt of such 
a thing. What, has he called you up here to stay till 
I go?” 

“ Oh, my dear, he has been so kind,” his mother said, 
“ and so funny ! He wrote me such a scolding letter, 
just as if I had been a very naughty little girl. He said 
he wasn’t going to allow me to bring disgrace upon him 
by living in wretched lodgings at Yarmouth, nor by 
his grand-nieces being sent out as governesses. So he 


THE YOUNG WRITER. 


13 


ordered me at once, ordered me, Charlie, as if I had no 
will of my own, to give up the lodgings and to take out 
places in the coach yesterday morning. He said we 
were not to shame him by appearing here in rags, and he 
sent me a hundred pounds, every penny of which, he 
said, was to be laid out in clothes. As to the future, he 
said it would be his duty to see that I brought no further 
disgrace upon the family.” 

“ Yes, and he’s been just as kind to me, mother. As 
I told you when I wrote, he had ordered an enormous 
outfit, which will, I am sure, cost hundreds of pounds. 
He makes me go to the playhouses and all sorts of 
amusements, and all the time he has been so kind he 
scolds, and grumbles, and predicts that I shall be 
hanged.” 

“ I’m sure you won’t,” Kate, his youngest sister, said 
indignantly. “ How can he say such a thing! ” 

“ He doesn’t mean it,” Charlie laughed; “ it’s only his 
way. He will go on just the same way with you, I have 
no doubt; but you mustn’t mind, you know, and mustn’t 
laugh, but must look quite grave and serious. Ah ! here 
he is. Oh, uncle, this is kind of you! ” 

“ Hold your tongue, sir,” said his uncle, “ and try 
and learn not to speak to your elders unless you are 
addressed. Niece Mary,” he said, kissing her upon the 
forehead, “ I am glad to see you again. You are not 
so much changed as I expected. And these are my 
grand-nieces, Elizabeth and Kate, though why Kate I 
don’t know. It is a fanciful name and new to the family, 
and I am surprised that you didn’t call her Susanna, 
after your grandmother.” 

Kate made a little face at the thought of being called 
Susanna. However, a warning glance from Charlie 
closed her lips just as she was about to express her 
decided preference for her own name. Mr. Tufton 
kissed them both, muttering to himself: 

“ I suppose I ought to kiss them. Girls always expect 
to be kissed at every opportunity. What are you laugh- 
ing at, grand-niece?” 


14 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


“ I don’t think girls expect to be kissed except by 
people they like/’ Kate said; “but we do like kissing 
you, uncle,” throwing her arms around his neck and kiss- 
ing him heartily; “ because you have been so kind to 
Charlie and have brought us up to see him again.” 

“ You have disarranged my white tie, niece,” Mr. 
Tufton said, extricating himself from Kate’s embrace.” 

“ Niece Mary, I fear that you have not taught your 
daughters to restrain their emotions, and there is nothing 
so dreadful as emotional women.” 

“ Perhaps I have not taken so much pains with their 
education in that way as in some others,” Mrs. Marryat 
said, smiling. “ But, of course, uncle, if you object to 
be kissed, the girls will abstain from doing so.” 

“ No,” Mr. Tufton said thoughtfully. “ It is the duty 
of nieces to kiss their uncles, in moderation — in modera- 
tion, mind, and it is the duty of the uncles to receive 
those salutations, and I do not know that the duty is 
altogether an unpleasant one. I am myself unaccus- 
tomed to be kissed, but it is an operation to which I 
may accustom myself in time.” 

“ I never heard it called an operation, uncle,” Lizzie 
said demurely; “but I now understand the meaning of 
the phrase of a man’s undergoing a painful operation. 
I used to think it meant cutting off a leg, or something 
of that sort, but I see it’s much worse.” 

Her uncle looked at her steadily. 

“ I am afraid, grand-niece, that you intend to be sar- 
castic. This is a hateful habit in a man, worse in a 
woman. Cure yourself of it as speedily as possible, or 
Pleaven help the unhappy man who may some day be 
your husband. And now,” he said, “ ring the bell. The 
housekeeper will show you to your rooms. My nephew 
will tell you what are the hours for meals. Of course 
you will want to be gadding about with him. You will 
understand that there is no occasion to be in to meals; 
but if you are not present when they are upon the table 
you will have to wait for the next. I cannot have my 
house turned upside down by meals being brought up 


THE YOUNG WRITER. 


*5 

at all sorts of hours. You must not expect me, niece, 
to be at your beck and call during the day, as I have 
my business to attend to; but of an evening I shall, of 
course, feel it my duty to accompany you to the play- 
house. It will not do for you to be going about with 
only the protection of a hare-brained boy.” 

The remainder of Charlie’s stay in London passed 
most pleasantly. They visited all the sights of town. 
Mr. Tufton performing what he called his duty with an 
air of protest, but showing a general thoughtfulness and 
desire to please his visitors, which was very apparent 
even when he grunted and grumbled the most. 

On the evening before he started he called Charlie 
down into his counting-house. 

“ To-morrow you are going to sail,” he said, “ and to 
start in life on your own account, and I trust that you 
will, as far as possible, be steady and do your duty to 
your employers. You will understand that although the 
pay of a writer is not high there are opportunities for 
advancement. The company have the monopoly of the 
trade of India, and in addition to their great factories 
at Bombay, Calcutta, and Madras they have many other 
trading stations. Those who by their good conduct 
attract the attention of their superiors rise to positions of 
trust and emolument. There are many who think that the 
company will in time enlarge its operations, and as they 
do so, superior opportunities will offer themselves, and 
since the subject of India has been prominently brought 
before my notice I have examined the question and am 
determined to invest somewhat largely in the stock of 
the company, a step which will naturally give me some 
influence with the board. That influence I shall, always 
supposing that your conduct warrants it, exercise on your 
behalf. As we are now at war with France, and it is 
possible that the vessel in which you are proceeding 
may be attacked by the way, I have thought it proper 
that you should be armed. You will, therefore, find in 
your cabin a brace of pistols, a rifle, and a double-barrel 
shot-gun, which last, I am informed, is a useful weapon 


1 6 WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 

at close quarters. Should your avocations in India per- 
mit your doing so, you will find them useful in the pur- 
suit of game. I hope that you will not be extravagant; 
but as a matter of business I find that it is useful to be 
able to give entertainments to persons who may be in 
a position to benefit or advance you. I have, therefore, 
arranged that you will draw from the factor at Madras 
the sum of two hundred pounds annually in addition to 
your pay. It is clearly my duty to see that my nephew 
has every fair opportunity for making his way. Now, 
go upstairs at once to your mother. I have letters to 
write, and am too busy for talking.” 

So saying, with a peremptory wave of his hand he dis- 
missed his nephew. 

“ Well, mother,” Charlie said, after telling her of his 
uncle’s generosity, “ thank goodness you will be all right 
now anyhow. No doubt uncle intends to do something 
for you and the girls, though he has said nothing at 
present beyond the fact that you are not to be in wretched 
lodgings and they are not to go out as governesses. But 
even if he should change his mind, and I don’t think he 
ever does that, I shall be able to help you. Oh, he is 
kind, isn’t he? ” 

The parting was far less sad than that which had taken 
place at Yarmouth. Charlie was now assured that his 
mother and sisters would be comfortable and well cared 
for in his absence; while his mother, happy in the lighten- 
ing of her anxiety as to the future of her daughters and 
as to the prospects of her son, was able to bear with 
better heart the thought of their long separation. 

Mrs. Marryat and the girls accompanied him on board 
ship. Mr. Tufton declined to join the party, under the 
plea that in the first place he was busy, and in the second 
that he feared there would be an emotional display. He 
sent, however, his head clerk with them, to escort the 
ladies on their return from the docks. 

The Lizzie Anderson was a fine ship of the largest size, 
and she was almost as clean and trim as a man-of-war. 
She carried twelve cannon, two of them thirty-two 


THE YOUNG WRITER. 


17 


pounders, which were in those days considered large 
pieces of ordnance. All the ships of the company, and, 
indeed, all ocean-going merchantmen of the day, were 
armed, as the sea swarmed with privateers and the black 
flag of the pirate was still occasionally to be seen. The 
girls were delighted with all they saw, as, indeed, was 
Charlie, for, accustomed as they were only to the coast- 
ing vessels which frequented the port of Yarmouth, this 
floating castle appeared to them a vessel of stupendous 
size and power. 

This was Charlie’s first visit also to the ship, for his 
uncle had told him that all directions had been given, 
that the trunks with the things necessary for the voyage 
would be found in his cabin at the time of starting, and 
the rest of the luggage in the hold. Everything was in 
order, and Charlie found that his cabin companion was 
a doctor in the service returning to Madras. He was 
a pleasant man of some five or six and thirty, and assured 
Mrs. Marryat that he would soon make her son at home 
on board ship, and would, moreover, put him up to the 
ways of things upon his arrival in India; There were 
many visitors on board saying good-by to their friends, 
and all sat down to lunch, served in the saloon. When 
this was over the bell rang for visitors to go ashore. 
There was a short scene of parting in which Charlie was 
not ashamed to use his handkerchief as freely as did his 
mother and sisters. 

Five minutes later the great vessel passed through the 
dock gates. Charlie stood at the stern waving his hand- 
kerchief as long as he could catch a glimpse of the figures 
of his family, and then, as with her sails spread and the 
tide gaining strength every minute beneath her, the vessel 
made her way down the river, he turned around to 
examine his fellow-passengers. These were some twenty 
in number, and for the most part men. Almost all were, 
in some capacity or other, civil or military, in the service 
of the company; for at that time their monopoly was 
a rigid one, and none outside its boundary were allowed 
to trade in India. The company was indeed solely a 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


j8 

great mercantile house of business. They had their own 
ships, their own establishments, and bought and sold 
goods like other traders. They owned a small extent of 
country around their three great trading towns, and kept 
up a little army composed of two or three white regi- 
ments, and as many composed of natives, trained and 
disciplined like Europeans, and known as Sepoys. Hence 
the clergyman, the doctor, a member of the council of 
Madras, four or five military officers, twice as many 
civilians, and three young writers besides Charlie, were 
all in the employment of the company. 

“Well, youngster/’ a cheery voice said beside him, 
“ take your last look at the smoke of London, for it will 
be a good many years before you see it again, my lad. 
You’ve blue skies and clear ones where you’re going, 
except when it rains, and when it does there is no mis- 
take about it.” 

The speaker was the captain of the Lizzie Anderson , 
a fine sailor-like man of some fifty years, of which near 
forty had been spent in the service of the company. 

“ I’m not a Londoner, £ Charlie said smiling, “ and 
have no regret for. leaving its smoke. Do you think we 
shall make a quick voyage? ” 

“ I hope so,” the captain said, “ but it all depends upon 
the wind. A finer ship never floated than the Lizzie 
Anderson; but the company don’t build their vessels for 
speed, and it’s no use trying to run when you meet a 
Frenchman. Those fellows understand how to build 
ships, and if they could fight them as well as they build 
them we should not long be mistress of the sea.” 

Most of the people on board appeared to know each 
other, and Charlie felt rather lonely till the doctor came 
up and began to chat with him. He told him who most 
of his fellow-passengers were. 

“ That gentleman there, walking on the other side of 
the deck as if not only the ship but the river and banks 
on both sides belonged to him, is one of the council. 
That is his wife over there with a companion holding 
her shawl for her. That pretty little woman next to her 


THE YOUNG WRITER. 


19 


is the wife of Captain Tibbets, the tall man leaning 
against the bulwarks. Those two sisters are going out 
to keep house for their uncle, one of the leading men in 
Madras, and, I suppose, to get husbands, which they 
will most likely do before they have been there many 
weeks. They look very nice girls. But you will soon get 
acquainted with them all. It is surprising how soon 
people get friendly on board ship, though, as a rule, they 
quarrel like cats and dogs before they get to the end 
of it.” 

“What do they quarrel about?” Charlie asked, sur- 
prised. 

“ Oh, about anything or nothing,” the doctor said. 
“ They all get heartily sick of each other and of the 
voyage, and they quarrel because they have nothing else 
to do. You will see we shall be as happy a party as possi- 
ble till we get about as far as the Cape. After that the 
rows will begin, and by the time we get to India half the 
people won't speak to each other. Have you been down 
the river before? That's Gravesend. I see the captain 
is getting ready to anchor. So, I suppose the tide has 
nearly run out. If this wind holds we shall be fairly out 
at sea when you get up to-morrow. You snore, I 
hope? ” 

“ No, sir, I don’t think so,” Charlie said. 

“ I hoped you did,” the doctor said, “ because I’m told 
I do sometimes. However, as I usually smoke a cigar 
on deck the last thing, I hope you will be fairly asleep 
before I am. If at any time I get very bad and keep you 
awake you must shake me.” 

Charlie said it took a good deal to keep him awake, 
and that he should probably get accustomed to it ere 
long. “ It’s better to do that,” he said with a laugh, 
“ than to keep on waking you for the next four or five 
months.” 

A week later the Lizzie Anderson was running down 
the Spanish coast with all sail set. She was out of sight 
of land, and so far had seen nothing likely to cause 
uneasiness. They had met many vessels homeward 


20 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


bound from the Mediterranean, and one or two big ships 
which the captain pronounced to be Indiamen. That 
morning, however, a vessel was seen coming out from 
the land. She seemed to Charlie’s eyes quite a small 
vessel, and he was surprised to see how often the captain 
and officers turned their glasses toward her. 

“ I fancy our friend over there is a French privateer,” 
the doctor remarked to him; “and I should not be sur- 
prised if we found ourselves exchanging shots with her 
before many hours are over.” 

“ But she’s a little bit of a thing,” Charlie said. 
“ Surely she would never venture to attack a ship like 
ours.” 

“ It’s the size of the guns, not the size of the ship, that 
counts, my boy. She has the advantage of being able 
to sail three feet to our two, and probably, small as she 
is, carries half as many men again as we do. However, 
we carry heavy metal, and can give a good account of 
ourselves. Those thirty-twos will astonish our friend if 
she comes within range.” 

The stranger was a large schooner, and the tautness of 
the spars and rigging showed that she was in beautiful 
order. She crossed the line upon which the merchant- 
man was sailing some two miles in her rear, and then, 
bearing up, followed in her wake. 

Charlie stood near the captain, who, instead of watch- 
ing her, was sweeping the horizon with his glass. Pres- 
ently he paused and gazed intently at a distant object. 

“ I thought so,” he said to the first officer. “ I fancied 
that fellow wasn’t alone. He would hardly have ven- 
tured to try his strength with us if he had been. Send 
a man up to the tops and let him see what he can make 
her out to be. I can only see her topmasts, but I can 
make out no yards.” 

Presently the lookout came down and reported that 
the distant vessel appeared to be a large fore-and-aft 
schooner bearing down upon them. 

“ She will not be up for two hours yet,” the captain 
said. “ It will be getting dark then. It is not likely 


THE YOUNG WRITER. 


21 


they will engage at night, but they will keep close and 
show their teeth at daybreak.” 

It soon became known that the belief of the captain 
was that the vessel in their wake, and that which could 
be seen approaching on the beam, were French priva- 
teers, and soon all were preparing in their own way for 
what might happen. The sailors cleared the decks and 
loosed the guns. The gentlemen went below and shortly 
returned bringing up rifles and fowling-pieces. Small- 
arms and cutlasses were brought up and piled around 
the masts. 

“ Why don’t you put on more sail, sir? ” Mr. Ash- 
mead, the member of the council, said to the captain. 
“ My wife, sir, objects to the sound of firearms, and I 
must really beg that you will increase your speed. As 
it is, we are losing rather than gaining upon that vessel 
behind. The duty of the ships of the company is to try 
not to fight.” 

“ If they can help it,” the captain added quietly. “ Not 
to fight if they can help it, Mr. Ashmead. But, unfor- 
tunately, the choice upon the present occasion lies with 
the gentlemen yonder and not with us. It is not of the 
slightest use adding to the sail we carry, for at our very 
best speed those schooners could sail round and round 
us. As night comes on I intend to shorten sail and put 
the ship into fighting trim. In the morning I shall again 
increase it, but I shall not make any attempt to escape 
a combat which it depends entirely on those privateers 
to bring on or not as they choose. I am sorry that Mrs. 
Ashmead should be exposed to the unpleasantness of 
listening to the explosion of firearms, and that my other 
lady passengers should be exposed to the danger which 
cannot but arise more or less from a naval conflict. 
However, I hope, sir, that there need be no great anxiety 
as to the result. The company has given us a heavy 
armament, and you may be sure that we shall all do our 
best.” 

Seeing the gentlemen go below for their guns Charlie 
asked one of the other young writers, a lad of about his 


22 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


own age, named Peters, with whom he had become 
friendly, to go below with him. He had not yet exam- 
ined the arms that his uncle had given him, for he had 
not thought of them since he saw the gun-cases under 
his berth on his first arrival on board ship. He found 
the doctor already in his cabin putting together a heavy 
double-barreled gun. 

“ Well, youngster,” he said, “ so we’re likely to have a 
brush. I see you have a couple of gun-cases under your 
berth. You are a good deal better provided than most 
lads who go out as writers. Ah! that’s a beautiful piece 
of yours,” he said, as Charlie unlocked one of the cases 
and took out a rifle, a small bore and a heavy barrel, and 
beautifully finished. “ With a greased patch and a heavy 
charge that ought to carry a bullet far and true. Have 
you had any practice? ” 

“ Not with this gun, sir. I used sometimes to practice 
shooting at gulls, with a musket on board the cutter 
my father commanded, and I got to be a fair shot 
with it.” 

“ Then you ought to be able to do good work with 
such a piece as that. What is in the other case? Ah! 
that’s a beauty too,” he said as he examined the double- 
barreled gun. “ Made extra strong and heavy, I see, so 
as to carry bullets. You’ll find your shoulder ache at 
first, but you’ll get accustomed to it in time. I’m always 
in favor of heavy barrels. They shoot stronger and 
straighter than your light guns, are not so liable to get 
bent or bruised if a stupid servant drops one across a 
stone, and, after all, two or three pounds .difference in 
weight does not make any material difference when 
you’re accustomed to it. Although, I grant a heavy gun 
does not come quite so quickly up to the shoulder for a 
snap shot.” 

“ Now, Peters,” Charlie said, “ you take the double- 
barrel; I will use the rifle. Mine will come into play 
first, but, as my uncle said when he gave it me, yours will 
do most execution at close quarters.” 

At dusk the schooners, having exchanged some signals 


A BRUSH WITH PRIVATEERS. 


2 3 


by flags, took up their positions, one on each quarter of 
the ship, at a distance of some two miles. 

“ Do not you think,” Charlie asked his friend the doc- 
tor, “ that they are likely to try and board us to-night? ” 

“ No,” the doctor said. “ These privateers generally 
depend upon their long guns. They know that we shall 
be on the watch all night, and that in a hand-to-hand fight 
they would lose a considerable number of men, while by 
keeping at a distance and maintaining a fire with their 
long guns, they rely upon crippling their opponents, and 
then, ranging up under their stern, pouring in a fire at 
close quarters until they surrender. Another thing is 
that they prefer daylight, as they can then see whether 
any other vessel is approaching. Were one of our 
cruisers to hear a cannonade in the night she would come 
down and might take them unaware. No, I think you 
will see that at daylight, if the coast is clear, they will 
begin.” 

Such was evidently the captain’s opinion also, as he 
ordered sail to be still further shortened, and all, save the 
watch on deck, to turn in at once. The lights were all 
extinguished, not that the captain had any idea of evad- 
ing his pursuers, but that he wished to avoid offering 
them a mark for their fire should they approach in the 
darkness. 


CHAPTER III. 

A BRUSH WITH PRIVATEERS. 

The night passed quietly. Once or twice lights were 
seen as the schooners showed a lantern for a moment to 
notify their exact position to each other. As soon as 
dawn broke every man on board the Lizzie Anderson 
was at his post. The schooners had drawn up a little, 
but were still under easy sail. The moment that the day 
grew clear enough for it to be perceived that no other 
sail could be seen above the horizon, fresh sail was spread 
upon the schooners and they began rapidly to draw up. 


24 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


On the previous evening the four heavy guns had been 
brought aft, and the Indiaman could have made a long 
running fight with her opponents had the captain been 
disposed. To this, however, he objected strongly, as his 
vessel was sure to be hulled and knocked about severely, 
and perhaps some of his masts cut down. He was con- 
fident in his power to beat off the two privateers, and he 
therefore did not add a stitch of canvas to the easy sail 
under which he had been holding on all night. Pres- 
ently a puff of smoke shot out from the bow of the 
schooner from the weather quarter, followed almost in- 
stantaneously by one from her consort. Two round shot 
struck up the water, the one under the Indiaman’s stern, 
the other under her forefoot. 

“ The rascals are well within range,” the captain said 
quietly. “ See, they are taking off canvas again. They 
intend to keep at that distance and hammer away at us. 
Just what I thought would be their tactics.” 

Two more shots were fired by the schooners. One 
flew over the deck between the masts and plunged harm- 
lessly in the sea beyond, the other struck the hull with a 
dull crash. 

“ It is lucky the ladies were sent into the hold,” the 
captain said ; “ that shot has gone right through their 
cabin. Now, my lads, have you got the sights well upon 
them? Fire!” 

The four thirty-two pounders spoke out almost at the 
same moment, and all gazed over the bulwarks anx- 
iously to watch the effect, and a cheer arose as it was 
seen how accurate had been the aim of the gunners. 
One shot struck the schooner to windward in the bow, a 
foot or two above the water-level ; another went through 
her foresail close to the mast. 

“ A foot more, and you would have cut his foremast 
asunder.” 

The vessel to leeward had been struck by only one 
shot, the other passing under her stern. She was struck 
just above her deck line, the shot passing through the 
bulwark, and, as they thought on board the merchant- 


A BRUSH WITH PRIVATEERS. 2 $ 

man, narrowly missing if not actually striking the main- 
mast. 

“ There is some damage done,” Dr. Rae said, keeping 
his glass fixed on the vessel; “there is a good deal of 
running about on deck there.” 

It was evident that the display of the heavy metal 
carried by the Indiaman was an unpleasant surprise to 
the privateers. Both lowered sail and ceased firing, and 
there was then a rapid exchange of signals between 
them. 

“ They don’t like it,” the captain said laughing; “ they 
see that they cannot play the game they expected, and 
that they’ve got to take as well as to give. Now it de- 
pends upon the sort of stuff their captains are made of, 
whether they give it up at once or come straight up to 
close quarters. Ah! they mean fighting.” 

As he spoke a cloud of canvas was spread upon the 
schooners, and sailing more than two feet to the mer- 
chantman’s one they ran quickly down toward her, firing 
rapidly as they came. Only the merchantman’s heavy 
guns replied, but these worked steadily and coolly and did 
considerable damage. The bowsprit of one of their 
opponents was shot away. The sails of both vessels were 
pierced in several places, and several ragged holes were 
knocked in their hulls. 

“ If it were not that I do not wish to sacrifice any of 
the lives on board unnecessarily,” the captain said, “ I 
would let them come alongside and try boarding. We 
have a strong crew, and with the sixty soldiers we should 
give them such a reception as they do not dream of. 
However, I will keep them off if I can. Now, Mr. 
James,” he said to the first officer, “ I propose to give that 
vessel to leeward a dose ; they are keeping about abreast, 
and by the course they are making will range alongside 
at about a cable’s length. When I give the word pour a 
broadside with the guns to port upon that weather 
schooner. At that moment, gentlemen,” he said turning 
to the passengers, “ I shall rely upon you to pick off the 
steersman of the other vessel, and to prevent another tak- 


26 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


ing his place. She steers badly now, and the moment her 
helm is free she’ll run up into the wind. As she does so 
I shall bear off, run across her bow, and rake her deck 
with grape as we pass. Will you, Mr. Barlow, order 
your men to be in readiness to open fire with musketry 
upon her as we pass? ” 

The schooners were now running rapidly down upon 
the Indiaman. They were only able to use the guns 
in their bows, and the fire of the Indiaman from the heavy 
guns on her quarter was inflicting more damage than she 
received. 

“ Let all hands lie down on deck,” the captain ordered ; 
“ they will open with their broadside guns as they come 
up. When I give the word let all the guns on the port 
side be trained at the foot of her mainmast, and fire as 
you get the line. On the starboard side lie down till 
I give the word.” 

It was a pretty sight as the schooners, throwing the 
water high up from their sharp cut-waters, came running 
along heeling over under the breeze. As they ranged 
alongside their topsails came down, and a broadside from 
both was poured into the Indiaman. The great ship 
shook as the shot crashed into her, and several sharp 
cries told of the effect which had been produced. Then 
the captain gave the word, and a moment afterward an 
irregular broadside, as the captain of each gun brought 
his piece to bear, was poured into the schooner from the 
guns on the port side. As the privateer heeled over her 
deck could be plainly seen, and the shot of the Indiaman, 
all directed at one point, tore up a hole around the foot 
of the mainmast. In an instant the spar tottered and 
with a crash fell alongside. At the same moment three 
of the passengers took a steady aim over the bulwark at 
the helmsman of the other privateer, and simultaneously 
with the reports of their pieces the man was seen to fall. 
Another sprang forward to take his place, but again the 
rifles spoke out, and he fell beside his comrade. Freed 
from the strain which had counteracted the pressure of 
her mainsail the schooner flew up into the wind. The 


A BRUSH WITH PRIVATEERS. 


27 


Indiaman held on her course for another length and then 
her helm was put up, and she swept down across the 
bows of the privateer. Then the men leaped to their feet, 
the soldiers lined the bulwarks, and as she passed along a 
few yards only distant from her foe, each gun poured a 
storm of grape along her crowded deck while the troops 
and passengers kept up a continuous fire of musketry. 

“That will do,” the captain said quietly; “now we 
may keep her on her course; they have had more than 
enough of it.” 

There was no doubt of that, for the effect of the iron 
storm had been terrible, and the decks of the schooner 
were strewn with dead and dying. For a time after the 
merchantman had borne upon her course the sails of the 
schooner flapped wildly in the wind, and then the fore- 
mast went suddenly over the side. 

“ I should think you could take them both, Captain 
Thompson,” one of the passengers said. 

“ They are as good as taken,” the captain answered, 
“ and would be forced to haul down their flags if I were 
to wear round and continue the fight. But they would 
be worse than useless to me. I should not know what to 
do with their crews, and should have to cripple myself by 
putting very strong prize crews upon them, and so run 
the risk of losing my own ship and cargo. No, my busi- 
ness is to trade and not to fight. If anyone meddle with 
me I am ready to take my own part; but the company 
would not thank me if I were to risk the safety of this 
ship and her valuable cargo for the sake of sending home 
a couple of prizes which might be recaptured as they 
crossed the bay, and would not fetch any great sum if 
they got safely in port.” 

An examination showed that the casualties on board 
the Lizzie Anderson amounted to three killed and eight 
wounded. The former were sewn in hammocks with a 
round shot at their feet and dropped overboard, the 
clergyman reading the burial service. The wounded 
were carried below and attended to by the ship’s surgeon 
and Dr. Rae. The ship’s decks were washed and all 


28 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


traces of the conflict removed. The guns were again 
lashed in their places, carpenters were lowered over the 
side to repair damages, and when the ladies came on 
deck an hour after the conflict was over, two or three 
ragged holes in the bulwarks and a half dozen in the 
sails were the sole signs that the ship had been in action, 
save that some miles astern could be seen the two 
crippled privateers, with all sails lowered, at work to 
repair damages. Two or three days afterward Charlie 
Marryat and his friend Peters were sitting beside Dr. 
Rae, when the latter said: 

“ I hope that we shan’t find the French in Madras when 
we get there.” 

“The French in Madras!” Charlie exclaimed in sur- 
prise. “ Why, sir, there’s no chance for that, is there? ” 

“A very great chance,” the doctor said; “don’t you 
know that they captured the place three years ago? ” 

“ No, sir; Fm ashamed to say that I know nothing at 
all about India except that the company have trading 
stations at Bombay, Madras, and Calcutta.” 

“I will tell you about it,” the doctor said; “it is as 
well that you should understand the position of affairs at 
the place to which you are going. You must know that 
the company hold the town of Madras and a few square 
miles of land around it as tenants of the Nawab of the 
Carnatic, which is the name of that part of India. The 
French have a station at Pondicherry, eighty-six miles to 
the sou’west of Madras. This is a larger and more im- 
portant town than Madras, and of course the greatest 
rivalry prevails between the English and French. The 
French are much more powerful than the English and 
exercise a predominating influence throughout the Car- 
natic. The French governor, M. Dupleix, is a man of 
very great ability and far-seeing views. He has a con- 
siderable force of French soldiers at his command, and 
by the aid which he has given to the nawab upon various 
occasions he has obtained a predominating influence in 
his councils. 

“ When war was declared between England and 


A BRUSH WITH PRIVATEERS. 


29 


France in the year ’44, the English squadron under Com- 
modore Barnet was upon the coast, and the company 
sent out orders to Mr. Morse, the governor of Madras, to 
use every effort to destroy the French settlement, of 
whose rising power they felt the greatest jealousy. Du- 
pleix, seeing the force that could be brought against him, 
and having no French ships on the station, although he 
was aware that a fleet under Admiral La Bourdonnais 
was fitting out and would arrive shortly, dreaded the con- 
test, and proposed to Mr. Morse that the Indian colonies 
of the two nations should remain neutral and take no 
part in the struggle in which their respective countries 
were engaged. Mr. Morse, however, in view of the 
orders he had received from the company, was unable to 
agree to this. Dupleix then applied to the nawab, who 
at his request forbade his European tenants to make war 
on land with each other, an order which they were 
obliged to obey. _ 

“ In July, 1746, La Bourdonnais arrived with his fleet, 
and chased the small English squadron from the Indian 
seas. Dupleix now changed his tactics, and regardless 
of the injunction which he himself had obtained from the 
nawab he determined to crush the English at Madras. 
Fie supplied the fleet with men and money and ordered 
the admiral to sail for Madras. The fleet arrived before 
the town on the 14th of September, landed a portion of 
its troops, 600 in number, with two guns, a short 
distance along the coast, and on the following day dis- 
embarked the rest, consisting of 100 French troops, 
400 Sepoys, and 300 African troops, and summoned 
Madras to surrender. Madras was in no position 
to offer any effectual resistance. The fort was weak 
and indefensible. The English inhabitants consisted 
only of 100 civilians and 200 soldiers. Governor 
Morse endeavored to obtain from the nawab the protec- 
tion which he had before granted to Dupleix, a demand 
which the nawab at once refused. I was there at the 
time and quite agreed with the governor that it was use- 
less to attempt resistance to the force brought against us. 


3 ° 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


The governor, therefore, surrendered on the 21st. The 
garrison and all the civilians in the place not in the serv- 
ice of the company were to become prisoners of war, 
while those in the regular service of the company were 
free to depart, engaging only not to carry arms against 
the French until exchanged. These were the official 
conditions; but La Bourdonnais, influenced by jealousy 
of Dupleix, and by the promise of a bribe of forty thou- 
sand pounds, made a secret condition with Mr. Morse by 
which he bound himself to restore Madras in the future, 
upon the payment of a large sum of money. This agree- 
ment Dupleix, whose heart was set upon the total expul- 
sion of the English, refused to ratify. 

“ A good many of us considered that by this breach of 
the agreement we were released from our parole not to 
carry arms against the French, and a dozen or so of us 
in various disguises escaped from Madras and made our 
way to Fort St. David, a small English settlement twelve 
miles south of Pondicherry. I made the journey with a 
young fellow named Clive, who had come out as a writer 
about two years before. He was a fine young fellow, as 
unfitted as you are, I should think, Marryat, for the dull 
life of a writer, but full of energy and courage. At Fort 
St. David we found 200 English soldiers and 100 Sepoys, 
and a number of us having nothing to do at our own 
work volunteered to aid in the defense. 

“ After Dupleix had conquered Madras, the nawab 
awoke to the fact of the danger of allowing the French 
to become all-powerful by the destruction of the English, 
and ordered Dupleix to restore the place. Dupleix re- 
fused, and the nawab sent his son, Maphuz Khan, to 
invest the town. Dupleix at once dispatched a detach- 
ment of 230 French and 700 Sepoys, commanded by an 
engineer officer named Paradis, to raise the seige. On 
the 2d of November the garrison of Madras sallied out 
and drove away the cavalry of Maphuz Khan, and on the 
4th, Paradis attacked his army and totally defeated it. 

“ This, lads, was a memorable battle; it is the first time 
that European and Indian soldiers have come into con- 


A BRUSH WITH PRIVATEERS. 


31 


test, and it shows how immense is the superiority of 
Europeans. What Paradis did then, opens all sorts of 
possibilities for the future, and it may be that either we 
or the French are destined to rise from mere trading 
companies to be rulers of Indian states. Such, I know, 
is the opinion of young Clive, who is a very long-headed 
and ambitious young fellow. I remember his saying to 
me one night when we were with difficulty holding our 
o\\yi in the trenches, that if we had but a man of energy 
and intelligence at the head of our affairs in Southern 
India we might ere many years passed be masters of the 
Carnatic. I own that it appears to me more likely that 
the French will be in that position, and that we shall not 
have a single establishment left there; but time will 
show. 

“ Having defeated Maphuz Khan, Dupleix resolved to 
make a great effort to expel us from Fort St. David, our 
sole footing left in Southern India, and he dispatched an 
army of 900 Frenchmen, 600 Sepoys, and 100 Africans, 
with six guns and six mortars, against us. They were 
four to one against us and we had hot work, I can tell 
you. Four times they tried to storm the place, and each 
time we drove them back, till at last they gave it up in 
disgust at the end of June, having besieged us for six 
months. Soon after this Admiral Boscawen with a great 
fleet and an army arrived from England, and on the 19th 
of August, besieged Pondicherry. The besieging army 
was 6000 strong, of whom 3720 were English. But 
Pondicherry resisted bravely, and after two months the 
besiegers were forced to retire, having lost in attacks or 
by fever 1065 men. At the end of the siege, in which I 
had served as a medical officer, I returned to England. 
A few months after I left, peace was made between Eng- 
land and France, and by its terms Dupleix had to restore 
Madras to the English. I hear that fighting has been 
going on ever since, the English and French engaging 
as auxiliaries to rival native princes, and especially that 
there was some hot fighting round Davikota. However, 
we shall hear about that when we get there.” 


32 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


“ And what do you think will be the result of it all, 
Dr. Rae?” 

“ I think that undoubtedly sooner or later either the 
French or ourselves will be driven out; which it will be 
remains to be seen. If we are expelled, the effect of our 
defeat is likely to operate disastrously at Calcutta if not 
at Bombay. The French will be regarded as a powerful 
people whom it is necessary to conciliate, while we shall 
be treated as a nation of whom they need have no fear, 
and whom they can oppress accordingly. If we are suc- 
cessful and absolutely obtain possession of the Carnatic, 
our trade will vastly increase, fresh posts and commands 
of all sorts will be established, and there will be a fine 
career open to you young fellows in the service of the 
company.” 

After rounding the Cape of Good Hope the ship en- 
countered a series of very heavy gales, which drove her 
far out of her course up the eastern coast of Africa. In 
the last gale her foremast was carried away, and she put 
in to a small island to refit. She had also sprung a 
leak, and a number of stores were landed to enable her to 
be taken up into shallow water and heeled over in order 
that the leak might be got at. 

The captain hurried on the work with all speed. 

“ Had it not been for this,” Charlie heard him say to 
Mr. Ashmead, “ I would have rigged a jury-mast and 
proceeded; but I can’t stop the leak from the inside with- 
out shifting a great portion of the cargo, and our hold is 
so full that this would be difficult in the extreme. But I 
own that I do not like delaying a day longer than neces- 
sary here. The natives have a very bad reputation, be- 
sides which it is suspected that one if not more pirates 
have their rendezvous in these seas. Several of our mer- 
chantmen have mysteriously disappeared without any 
gale having taken place which would account for their 
loss. The captain of a ship which reached England two 
or three days before we sailed, brought news that when 
she was within a fortnight’s sail of the Cape the sound 
of guns was heard one night, and that afterward a ship 


A BRUSH WITH PRIVATEERS. 


33 


was seen on fire low down on the horizon. He reached 
the spot soon after daybreak and found charred spars and 
other wreckage, but though he cruised about all day he 
could find no signs of any boats. Complaints have been 
made to government, and I hear that there is an intention 
of sending two or three sloops out here to hunt the 
pirates up; but that will be of no use to us.” 

Upon the day of their arrival at the island a native 
sailing boat was seen to pass across the mouth of the bay. 
When half across she suddenly tacked round and sailed 
back in the direction from which she had come. 

Before proceeding to lighten the ship the captain had 
taken steps to put himself in a position of defense. For 
some distance along the center of the bay the ground 
rose abruptly at a distance of some thirty yards from the 
shore, forming a sort of natural terrace; behind this a 
steep hill rose. The terrace, which was forty feet above 
the water level, extended for about a hundred yards 
when the ground on either side of the plateau dropped 
away as steeply as in front. The guns were the first 
things taken out of the ship, and, regardless of the re- 
monstrances of the passengers at what they considered to 
be a waste of time, Captain Thompson had the whole of 
them taken up on the terrace. A small battery was 
thrown up by the sailors at the two corners, and in each 
of these two of the thirty-two pounders were placed. 
The broadside guns were ranged in line along the center 
of the terrace. 

“ Now,” the captain said, when at the end of the 
second day the preparations were completed by the trans- 
port of a quantity of ammunition from the ship’s maga- 
zine to the terrace, “ I feel comfortable. We can defend 
ourselves here against all the pirates of the South Seas. 
If they don’t come we shall only have lost our two days’ 
work, and shall have easy minds for the remainder of our 
stay here, which we should not have had if we had been 
at the mercy of the first of those scoundrels who hap- 
pened to hear of our being laid up.” 

The next morning the work of unloading the ship be- 


34 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


gan, the bales and packages being lowered from the ship 
as they were brought up from the hold into boats along- 
side, and then taken to the shore and piled there at the 
foot of the slope. This occupied three days, and at the 
end of that time the greater portion of the cargo had 
been removed. The ship, now several feet lighter in the 
water than before, was brought broadside to shore until 
her keel touched the ground. Then the remaining cargo 
was shifted, and by the additional aid of tackle and pur- 
chases on shore fastened to her masts, she was heeled 
over until her keel nearly reached the level of the water. 
It was late one evening when this work was finished, and 
the following morning the crew were to begin to scrape 
her bottom, and the carpenters were to repair the leak, 
and the whole of the seams under water were to be 
calked and repitched. 

Hitherto ail had remained on board; but previous to 
the ship being heeled over, tents constructed of the sails 
were erected on the terrace, beds and other articles of 
necessity landed, and the passengers, troops, and crew 
took up their temporary abode there. 


CHAPTER IV. 

THE PIRATES OF THE PACIFIC. 

A regular watch was set both on the plateau and on 
board ship. Toward morning one of the watch on board 
hailed the officer above. 

“ I have fancied, sir, for some time that I heard noises. 
It seems to me like the splash of a very large number of 
oars.” 

“ I have heard nothing,” the officer said ; “ but you 
might hear sounds down there coming along on the 
water before I do. I will go down to the water’s edge 
and listen.” 

He did so, and was at once convinced that the man’s 
ears had not deceived him. Although the night was per- 


THE PIRATES OF THE PACIFIC. 


35 


fectly still and not a breath of wind was stirring, he heard 
a low rustling sound like that of the wind passing 
through the dried leaves of a forest in autumn. 

“ You are right, Johnson, there is something going on 
out at sea beyond the mouth of the bay. I will call the 
captain at once.” 

Captain Thompson on being aroused also went down 
to the water-side to listen, and at once ordered the whole 
party to get under arms. He requested Mr. Barlow, the 
young lieutenant in charge of the troops, to place half his 
men across each end of the plateau. The back was de- 
fended by a cliff which rose almost perpendicularly from 
it to a height of some hundred feet, the plateau being 
some thirty yards in depth from the sea face to its foot. 
The male passengers were requested to divide them- 
selves in two parties, and to join the soldiers in defend- 
ing the position against flank attacks. The guns were 
all loaded, and the sailors then set to work dragging up 
bales of goods from below, and placing them so as to 
form a sort of breastwork before the guns along the sea 
face* 

The noise at sea had by this time greatly increased, 
and although it was still too dark to see what was pass- 
ing, Captain Thompson said that he had no doubt what- 
ever that the boats had one or two more large ships in 
tow. 

“ Had it not been for that,” he said, “ they would long 
ago have been here. I expect that they hoped to catch 
us napping, but the wind fell and delayed them. They 
little dream how well we are prepared. Did they know 
of our fort here, I question whether they would have 
ventured upon attacking us at all, but would have waited 
till we were well at sea, and then our chance would have 
been a slight one. Well, gentlemen, you will allow that 
the two days were not wasted^ I think now the pirates 
are well inside the bay. In half an hour we shall have 
light enough to see them. There, listen! there’s the 
splash of their anchors. There, again! I fancy there 
are two ships moored broadside on, stem and stern.” 


3$ 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


All this time the work on shore had been conducted in 
absolute silence, and the pirates could have had no inti- 
mation that their presence was discovered. Presently 
against the faintly dawning light in the east the masts of 
two vessels could be seen. One was a large ship, the 
other a brig. Almost at the same time the rough sound 
of boats’ keels grounding on the shore could be heard. 

“ Just as I thought,” the captain whispered; “they 
have guessed that some of us will be ashore, and will 
make a rush upon us here when the ships open fire.” 

The word was passed along the guns that every one 
was to be double-shotted and that their fire was at first 
to be directed at the brig. They were to aim between 
wind and water, and strive to sink her as speedily as 
possible. As the light gradually grew brighter the party 
on the plateau anxiously watched for the moment when, 
the hull of the Indiaman becoming plain to the enemy, 
these would open fire upon it, and so give the signal for 
the fight. At the first alarm the tents had all been 
leveled, and a thick barricade of bales erected around 
a slight depression of the plateau at the foot of the cliff 
in its rear. Here the ladies were placed for shelter. 

As the light increased it could be seen that in addition 
to the two ships were a large number of native dhows. 
Presently from the black side of the ship a jet of fire 
shot out, and at the signal a broadside was poured into 
the Indiaman by the two vessels. At the same moment, 
with a hideous yell, hundreds of black figures leaped 
to their feet on the beach and rushed toward the, as yet 
unseen, position of the English. The captain shouted 
“Fire!” and the twenty guns on the plateau poured 
their fire simultaneously into the side of the brig. The 
captain then gave orders that two of the light guns 
should be run along the terrace to take position on the 
flanks, and aid the soldiers against the attacks. This 
time Charlie had lent his rifle to Peters, and was himself 
armed with his double-barrel gun. 

“ Steady, boys,” Mr. Hallam, the ensign who com- 
manded the soldiers at the side where Charlie was sta- 


THE PIRATES OF THE PACIFIC. 37 

tioned, cried; “don’t fire a shot till I give the word, 
and then aim low.” 

With terrific yells the throng of natives, waving curved 
swords, spears, and clubs, rushed forward. The steep 
ascent checked them, but they rushed up until within 
ten yards of the line of soldiers on its brow. Then Mr. 
Hallam gave the word to fire, and the soldiers and 
passengers poured a withering volley into them. At so 
short a distance the effect was tremendous. Completely 
swept away, the leading rank fell down among their 
comrades, and these for a moment recoiled. Then gath- 
ering themselves together they again rushed forward, 
while those in their rear discharged volleys of arrows 
over their heads. 

Among the defenders every man now fought for him- 
self, loading and firing as rapidly as possible. Some- 
times the natives nearly gained a footing on the crest, 
but each time the defenders with clubbed muskets beat 
them back again. The combat was, however, doubtful, 
for their assailants were many hundred strong, when the 
defenders were gladdened with a shout of “ Make way, 
my hearties. Let us come to the front and give them 
a dose.” 

In a moment two ship’s guns, loaded to the muzzle 
with bullets, were run forward, and poured their contents 
among the crowded masses below. The effect was 
decisive. The natives, shaken by the resistance they had 
already experienced and appalled by the destruction 
wrought by the cannon, turned and fled along the shore, 
followed by the shots of the defenders, and by two more 
rounds of grape which the sailors poured into them 
before they could reach their boats. Similar success had 
attended the defenders of the other flank of the position, 
and all hands now aided in swinging round the guns 
which had done such good service, to enable them to 
bear their share in the fight with the ships. In the 
middle of the fight the party had heard a great cheer from 
those working the seaward guns, and they now saw its 
cause. The brig had disappeared below the water, and 


38 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


the sailors were now engaged in a contest with the ship. 
The pirates fought their guns well, but they were alto- 
gether overmatched by the twenty guns playing upon 
them from a commanding position. Already the dhows 
were hoisting their sails, and one of the cables of the 
ship suddenly disappeared in the water, while a number 
of men sprang upon the ratlines. 

“ Fire at the masts,” Captain Thompson shouted; 
“ cripple her if you can. Let all with muskets and rifles 
try to keep men out of the rigging.” 

The ship was anchored within three hundred yards of 
the shore, and although the distance was too great for 
anything like accurate fire, several of the men dropped 
as they ran up the shrouds. The sailors worked their 
guns with redoubled vigor, and a great shout arose as 
the mainmast, wounded in several places, fell over the 
side. 

“ Sweep her decks with grape,” the captain shouted, 
“ and she’s ours. Mr. James, take all the men that can 
be spared from the guns, man the boats, and make a 
dash for the ship at once. I see the men are leaving 
her. They’re crowding over the side into their boats. 
Most likely they’ll set fire to her. Set all your strength 
putting it out. We will attend to the other boats.” 

It was evident now that the pirates were deserting the 
ship. They had fallen into a complete trap, and instead of 
the easy prey on which they had calculated, found them- 
selves crushed by the fire of a heavy battery in a com- 
manding position. Captain Thompson, seeing that the 
guns of the ship were silent and that all resistance had 
ceased, now ordered the sailors to turn their guns on the 
dhows and sink as many as possible. These, crowded 
together in their efforts to escape, offered an easy mark 
for the gunners, whose shot tore through their sides, 
smashing and sinking them in all directions. In ten 
minutes the last of those that floated had gained the 
mouth of the bay and, accompanied by the boats crowded 
with the crews of the two pirate vessels, made off, fol- 
lowed by the shot of the thirty-two pounders until they 


THE PIRATES OF THE PACIFIC. 


39 


had turned the low promontory which formed the head 
of the bay. Long ere this Mr. James and the boats’ 
crews had gained the vessel, and were engaged in com- 
bating the fire, which had broken out in three places. 

The boats were sent back to shore and returned with 
Captain Thompson and the rest of the sailors, and this 
reinforcement soon enabled them to get the mastery of 
the flames. The ship was found to be the Dover Castle , 
a new and very fast ship of the company’s service, of 
which all traces had been lost since she left Bombay two 
years before. She was now painted entirely black, and 
a snake had been added for her figure-head. The origi- 
nal name, however, still remained upon the binnacle 
and ship’s bell. Her former armament had been in- 
creased, and she now carried thirty guns, of which ten 
were thirty-two pounders. A subsequent search showed 
that her hold was stored with valuable goods, which had, 
by the marks upon the bales, evidently belonged to 
several ships which she had no doubt taken and sunk 
after removing the pick of their cargoes. 

The prize was a most valuable one, and the captain felt 
that the board of directors would be highly delighted 
at the recovery of their ship, and still more by the 
destruction of the two bands of pirates. The deck of 
the ship was thickly strewn with dead. Among them 
was the body of a man who by his dress was evidently 
the captain. From some of the pirates who still lived 
Captain Thompson learned that the brig was the original 
pirate, that she had captured the Dover Castle , that from 
her and subsequent prizes they had obtained sufficient 
hands to man both ships, all who refused to join being 
compelled to walk the plank. These were the only two 
pirate ships in those seas, so far as the men knew. Their 
rendezvous was at a large native town on the mainland, 
at the mouth of a river three days’ sail distant. The 
news of the Indiaman being laid up refitting at the 
island was brought by the native craft they had seen on 
the day after their arrival, and upon its being known 
the natives had insisted in joining in the attack. The 


40 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


pirate captain (whose interest it was to keep well with 
them, could not refuse to allow them to join, although 
he would gladly have dispensed with their aid, believing 
his own force to be far more than sufficient to capture 
the vessel, which he supposed to be lying an easy prize 
at his hands. 

Another ten days were spent in getting the cargo and 
guns on board the Lizzie Anderson , and in fitting out 
both ships for sea. Then Mr. James and a portion of 
the crew being placed on board the prize, they sailed 
together for India, The Dover Castle proved to be much 
the faster sailer, but Captain Thompson ordered her to 
reduce sail and to keep about a mile in his wake, as she 
could at any time close up when necessary; and the two 
together would be able to oppose a determined front even 
to a French frigate, should they meet with one on their 
way. 

The voyage passed without incident, save that when 
rounding the southern point of Ceylon a sudden squall 
from the land struck them. The vessel heeled over sud- 
denly, and a young soldier who was sitting on the bul- 
warks to leeward was jerked backward and fell into the 
water. Charlie Marryat was on the quarterdeck, leaning 
against the rail, watching a shoal of flying-fish passing 
at a short distance. In the noise and confusion caused 
by the sudden squall, the creaking of cordage, the flap- 
ping of sails, and the shouts of the officers to let go the 
sheets, the fall of the soldier was unnoticec?Cand Charlie 
was startled by perceiving in the water below him the 
figure of a struggling man. He saw at once that he was 
unable to swim. Without an instant’s hesitation Charlie 
threw off his coat and kicked off his shoes, and with 
a loud shout of “ Man overboard ! ” sprang from the 
taffrail and with a few vigorous strokes was alongside 
the drowning man. He seized him by the collar and 
held him at a distance. “ Now,” he said, “ don’t strug- 
gle, else I’ll let you go. Keep quiet and I can hold you 
till we’re picked up.” 

In spite of the injunction the man strove to grasp him, 


THE PIRATES OF THE PACIFIC. 


41 


but Charlie at once let go his hold and swam a pace back 
as the man sunk. When he came up he seized him 
again, and again shouted, “ Keep quite quiet, else I’ll 
leave go.” 

This time the soldier obeyed him, and turning him on 
his back and keeping his face above water, Charlie 
looked around at the vessel he had left. The Indiaman 
was still in confusion. The squall had been sudden and 
strong. The sheets had been let go, the canvas was 
flapping in the wind, and the hands were aloft reducing 
sail. She was already some distance away from him. 
The sky was bright and clear, and Charlie, who was sur- 
prised at seeing no attempt to lower a boat, saw a signal 
run up to the masthead. Looking the other way he 
saw at once why no boat had been lowered. The Dover 
Castle was but a quarter of a mile astern. Carrying less 
sail than her consort, she had been better prepared for 
the squall, and was running down upon him at a great 
rate. A moment later a boat was swung out on davits 
and several men climbed into it. The vessel kept on her 
course until scarcely more than her own length away. 
Then she suddenly rounded up into the wind, and the 
boat was let fall and rowed rapidly toward him. 

All this time Charlie had made no effort beyond what 
was necessary to keep his own head and his companion’s 
face above the water. He now lifted the soldier’s head 
up, and shouted to him that aid was at hand. In 
another minute they were dragged into the boat. This 
was soon alongside the ship, and three minutes later the 
Dover Castle was pursuing her course in the track of 
the Lizzie Anderson , having signaled that the pair had 
been rescued. Charlie found that the soldier was an 
Irish lad of some nineteen years old. His name, he said, 
was Tim Kelly, and as soon as he had recovered himself 
sufficiently to speak he was profuse in his professions 
of gratitude to his preserver. Tim, like the majority of 
the recruits in the company’s service, had been enlisted 
while in a state of drunkenness, had been hurried 
on board a guardship, where, when he recovered, he 


42 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


found a number of unfortunates like himself. He had 
not been permitted to communicate with his friend’s on 
shore, but had been kept in close confinement until he 
had been put in uniform and conveyed on board the 
Lizzie Anderson half an hour before she sailed. The 
company’s service was not a popular one. There was 
no fighting in India, and neither honor, glory, nor pro- 
motion to be won. The climate was unsuited to Euro- 
peans, and few indeed of those who sailed from England 
as soldiers in the company’s service ever returned. The 
company then were driven to all sorts of straits to keep 
up even the small force which they then maintained in 
India, and their recruiting agents were by no means par- 
ticular as to the means they employed to make up the 
tale of recruits. 

The vessels did not again communicate until they came 
to anchor in Madras roads, as the wind was fair and 
Captain Thompson anxious to arrive at his destination. 
During these few days Tim Kelly had followed Charlie 
about like a shadow. Having no duties to perform on 
board, he asked leave. to act as Charlie’s servant; and 
Charlie was touched by the efforts which the grateful 
fellow made to be of service to him. Upon their arrival 
they saw to their satisfaction that the British flag was 
waving over the low line of earthworks which constitute 
the British fort. Not far from this, near the water’s 
edge, stood the white houses and stores of the company’s 
factors, and behind these again were the low hovels of 
the black town. The prospect was not an inviting one, 
and Charlie wondered how on earth a landing was to be 
effected through the tremendous surf which broke upon 
the shore. He soon found that until the wind went down 
and the surf moderated somewhat, no communication 
could be effected. The next morning, however, the 
wind lulled, and a crowd of curious native boats were 
seen putting off from the shore. 

Charlie had, after the vessel anchored, rejoined his 
ship with Tim Kelly, and he now bade good-by to all 
on board; for only the doctor, two civilians, and the 


THE PIRATES OF THE PACIFIC. 


43 


troops destined were for Madras, all the rest going on 
in the ship to Calcutta, after she had discharged that 
portion of her cargo .intended for Madras. Charlie had 
during the last twelve hours been made a great deal of, 
on account of the gallantry he had displayed in risking 
his life for that of the soldier. Peters and one of the 
other young writers were also to land, and taking his 
seat with these in a native boat, paddled by twelve canoe 
men, he started for the shore. .As they approached the 
line of surf Charlie fairly held his breath, for it seemed 
impossible that the boat could live through it. The 
boatmen, however, ceased rowing outside the line of 
broken water, and lay on their paddles for three of four 
minutes. At last a wave larger than any of its prede- 
cessors was seen approaching. As it passed under them 
the steersman gave a shout. In an instant the rowers 
struck their paddles into the water and the boat dashed 
along with the speed of a racehorse on the crest of the 
wave. There was a crash. For a moment the boat 
seemed to the lads engulfed in white foam, and then she 
ran high up upon the beach. The rowers seized the boys 
and, leaping out, carried them beyond the reach of the 
water before the next wave broke upon them, and then 
triumphantly demanded a present for their skillful man- 
agement. This the lads were glad to give, for they con- 
sidered that their escape had been something miraculous. 

For a while they stood on the shore watching other 
boats with the soldiers and baggage coming ashore, and 
then, being accosted by a gentleman in the employment 
of the company, followed him to the residence of the 
chief factor. Here they were told that rooms would be 
given them in one of the houses erected by the company 
for the use of its employees, that they would mess with 
the other clerks residing in the same house, and that at 
nine o’clock in the morning they would report them- 
selves as ready for work. 

Charlie and his friends amused themselves by saunter- 
ing about in the native town, greatly surprised by the 
sights and scenes which met their eyes; for in those days 


44 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


very little was known of India in England. They were, 
however, greatly disappointed. Visions of Oriental splen- 
dor, of palaces and temples, of superbly dressed chiefs 
with bands of gorgeous retainers had floated before their 
mind’s eye. Instead of this they saw squalid huts, men 
dressed merely with a rag of cotton around them, every- 
where signs of squalor and poverty. Madras, however, 
they were told that evening, was not to be taken as a 
sample of India. It was a mere collection of huts which 
had sprung up around the English factories. But when 
they went to a real Indian city they would see a very 
different state of things. 

CHAPTER V. 

MADRAS. 

After the young writers had seen the native town 
they returned to the beach and spent the afternoon 
watching the progress of landing the cargo of the Lizzie 
Anderson. They were pleased to see their own luggage 
safely ashore, as it would have been greatly damaged 
had the boat containing it been swamped, a misfortune 
which happened to several of the boats laden with cargo. 
It was very amusing each time that one of these boats 
arrived to see a crowd of natives rush down into the 
water waist deep, seize it and drag it up beyond the next 
wave. Many of them would be knocked down, and some 
swept out by the retreating wave, only to return on the 
next roller. All could swim like fish, and any of these 
events were greeted with shouts of laughter by the rest. 
When the packages were landed a rope was put around 
them, and through this a long bamboo pole was inserted, 
which would be lifted on to the shoulders of two, four, 
or six porters, according to its weight, and these would 
go off at a hobbling sort of trot with their burden to the 
factory. Their own baggage was taken up to the quar- 
ters allotted to them, and at the hour named for dinner 
the newcomers met for the first time those with whom 
they were to be associated. 


MADRAS. 


45 


All were dressed in white suits, and Charlie was struck 
with the pallor of their faces and the listless air of most 
of them. The gentleman to whom they had first been 
introduced made them acquainted with the others. 

“How refreshingly healthy and well you look!” a 
young man of some six-and-twenty years old, named 
Johnson, said. “ I was something like that when I first 
came out here, though you’d hardly think it now. Eight 
years of stewing in this horrible hole takes the life and 
spirits out of anyone. However, there’s one consolation, 
after eight or ten years of quill-driving in a stuffy room 
one becomes a little more one’s own master, and one’s 
duties begin to be a little more varied and pleasant. One 
gets a chance of being sent up occasionally with goods 
or on some message or other to one of the native princes, 
and then one gets treated like a prince, and sees that 
India is not necessarily so detestable as we have con- 
trived to make it here. The only bearable time of one’s 
life is the few hours after dinner, when one can sit in 
a chair in the veranda and smoke and look at the sea. 
Some of the fellows play billiards and cards; but if you 
will take my advice you won’t go in for that sort of 
thing. It takes a lot out of one, and fellows that do 
it are, between you and me, in the bad books of the 
big-wigs. Besides, they lose money, get into debt, and 
all sorts of mischief comes of it.” 

The speaker was sitting between Charlie and Peters, 
and was talking in a tone of voice which would not be 
overheard by the others. 

“ Thank you,” Charlie said. “ I for one will certainly 
take your advice. I suppose one can buy ponies here. 
I should think a good ride every morning early, before 
work, would do one good.” 

“ Yes, it is not a bad thing,” Johnson said. “ A good 
many fellows do it when they first come out here; but 
after a time they lose their energy, you see, though some 
do keep it up. What appetites you fellows have! It 
does one good to see you eat.” 

“ I have not the least idea what we are eating,” Charlie 


46 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


said laughing; “but it’s really very nice whatever it is. 
But there seems an immense quantity of pepper, or hot 
stuff of some kind or other, which one would have 
thought, in this tremendous heat, would have made one 
hotter instead of cooler.” 

“ Yes,” their new friend answered. “ No doubt all 
this pepper and curry do heat the blood; but you see it 
is done to tempt the appetite. Meat here is fearfully 
coarse and tasteless. Our appetites are poor, and were 
it not for these hot sauces we should eat next to nothing. 
Will you have some bananas?” 

“ They are nice and cool,” Peters said as, having 
peeled the long fruit as he saw his companion doing, he 
took a bite of one; “ but they have very little taste.” 

“ Most of our fruit is tasteless,” Johnson said, “ except, 
indeed, the mango and mangostine. They are equal to 
any English fruit in flavor, but I would give them all for 
a good English apple. Its sharpness would be delicious 
here; and now, as you have done, if you will come and 
sit in the veranda of my room we will smoke a cigar 
and have something cool to drink, and I will answer as 
well as I can the questions you’ve asked me about the 
state of things here.” 

When they had seated themselves in the extremely 
comfortable cane chairs in a veranda, facing the sea, and 
had lit their cigars, their friend began: 

“Madras isn’t much of a place now; but you should 
have seen it before the French had it. Our chiefs think 
of nothing but trade, and care nothing how squalid and 
miserable is the place in which they make money. The 
French have larger ideas. They transformed this place, 
cleared away that portion of the native town which sur- 
rounded the factory and fort, made wide roads, formed 
an esplanade, improved and strengthened the fortifica- 
tions, forbade the natives to throw all their rubbish and 
offal on the beach, and made, in fact, a decent place of 
it. We hardly knew it when we came back, and what- 
ever the company have thought we were thoroughly 
grateful for the French occupation. One good result, 


MADRAS. 


47 


too, is that our quarters have been greatly improved; 
for not only did the French build several new houses, 
but at present all the big men, the council and so on, 
are still living at Fort St. David, which is still the seat 
of administration. So you see we have got better quar- 
ters; we are rid of the stenches and nuisances of the 
native town; the plague of flies which made our life a 
burden is abated; and we can sit here and enjoy the cool 
sea breeze without its being poisoned before it reaches 
us by the heaped-up filth on the beach. It must have 
wrung Dupleix’s heart to give up the place over which 
they had expended so much pains, and after all it didn’t 
do away with the fighting. In April we sent a force from 
Fort St. David — before we came back here — *430 white 
soldiers and 1000 Sepoys, under the command of Cap- 
tain Cope, to aid a fellow who had been turned out 
of the rajahship of Tanjore. I believe he was a great 
blackguard, and the man who had taken his place was 
an able ruler liked by the people.” 

“ Then why should we interfere on behalf of the 
other? ” Charlie asked. 

“ My dear Marryat,” their host said compassionately, 
“ you are very young yet, and quite new to India. You 
will see after a time that right has nothing at all to do 
with the dealings of the company in their relations to 
the native princes. We are at present little people living 
here on sufferance among a lot of princes and powers 
who are enemies and rivals of each other. We have, 
moreover, as neighbors another European colony con- 
siderably stronger than we are. The consequence is, the 
question of right cannot enter into the considerations of 
the company. It may be said that for every petty king- 
dom in Southern India there are at least two pretenders, 
very often half a dozen. So far we have not meddled 
much in their quarrels, but the French have been much 
more active that way. They always side with one or 
other of these pretenders, and when they get the man 
they support into power, of course he repays them for 
their assistance. In this manner, as I shall explain to 


48 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


you presently, they have virtually made themselves mas- 
ters of the Carnatic outside the walls of Fort St. David, 
and this place. 

“ Well, our people thought to take a leaf out of the 
French book, and as the ex-rajah offered us in payment 
for our aid the possession of Devikota, a town at the 
mouth of the river Kolrun, a place likely to be of great 
use to us, we agreed to assist him. Cope with the land 
forces had marched to the border of the Tanjore terri- 
tory, and the guns and heavy baggage were to go by 
sea; but, unfortunately, we had a tremendous gale just 
after they sailed. The admiral’s flag-ship, the Namur , 
of seventy-four guns, the Pembroke , of sixty, and the 
hospital ship, Apollo, were totally lost, and the rest of 
the fleet scattered in all directions. Cope entered the Tan- 
jore territory, but found the whole population attached 
to the new rajah. It was useless for him, therefore, to 
march upon Tanjore, which is a really strong town, so 
he marched down to Devikota, where he hoped to find 
some of the fleet. Not a ship, however, was to be seen, 
and as without guns Cope could do nothing, he returned 
here, as we had just taken possession again. 

“ Then he went to Fort St. David, and there was a 
great discussion among the big-wigs. It was clear 
from what Cope said that our man had not a friend in 
his own country. Still, as he pointed out, Devikota was 
a most important place for us. Neither Madras nor Fort 
St. David has a harbor, and Devikota, therefore, where 
the largest ships could run up the river and anchor, 
would be of immense utility to us. As this was really 
the reason for which we had gone into the affair it was 
decided to repeat the attempt. By this time Major 
Lawrence, who commands the whole of the company’s 
forces in India, and who had been taken a prisoner in 
one of the French sorties at the siege of Pondicherry, 
had been released, so he was put at the head of the expe- 
dition, and the whole of the company’s English troops, 
800 in all, including the artillery, and 1500 Sepoys, 
started on board ship for Devikota. I must tell you 


MADRAS. 


49 


that Lawrence is a first-rate fellow, the only really good 
officer we have out here, and the affair couldn’t have 
been in the hands of a better man. 

“ The ships arrived safely at the mouth of the Kolrun, 
and the troops were landed on the bank of the river 
opposite the town, where Lawrence intended to erect his 
batteries, as, in the first place, the shore behind the town 
was swampy, and in the second the Rajah of Tanjore, 
who had got news of our coming, had his army encamped 
there to support the place. Lawrence got his guns in 
position and fired away, across the river, at the earthern 
wall of the town. In three days he had a breach. The 
enemy didn’t return our fire, but occupied themselves in 
throwing up an intrenchment across the side of the fort. 
We made a raft and crossed the river, but the enemy’s 
matchlock men peppered us so severely that we lost 30 
English and 50 Sepoys in getting over. The enemy’s 
intrenchment was not finished, but in front of it was a 
deep rivulet which had to be crossed. 

“ Lawrence gave the command of the storming party 
to Clive. He is one of our fellows, a queer, restless sort 
of chap, who was really no good here, for he hated his 
work and always seemed to think himself a martyr. He 
was not a favorite among us, for he was often gloomy 
and discontented, though he had his good points. He 
was straightforward and manly, and he put down two 
or three fellows here who had been given to bully the 
young ones, in a way that astonished them. He would 
never have made a good servant of the company, for he 
so hated his work that when he had been out here about 
a year he tried to blow out his brains. He snapped the 
pistol twice at his head, but it didn’t go off though it was 
loaded all right. Strange, wasn’t it? So he came to the 
conclusion that he wasn’t meant to kill himself, and went 
on living till something should turn up.” 

“ Yes,” Charlie said; “ Dr. Rae spoke to us about him 
during the voyage. He knew him at the siege of Fort 
St. David and Pondicherry.” 

“ Yes,” Johnson said, “ He came out there quite in 


WITH CLIVE IN INPIA. 


50 

a new light. He got transferred into the military service, 
and was always in the middle of the fighting. Major 
Lawrence had a very high opinion of him, and so selected 
him to lead the storming party. It really seems almost 
as if he had a charmed life. Lawrence gave him 33 
English soldiers and 700 Sepoys. The rest of the force 
were to follow as soon as Clive’s party gained the 
intrenchments. Clive led the way with his Europeans, 
with the Sepoys supporting behind, and got across the 
rivulet with a loss of only 4 men. He waited on the 
other bank till he saw the Sepoys climbing up, and then 
again led the English on in advance toward the unfin- 
ished part of the intrenchment. The Sepoys, however, 
did not move, but remained waiting for the main body to 
come up. The enemy let Clive and his 29 men get on 
some distance in advance, and then their cavalry, who 
had been hidden by a projection of the fort, charged 
suddenly down on him. They were upon our men 
before they had time to form, and in a minute 26 of them 
were cut to pieces. Clive and the other 3 managed to 
get through the Tanjore horsemen and rejoin the Sepoys. 
That was almost as narrow a shave for his life as with 
the pistol. Lawrence now crossed with his main body 
and advanced. 

“Again the Tanjore horsemen charged; but this time 
we were prepared, and Lawrence let them come on till 
within a few yards, and then gave them a volley which 
killed 14 and sent the rest scampering away. Lawrence 
pushed forward. The garrison, panic-stricken at the 
defeat of their cavalry, abandoned the breach and escaped 
to the opposite side of the town, and Devikota was ours. 
A few days later we captured the fortified temple of 
Uchipuran. A hundred men were left there, and these 
were afterward attacked by the Rajah of Tanjore with 
5000 men, but they held their own and beat them off. 
A very gallant business that! These affairs showed the 
rajah that the English could fight, a point which, 
hitherto, the natives had been somewhat skeptical about. 
They were afraid of the French, but they looked upon 


MADRAS. 


51 


us as mere traders. He had, too, other things to trouble 
him as to the state of the Carnatic, and so hastened to 
make peace. He agreed to pay the expenses of the war, 
and to cede us Devikota and some territory round it, and 
to allow the wretched ex-rajah, in whose cause we had 
pretended to fight, a pension of four hundred a year, on 
condition that we kept him shut up in one of our forts. 
Not a very nice business on our side, was it? Still we 
had gained our point, and with the exception of the 
ex-rajah, who was a bad lot after all, no one jvyas 
discontented. 

“ When the peace was signed our force returned to 
Fort St. David. While they had been away there had 
been a revolution in the Carnatic. Now this was rather 
a complicated business; but as the whole situation at 
present turns upon it, and it will not improbably cause 
our expulsion from Southern India, I will explain it to 
you as well as I can. Now you must know that all 
Southern India, with the exception of a strip along^the 
west coast, is governed by a viceroy, appointed by the 
emperor at Delhi. He was called the Subadar of the 
Deccan. Up till the end of ’48 Nizam Ul-Mulk was 
viceroy. About that time he died, and the emperor 
appointed his grandson, Muzaffar Jung, who was the 
son of a daughter of his, to succeed him. But the 
subadar had left five sons. Four of these lived at Delhi, 
and were content to enjoy their life there. The second 
son, however, Nazir Jung, was an ambitious man, who 
had rebelled even against his father. Naturally he re- 
belled against his nephew. He was on the spot when his 
father died while the new subadar was absent. Nazir, 
therefore, seized the reins of government and all the re- 
sources of the state. The emperor had troubles enough of 
his own at Delhi, and Muzaffar had no hope of aid from 
him. He therefore went to Satarah, the court of the 
Marattas, to ask for their assistance. There he met 
Chunda Sahib. This man was the nephew of the last 
Nawab of the Carnatic, Dost Ali. Dost Ali had been 
killed in a battle with them in 1739; and they afterward 


52 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


captured Trichinopoli, and took Chunda Sahib, who 
commanded there, prisoner, and had since kept him at 
Satarah. Had he been at liberty he would no doubt have 
succeeded his uncle, whose only son had been murdered; 
but as he was at Satarah the Subadar of the Deccan 
bestowed the government of the Carnatic upon 
Anwarud-din. 

“ Chunda Sahib and Muzaffar Jung put their heads 
together and agreed to act in concert. Muzaffar, of 
course, desired the subadarship of the Deccan, to which 
he had been appointed by the court of Delhi. Chunda 
Sahib wanted the nawabship of the Carnatic, and advised 
his ally to abandon his intention of asking for Maratta 
aid, and to ally himself with the French. A correspond- 
ence ensued with Dupleix, who seeing the immense 
advantage it would be to him to gain what would vir- 
tually be the position of patron and protector of the 
Subadar of the Deccan and the Nawab of the Carnatic, 
at once agreed to join them. Muzaffar raised 30,000 
men, and Chunda Sahib 6000 — it is always easy in India 
to raise an army with a certain amount of money and 
lavish promises — marched down and joined a French 
force of 400 strong, commanded by D’Auteuil. The 
nawab advanced against them, but was utterly defeated 
at Ambur, the French doing pretty well the whole of the 
work. The nawab was killed, and one of his sons, 
Maphuz Khan, taken prisoner. The other, Muhammud 
Ali, bolted at the beginning of the fight. Arcot, the 
capital of the Carnatic, surrendered next day. 

“ Muzaffar Jung proclaimed himself Subadar of the 
Deccan, and appointed Chunda Sahib Nawab of the 
Carnatic. Muzaffar Jung conferred upon Dupleix the 
sovereignty of eighty-one villages adjoining the French 
territory. Muzaffar, after paying a visit to Pondicherry, 
remained in the camp of his army twenty miles distant 
from that place. Chunda Sahib remained as the guest 
of Dupleix at Pondicherry. 

“ On the receipt of the news of the battle of Ambur, 
Mr. Floyer, who is governor at Fort St. David, sent at 


MADRAS. 


53 


once to Chunda Sahib to acknowledge him as nawab, 
which, in the opinion of everyone here, was a very foolish 
step. Muhammud Ali had fled to Trichinopoli, and sent 
word to Mr. Floyer that he could hold the place, and 
even reconquer the Carnatic, if the English would assist 
him. I know that Admiral Boscawen, who was with the 
fleet at Fort St. David, urged Mr. Floyer to do so, as 
it was clear that Chunda Sahib would be a mere tool in 
the hands of the French. When Chunda Sahib delayed 
week after week at Pondicherry, Mr. Floyer began to 
hesitate, but he could not make up his mind, and Admiral 
Boscawen, who had received orders to return home, 
could no longer act in contravention to them, and was 
obliged to sail. 

“ The instant the fleet had left, and we remained vir- 
tually defenseless, Chunda Sahib, supplied with troops 
and money by Dupleix, marched out from Pondicherry 
and joined Muzaffar Jung with the avowed intention of 
marching upon Trichinopoli. Had he done this at once 
he must have taken the place, and it was a question of 
weeks and days only of our being turned altogether out 
of Southern India. Nothing, indeed, could have saved 
us. Muzaffar Jung and Chunda Sahib, however, dis- 
regarding the plan which Dupleix had marked out for 
them, resolved, before marching on Trichinopoli, to 
conquer Tanjore, which is the richest city in Southern 
India. The rajah had only a few weeks before made 
peace with us, and he now sent messengers to Nazir 
Jung, Muzaffar’s rival in the Deccan, and to the English, 
imploring their assistance. Both parties resolved at once 
to grant it, for alone both must have been overwhelmed 
by the alliance between the two Indian princes and the 
French, and their only hope of a successful resistance to 
this combination was in saving Trichinopoli. 

“ The march of these allies upon Tanjore opened 
the road to Trichinopoli, and Captain Cope with 120 
men was at once dispatched to reinforce Muhammud 
Ali’s garrison. Of this little force he sent off 20 
men to the aid of the Rajah of Tanjore, and these, 


54 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


under cover of the night, passed through the lines of the 
besiegers and into the city, which was strongly fortified 
and able to stand a long siege. The English at once 
entered into a treaty with Nazir Jung, promising him 
600 English troops to assist him in maintaining his 
sovereignty of the Deccan, and in aiding to place 
Muhammud Ali in the nawabship of the Carnatic. Tan- 
jore held out bravely. For some weeks the rajah had 
thrown dust in the eyes of Chunda Sahib by pretending 
to negotiate. Then when the allies attacked he defended 
the city for fifty-two days, at the end of which one of the 
gates of the town had been captured, and the city was 
virtually at the mercy of the besiegers; he again delayed 
them by entering into negotiations for surrender. In 
vain Dupleix continued to urge Chunda Sahib to act 
energetically and to enter Tanjore. 

“ Chunda Sahib, however, although he has a good 
head for planning, is irresolute in action. His troops 
were discontented at the want of pay. The French con- 
tingent also was demoralized from the same cause. The 
troops feared to engage in a desperate struggle in the 
streets of a town abounding with palaces, each of which 
was virtually a fortress, especially as it was known that 
Nazir Jung was marching with all speed to fall upon 
their rear. So at last the siege was broken up, and the 
army fell back upon Pondicherry. 

“ Meanwhile Cope’s detachment of 100 men, with 
6000 native horsemen, escorted Muhammud Ali to 
join Nazir Jung at Valdaur, fifteen miles from Pondi- 
cherry. Lawrence was busy at work at Fort St. David, 
organizing a force to go to his aid. Dupleix saw that 
it was necessary to aid his allies energetically. The army 
on its return from the siege of Tanjore was reorganized, 
the French contingent increased to 2000 men, and a 
supply of money furnished from his private means. 

“ The army set out to attack Nazir Jung and his ally 
at Valdaur. When the battle began, however, the 
French contingent mutinied and refused to fight; and 
the natives, panic-stricken by the desertion of their allies, 


MADRAS. 


55 


fell back on Pondicherry. Chunda Sahib accompanied 
his men, Muzaffar Jung surrendered to his uncle, the 
usurper. In three or four days the discipline of the 
French army was restored, and on the 13th of April it 
attacked and defeated a detachment of Nazir Jung’s 
army, and a few days later captured the strong temple 
of Tiruvadi, sixteen miles from Fort St. David. 

“ Some months passed before the French were com- 
pletely prepared; but on September 1, D’Auteuil, who 
commanded the French, and Chunda Sahib attacked the 
army of the native princes, 20,000 strong, and defeated 
it utterly, the French not losing a single man. Muham- 
mud Ali, with only two attendants, fled to Arcot, and 
the victory rendered Chunda Sahib virtual master of the 
Carnatic. Muzaffar Jung, after his surrender to his 
uncle, had been loaded with chains, and remained a 
prisoner in the camp, where, however, he managed to 
win over several of the leaders of his uncle’s army. 
Gingee was stormed by a small French force, and the 
French officer there entered into a correspondence with 
the conspirators, and it was arranged that when the 
French army attacked Nazir Jung these should declare 
against him. 

“ On the 15th of December the French commander, 
with 800 Europeans, 3000 Sepoys, and ten guns, marched 
against Nazir Jung, whose army of 25,000 men opposed 
him. These, however, he defeated easily. While the 
battle was going on, the conspirators murdered Nazir 
Jung, released Muzaffar Jung, and saluted him as 
subadar. His escape was a fortunate one, for his uncle 
had ordered him to be executed that very day. Muzaffar 
Jung proceeded to Pondicherry, where he was received 
with great honors. He nominated Dupleix Nawab of the 
Carnatic and neighboring countries, with Chunda Sahib 
as his deputy* conferred the highest dignities upon him, 
and granted the French possession of all the lands and 
forts they had conquered. He arranged with Dupleix 
a plan for common action, and agreed that a body of 
French troops should remain permanently at his capital.” 


56 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


CHAPTER VI. 

THE ARRIVAL OF CLIVE. 

“ I have nearly brought down my story to the present 
time,” Mr. Johnson said. “ One event has taken place, 
however, which was of importance. Muzaffar Jung set 
out for Hyderabad accompanied by a French contingent 
under Bussy. On the way the chiefs who had conspired 
against Nazir Jung mutinied against his successor. 
Muzaffar charged them with his cavalry ; two of the three 
chief conspirators were killed, and while pursuing the 
third Muzaffar was himself killed. Bussy at once 
released from confinement a son of Nazir Jung, pro- 
claimed him Subadar of the Deccan, escorted him to 
Hyderabad, and received from him the cession of con- 
siderable fresh grants of territory to the French. The 
latter were now everywhere triumphant, and Trichinopoli 
and Tanjore, with the three towns held by the English, 
the sole places which resisted their authority. Muham- 
mud Ali deeming further resistance hopeless had already 
opened negotiations with Dupleix for the surrender of 
Trichinopoli. Dupleix agreed to his conditions; but 
when Muhammud Ali found that Count Bussy with the 
flower of the French force had been dispatched to Hy- 
derabad, he gained time by raising fresh demands which 
would require the ratification of the subadar. 

“ Luckily for us Mr. Floyer had been recalled and his 
place taken by Mr. Saunders, who is, everyone says, a 
man of common sense and determination. Muhammud 
Ali urged upon him the necessity for the English to make 
common cause with him against the enemy, for if Trichi- 
nopoli fell it would be absolutely impossible for the 
English to resist the French and their allies. Early this 
year, then, Mr. Saunders assured him that he should be 
assisted with all our strength, and Muhammud Ali there- 
upon broke off the negotiations with the French. Most 
unfortunately for us Major Lawrence had gone home to 


THE ARRIVAL OF CLIVE. 


57 


England on sick leave. Captain Gingen, who now com- 
mands our troops, is a wretched substitute for him; Cap- 
tain Cope is no better. 

“ Early this year Mr. Saunders sent Cope with 280 
English and 300 Sepoys to Trichinopoli. Benefiting by 
the delay which was caused before Dupleix, owing to the 
absence of his best troops at Hyderabad, could collect 
an army, Cope laid siege to Madura, but was defeated 
and had to abandon his guns. Three thousand of 
Muhammud Ali’s native troops thereupon deserted to 
the enemy. The cause of the English now appeared 
lost. Dupleix planted the white flags, emblems of the 
authority of France, in the fields within sight of Fort 
St. David. 

“With immense efforts Mr. Saunders put into the field 
500 English troops, 1000 Sepoys, 100 Africans, and 
eight guns, under the command of Captain Gingen, 
whose orders were to follow the movements of the army 
with which D’Auteuil and Chunda Sahib were marching 
against Trichinopoli. 

“ Luckily Chunda Sahib, instead of doing so at once, 
moved northward to confirm his authority in the towns 
of North and South Arcot, and to raise additional 
levies. Great delay was caused by this. On arriving 
before the important fortress of Valkonda, Chunda Sahib 
found before it the troops of Captain Gingen, who had 
been reinforced by 1600 troops from Trichinopoli. The 
governor of the place, not knowing which party was the 
stronger, refused to yield to either, and for a fortnight 
the armies lay at a short distance from each other, near 
the fortress, with whose governor both continued their 
negotiations. Gingen then lost patience and attacked 
the place, but was repulsed, and the governor at once 
admitted the French within the fortress. The next day 
the main body of the French attacked us, the guns of 
the fortress opening fire upon us at the same time. . Our 
men, a great portion of whom were recruits just joined 
from England, fell into a panic and bolted, abandoning 
their allies and leaving their guns, ammunition, and 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


58 

stores in the hands of the enemy. Luckily D’Auteuil 
was laid up with gout. If he had pressed on there 
remained only the 200 or 300 men under Cope to offer 
the slightest resistance. Trichinopoli must have fallen 
at once, and we, without a hundred soldiers here, should 
have had nothing to do but pack up and go. As it was, 
Gingen’s beaten men were allowed to retreat quietly 
toward Trichinopoli. 

“ The next day D’Auteuil was better and followed in 
pursuit, and Gingen had the greatest difficulty in reach- 
ing Trichinopoli. There at the present moment we lie 
shut up, a portion of our force only remaining outside 
the walls. The place itself is strong. The town lies 
around a lofty rock on which stands the fortress, which 
commands the country for some distance around. Still 
there is no question that the French could take it if they 
attacked it. Our men are utterly dispirited with defeat. 
Cope and Gingen have neither enterprise nor talent. At 
present the enemy, who are now under the command of 
Colonel Law, who has succeeded D’Auteuil, are content- 
ing themselves with beleaguering the place. But as we 
have no troops whatever to send to its rescue, and 
Muhammud Ali has no friends elsewhere to whom to 
look for aid, it is a matter of absolute certainty that the 
place must fall, and then Dupleix will only have to 
request us to leave, and we shall have nothing else to do 
but to go at once. So I should advise you not to trouble 
yourself to unpack your luggage, for in all probability 
another fortnight will see us on board ship. 

“ There, that’s a tremendous long yarn I’ve been tell- 
ing you, and not a pleasant one. It’s a history of defeat, 
loss of prestige and position. We have been out-fought 
and out-diplomatized, and have made a mess of every- 
thing we put our hand to. I should think you must be 
tired of it. I am; I haven’t done so much talking for 
years.” 

Charlie and Peters thanked their new acquaintance 
warmly for the pains he had taken in explaining the 
various circumstances and events which had led to the 


THE ARRIVAL OF CLIVE. 


59 


present unfortunate position, and Charlie asked, as they 
stood up to say good-night to Mr. Johnson, “ What has 
become of Clive all this time? ” 

“ After the conquest of Devikota,” Mr. Johnson said, 
“ the civilians in the service were called back to their 
posts; but to show that they recognized his services the 
authorities allowed Clive to attain the rank of captain, 
which would have been bestowed upon him had he re- 
mained in the military service, and they appointed him 
commissary to the army, a post which would take him 
away from the office-work he hated. Almost directly 
afterward he got a bad attack of fever and was forced to 
take a cruise in the Bay of Bengal. He came back in 
time to go with Gingen’s force; but after the defeat of 
Valkonda he resigned his office, I suppose in disgust, 
and returned to Fort St. David. In July some of the 
company’s ships came in with some reinforcements. 
There were no military officers left at Fort St. David, so 
Mr. Pigot, a member of the council, started with a large 
convoy of stores, escorted by 80 English and 300 Sepoys. 
Clive volunteered to accompany them. They had to 
march thirty or forty miles to Verdachelam, a town close 
to the frontier of Tanjore, through which the convoy to 
Trichinopoli would be able to pass unopposed, but the 
intervening country was hostile to the English. How- 
ever, the convoy passed unmolested, and after seeing it 
safely to that point Pigot and Clive set out to return with 
an escort of 12 Sepoys. They were at once attacked, 
and for miles a heavy fire was kept up on them. Seven 
of the escort were killed, the rest reached Fort St. David 
in safety. Pigot’s report of Clive’s conduct, strength- 
ened by that previously made by Major Lawrence, in- 
duced the authorities to transfer him permanently to the 
army. He received a commission as captain and was 
sent off, with a small detachment remaining at St. 
David’s, to Devikota. There he placed himself under 
Captain Clarke, who commanded, and the whole body, 
numbering altogether 100 English, 50 Sepoys, with a 
small field-piece, marched up to Trichinopoli, and I hear 


6o 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


managed to make its way in safety. He got in about a 
month ago.” 

“ And what force have we altogether, here and at St. 
David’s, in case Trichinopoli falls? ” 

“ What with the detachment that came with you, and 
two others which arrived about ten days back, we have 
altogether about 350 men. What on earth could these do 
against all the force of the nawab, the subadar, and 3000 
or 4000 French troops? ” 

The prospect certainly seemed gloomy in the extreme, 
and the young writers retired to their beds on this the 
first night of their arrival in India, with the conviction 
that circumstances were in a desperate position. The 
next day they set to work, and at its end agreed that they 
should bear the loss of their situations, and their expul- 
sion from the country, with more than resignation. It 
was now August, the heat was terrible, and as they sat in 
their shirt sleeves at their desks, bathed in perspiration, 
at their work of copying invoices, they felt that any pos- 
sible change of circumstances would be for the better. 
The next day, and the next, still further confirmed these 
ideas. The nights were nearly as hot as the days. Tor- 
mented by mosquitos they tossed restlessly in their beds 
for hours, dozing of! toward morning and awaking unre- 
freshed and worn out. 

When released from work at the end of the third day 
Charlie and Peters strolled down together to the beach 
and bewailed their hard fate. “ There are two ships 
coming from the south,” Charlie said presently. “ I 
wonder whether they’re from England or Fort St. 
David! ” 

“ Which do you hope they will be? ” Peters said. 

“ I hope they’re from St. David’s,” Charlie answered. 
“ Even if they made a quick voyage they couldn’t have 
left England many weeks after us, and although I should 
be glad to get news from home, I am still more anxious 
just at present for news from St. David’s. Between our- 
selves I long to hear of the fall of Trichinopoli. Every- 
one says it is certain to take place before long, and the 


THE ARRIVAL OF CLIVE. 


6l 


sooner it does the sooner we shall be out of this fright- 
ful place.” 

After dinner they again went down to the beach and 
were joined by Dr. Rae, who chatted with them as to the 
ships, which were now just anchoring. These had 
already signaled that they were from St. David’s, and 
that they had on board Mr. Saunders the governor and 
a detachment of troops. Already the soldiers from the 
Lizzie Anderson, aided by a number of natives, were at 
work pitching tents in the fort for the reception of the 
newcomers, and conjecture was busy on shore among 
the civilians as to the object of bringing troops from St. 
David’s to Madras, that is, directly away from the scene 
of action. 

“It is one of two things,” Dr. Rae said: “either 
Trichinopoli has surrendered and they are evacuating 
Fort St. David, or they have news that the nawab is 
marching to attack us here. I should think it to be the 
latter, for Fort St. David is a great deal stronger than 
this place, though the French did strengthen it during 
their stay here. If, then, the authorities have determined 
to abandon one of the two towns, and to concentrate all 
their force for the defense of the other, I should have 
thought they would have held on to St. David’s. There 
is a boat being lowered from one of the ships, so we shall 
soon have news.” 

A signal from the ship announced that the governor 
was about to land, and the principal persons at the fac- 
tory assembled on the beach to receive him. Dr. Rae 
and the two young writers stood a short distance from 
the party. As the boat was beached Mr. Saunders 
sprang out and, surrounded by those assembled to meet 
him, walked at once toward the factory. An officer got 
out from the boat and superintended the debarkation of 
the baggage, which a number of coolies at once placed on 
their heads and carried away. The officer was following 
them when his eye fell upon Dr. Rae. “ Ah! doctor,” he 
said, “ how are you? When did you get out again from 
England? ” 


62 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


“ Only three or four days since, Captain Clive. I did 
not recognize you at first. I am glad to see you again.” 

“ Yes, I have cast my slough,” Captain Clive said 
laughing, “ and have, thank God, exchanged my pen for 
a sword, for good.” 

“ You were able to fight, though, as a civilian,” Dr. 
Rae said laughing. 

“ Yes, we had some tough fighting behind the ram- 
parts of St. David’s and in the trenches before Pondi- 
cherry; but we shall have sharper work still before us, 
or I am mistaken.” 

“ What! are they going to attack us here?” Dr. Rae 
exclaimed. 

“ Oh, no, just the other way,” Captain Clive said; “ we 
are going to carry the war into their quarters. It is a 
secret yet, and must not go farther.” And he included 
the two writers in his look. 

“ These are two fresh comers, Captain Clive. They 
came out in the same ship with me. This is Mr. 
Marryat, this Mr. Peters. They are both brave young 
gentlemen, and had an opportunity of proving it on the 
way out, for we were twice engaged. The first time with 
privateers; the second, a very sharp affair, with pirates. 
That ship lying off there is a pirate we captured.” 

“ Aha! ” Captain Clive said, looking keenly at the lads. 
“ Well, young gentlemen, and how do you like what you 
have seen of your life here? ” 

“ We hate it, sir,” Charlie said; “ we would both of us 
a thousand times rather enlist under you as private sol- 
diers. Oh, sir, if there is any expedition going to take 
place, do you think there is a chance of our being allowed 
to go as volunteers?” 

“ I will see about it,” Captain Clive said, smiling. 
“ Trade must be dull enough here at present, and we 
want every hand that can hold a sword or a musket in 
the field. You are sure you can recommend them? ” he 
said, turning to Dr. Rae with a smile. 

“ Most warmly,” the doctor said ; “ they both showed 
great coolness and courage in the affairs I spoke of. 


THE ARRIVAL OF CLIVE. 


63 

Have you any surgeons with you, Captain Clive? If not, 
I hope that I shall go with any expedition that will take 
place. The doctor here is just recovering from an attack 
of fever and will not be fit for weeks for the fatigues of 
active service. May I ask who is to command the expe- 
dition? ” 

“ I am,” Clive said quietly. “ You may well look sur- 
prised that an officer who has but just joined should have 
been selected; but in fact there is no none else. Cope 
and Gingen are both at Trichinopoli, and even if they 

were not ” he paused, and a shrug of the shoulders 

expressed his meaning clearly. “ Mr. Saunders is good 
enough to feel some confidence in my capacity, and I 
trust that I shall not disappoint him. We are going — but 
this, mind, is a profound secret till the day we march — 
to attack Arcot. It is the only possible way of relieving 
Trichinopoli.” 

“ To attack Arcot? ” Dr. Rae said, astonished. “ That 
does indeed appear a desperate enterprise with such a 
small body as you have at your command, and these, 
entirely new recruits. But I recognize the importance 
of the enterprise. If you should succeed it will draw off 
Chunda Sahib from Trichinopoli. It’s a grand idea, 
Captain Clive, a grand idea, though I own it seems to me 
a desperate one.” 

“ In desperate times we must take desperate measures, 
doctor,” Captain Clive said. “ Now I must be going on 
after the governor. I shall see you to-morrow. I will 
not forget you, young gentlemen.” So saying he pro- 
ceeded to the factory. 

It was afterward known that the proposal to effect a 
diversion by an expedition against Arcot was the pro- 
posal of Clive himself. Upon arriving at Trichinopoli he 
had at once seen that all was lost there. The soldiers 
were utterly dispirited and demoralized; they had lost all 
confidence in themselves and their officers, who had also 
lost confidence in themselves. At Trichinopoli nothing 
was to be done, and it must be either starved out, or fall 
an easy prey should the enemy advance to the assault. 


64 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


Clive had then, after a few days’ stay, made his way out 
from the town and proceeded to Fort St. David, where he 
had laid before the governor the proposal which he be- 
lieved to be the only possible measure which could save 
the English in India. 

The responsibility thus set before Mr. Saunders was a 
grave one. Upon the one hand he was asked to detach 
half of the already inadequate garrisons of Fort St. David 
and Madras upon an enterprise which, if unsuccessful, 
must be followed by the loss of the British possessions 
of which he was governor; he would have to take this 
great risk, not upon the advice of a tried veteran like 
Lawrence, but on that of a young man, only a month or 
two back a civilian; and it was to this young man, un- 
tried in command, that the leadership of this desperate 
enterprise must be intrusted. Upon the other hand, if 
he refused to take this responsibility the fall of Trichin- 
opoli, followed by the loss of the three English ports, was 
certain. But for this no blame or responsibility could 
rest upon him. Many men would have chosen the 
second alternative; but Mr. Saunders had since Clive’s 
return seen a good deal of him, and had been impressed 
with a strong sense of his capacity, energy, and good 
sense. Mr. Pigot, who had seen Clive under the most 
trying circumstances, was also his warm supporter; and 
Mr. Saunders at last determined to adopt Clive’s plan, 
and to stake the fortunes of the English in India on this 
desperate venture. 

Accordingly, leaving ioo men only at Fort St. David, 
he decided to carry the remainder to Madras, and that 
Clive, leaving only 50 behind as a garrison there, should, 
with the whole available force, march upon Arcot. 

The next morning, as Charlie and Peters were at 
breakfast, a native entered with a letter from the chief 
factor to the effect that their services in the office would 
be dispensed with, and that they were, in accordance with 
their request, to report themselves to Captain Clive as 
volunteers. No words can express the joy of the two 
lads at receiving the intelligence, and they created so 


THE ARRIVAL OF LORD CLIVE. 65 

much noise in the exuberance of their delight that Mr. 
Johnson came in from the next room to see what was the 
matter. 

‘‘Ah!” he said, when he heard the cause of the up- 
roar; “when I first came out here I should have done 
the same, and should have regarded the certainty of being 
knocked on the head as cheerfully as you do. Eight 
years out here takes the enthusiasm out of a man, and I 
shall wait quietly to see whether we are to be transferred 
to Calcutta or shipped back to England.” 

A quarter of an hour later, Charlie and Peters joined 
Captain Clive in the camp. 

“Ah! ” he said,. “my young friends, I’m glad to see 
you. There is plenty for you to do at once. We shall 
march to-morrow, and all preparations have to be made. 
You will both have the rank of ensign while you serve 
with me. I have only six other officers, two of whom 
are civilians who, like yourselves, volunteered at St. 
David’s. They are of four or five years’ standing, and 
as they speak the language they will serve with the 
Sepoys under one of my military officers; another officer, 
who is also an ensign, will take the command of the three 
guns. The Europeans are divided into two companies; 
one of you will be attached to each. The remaining 
officer commands both.” 

During the day the lads had not a moment to them- 
selves, and were occupied until late at night in superin- 
tending the packing of stores and tents, and the follow- 
ing morning, the 26th of August, 1751, the force' marched 
from Madras. It consisted of 200 of the company’s 
English troops, 300 Sepoys, and three small guns. They 
were led, as has been said, by eight European officers, of 
whom only Clive and another had ever heard a shot fired 
in action, four of the eight being young men in the civil 
service who had volunteered. Charlie was glad to find 
that among the company to which he was appointed was 
the detachment which had come out with him on board 
ship, and the moment these heard that he was to accom- 
pany them as their officer, Tim Kelly pressed forward 


66 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


and begged that he might be allowed to act as Charlie’s 
servant, a request which the lad readily complied with. 

The march the first day was eighteen miles, a distance 
which in such a climate was sufficient to try to the utmost 
the powers of the young recruits. The tents were soon 
erected, each officer having two or three native servants, 
that number being indispensable in India. Charlie and 
Peters had one tent between them which was shared by 
two other officers, as the column had moved in the 
lightest order possible in India. 

“ Shure, Mr. Marryat,” Tim Kelly said to him confi- 
dentially, “ that black hathen of a cook is going to pison 
ye. I have been watching him, and there he is putting 
all sorts of outlandish things into the mate. He’s been 
pounding them up on stones, for all the world like an 
apothecary, and even if he manes no mischief, the food 
isn’t fit to set before a dog, let alone a Christian and a 
gintleman like yourself. If you give the word, sir, I’ll 
knock him over with the butt end of my musket, and do 
the cooking for you meself.” 

“ I’m afraid the other officers wouldn’t agree to that, 
Tim,” Charlie said, laughing. “ The food isn’t so bad as 
it looks, and I don’t think an apprenticeship among the 
Irish bogs is likely to have turned you out a first-rate 
cook, Tim, except, of course, for potatoes.” 

“ Shure, now, yer honor, I can fry a rasher of bacon 
with any man.” 

“ Perhaps you might do that, Tim, but as we’ve no 
bacon here, that won’t help us. No, we must put up with 
the cook, and I don’t think any of us will be the worse 
for the dinner.” 

On the morning of the 29th Clive reached Conjeveram, 
a town of some size, forty-two miles from Madras. Here 
Clive gained the first trustworthy intelligence as to Arcot. 
He found the garrison outnumbered his own force by two 
to one, and that although the defenses were not in a posi- 
tion to resist an attack by heavy guns, they were capable 
of being defended against any force not so provided. 
Clive at once dispatched a messenger to Madras, begging 


THE SIEGE OF ARGOT. 


67 


that two eighteen-pounders might be sent after him, and 
then without awaiting their coming he marched forward 
against Arcot. 


CHAPTER VII. 

THE SIEGE OF ARCOT. 

From Conjeveram to Arcot is twenty-seven miles, and 
the troops, in spite of a delay caused by a tremendous 
storm of thunder and lightning, reached the town in two 
days. The garrison, struck with panic at the sudden 
coming of a foe when they deemed themselves in abso- 
lute security, at once abandoned the fort, which they 
might easily have maintained until Chunda Sahib was 
able to send a force to relieve it. The city was incapable 
of defense after the fort had been abandoned, and Clive 
took possession of both without firing a shot. He at 
once set to work to store up provisions in the fort, in 
which he found eight guns and an abundance of ammuni- 
tion, as he foresaw the likelihood of his having to stand 
a siege there; and then, leaving a garrison to defend it 
in his absence, marched on the 4th of September with the 
rest of his forces against the enemy, who had retired from 
the town to the mud fort of Timari, six miles south of 
Arcot. After a few discharges with their cannon they 
retired hastily, and Clive marched back to Arcot. Two 
days later, however, he found that they had been rein- 
forced, and as their position threatened his line of com- 
munications he again advanced toward them. He found 
the enemy about 2000 strong drawn up in a grove 
under cover of the guns of the fort. The grove was 
inclosed by a bank and ditch, and some fifty yards, 
away was a dry tank inclosed by a bank higher than that 
which surrounded the grove. In this the enemy could 
retire when dislodged from their first position. 

Charlie’s heart beat faster when he heard the order 
given to advance. The enemy outnumbered them by 
five to one, and were in a strong position. As the Eng- 


68 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


lish advanced, the enemy’s two field-pieces opened upon 
them. Only three men were killed, and, led by their 
officers, the men went at the grove at the double. The 
enemy at once evacuated it and took refuge in the tank, 
from behind whose high bank they opened fire upon the 
English. Clive at once divided his men into two col- 
umns, and sent them round to attack the tank upon two 
sides. The movement was completely successful. At 
the same moment the men went with a rush at the banks, 
and upon reaching the top opened a heavy fire upon the 
crowded mass within. These at once fled in disorder. 
Clive then summoned the fort to surrender; but the com- 
mander, seeing that Clive had no battering train, refused 
to do so, and Clive fell back upon Arcot again until his 
eighteen-pounders should arrive. 

For the next eight days the troops were engaged in 
throwing up defenses, and strengthening and victualing 
the fort. The enemy gaining confidence gathered to the 
number of 3000 and encamped three miles from the town, 
proclaiming that they were about to besiege ; and at mid- 
night of the 14th Clive sallied out, took them by surprise, 
and dispersed them. The two eighteen-pounders for 
which Clive had sent to Madras were now well upon the 
road, under the protection of a small body of Sepoys, and 
were approaching Conjeveram. The enemy sent a con- 
siderable body of troops to cut off the guns, and Clive 
found that the small number which he had sent out to 
meet the approaching party would not be sufficient. He 
therefore resolved to take the whole force, leaving only 
sufficient to garrison the fort. The post which the 
enemy occupied was a temple near Conjeveram, and as 
this was twenty-seven miles distant, the force would be 
obliged to be absent for at least two days. As it would 
probably be attacked and might have to fight hard, he 
decided on leaving only 30 Europeans and 50 Sepoys 
within the fort. He appointed Dr. Rae to the command 
of the post during his absence, and placed Charlie and 
Peters under his orders. 

“ I wonder whether they will have any fighting/’ 


THE SIEGE OF ARCOT. 69 

Charlie said, as the three officers looked from the walls 
of the fort after the departing force. 

“ I wish we had gone with them,” Peters put in; “ but 
it will be a long march in the heat.” 

“ I should think,” Dr. Rae said, “ that they are sure to 
have fighting. I only hope they may not be attacked at 
night. The men are very young and inexperienced, and 
there is nothing tries new soldiers so much as a night 
attack. However, from what I hear of their own wars, I 
believe that night attacks are rare among them. I don’t 
know that they have any superstition on the subject, as 
some African people have, on the ground that evil spirits 
are about at night; but the natives are certainly not brisk 
after nightfall. They are extremely susceptible to any 
fall of temperature, and as you have, of course, noticed, 
sleep with their heads covered completely up. How- 
ever, we must keep a sharp lookout here to-night.” 

“ You don’t think that we are likely to be attacked, sir, 
do you? ” 

“ It is possible we may be,” the doctor said. “ They 
will know that Captain Clive has set out from here with 
the main body and has left only a small garrison. Of 
course they have spies and will know that there are only 
80 men here, a number insufficient to defend one side of 
this fort, to say nothing of the whole circle of the walls. 
They have already found out that the English can fight 
in the open, and their experience at Timari will make 
them shy of meeting us again. Therefore it is just pos- 
sible that they may be marching in this direction to- 
day, while Clive is going in the other, and that they 
may intend carrying it with a.rush. I should say, to-day 
let the men repose as much as possible; keep the sentries 
on the gates and walls, but otherwise let them all have 
absolute quiet. You can tell the whites, and I will let 
the Sepoys know, that they have to be in readiness all 
night, and that they had better therefore sleep as much as 
possible to-day. We will take it by turns to be on duty, 
one going round the walls and seeing that the sentries 
are vigilant, while the others sit in the shade and doze off 


7 o 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


if they can. We must all three keep on the alert during 
the night.” 

Dr. Rae said that he himself would see that all went 
well for the first four hours, after which Charlie should 
go on duty; and the two subalterns accordingly made 
themselves as comfortable as they could in their quarters, 
which were high up in the fort and possessed a window 
looking over the surrounding country. 

“ Well, Tim, what • is the matter with you?” they 
asked that soldier as he came in with an earthenware jar 
of water which he placed to cool in the window; “you 
look pale.” 

“ And it’s pale I feel, yer honor, with the life fright- 
ened fairly out of me a dozen times a day. It was bad 
enough on the march, but this place just swarms with 
horrible reptiles. Shure an’ it’s a pity that the holy St. 
Patrick didn’t find time to pay a visit to India. If he’d 
driven the varmint into the sea for them, as he did in 
Ireland, the whole population would have become Chris- 
tians out of pure gratitude. Why, yer honor, in the 
cracks and crevices of the stones of this ould place there 
are bushels and bushels of ’em. There are things they 
call centipades, with a million legs on each side of them, 
and horns big enough to frighten ye; of all sizes up to 
as long as my hand and. as thick as my finger, and they 
say that a bite from one of them will put a man in a rag- 
ing fever, and maybe kill him. Then there are scorpions, 
the savagest looking little bastes ye ever saw, for all the 
world like a little lobster with his tail turned over his 
back, and a sting at the end of it. Then there’s spiders, 
some of ’em nigh as big as a cat.” 

“Oh, nonsense, Tim!” Charlie said; “I don’t think 
from what I’ve heard that there’s a spider in India whose 
body is as big as a mouse.” 

“ It isn’t their body, yer honor, it’s their legs. They’re 
just cruel to look at. It was one of ’em that gave me a 
turn a while ago. I was just lying on my bed smoking 
my pipe, when I saw one of the creatures as big as a 
saucer, I’ll take my oath, walking toward me with his 


THE SIEGE OF ARCOT. 


71 


wicked eye fixed full on me. I jumped off the bed and 
on to a bench that stood handy. ‘ What are ye yelling 
about, Tim Kelly? ’ said Corporal Jones to me. ‘ Here’s 
a riotous baste here, corporal,’ says I, ‘ that’s meditating 
an attack on me.’ ‘ Put your foot on it, man,’ says he. 
‘ It’s mighty fine,’ says I, ‘ and I in my bare feet.’ So the 
corporal tells Pat Murphy, my right-hand man, to tackle 
the baste. I could see Pat didn’t like the job aytlier, yer 
honor, but he’s not the boy to shrink from his duty; so 
lie comes and he takes post on the form be my side, and 
just when the cratur is making up his mind to charge us 
both, Pat jumps down upon him and squelched it. 
Shure, yer honor, the sight of such bastes is enough to 
turn a Christian man’s blood.” 

“ The spider had no idea of attacking you, Kelly,” 
Peters said, laughing; “ it might possibly bite you in the 
night, though I do not think it would do so, or if you 
took it up in your fingers.” 

“The saints defind us, yer honor! I’d as soon think 
of taking a tiger by the tail. The corporal, lie’s an Eng- 
lishman, and lives in a country where they’ve got snakes 
and reptiles; but it’s hard on an Irish boy, dacently 
brought up within ten miles of Cork’s own town, to be 
exposed to the like. And do ye know, yer honor, when 
I went out into the town yesterday, what should I see but 
a man sitting down against a wall with a little bit of a 
flute in his hand and a basket by his side. Well, yer 
honor, I thought maybe he was going to play a tune, 
when he lifts up the top of the basket and then began to 
play. Ye may call it music, yer honor, but there was 
nayther tune nor music in it. Then all of a suddint two 
sarpents in the basket lifts up their heads, with a great 
ear hanging down on each side, and began to wave them- 
selves about.” 

“Well, Tim, what happened then?” Charlie asked, 
struggling with his laughter. 

“Shure it’s little I know what happened after, for I 
just took to my heels, and I never drew breath till I was 
inside the gates.” 


72 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


“ There was nothing to be frightened at, Tim,” Charlie 
said; “ it was a snake-charmer. I have never seen one 
yet, but there are numbers of them all over India. Those 
were not ears you saw, but the hood. The snakes like 
the music and wave their heads about in time to it. I be- 
lieve that although they are a very poisonous snake and 
their bite is certain death, there is no need to be afraid 
of them, as the charmers draw out their poison fangs 
when they catch them;” 

“ Do they, now? ” Tim said in admiration; “ I wonder 
what the regimental barber would say to a job like that 
now. He well-nigh broke Dan Sullivan’s jaw yesterday 
in getting out a big tooth, and then swore at the poor boy 
for having such a powerful strong jaw. I should like to 
see his face if he was asked to pull out a tooth from one 
of them dancing sarpents. I brought ye in some fruits, 
yer honors. I don’t know what they are, but you may 
trust me they’re not poison. I stopped for half an hour 
beside the stall till I saw some of the people of the coun- 
try buying and eating them. So then I judged that they 
were safe for yer honors.” 

“ Now, Tim, you’d better go and lie down and get a 
sleep, if the spiders will let you, for you will have to be 
under arms all night, as it is possible that we may be 
attacked.” 

The first part of the night passed quietly. Double 
sentries were placed at each of the angles of the walls. 
The cannons were loaded and all ready for instant action. 
Dr. Rae and his two subalterns were upon the alert, visit- 
ing the posts every quarter of an hour to see that the men 
were vigilant. Toward two o’clock a dull sound was 
heard, and although nothing could be seen the men were 
at once called to arms and took up the post to which they 
had already been told off on the walls. The noise con- 
tinued. It was slight and confused, but the natives are 
so quiet in their movements that the doctor did not doubt 
that a considerable body of men were surrounding the 
place, and that he was about to be attacked. Presently 
one of the sentries over the gateway perceived something 


THE SIEGE OF ARCOT. 


73 


approaching. He challenged, and immediately after- 
ward fired. The sound of his gun seemed to serve as the 
signal for an assault, and a large body of men rushed 
forward at the gate, while at two other points a force ran 
up to the foot of the walls and endeavored to plant 
ladders. 

The garrison at once collected at the points of attack, 
a few sentries only being left at intervals on the wall to 
give notice should any attempt be made elsewhere. 
From the walls a heavy fire of musketry was poured upon 
the masses below, while from the windows of all the 
houses around, answering flashes of fire shot out, a rain 
of bullets being directed at the battlements. Dr. Rae 
himself commanded at the gate; one of the subalterns at 
each of the other points assailed. The enemy fought 
with great determination; several times the ladders were 
planted and the men swarmed up them, but as often these 
were hurled back upon the crowd below. At the gate 
the assailants endeavored to hew their way with axes 
through it, but so steady was the fire directed from the 
loop-holes which commanded it upon those so engaged, 
that they were each time forced to recoil with great 
slaughter. It was not until nearly daybreak that the 
attack ceased, and the assailants, finding that they could 
not carry the place by a coup de main , fell back. 

The next day the main body of the British force re- 
turned with the convoy. News arrived the following 
day that the enemy were approaching to lay siege to the 
place. The news of the capture of Arcot had produced 
the effect which Clive had anticipated from it. It 
alarmed and irritated the besiegers of Trichinopoli, and 
inspired the besieged with hope and exultation. The 
Maratta chief of Gutti and the Rajah of Mysore, with 
whom Muhammud Ali had for some time been negotiat- 
ing, at once declared in his favor. The Rajah of Tan- 
jore and the chief of Pudicota, adjoining that state, who 
had hitherto remained strictly neutral, now threw in their 
fortunes with the English, and thereby secured the com- 
munications between Trichinopoli and the coast. 


74 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


Chunda Sahib determined to lose not a moment in 
recovering Arcot, knowing that its recapture would at 
once cool the ardor of the new native allies of the Eng- 
lish, and that with its capture that last hope of the be- 
sieged in Trichinopoli would be at an end. Continuing 
the siege, he dispatched 3000 of his best troops with 150 
Frenchmen to reinforce the 2000 men already near Arcot 
under the command' of his son Riza Sahib. Thus the 
force about to attack Arcot amounted to 5000 men, while 
the garrison under Clive’s orders had, by the losses in the 
defense of the fort, by fever and disease, been reduced to 
120 Europeans and 200 Sepoys, while four out of the 
eight officers were hors de combat. 

The fort which this handful of men had to defend was 
in no way capable of offering a prolonged resistance. 
Its walls were more than a mile in circumference and 
were in a very bad state of repair. The rampart was 
narrow and the parapet low, and the ditch in many places 
dry. The fort had two gates. These were in towers 
standing beyond the ditch, and connected with the in- 
terior by a causeway across it. The houses in the town 
in many places came close up to the walls, and from their 
roofs the ramparts of the forts were commanded. 

On the 23d September Riza Sahib with his army 
took up his position before Arcot. Their guns had not, 
however, arrived, with the exception of four mortars, but 
they at once occupied all the houses near the fort, and 
from the walls and upper windows kept up a heavy fire 
on the besieged. Clive determined to make an effort at 
once to drive them from this position, and he accordingly, 
on the same afternoon, made a sortie. So deadly a fire, 
however, was poured into the troops as they advanced 
that they were unable to make any way, and were forced 
to retreat into the fort again after suffering heavy loss. 

On the night of the 24th, Charlie Marryat, with 20 
men carrying powder, was lowered from the walls, and an 
attempt was made to blow up the houses nearest to them ; 
but little damage was done, for the enemy were on the 
alert, and they were unable to place the powder in effec- 


THE SIEGE OF ARCOT. 


75 


tive positions, and with a loss of io of their number the 
survivors with difficulty regained the fort. For the next 
three weeks the position remained unchanged. So heavy 
was the fire which the enemy, from their commanding 
position, maintained, that no one could show his head 
for a moment without running the risk of being shot. 
Only a few sentinels were kept upon the walls to pre- 
vent the risk of surprise, and these had to remain stoop- 
ing below the parapet. Every day added to the losses. 

Captain Clive had a series of wonderful escapes, and 
indeed the men began to regard him with a sort of super- 
stitious reverence, believing that he had a charmed life. 
One of his three remaining officers, seeing an enemy tak- 
ing deliberate aim at him through a window, endeavored 
to pull him aside. The native changed his aim and the 
officer fell dead. On three other occasions sergeants 
who accompanied him on his rounds were shot dead by 
his side, yet no ball touched him. Provisions had been 
stored in the fort, before the commencement of the siege, 
sufficient for sixty days, and of this a third was already 
exhausted when on the 14th of October the French 
troops serving with Riza Sahib received two eighteen- 
pounders and seven smaller pieces of artillery. Hitherto 
the besiegers had contented themselves with harassing 
the garrison night and day, abstaining from any attack 
which would cost them lives until the arrival of their 
guns. Upon receiving these they at once placed them 
in a battery which they had prepared on the northwest 
of the fort and opened fire. So well was this battery 
placed, and so accurate the aim of its gunner, that the 
very first shot dismounted one of the eighteen-pounders 
in the fort; the second again struck the gun and com- 
pletely disabled it. The besieged mounted their second 
heavy gun in its place, and were preparing to open fire 
on the French battery, when a shot struck it also and 
dismounted it. It was useless to attempt to replace it, 
and it was during the night removed to a portion of the 
walls not exposed to the fire from the enemy’s battery. 
The besiegers continued their fire, and in six days had 


7 6 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


demolished the wall facing their battery, making a breach 
fifty feet wide. 

Give, who had now only the two young subalterns 
serving under him, worked indefatigably. His coolness 
and confidence of bearing kept up the courage of his 
little garrison, and every night, when darkness hid them 
from the view of the enemy’s sharpshooters, the men 
labored to prepare for the impending attack. Works 
were thrown up inside the fort to command the breach. 
Two deep trenches were dug, one behind the other, the 
one close to the wall, the other some distance farther 
back. These trenches were filled with sharp iron three- 
pointed spikes and palisades erected extending from the 
ends of the ditches to the ramparts, and a house pulled 
down in the rear to the height of a breastwork, behind 
which the garrison could fire at the assailants as they 
endeavored to cross the ditches. One of the three field- 
pieces Clive had brought with him he mounted on a 
tower, flanking the breach outside. Two he held in 
reserve, and placed two small guns, which he had found 
in the fort when he took it, on the flat roof of a house 
in the fort commanding the inside of the breach. 

From the roofs of some of the houses around the fort 
the besiegers beheld the progress of these defenses; and 
Riza Sahib feared, in spite of his enormously superior 
numbers, to run the risk of a repulse. He knew that the 
amount of provisions which Clive had stored was not 
large, and thinking that famine would inevitably compel 
his surrender, shrank from incurring the risk of dis- 
heartening his army by the slaughter which an unsuc- 
cessful attempt to carry the place must entail. He 
determined at any rate to increase the probability of suc- 
cess and utilize his superior forces by making an assault 
at two points simultaneously. He therefore erected a 
battery on the southwest, and began to effect a breach 
on that side also. 

Clive, on his part, had been busy endeavoring to ob- 
tain assistance. His native emissaries, penetrating the 
enemy’s lines, carried the news of the situation of affairs 


THE SIEGE OF ARCOT. 


77 


in the fort to Madras, Fort St. David, and Trichinopoli. 
At Madras a few fresh troops had arrived from England, 
and Mr. Saunders, feeling that Clive must be relieved 
at all cost, however defenseless the state of Madras 
might be, dispatched on the 20th of October 100 Euro- 
peans and 100 Sepoys under Lieutenant Innis. These 
after three days marching arrived at Trivatoor, twenty- 
two miles from Arcot. Riza Sahib had heard of his 
approach and sent a large body of troops with two guns 
to attack him. The contest was too unequal. Had the 
British force been provided with field-pieces they might 
have gained the day, but after fighting with great bravery 
they were forced to fall back with a loss of twenty Eng- 
lish and two officers killed and many more wounded, 
while the Sepoys suffered equally severely. 

One of Clive’s messengers reached Murari Reo, the 
Maratta chief of Gutti. This man was a ferocious free- 
booting chief, daring and brave himself, and admiring 
those qualities in others. Hitherto his alliance with 
Muhammud Ali was little more than nominal, for he had 
dreaded bringing upon himself the vengeance of Chunda 
Sahib and the French, whose ultimate success in the 
strife appeared certain. Clive’s march upon Arcot, and 
the heroic defense which the handful of men there were 
opposing to overwhelming numbers, excited his highest 
admiration. As he afterward said, he had never before 
believed that the English could fight, and when Clive’s 
messenger reached him he at once sent back a promise 
of assistance. Riza Sahib learned almost as soon as Clive 
himself that the Marattas were on the move. The pros- 
pects of his communications being harassed by these 
daring horsemen filled him with anxiety. Murari Reo 
was encamped with 6000 men at a spot thirty miles to 
the west of Arcot, and he might at any moment swoop 
down upon the besiegers. Although, therefore, Riza 
Sahib had for six days been at work effecting a new 
breach, which was now nearly open to assault, he sent, 
on the 30th of October, a flag of truce with an offer to 
Clive of terms if he would surrender Arcot. The gar- 


78 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


rison were to be allowed to march out with their arms 
and baggage, while to Clive himself he offered a large 
sum of money. In case of refusal he threatened to storm 
the fort and put all its defenders to the sword. Clive 
returned a defiant refusal, and the guns again opened on 
the second breach. 

On the 9th of November the Marattas began to show 
themselves in the neighborhood of the besieging army. 
The force under Lieutenant Innis had been reinforced, 
and was now under the command of Captain Kilpatrick, 
who had 150 English troops with four field-guns. This 
was now advancing. Four days later the new breach 
had attained a width of thirty yards, but Clive had pre- 
pared defenses in the rear similar to those at the other 
breach; and the difficulties of the besiegers would here 
be much greater, as the ditch was not fordable. The 
fifty days which the siege had lasted had been terrible 
ones for the garrison. Never daring to expose them- 
selves unnecessarily during the day, yet ever on the alert 
to repel an attack, laboring at night at the defenses with 
their numbers daily dwindling, and the prospect of an 
assault becoming more and more imminent, the work 
of the little garrison was terrible, and it is to the defenses 
of Lucknow and Cawnpore, a hundred years later, that 
we must look to find a parallel in English warfare for 
their endurance and bravery. Both Charlie Marryat 
and Peters had been wounded, but in neither case were 
the injuries severe enough to prevent their continuing 
on duty. Tim Kelly had his arm broken by a ball, while 
another bullet cut a deep seam along his cheek and car- 
ried away a portion of his ear. 'With his arm in splints 
and a sling, and the side of his face covered with strap- 
pings and plaster, he still went about his business. 

“Ah! yer honors,” he said one day to his masters, 
“ I’ve often been out catching rabbits, with ferrets to 
drive ’em out of their holes, and sticks to knock ’em on 
the head as soon as they showed themselves; and it’s a 
divarshun I was always mightily fond of, but I never 
quite intered into the feelings of the rabbits. Now I 


THE GRAND ASSAULT. 


79 


understand them complately, for aint we rabbits our- 
selves. The officers, saving your presence, are the fer- 
rets who turn us out of our holes on duty, and the niggers 
yonder with their muskets and their matchlocks are the 
men with sticks ready to knock us on the head directly 
we show ourselves. If it plase Heaven that I ever return 
to the ould country again, I’ll niver lend a hand at rab- 
biting to my dying day.” 

CHAPTER VIII. 

THE GRAND ASSAULT. 

The 14th of November was a Mahommedan festival, 
and Riza Sahib determined to utilize the enthusiasm and 
fanatic zeal which such an occasion always excites among 
the followers of the Prophet, to make his grand assault 
upon Arcot, and to attack at three o’clock in the morn- 
ing. Every preparation was made on the preceding day, 
and four strong columns told off for the assault. . Two of 
these were to attack by the breaches, the other two at the 
gates. Rafts were prepared to enable the party attack- 
ing by the new breach to cross the moat, while the 
columns advancing against the gates were to be preceded 
by elephants, who, with iron plates on their foreheads, 
were to charge and batter down the gates. 

Clive’s spies brought him news of the intended assault, 
and at midnight he learned full particulars as to the 
disposition of the enemy. His force was now reduced 
to 80 Europeans and 120 Sepoys. Every man was told 
off to his post and then, sentries being posted to arouse 
them at the approach of the enemy, the little garrison 
lay down in their places to get two or three hours’ sleep 
before the expected attack. At three o’clock the firing 
of three shells from the mortars into the fort gave the 
signal for assault. The men leaped up and stood to their 
arms, full of confidence in their ability to resist the 
attack. Soon the shouts of the advancing columns testi- 
fied to the equal confidence and ardor of the Assailants, 


8o 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


Not a sound was heard within the walls of the fort 
until the elephants advanced toward the gates. Then 
suddenly a stream of fire leaped out from loophole and 
battlement. So well directed and continuous was the 
fire that the elephants, dismayed at the outburst of fire 
and noise and smarting from innumerable wounds, 
turned and dashed away, trampling in their flight multi- 
tudes of men in the dense columns packed behind 
them. These, deprived of the means upon which they 
had relied to break in the gates, turned and retreated 
rapidly. 

Scarcely less prolonged was the struggle at the 
breaches. At the first breach a very strong force of 
the enemy marched resolutely forward. They were per- 
mitted without a shot being fired at them to cross the 
dry ditch, mount the shattered debris of the wall, and 
pour into the interior of the fort. Forward they ad- 
vanced until, without a check, they reached the first 
trench bristling with spikes. Then, as they paused for 
a moment, from the breastwork in front of them, from 
the ramparts, and every spot which commanded the 
trench, a storm of musketry was poured on them, while 
the gunners swept the crowded mass with grape and 
bags of bullets. The effect was tremendous. Mowed 
down in heaps, the assailants recoiled, and then without 
a moment’s hesitation turned and fled. Three times, 
strongly reinforced, they advanced to the attack, but 
were each time repulsed with severe slaughter. 

Still less successful were those at the other breach. 
A great raft, capable of carrying 70, conveyed the head 
of the storming party across the ditch, and they had just 
reached the foot of the breach when Clive, who was him- 
self at this point, turned two field-pieces upon them with 
deadly effect. The raft was upset and smashed, and the 
column, deprived of its intended means of crossing the 
ditch, desisted from the attack. 

Among those who had fallen at the great breach was 
the commander of the storming party, a man of great 
valor. Four hundred of his followers had also been 


THE GRAND ASSAULT. 


8l 


killed, and Riza Sahib, utterly disheartened at his repulse 
at all points, decided not to renew the attack. He had 
still more than twenty men to each of the defenders; but 
the obstinacy of their resistance and the moral effect pro- 
duced by it upon his troops, the knowledge that the 
Maratta horse were hovering in his rear, and that Kil- 
patrick’s little column was close at hand, determined 
him to raise the siege. After the repulse of the assault 
the heavy musketry fire from the houses around the fort 
was continued. At two in the afternoon he asked for 
two hours’ truce to bury the dead. This was granted, 
and on its conclusion the musketry fire was resumed and 
continued until two in the morning. Then suddenly it 
ceased. Under cover of the fire Riza Sahib had raised 
the siege and retired with his army to Vellore. 

On the morning of the 15th Clive discovered that the 
enemy had disappeared. The joy of the garrison was 
immense. Every man felt proud and happy in the 
thought that he had taken his share in a siege which 
would not only be memorable in English history till the 
end of time, but which had literally saved India to us. 
The little band made the fort re-echo with their cheers 
when the news came in. Caps were thrown high in the 
air, and the men indulged in every demonstration of 
delight. Clive was not a man to lose time. The men 
were at once formed up and marched into the abandoned 
camp of the enemy, where they found four guns, four 
mortars, and a great quantity of ammunition. A cloud 
of dust was seen approaching, and soon a mounted officer 
riding forward announced the arrival of Captain Kil- 
patrick’s detachment. 

Not a moment was lost, for Clive felt the importance 
of at once following up the blow inflicted by the repulse 
of the enemy. Three days were spent in continuous 
labor in putting the fort of Arcot again in a position of de- 
fense; and leaving Kilpatrick in charge there, he marched 
out with 200 Europeans, 700 Sepoys, and three guns, 
and attacked and took Timari, the little fort which had 
Jefore baffled him. This done he returned toward Arcot 


82 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


to await the arrival of 1000 Maratta horse which Murari 
Reo had promised him. When these arrived, however, 
they proved unwilling to accompany him. Upon their 
way they had fallen in with a portion of Riza Sahib’s 
retreating force and had been worsted in the attack ; and 
as the chance of plunder seemed small while the prospect 
of hard blows was certain, the freebooting horsemen 
refused absolutely to join in the pursuit of the retreating 
enemy. Just at this moment the news came in that reirp 
forcements from Pondicherry were marching to meet 
Riza Sahib at Arni, seventeen miles south of Arcot, 
twenty south of Vellore. It was stated that with 
these reinforcements a large sum of money was being 
brought for the use of Riza Sahib’s army. When the 
Marattas heard the news, the chance of booty at once 
altered their intentions, and they declared themselves 
ready to follow Clive. The greater portion of them, 
however, had dispersed plundering over the country, 
and great delay was caused before they could be col- 
lected. When 600 of them had been brought together 
Clive determined to wait no longer, but started at once 
for Arni. 

The delay enabled Riza Sahib, marching down from 
Vellore, to meet his reinforcements, and when Clive, after 
a forced march of twenty miles, approached Arni, he 
found the enemy, composed of 300 French troops, 2500 
Sepoys, and 200 horsemen, with four guns, drawn up 
before it. Seeing their immense superiority in numbers 
these advanced to the attack. 

Clive determined to await them where he stood. The 
position was an advantageous one. He occupied a space 
of open ground some three hundred yards in width. On 
his right flank was a village. On the left a grove of 
palm trees. In front of the ground he occupied were 
rice fields, which, it being the wet season, were very 
swampy and altogether impracticable for guns. These 
fields were crossed by a causeway which led to the vil- 
lage, but as it ran at an angle across them, those ad- 
vancing upon it were exposed' to the fire of the English 


THE GRAND ASSAULT. 


83 

front. Clive posted' the Sepoys in the village, the 
Maratta horsemen in the grove, and the 200 English 
with the guns on the ground between them. The enemy 
advanced at once. His native cavalry with some infan- 
try marched against the grove, while the French troops 
with about 1500 infantry moved along the causeway 
against the village. 

The fight began on the English left. There the Ma- 
ratta cavalry fought bravely. Issuing from the palm 
grove they made repeated charges against the greatly 
superior forces of the enemy. But numbers told, and 
the Marattas, fighting fiercely, were driven back into the 
palm grove, where they with difficulty maintained them- 
selves. In the meantime the fight was going on at the 
center. Clive opened fire with his guns on the long 
column marching almost across his front to attack the 
village. The enemy, finding themselves exposed to a 
fire which they were powerless to answer, quitted the 
causeway, and formed up in the rice fields fronting the 
English position. The guns, protected only by a few 
Frenchmen and natives, remained on the causeway. 
Clive now dispatched two of his guns and 50 English 
to aid the hard pressed Marattas in the grove, and 50 
others to the village with orders to join the Sepoys there, 
to dash forward on to the causeway, and charge the 
enemy’s guns. 

As the column issued from the village along the cause- 
way at a rapid pace the French limbered up their guns 
and retired at a gallop. The infantry, dispirited at their 
disappearance, fell back across the rice fields, an example 
which their horsemen on their right, already dispirited 
by the loss which they were suffering from the newly 
arrived English musketry and the discharges of the field- 
pieces, followed without delay. Clive at once ordered 
a pursuit. The Marattas were dispatched after the 
enemy’s cavalry, while he himself with his infantry ad- 
vanced across the causeway and pressed upon the main 
body. Three times the enemy made a stand, but each 
time failed to resist the impetuosity of the pursuers, and 


8 4 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


the night alone put a stop to the pursuit, by which time 
the enemy were completely routed. 

The material loss had not been heavy, for but 50 
French and 150 natives were killed or wounded; but the 
army was broken up, the morale of the enemy completely 
destroyed, and it was proved to all Southern India, which 
was anxiously watching the struggle, that the English 
were in the field of battle superior to their European 
rivals. This assurance alone had an -immense effect. It 
confirmed in their alliance with the English many of the 
chiefs whose friendship had hitherto been lukewarm, 
and brought over many waverers to our side. In the 
fight 8 Sepoys and 50 of the Maratta cavalry were killed 
or disabled; the English did not lose a single man. 
Many of Riza Sahib’s soldiers came in during the next 
few days and enlisted in the British force. The Marattas 
captured the treasure the prospect of which had induced 
them to join in the fight, and the governor of Arni agreed 
to hold the town for Muhammud Ali. Clive moved on 
at once to Conjeveram, where 30 French troops and 300 
Sepoys occupied the temple, a very strong building. 
Clive brought up two eighteen-pounders from Madras 
and pounded the walls, and the enemy, seeing that the 
place must fall, evacuated it in the night and retired to 
Pondicherry. North Arcot being now completely in 
the power of the English, Clive returned to Madras, and 
then sailed to Fort St. David to concert measures with 
Mr. Saunders for the relief of Trichinopoli. This place 
still held out, thanks rather to the feebleness and inde- 
cision of Colonel Law, who commanded the besiegers, 
than to any effort on the part of the defenders. 

Governor Dupleix, at Pondicherry, had seen with sur- 
prise the result of Clive’s dash upon Arcot. He had, 
however, perceived that the operations there were wholly 
secondary, and that Trichinopoli was still the all-impor- 
tant point. The fall of that place would more than 
neutralize Clive’s successes at Arcot, and he, therefore, 
did not suffer Clive’s operations to distract his attention 
here. Strong reinforcements and a battering train were 


THE GRAND ASSAULT. 


85 


sent forward to the besiegers, and by repeated messages 
he endeavored to impress upon Law and Chunda Sahib 
the necessity of pressing forward the capture of Trichi- 
nopoli. But Dupleix was unfortunate in his instruments. 
Law was always hesitating and doubting. Chunda 
Sahib, alhough clever to plan, was weak in action, inde- 
cisive at moments when it was most necessary that he 
should be firm. So then, in spite of the » entreaties of 
Dupleix, he had detached a considerable force to besiege 
Clive. Dupleix, seeing this, and hoping that Clive might 
be detained at Arcot long enough to allow of the siege 
of Trichinopoli being brought to a conclusion, had sent 
the 300 French soldiers to strengthen the force of Riza 
Sahib. He had still an overpowering force at Trichi- 
nopoli, Law having 900 trained French soldiers, a park 
of fifty guns, 2000 Sepoys, and the army of Chunda 
Sahib, 20,000 strong. Inside Trichinopoli were a few 
English soldiers under Captain Cope and a small body 
of troops of Muhammud Ali; while outside the walls, 
between them and the besiegers, was the English force 
under Gingen, the men utterly dispirited, the officer with- 
out talent, resolution, or confidence. 

Before leaving the troops with which he had won the 
battle of Arni, Clive had expressed to the two young 
writers his high appreciation of their conduct during the 
siege of Arcot, and promised them that he would make 
it a personal request to the authorities at Fort St. David 
that they might be permanently transferred from the 
civil to the military branch of the service; and such a 
request made by him was certain to be complied with. 
He strongly advised them to spend every available mo- 
ment of their time in the study of the native language, 
as without that they would be useless if appointed to 
command a body of Sepoys. Delighted at the prospect 
now open to them of a permanent relief from the drudg- 
ery of a clerk’s life in Madras, the young fellows were 
in the highest spirits; and Tim Kelly was scarcely less 
pleased when he heard that Charlie was now likely to 
be always employed with him. The boys lost not a 


86 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


moment in sending down to Madras to engage the 
services of a native “ moonshee ” or teacher. They wrote 
to their friend Johnson asking him to arrange terms 
with the man who understood most English, and to 
engage him to remain with them some time. 

A few days later Tim Kelly came in. “ Plase, yer 
honors, there’s a little shriveled atomy of a man outside 
as wants to spake wid ye. He looks for all the world 
like a monkey wrapped up in white clothes, but he spakes 
English after a fashion, and has brought this letter for 
you. The cratur scarce looks like a human being, and 
I misdoubt me whether you had better let him in.” 

“ Nonsense, Tim,” Charlie said, opening the letter; 
“ it’s the moonshee we are expecting from Madras. He 
has come to teach us the native language.” 

“ Moonshine, it is! by jabers, and it’s a mighty poor 
compliment to the moon to call him so. And is it the 
language you’re going to larn now. Shure, Mr. Charles, 
I wouldn’t demane myself by laming the lingo of these 
black hathens. Isn’t it for them to larn the English and 
mightily pleased they ought to be to get themselves to 
spake like Christians.” 

“ But who’s going to teach them, Tim? ” 

“ Oh, they larn fast enough,” said Tim. “ You’ve only 
got to point to a bottle of water, or to the fire, or what- 
ever else you want, and swear at them, and they under- 
stand directly. I’ve tried it myself over and over again.” 

“ There, Tim, it’s no use standing talking any longer; 
bring in the moonshee.” From that moment the little 
man had his permanent post in a corner of the boys’ 
room, and when they were not on duty they were con- 
stantly engaged in studying the language, writing down 
the names of every object they came across and getting 
it by heart, and learning every sentence, question, and 
answer which occurred to them as likely to be useful. 
As for Tim, he quite lost patience at this devotion to 
study on the part of his master, who, he declared to his 
comrades, went on just as if he intended to become a 
nigger and a hathen himself. “ It’s just awful to hear 


THE GRAND ASSAULT. 


87 


him, Corporal M’Bean, jabbering away in that foreign 
talk with that little black monkey moonshine. The little 
cratur a-twisting his shriveled fingers about, that looks 
as if the bones were coming through the skin. I wonder 
what the good father at Blarney, where I come from, 
you know, corporal, would say to sich goings-on. 
Faith, then, and if he were here, I’d buy a bottle of holy 
water and sprinkle it over the little hathen. I suspict 
he’d fly straight up the chimney when it touched him.” 

“ My opinion of you, Tim Kelly,” the corporal, who 
was a grave Scotchman, said, “ is that you’re just a fule. 
Your master is a brave young gentleman, and is a deal 
more sensible than most of them, who spend all their 
time in drinking wine and playing cards. A knowledge 
of the language is most useful. What would you do 
yourself if you were to marry a native woman and 
couldn’t speak to her afterward? ” 

‘‘The saints defind us!” Tim exclaimed; “and what 
put such an idea in yer head, corporal? It’s nayther 
more nor less than an insult to suppose that I, a dacent 
boy, and brought up under the teaching of Father 
O’Shea, should marry a hathen black woman; and if you 
weren’t my suparior officer, corporal, I’d tach ye better 
manners.” 

Fortunately at this moment Charlie’s voice was heard 
shouting for his servant, and Tim was therefore saved 
from the breach of the peace which his indignation 
showed that he meditated. 

December passed quietly, and then in January, 1752, 
an insurrection planned by Dupleix broke out. The 
governor of Pondicherry had been suffering keenly from 
disappointments, which, as time went on, and his en- 
treaties and commands to Law to attack Trichinopoli 
were answered only by excuses and reasons for delay, 
grew to despair, and he resolved upon making another 
effort to occupy the attention of the man in whom he 
already recognized a great rival, and to prevent his tak- 
ing steps for the relief of Trichinopoli. Law had over 
and over again assured him that in the course of a very 


88 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


few weeks that place would be driven by famine to sur- 
render; and, as soon as Clive arrived at Fort St. David, 
Dupleix set about taking steps which would again neces- 
sitate his return to the north, and so give to Law the time 
which he asked for. Supplies of money were sent to 
Riza Sahib together with 400 French soldiers. These 
marched suddenly upon Punemalli and captured it, seized 
again the fortified temple of Conjeveram, and from this 
point threatened both Madras and Arcot. 

Had this force possessed an active and determined 
commander, it could undoubtedly have carried out Du- 
pleix’s instructions, captured Madras, and inflicted a ter- 
rible blow upon the English. Fortunately it had no such 
head. It marched indeed against Madras, plundered 
and burned the factories, levied contributions, and ob- 
tained possession of everything but the fort, where the 
civilians and the few men who constituted the garrison 
daily expected to be attacked, in which case the place 
must have fallen. This, however, the enemy never even 
attempted, contenting themselves with ravaging the 
place outside the walls of the fort. The little garrison 
of Arcot, 200 men in all, were astonished at the news 
that the province which they had thought completely 
conquered was again in flames, that the road to Madras 
was cut by the occupation of Conjeveram by the French, 
and that Madras itself was, save the fort, in the hands of 
the enemy. The fort itself, they knew, might easily be 
taken, as they were aware that it was defended by only 
80 men. 

The change in the position was at once manifest in the 
altered attitude of the fickle population. The main body 
of the inhabitants of Southern India were Hindoos, who 
had for centuries been ruled by foreign masters. The 
Mahommedans from the north had .been their con- 
querors, and the countless wars which had taken place 
to them signified merely whether one family or another 
were to reign over them. The sole desire was for peace 
and protection, and they, therefore, ever inclined toward 
the side which seemed strongest. Their sympathies 


THE GRAND ASSAULT. 89 

were no stronger with their Mahommedan rulers than 
with the French or English, and they only hoped that 
whatever power was strongest might conquer, and that 
after the hostilities were over their daily work might be 
conducted in peace, and their property and possessions 
be enjoyed in security. The capture and defense of 
Arcot,and the battle of Arni, had brought them to regard 
the English as their final victors; and the signs of deep 
and even servile respect which greeted the conquerors 
wherever they went, and which absolutely disgusted 
Charlie Marryat and his friend, were really sincere marks 
of the welcome to masters who seemed able and willing 
to maintain their rule over them. With the news of the 
successes of Riza Sahib all this changed. The natives 
no longer bent to the ground as the English passed them 
in the streets. The country people who had flocked in 
with their products to the markets absented themselves 
altogether, and the whole population prepared to wel- 
come the French as their new masters. 

In the fort the utmost vigilance was observed. The 
garrison labored to mend the breaches and complete the 
preparations for defense. Provisions were again stored 
up, and they waited anxiously news from Clive. That 
enterprising officer was at Fort St. David, busy in mak- 
ing preparations for a decisive campaign against the 
enemy around Trichinopoli, when the news of the rising 
reached him. He was expecting a considerable number 
of fresh troops from England, as it was in January that 
the majority of the reinforcements dispatched by the 
company arrived in India, and Mr. Saunders had written 
to Calcutta begging that ioo men might be sent thence. 
These were now, with the 80 men at Madras and the 200 
at Arcot, all the force that could be at his disposal, for 
at Fort St. David there was not a single available man. 
With all the efforts that Clive, aided by the authorities, 
could make, it was not until the middle of February that 
he had completed his arrangements. On the 9th the 
100 men arrived from Bengal, and without the loss 
of a day, Clive started for Madras to form a junction with 


9 ° 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


the garrison from Arcot, who, leaving only a small force 
to hold the fort, had moved down to meet him. 


CHAPTER IX. 

THE BATTLE OF ICAVARIPAK. 

The troops from Arcot had already moved some dis- 
tance on their way to Madras, and Clive, therefore, with 
the new levies, joined them on the day after his leaving 
Madras. The French and Riza Sahib let slip the oppor- 
tunity of attacking these bodies before they united. They 
were well aware of their movements, and had resolved 
upon tactics, calculated in the first place to puzzle the 
English commander, to wear out his troops, and to 
enable them finally to surprise and take him entirely at 
a disadvantage. The junction with the Arcot garrison 
raised the force under Clive’s orders to 380 English, 1300 
Sepoys, and six field-guns, while the enemy at Vendalur, 
a place twenty-five miles south of Madras, where they 
had a fortified camp, had 400 French troops, 2000 Sepoys, 
2500 cavalry, and twelve guns. Hoping to surprise them 
there Clive marched all night. When the force ap- 
proached the town they heard that the enemy had dis- 
appeared, and that they had started apparently in several 
directions. 

The force was halted for a few hours, and then the 
news was obtained that the enemy had united their forces 
at Conjeveram, and that they had marched away from 
that place in a westerly direction. Doubting not that 
they were about to attack Arcot, which, weakened by the 
departure of the greater portion of its garrison, would 
be in no position to defend itself against a sudden coup 
de main by a strong force, Clive set his troops again in 
motion. The French, indeed, had already bribed some 
of the native soldiers within the fort, who were to reply 
to a signal made without if they were in a position to 
open the gates. However, by good fortune their treach- 


THE BATTLE OF KAVARIPAK. 


91 


ery had been discovered, and when the French arrived 
they received no reply to their signal; and as Arcot 
would be sure to fall if they defeated Clive, they marched 
away without attacking it, to take up the position which 
they had agreed upon beforehand. It was at nine in the 
evening that Clive at Vendalur obtained intelligence that 
the enemy had assembled at Conjeveram. The troops 
had already marched twenty-five miles, but they had had 
a rest of five hours, and Clive started with them at once, 
and reached Conjeveram, twenty miles distant, at four in 
the morning. Finding that the enemy had again dis- 
appeared he ordered the troops to halt for a few hours. 
They had already marched forty-five miles in twenty-four 
hours, a great feat when it is remembered that only the 
Arcot garrison were in any way accustomed to fatigue, 
the others being newly raised levies. The greater por- 
tion of the Sepoys had been enlisted within the fortnight 
preceding. 

“ I don’t know, Mr. Marryat, whether the French call 
this fighting; I call it playing hide and seek,” Tim Kelly 
said. “ Shure we’ve bin marching with only a halt of 
two or three hours since yisterday morning, and my poor 
feet are that sore that I daren’t take my boots off me, 
for I’m shure I’d never git ’em on agin. If the French 
want to fight us why don’t they do it square and honest, 
not be racing and chasing about like a lot of wild sheep.” 

“ Have you seen the moonshee, Tim? He is with the 
baggage.” 

“ Shure and I saw him,” Tim said. “ The cart come 
in just now, and there was he perched up on the top of 
it like a dried monkey. You don’t want him to-night, 
shure, yer honor.” 

“ Oh, no, I don’t want him, Tim. You’d better go 
now, and get to sleep at once if you can; we may be off 
again at any minute.” 

Arcot is twenty-seven miles from Conjeveram. Clive 
felt certain that the enemy had gone on to that place, but 
anxious as he was for its safety, it was absolutely neces- 
sary that the troops should have a rest before starting on 


92 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


such a march. They were therefore allowed to rest until 
twelve o’clock, when, refreshed by their eight hours’ halt 
and breakfast, they started upon their long march toward 
Arcot, making sure that they should not find the enemy 
until they reached that place. Had Clive possessed a 
body of cavalry, however small, he would have been able 
to scour the country, and to make himself acquainted 
with the real position of the French. Cavalry are to a 
general what eyes are to a man, and without these he is 
liable to tumble into a pitfall. Such was the case on the 
present occasion. Having no doubt that the enemy were 
engaged in attacking Arcot the troops were plodding 
along carelessly and in loose order, when, to their aston- 
ishment, after a sixteen-mile march, as they approached 
the town of Kavaripak just as the sun was setting, a fire 
of artillery opened upon them from a grove upon the 
right of the road but 250 yards distant. Nothing is 
more confusing than a surprise of this kind, especially 
to young troops, and when no enemy is thought to be 
near. 

The French general’s plans had been well laid. He 
had reached Kavaripak that morning, and allowed his 
troops to rest all day, and he expected to obtain an easy 
victory over the tired men who would, unsuspicious of 
danger, be pressing on to the relief of Arcot. So far his 
calculations had been correct, and the English marched 
unsuspiciously into the trap laid for them. The twelve 
French guns were placed in a grove, round whose sides, 
facing the point from which Clive was approaching, ran 
a deep ditch with a high bank forming a regular battery. 
A body of French infantry were placed in support of the 
guns, with some Sepoys in reserve behind the grove. 
Parallel with the road on the left ran a deep water-course, 
now empty, and in this the rest of the infantry were 
stationed, at a point near the town of Kavaripak, and 
about a quarter of a mile further back than the grove. 
On either side of this water-course the enemy had placed 
his powerful cavalry force. 

For a moment when the guns opened there was con- 


THE BATTLE OF KAVARIPAK. 


93 


fusion and panic among the British troops. Clive, how- 
ever, ever cool and confident in danger, and well 
seconded by his officers, rallied them at once. The posi- 
tion was one of extreme danger. It was possible, indeed, 
to retreat, but in the face of an enemy superior in infantry 
and guns, and possessing so powerful a body of cavalry, 
the operation would have been a very dangerous one. 
Even if accomplished it would entail an immense loss of 
morale and prestige to his troops. Hitherto under his 
leading they had been always successful, and a belief in 
his own superiority adds immensely to the fighting power 
of a soldier. Even should the remnant of the force fight 
its way back to Madras the campaign would have been a 
lost one, and all hope of saving Trichinopoli would have 
been at an end. 

“ Steady, lads, steady/’ he shouted. “ Form up quietly 
and steadily. We have beaten the enemy before, you 
know, and we will do so again.” 

While the troops, in spite of the artillery fire, fell into 
line, Clive rapidly surveyed the ground. He saw the 
enemy’s infantry advancing up the water-course, and so 
sheltered by it as to be out of the fire of his troops. He 
saw their cavalry sweeping down on the other side of the 
water-course, menacing his left and threatening his bag- 
gage. The guns were at once brought up from the rear, 
but before these arrived the men were falling fast. 
Three of the guns he placed to answer the French bat- 
tery, two of them he hurried to his left with a small body 
of English and 200 Sepoys, to check the advance of the 
enemy’s .cavalry. The main body of his infantry he 
ordered into the water-course, which afforded them a 
shelter from the enemy’s artillery. The baggage carts 
and baggage he sent half a mile to the rear, under the 
protection of 40 Sepoys and a gun. While this was 
being done the enemy’s fire was continuing, but his in- 
fantry advanced but slowly, and had not reached a point 
abreast of the grove when the British force in the water- 
course met them. It would not seem to be a very impor- 
tant matter at what point in the water-course the infantry 


94 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


of the two opposing parties came into collision, but 
matters apparently trifling in themselves often decide the 
fate of battles; and, in fact, had the French artillery re- 
tained their fire until their infantry were abreast of the 
grove, the battle of Kavaripak would have been won by 
them, and the British power in Southern India would 
have been destroyed. Clive moved confidently and reso- 
lutely among his men, keeping up their courage by 
cheerful words, and he was well seconded by his officers. 

“ Now, lads,” Charlie Marryat cried to the company of 
which he was in command, “ stick to it. You ought to 
be very thankful to the French for saving you the trouble 
of having to march another twelve miles before giving 
you an opportunity of thrashing them.” 

The men laughed and redoubled their fire on the 
French infantry, who were facing them in the water- 
course at a distance of eighty yards. Neither party liked 
to charge. The French commander knew that he had 
only to hold his position to win the day. His guns were 
mowing down the English artillerymen. The English 
party on the left of the water-course with difficulty held 
their own against the charges of his horsemen, and were 
rapidiy dwindling away under the artillery fire, while 
other bodies of his cavalry had surrounded the baggage, 
and were attacking the little force told off to guard it. 
He knew, too, that any attempt the English might make 
to attack the battery, with its strong defenses, must 
inevitably fail. 

The situation was becoming desperate. It was now 
ten o’clock; the fight had gone on for four hours. No 
advantage had been gained, the men were losing confi- 
dence, and the position grew more and more desperate. 
Clive saw that there was but one chance of victory. The 
grove could not be carried in the front, but it was just 
possible that it might be open in the rear. Choosing a 
sergeant who spoke the native language well, lie bade 
him leave the party in the water-course and make his way 
round to the rear of the grove, and discover whether it 
was strongly guarded there or not. In twenty minutes 


THE BATTLE OF KAVARIPAK. 


95 


the sergeant returned with the news that there was no 
strong force there. 

Clive at once took 200 of his English infantry, the men 
who had fought at Arcot, and quietly left the water- 
course and made his way round toward the rear of 
the grove. Before he had gone far the main body in the 
water-course, surprised at the sudden withdrawal of 
the greater portion of the English force and missing the 
presence of Clive himself, began to lose heart. They no 
longer replied energetically to the fire of the French 
infantry. A movement of retreat began, the fire ceased, 
and in a minute or two they would have broken in flight. 
At this moment Clive returned. As he moved forward 
he had marked the dying away of the English fire, and 
guessing what had happened, had given over the com- 
mand of the column to Lieutenant Keene, the senior 
officer, and hurried back to the water-course. He ar- 
rived there just as the troops had commenced to run 
away. Throwing himself among them, with shouts and 
exhortations, he succeeded in arresting their flight, and 
bv assurances that the battle was as good as won else- 
where, and that they had only to hold their ground for a 
few minutes longer to insure victory, he got them to 
advance to their former position and to reopen fire on 
the French, who had, fortunately, remained inactive in- 
stead of advancing and taking advantage of the cessation 
of the English fire. 

In the mean time Lieutenant Keene led his detach- 
ment, making a long circuit, to a point three hundred 
yards immediately behind the grove. He then sent for- 
ward one of his officers, Ensign Symmonds, who spoke 
French perfectly, to reconnoiter the grove. Symmonds 
had proceeded but a little way when he came upon a 
large number of French Sepoys, who were covering the 
rear of the grove, but who, as their services were not 
required, were sheltering themselves there from the ran- 
dom bullets which were flying about. They at once 
challenged, but Symmonds answering them in French, 
they being unable to see his uniform in the darkness, 


9 6 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


and supposing him to be a French officer, allowed him to 
advance. He passed boldly forward into the grove. He 
proceeded nearly through it, until he came within sight 
of the guns, which were still keeping up their fire upon 
those of the English, while ioo French infantry, who 
were in support, were all occupied in watching what was 
going on in front of them. 

Symmonds returned to the detachment by a path to 
the right of that by which he had entered, and passed 
out without seeing a soul. Lieutenant Keene gave ^e 
word to advance, and, following the guidance of Mr. 
Symmonds, entered the grove. He advanced unob- 
served until within thirty yards of the enemy. Here he 
halted and poured a volley into them. The effect was 
instantaneous. Many of the French fell, and the rest, 
astounded at this sudden and unexpected attack, left 
their guns and fled. Sixty of them rushed for shelter 
into a building at the end of the grove, where the Eng- 
lish surrounded them and forced them to surrender. 

By this sudden stroke the battle of Kavaripak was 
won. The sound of the musketry fire and the immediate 
cessation of that of the enemy’s guns, told Clive that the 
grove was captured. A few minutes later fugitives arriv- 
ing from the grove informed the commander of the 
enemy’s main body of infantry of the misfortune which 
had befallen them. The French fire at once ceased and 
the troops withdrew. In the darkness it was impossible 
for Clive to attempt a pursuit. He was in ignorance of 
the direction the enemy had taken; his troops had 
already marched sixty miles in two days, and he would, 
moreover, have been exposed to sudden dashes of the 
enemy’s cavalry. Clive, therefore, united his troops, 
joined his baggage, which the little guard had gallantly 
defended against the attacks of the enemy’s cavalry, and 
waited for morning. At daybreak not an enemy was to 
be seen. Fifty Frenchmen lay dead on the field and 
60 were captives. Three hundred French Sepoys had 
fallen. There were, besides, many wounded. The 
enemy’s artillery had been all captured. The British 


THE BATTLE OF KAVARIPAK. 


97 


loss was 40 English and 30 Sepoys killed, and a great 
number of both wounded. 

The moral effect of the victory was immense. It was 
the first time that French and English soldiers had fought 
in the field against each other in India. The French had 
proved to the natives that they were enormously their 
superiors in fighting power. Hitherto the English had 
not done so. The defense of Arcot had proved that they 
could fight behind walls, but the natives had themselves 
many examples of gallant defenses of this kind. The 
English troops under Gingen and Cope had suffered 
themselves to be cooped up in Trichinopoli and had not 
struck a blow in its defense. At Kavaripak the natives 
discovered that the English could fight as well, or better 
than the French. The latter were somewhat stronger 
numerically than their rivals; they had double the force 
of artillery, were half as strong again in Sepoys, and had 
2500 cavalry, while the English had not a single horse- 
man. They had all the advantages of surprise and posi- 
tion, and yet they had been entirely defeated. 

Thenceforth the natives of India regarded the Eng- 
lish as a people to be feared and respected, and for the 
first time considered their ultimate triumph over the 
French to be a possibility. As the policy of the native 
princes had ever been to side with the strongest, the 
advantage thus gained to the English cause by the vic- 
tory of Kavaripak was enormous. 

On the following day the English took possession of 
the fort of Kavaripak and marched to Arcot. Scarcely 
had they arrived there when Clive received a dispatch 
from Fort St. David ordering him to return there at 
once with all his troops, to march to the relief of Trichi- 
nopoli, where the garrison was reported to be in the 
sorest straits from want of provisions. The force 
reached Fort St. David on the nth of March. Here 
preparations were hurried forward for the advance to 
Trichinopoli, and in three days Clive was ready to start. 
Just as he was about to set out a ship arrived from Eng- 
land, having on board some more troops, together with 


98 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


Major Lawrence and several officers, some of whom were 
captains senior to Clive. Major Lawrence, who had 
already proved his capacity and energy, of course took 
command of the expediton, and treated Clive, who had 
served under him at the siege of Pondicherry, and whose 
successes in the field had attracted his high admiration, 
as second in command, somewhat to the discontent of the 
officers senior to him in rank. 

The force consisted of 400 Europeans, 1100 Sepoys, 
and eight guns, and escorted a large train of provisions 
and stores. During these months which the diversion, 
caused by the attack of Riza Sahib and the French upon 
Madras, had given to the besiegers of Trichinopoli, they 
should have long since captured the town. In spite of all 
the orders of Dupleix, Law could not bring himself to 
attack the town, and the French governor of Pondi- 
cherry saw with dismay that the two months and a half 
which his efforts and energy had gained for the besiegers 
had been entirely wasted, and that it was probable the 
whole fruits of his labors would be thrown away. He 
now directed Law to leave only a small force in front of 
Trichinopoli, and to march with the whole of his army, 
and that of Chunda Sahib, and crush the force advancing 
under Lawrence to the relief of Trichinopoli. Law, how- 
ever, disobeyed orders, and indeed acted in direct con- 
tradiction to them. He retained 600 French troops and 
many thousands of natives before Trichinopoli, and sent 
but 250 French and about 350 natives — a force alto- 
gether inferior in numbers to that which it was sent to 
oppose — to arrest the progress of Lawrence’s advancing 
column. 

The position which this French force was directed to 
occupy was the Fort of Koiladi, an admirable position. 
As the two branches of the Kavari were here but half a 
mile apart, had Law concentrated all his force here he 
could, no doubt, have successfully opposed the English. 
Lawrence, however, when the guns of the fort opened 
upon him, replied to them by the fire of his artillery, and 
as the French force was insufficient to enable its com- 


THE BATTLE OF KAVARIPAK. 


99 


mander to fight him in the open, he was enabled to take 
his troops and convoy in safety past the fort. When 
Law heard this he marched out and took his position 
round a lofty and almost inaccessible rock called Elmis- 
eram, and prepared to give battle. Lawrence, however, 
after passing Koiladi, had been joined by ioo English 
and 50 dragoons from Trichinopoli. These acted as 
guides, and led him by a route by which he avoided the 
Trench position, and effected a junction with 200 Euro- 
peans and 400 Sepoys from Trichinopoli, and with a 
body of Maratta cavalry under Murari Reo. Law hav- 
ing failed to attack the English force upon its march, 
now, when its strength was nearly doubled, suddenly 
decided to give battle, and advanced against the force 
which, wearied with its long march, had just begun to 
prepare their breakfast. The French artillery at once 
put the Maratta cavalry to flight. 

Lawrence called the men again under arms, and sent 
Clive forward to reconnoiter. He found the French in- 
fantry drawn up with twenty-two guns, with large bodies 
of cavalry on either flank. Opposite to the center of 
their position was a large caravansary, or native inn, with 
stone buildings attached. It was nearer to their position 
than to that occupied by the English, and Clive saw at 
once that if seized and held by the enemy’s artillery, it 
would sweep the whole ground over which the English 
would have to advance. He galloped back at full speed 
to Major Lawrence, and asked leave at once to occupy 
the building. Obtaining permission he advanced with all 
speed to the caravansary with some guns and infantry. 

The negligence of the French in allowing this move- 
ment to be carried out was fatal to them. The English 
artillery opened upon them from the cover of the inn and 
buildings, and to this fire the French in the open could 
reply only at a great disadvantage. After a cannonade 
lasting half an hour, the French, having lost 40 Euro- 
pean and 300 native soldiers, fell back, the English hav- 
ing lost only 21. Disheartened at this result, utterly 
disappointed at the failure which had attended his long 


roo 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


operations against Trichinopoli, without energy or deci- 
sion, Law at once raised the siege of the town, abandon- 
ing a great portion of his baggage, and destroying great 
stores of ammunition and supplies, crossed an arm of the 
Kavari, and took post in the great fortified temple of 
Seringam. 

The delight of the troops so long besieged in Trichi- 
nopoli, inactive, dispirited, and hopeless, was extreme, 
and the exultation of Muhammud Ali and his native 
allies was no less. 

Captain Cope, toward the end of the siege, had been 
killed in one of the little skirmishes which occasionally 
took place with the French. 

Charlie Marryat and Peters had, owing to some of the 
officers senior to them being killed or invalided, and to 
large numbers of fresh recruits being raised, received a 
step in rank. They were now lieutenants, and each com- 
manded a body of Sepoys 200 strong. At Charlie’s re- 
quest Tim Kelly was detached from his company and 
allowed to remain with him as soldier servant. After the 
retreat of the French and the settling down of the Eng- 
lish force in the lines they had occupied, Charlie and his 
friend entered Trichinopoli, and were surprised at the 
temples and palaces there. Although very inferior to 
Tanjore, and in no way even comparable to the cities of 
the northwest of India, Trichinopoli was a far more 
important, city than any they had hitherto seen. They 
ascended the lofty rock and visited the fort on its sum- 
mit, which looked as if in the hands of a resolute garri- 
son, it should be impregnable to attack. The manner in 
which this rock, as well as that of Elmiseram and others 
lying in sight, rose sheer up from the plain, filled them 
with surprise; for although these natural rock fortresses 
are common enough in India, they are almost without an 
example in Europe. After visiting the fort they rambled 
through the town, and were amused at the scene of bustle 
in its streets and at the gay shops, full of articles new and 
curious to them, in the bazaars. 

“ They are wonderfully clever and ingenious,” Charlie 


THE FALL OF SERINGAM. 


tOI 


said. “ Look what rough tools that man is working 
with, and what delicate and intricate work he is turning 
out. If these fellows could but fight as well as they 
work, and were but united among themselves, not only 
should we be unable to set a foot in India, but the 
emperor, with the enormous armies which he would be 
able to raise, would be able to threaten Europe. I sup- 
pose they never have been really good fighting men. 
Alexander a couple of thousand years ago defeated them, 
and since then the Afghans and other northern peoples 
have been always overrunning and conquering them. 
I can’t make it out. These Sepoys, after only a few 
weeks’ training, fight almost as well as our own men. I 
wonder how it is that, when commanded by their own 
countrymen, they are able to make so poor a fight of it. 
We had better be going back to camp again, Peters, at 
any moment there may be orders for us to do something. 
With Major Lawrence and Clive together we are not 
likely to stop here long inactive.” 


CHAPTER X. 

THE FALL OF SERINGAM. 

Although called an island, Seringam is in fact a long 
narrow tongue of land running between the two branches 
of the river Kavari. In some places these arms are but 
a few hundred yards apart, and the island can therefore 
be defended against an attack along the land. But the 
retreat of the French by this line was equally difficult, as 
we held the narrowest part of the neck, two miles from 
Koiladi. Upon the south our forces at Trichinopoli 
faced the French across the river. Upon the other side 
of the Kolrun, as the northern arm of the Kavari is called, 
the French could cross the river and make their retreat, 
if necessary, in any direction. The two principal roads, 
however, led from Paichandah, a strong fortified position 
on the bank of the river, facing the temple of Seringam. 


102 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


Clive saw that a force crossing the river, and taking up 
its position on the north, would entirely cut off Law’s 
army in the island, would intercept any reinforcements 
sent by Dupleix to its rescue, and might compel the sur- 
render of the whole French army. The attempt would, 
of course, be a dangerous one. The French force was 
considerably stronger than the English, and were the 
latter divided into two portions, entirely cut off from each 
other, the central point between them being occupied by 
the French, the latter would have an opportunity of 
throwing his whole force upon one after the other. This 
danger would have been so great that, had the French 
been commanded by an able and active officer, the 
attempt would never have been made. Law, however, 
had shown amply that he had neither energy nor intel- 
ligence, and Major Lawrence therefore accepted Clive’s 
proposal. 

But to be successful it was necessary that both por- 
tions of the English force should be well commanded. 
Major Lawrence felt confident in his own capacity to 
withstand Law upon the southern bank, and in case of 
necessity he could fall back under the guns of Trichi- 
nopoli. He felt sure that he could, with equal certainty, 
confide the command of the other party to Captain Clive. 
There was, however, the difficulty that he was the junior 
captain present, and that already great jealousy had been 
excited among his seniors by the rank which he occupied 
in the councils of Lawrence. Fortunately the difficulty 
was settled by the native allies. Major Lawrence laid 
his plans before Muhammud Ali and his allies, whose 
co-operation and assistance were absolutely necessary. 
These, after hearing the proposal, agreed to give their 
assistance, but only upon the condition that Clive should 
be placed in command of the expeditionary party. They 
had already seen the paralyzing effects of the incapacity 
of some English officers. Clive’s defense of Arcot and 
the victories of Arni and Kavaripak had excited their 
intense admiration, and caused them to place unbounded 
confidence in him. Therefore they said, “ If Captain 


THE FALL OF SERINGAM. 


Clive commands we will go. Unless he commands we 
do not.” Major Lawrence was glad that the pressure 
thus placed upon him enabled him, without incurring a 
charge of favoritism, to place the command in the hands 
of the officer upon whom he most relied. 

On the night of the 6th of April Clive set out with a 
force composed of 400 English, 700 Sepoys, 3000 Maratta 
cavalry, 1000 Tanjore cavalry, six light guns and two 
heavy ones. Descending the river he crossed the island 
at a point three miles to the east of Law’s camping 
ground, and marched to Samieaveram, a town nine miles 
north of the island, and commanding the roads from the 
north and east. The movement was just made in time. 
Dupleix, utterly disgusted with Law, had resolved to 
displace him. D’Auteuil, the only officer he had of suffi- 
cient high rank to take his place, had not when pre- 
viously employed betrayed any great energy or capacity. 
It appeared, nevertheless, that he was at any rate superior 
to Law. On the 10th of April, therefore, he dispatched 
D’Auteuil with 120 French, and 500 Sepoys, with four 
guns and a large convoy to Seringam, where he was to 
take the command. When he arrived within fifteen miles 
of Samieaveram, he learned that Clive had possession of 
that village, and he determined upon a circuitous route 
by which he might avoid him. He therefore sent a mes- 
senger to Law to acquaint him with his plans in order 
that he might aid him by making a diversion. 

Clive in the mean time had been at work. On the 
day after his arrival at Samieaveram, he attacked and 
captured the temple of Mansurpet, halfway between the 
village and the island. The temple was lofty and stood 
on rising ground, and commanded a range of the country 
for many miles round. On its top Clive established a 
signal station. Upon the following day he carried the 
mud fort of Lalgudi, which was situated on the north 
bank of the river two miles to the east of Paichandah, 
which now remained Law’s only place of exit from the 
island. 

D’Auteuil, after sending word to Law of his intentions, 


104 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


marched from Utatua, where he was lying, by a road to 
the west which would enable him to move round Samiea- 
veram to Paichandah. Clive captured one of the mes- 
sengers and set off with his force to intercept him. 
D’Auteuil, however, received information by his spies of 
Clive’s movement, and not wishing to fight a battle in the 
open with a superior force, fell back to Utatua, while 
Clive returned to Samieaveram. Law, too, had received 
news of Clive’s movements. Here was a chance of re- 
trieving the misfortunes of the campaign. Paichandah 
being still in his hands, he could sally out with his whole 
force and that of Chunda Sahib, seize Samieaveram in 
Clive’s absence, and extend his hand to D’Auteuil, or fall 
upon Clive’s rear. Instead of this he repeated the mis- 
take he had made before Trichinopoli; and instead of 
marching out with his whole force, he sent only 80 Euro- 
peans, of whom 40 were deserters from the English army, 
and 700 Sepoys. 

The English returned from their march against 
D’Auteuil. The greater portion of the troops were 
housed in two temples, a quarter of a mile apart, known 
as the Large and Small Pagoda. Clive with several of 
his officers was in a caravansary close to the Small 
Pagoda. Charlie’s company were on guard, and after 
paying a visit to the sentries and seeing that all were on 
the alert, he returned to the caravansary. The day had 
been a long one, and the march under the heat of the sun 
very fatiguing. There was therefore but little conversa- 
tion, and Charlie, finding on his return from visiting the 
sentries that his leader and the other officers had already 
wrapped themselves in their cloaks and lain down to rest, 
imitated their example. Half an hour later the French 
column arrived at Samieaveram. The officer in com- 
mand was a daring and determined man. Before reach- 
ing the place he had heard that the English had returned, 
and finding that he had been forestalled, he might well 
have returned to Law. He determined, however, to 
attempt to surprise the camp. He placed his deserters 
in front, and when the column, arriving near the Sepoy 


THE FALL OF SERINGAM. 


J °5 

sentinel, was challenged, the officer in command of the 
deserters, an Irishman, stepped forward, and said that he 
had been sent by Major Lawrence to the support of Cap- 
tain Clive. As the other English-speaking soldiers now 
came up the sentry and native officer with him were com- 
pletely deceived, and the latter sent a soldier to guide the 
column to the English quarter of the camp. Without 
interruption the column marched on through lines of 
sleeping Sepoys and Marattas until they reached the 
heart of the village. Here they were again challenged. 
They replied with a volley of musketry into the caravan- 
sary and another into the pagoda. Then they rushed 
into the pagoda, bayoneting all they found there. 

Charlie, who had just dropped off to sleep, sprang to 
his feet, as did the other officers. While, confused by 
the noise and suddenness of the attack, others scarcely 
understood what was happening, Clive’s clear head and 
ready judgment grasped the situation at once. “ Gentle- 
men,” he said calmly, “ there is no firing going on in the 
direction of the Great Pagoda. Follow me there at once.” 

Snatching up their arms the officers followed him at a 
run. The whole village was a scene of wild confusion. 
The firing round the pagoda and caravansary were con- 
tinuous. The Maratta horsemen were climbing into 
their saddles and riding away out into the plain, the 
Sepoys were running hither and thither. At the pagoda 
he found the soldiers turning out under arms, and Clive, 
ordering his officers to do their best to rally the native 
troops in good order against the enemy, at once moved 
forward toward the caravansary with 200 English troops. 
On arriving there he found a large body of Sepoys firing 
away at random. Believing them to be his own men, for 
the French and English Sepoys were alike dressed in 
white, he halted the English a few yards from them, and 
rushed among them, upbraiding them for their panic, 
striking them, and ordering them instantly to cease firing 
and to form in order. One of the Sepoy officers recog- 
nizing Clive to be an Englishman, struck at him and 
wounded him with his sword. 


io6 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


Clive, still believing him to be one of his own men, was 
furious at what he considered an act of insolent insubor- 
dination, and seizing him dragged him across to the 
Small Pagoda to hand him over, as he supposed, to the 
guard there. To his astonishment he found six French- 
men at the gate, and these at once summoned him to sur- 
render. Great as was his surprise, he did not for a 
moment lose coolness, and at once told them that he had 
come to beg them to lay down their arms, that they were 
surrounded by his whole army, and that unless they sur- 
rendered his troops would give no quarter. So impressed 
were the Frenchmen with the firmness of the speaker 
that three of them at once surrendered, while the other 
three ran into the temple to inform their commander. 

Clive took the three men who had surrendered, and 
returned to the English troops he had left near the cara- 
vansary. The French Sepoys had discovered that the 
English were enemies, and had moved quietly off. Con- 
fusion still reigned. Clive did not imagine for a moment 
that so daring an assault could have been made on his 
camp by a small body of enemies, and expected every 
moment an attack by Law’s whole force. The com- 
mander of the French in the pagoda was disturbed by the 
news brought in by the three men from the gate, and dis- 
patched eight of his most intelligent men to ascertain 
exactly what was going on. These, however, fell into 
the hands of the English, and the officer of the party, 
not knowing that the Small Pagoda was in the hands of 
the French, handed them over to a sergeant, and told 
him to take a party and escort his eight prisoners and 
the three Captain Clive had captured to that pagoda for 
confinement there. Upon arrival at the gate the French- 
men at once joined their comrades, and these latter were 
also so bewildered at the affair that they allowed the 
English sergeant and his guard to march off again un- 
molested. 

By this time, owing to the absence of all resistance 
elsewhere, Clive had learned that the whole of the party 
who had entered the camp were in the Lesser Pagoda, 


THE FALL OF SERINGAM. 


107 


and, as he was still expecting momentarily to be attacked 
by Law’s main army, he determined to rid himself of this 
enemy in his midst. The pagoda was very strong and 
only two men could enter abreast. Clive led his men to 
the attack, but so well did the French defend themselves 
that, after losing an officer and fifteen men, Clive deter- 
mined to wait till morning. 

The French officer, knowing that he was surrounded 
and beyond the reach of all assistance, resolved upon 
cutting a way through, and at daylight his men sallied 
out from the temple. So fierce, however, was the fire 
with which the English received him that twelve of his 
men were instantly killed, and the rest ran back into the 
temple. 

Clive, hoping that their commander would now sur- 
render without further effusion of blood, advanced to the 
gateway and entered the porch to offer terms. He was 
himself so faint from the loss of blood from his wounds 
that he could not stand alone, but leaned against a wall, 
supported by two sergeants. The officer commanding 
the deserters came out to parley, but, after heaping abuse 
upon Clive, leveled his musket and discharged it at him. 

He missed Clive, but killed the two sergeants who 
were supporting him. 

The French officer in command, indignant at this con- 
duct, rushed forward at once to disavow it, and stated that 
he had determined to defend the post to the last, solely 
for the sake of the deserters, but that the conduct of their 
officer had released him from that obligation, and he now 
therefore surrendered at once. The instant day broke 
and Clive saw that Law was not, as he expected, at hand, 
he dispatched the Maratta horse in pursuit of the French 
Sepoys. These were overtaken and cut to pieces, and 
not one man of the force which Law had dispatched 
against Clive returned to the island. The English loss 
was heavy. The greater portion of the occupants of the 
Small Pagoda were bayoneted by the French when they 
entered, and as fifteen others were killed in the attack, 
it is probable that at least one-fourth of the English force 


Io8 WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 

under Clive were killed. Clive’s own escapes were ex- 
traordinary. In addition to those of being killed by the 
French Sepoys, among whom he ran by mistake, and of 
death at the hands of the treacherous deserter, he had one 
almost as close when the French fired their volley into 
the caravansary. A box at his feet was shattered, and a 
servant who slept close to him was killed. 

Some days passed after this attack without any fresh 
movement on either side. Major Lawrence then deter- 
mined to drive back D’Auteuil. He did not dispatch 
Clive against him, as this would involve the risk that Law 
might again march out to surprise Samieaveram. He 
therefore directed Clive to remain at that place and watch 
the island while he sent a force of 150 English, 400 
Sepoys, 500 Marattas, with four guns to attack D’Auteuil 
from his own force, under Captain Dalton. This officer 
in the advance marched his troops near Samieaveram, 
and, making as much show with them as he could, im- 
pressed D’Auteuil with the idea that the force was that 
of Clive. Accordingly he broke up his camp at Utatua 
in the night, abandoned his stores, and retreated hastily 
upon Valconda. Dalton then marched to Samieaveram, 
and placed his force at Clive’s disposal, and, to prevent 
any disputes arising as to precedence and rank, offered 
himself to serve under him as a volunteer. 

Not only D’Auteuil but Law was deceived by Dalton’s 
march. From the lofty towers of Seringam he saw the 
force marching toward Utatua, believed that Clive with 
his whole force had left Samieaveram, and did now what 
he should have before done, crossed the river with all his 
troops. Clive’s lookout on the temple of Mansurpet per- 
ceived what was going on and signaled the news to Clive, 
who at once set out with his whole force, and, before 
Law was prepared to issue out from Paichandah, Clive 
was within a mile of that place. Law might still have 
fought with a fair chance of success, as he was far 
stronger than his enemy, but he was again the victim of 
indecision and want of energy, and, covered by Paichan- 
dah, he fell back across the river again. 


THE FALL OF SERINGAM. 


IO9 

On the 15th of May Clive captured Paichandah, and 
then determined to give a final blow to D’Auteuil’s force, 
which had, he learned, again set out to endeavor to re- 
lieve Law. He marched to Utatua to intercept him. 
D’Auteuil, hearing of his coming, instantly fell back 
again to Valconda. The native chief of this town, how- 
ever, seeing that the affairs of the French were desperate, 
and willing, like all his countrymen, to make his peace 
with the strongest, had already accepted bribes from the 
English, and upon D’Auteuil’s return closed the gates 
and refused to admit him. Clive soon arrived and 
D’Auteuil, caught between two fires, surrendered with 
his whole force. 

Had Law been a man of energy he had yet a chance 
of escape. He had still 700 or 800 French troops with 
him, 2000 Sepoys, and 4000 of Chunda Sahib’s troops. 
He might then have easily crossed the Kavari at night 
and fallen upon Lawrence, whose force_ there now was 
greatly inferior to his own. Chunda Sahib in vain 
begged him to do so. His hesitation continued until, 
three days after the surrender of D’Auteuil, a battering 
train reached Lawrence, whereupon Law at once sur- 
rendered, his chief stipulation being that the life of 
Chunda Sahib should be spared. This promise was not 
kept. The unfortunate prince had preferred to surrender 
to the Rajah of Tanjore, who had several times intrigued 
secretly with him, rather than to Muhammud Ali or the 
English, whom he regarded as his implacable enemies. 
Had he placed himself in our hands his life would have 
been safe. He was murdered by the treacherous rajah 
within twenty-four hours of his surrender. 

With the fall of Seringam terminated the contest for 
the supremacy of the Carnatic between the English and 
French, fighting respectively on behalf of their puppets, 
Muhammud Ali and Chunda Sahib. This stage of the 
struggle was not a final one, but both by its circum- 
stances and by the prestige which we acquired in the eyes 
of the natives it gave us a moral ascendency which even 
when our fortunes were afterward at their worst was 


I IO 


with Clive in india. 


never lost again. Muhammud Ali had himself gained but 
little in the struggle. He was indeed nominally ruler of 
the Carnatic, but he had to rely for his position solely 
on the support of the English bayonets. Indeed the 
promises of which he had been obliged to be lavish to 
his native allies to keep them faithful to his cause when 
that cause seemed all but lost, now came upon him to 
trouble him, and so precarious was his position that he 
was obliged to ask the English to leave 200 English 
troops and 1500 of their Sepoys to protect the place 
against Murari Reo and the Rajahs of Mysore and 
Tan j ore. 

The fatigues of the expedition had been great, and 
when the force reached the seacoast Major Lawrence 
was forced to retire to Fort St. David to recover his 
health, while Clive, whose health had now greatly broken 
down, betook himself to Madras, which had, when the 
danger of invasion by the French was at an end, become 
the headquarters of the government of the presidency. 
There were, however, two French strongholds danger- 
ously near to Madras, Covelong and Chengalpatt. Two 
hundred recruits had just arrived from England, and 500 
natives had been enlisted as Sepoys. Mr. Saunders 
begged Clive to take the command of these and reduce 
the two fortresses. He took with him two twenty-four 
pounders, and four officers, of whom two were Charlie 
Marryat and Peters, to both of whom Clive was much 
attached, owing to their courage, readiness, and 
good humor. Covelong was first attacked. It mounted 
thirty guns and was garrisoned by 50 French and 300 
Sepoys. 

“ I don’t like the look o’ things, Mr. Charles,” Tim t 
Kelly said; “there’s nothing but boys altogether, white 
and black. Does it stand to reason that a lot of gos- 
soons who haven’t learnt the goose step, and haven’t as 
much as a shred of faith ayther in themselves or their 
officers, are fit to fight the French? ” 

“ Oh, I don’t know, Tim,” Charlie said. “ Boys are 
just as plucky as men in their way, and are ready to do 


THE FALL OF SERINGAM. 


Ill 


all sorts of foolhardy things which men would hesitate 
to . tempt.” 

“ And that is so, Mr. Charles, when they’ve only other 
boys to dale with; but as they’re growing up they take 
some time before they’re quite sure they’re a match for 
men. That’s what it is, yer honor, I tell ye, and you will 
see it soon.” 

Tim’s predictions were speedily verified. The very 
morning after they arrived before the fort the garrison 
made a sally, fell upon the troops, and killed one of their 
officers. The whole of the new levies took to their heels 
and fled away from the fight. Clive with his three 
officers threw himself among them, and for some time 
in vain attempted to turn the tide. It was not, indeed, 
until several had been cut down that the rout was 
arrested, and they were brought back to their duty. A 
day or two later a shot striking a rock killed or wounded 
fourteen men, and excited such a panic that it was some 
time before the rest would venture near the front. 

The enemy with a considerable force marched from 
Chengalpatt to relieve the place. Clive left half his force 
to continue the siege, and with the rest marched out and 
offered battle to the relieving force. Daring and con- 
fidence as usual prevailed. Had the enemy attacked 
there is little doubt they would have put Clive’s raw 
levies to flight. They were, however, cowed by his atti- 
tude of defiance, and retreated hastily. The governor of 
Covelong at once lost heart and surrendered the place, 
which he might have maintained for months against the 
force before it, and on the fourth day of the siege capitu- 
lated. A few hours afterward the enemy from Chengal- 
patt, ignorant of the fall of the fort, again advanced, and 
Clive met them with his whole force. Taken by sur- 
prise they suffered heavily. Clive pursued them to the 
gates of their fort, to which he at once laid siege. For- 
tunately for the English, the commander of this place, 
like him of Covelong, was cowardly and incapable. Had 
it not been so, the fort, which was very strong, well pro- 
visioned, and well garrisoned, might have held out for 


112 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


an indefinite time. As it was it surrendered on the fourth 
day, and Clive took possession on the 31st of August. 
He returned to Madras, and there, a short time after- 
ward, married Miss Maskelyne. Finding his health, 
however, continuing to deteriorate, he sailed for Europe 
in February, 1753. It was but five years since he had 
first taken up arms to defend Fort St. David, an unknown 
clerk without prospects and without fortune, utterly dis- 
contented and disheartened. Madras was in the hands 
of the French. Everywhere their policy was triumphant, 
and the soil surrounded by the walls of St. David’s alone 
remained to the English in Southern India. In the five 
years which had elapsed all had changed. The English 
were masters of the Carnatic. The French were broken 
and discredited. The English were regarded by the 
natives throughout the country as the coming power, 
and of this great change no slight portion was due to 
the energy and genius of Clive himself. 


CHAPTER XI. 

AN IMPORTANT MISSION. 

A few days after the return of the expedition against 
Covelong and Chengalpatt, Charlie received a note from 
Governor Saunders requesting him to call upon him at 
eleven o’clock. Charlie, of course, attended at Govern- 
ment House at the time named, and found Captain Clive 
with Mr. Saunders. 

“ I have sent for you, Mr. Marryat, to ask you if you 
are ready to undertake a delicate and somewhat dan- 
gerous mission. Captain Clive tells me that he is con- 
vinced that you will be able to discharge the duties 
satisfactorily. He has been giving me the highest report 
of your conduct and courage, and he tells me that you 
speak the language with some facility.” 

“ I have been working hard, sir,” Charlie said, “ and 
have had a moonshee for the last year; and as, except 


AN IMPORTANT MISSION. 


H3 

when on duty, I have spoken nothing but the native 
language with him, I can now speak it almost as fluently 
as I can English.” 

“ So Captain Clive has been telling me,” Mr. Saunders 
said ; “ and it is indeed on that ground that I select you 
for the service. Your friend, Mr. Peters, has equally 
distinguished himself in the field, Captain Clive tells me, 
but he is greatly your inferior in his knowledge of the 
vernacular.” 

This was indeed the case. Peters had but little natural 
aptitude for foreign languages, and after working hard 
for a time with the moonshee he found that he was 
making so little progress in comparison with Charlie that 
he lost heart; and although he had continued his lessons 
with the moonshee he had done so only to the extent of 
an hour or so a day, whereas Charlie had devoted his 
whole leisure time to the work. 

“ The facts of the case are these, Mr. Marryat. Owing 
to the failure of Muhammud Ali to fulfill the ridiculously 
onerous terms extorted from him by some of his native 
allies during the siege of Trichinopoli, several of them 
are in a state of discontent, which is likely soon to break 
out into open hostilities. The Rajahs of Mysore and 
Tanjore are, I have learned, already in communication 
with Pondicherry, and will, I believe, shortly acknowl- 
edge the son of Chunda Sahib, whom Dupleix has de- 
clared ruler of the Carnatic. Murari Reo has already 
openly joined the French. Their influence in the Deccan 
is now so great that Bussy may be said to rule there. 
Now, there is a chief named Boorhau Reo, whose terri- 
tory lies among the hills, and extends from the plain 
nearly up to the plateau land of the Deccan. His posi- 
tion/ like that of many of the other small rajahs, is 
precarious. In days like the present, when might makes 
right, and every petty state tries to make profit out of the 
constant wars at the expense of its neighbor, the position 
of a chief surrounded by half a dozen others more power- 
ful than himself is by no means pleasant. Boorhau Reo 
feels that he is in danger of being swallowed by the nizam 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


114 

or by the Marattas, and he earnestly desires to ally him- 
self with us, believing, as he says, that we are destined 
to be masters here. I have assured him that although 
gratified at his expressions of friendship, we can enter 
into no alliance with him. The position of his territory 
would enable him to be of great assistance to us in any 
war in which the whole force of the Deccan, controlled as 
it is at present by Bussy, might be utilized against us in 
the Carnatic. He would be able to harass convoys, cut 
communications, and otherwise trouble the enemy’s 
movements. But although we see that his aid would be 
very useful to us in case of such a war, we do not see how 
on our part we could give him any protection. We have 
now, with the greatest difficulty, brought affairs to a suc- 
cessful conclusion in the Carnatic, but Dupleix is active 
and energetic and well supported at home. Many of 
the chiefs lately our allies, have, as I have just said, 
declared against us or are about to do so, and it is out 
of the question for us to think of supporting a chief so 
far removed from us as Boorhau. I have, therefore, 
told him that we greatly desire his friendship, but are at 
present powerless to protect him should he be attacked 
by his northern neighbors. He is particularly anxious 
to train his men after the European fashion, as he sees 
that our Sepoys are a match for five times their number 
of the untrained troops of the Indian princes. 

“ This brings me to the subject before us. I have 
written to him to say that I will send to him an English 
officer capable of training and leading his troops, and 
whose advice may be useful to him upon all occasions; 
but that, as were it known that he had received a British 
officer and was employing him to train his troops, it 
would excite the instant animosity of Bussy and of the 
Peishwar, I should send one familiar with the language 
and who may pass as a native. Captain Clive has 
strongly recommended you for this difficult mission.” 

“ I fear, sir, that I could hardly pass as a native. The 
moonshee is constantly correcting mistakes which I make 
in speaking.” 


AN IMPORTANT MISSION. 


“5 


“ That may be so,” Mr. Saunders said; “ but there are 
a score of dialects in Southern India, and you could be 
passed upon nineteen of the twenty peoples who speak 
them as belonging to one of the other.” 

“If you think, sir, that I shall do,” Charlie said, “I 
shall be glad to undertake the mission.” 

“Very well, Mr. Marryat, that is understood then. 
You will receive full instructions in writing, and will 
understand that your duty is not only to drill the troops 
of this chief, but to give him such advice as may suit his 
and our interests, to strengthen his good feeling toward 
us, and to form as far as possible a compact little force 
which might at a critical moment be of immense utility. 
You will, of course, master the geography of the country, 
of which we are all but absolutely ignorant, find out 
about the passes, the mountain paths, the defensible posi- 
tions. All these things may some day be of the highest 
importance. You will have a few days to make your 
arrangements and settle as to the character you will 
adopt. This you had better do in consultation with 
someone who thoroughly understands the country. It 
is intended that you shall go down to Trichinopoli with 
the next convoy, and from there make your way to the 
stronghold of Boorhau.” 

“ Shall I take any followers with me? ” 

“ Yes,” Mr. Saunders said. “ As you will go in the 
character of a military adventurer who has served among 
our Sepoys long enough to learn European drill, you had 
better take two, three, or four men, as you like, with you 
as retainers. You might pick out two or three trusty 
men from the Sepoys you command.” 

Charlie left Government House in high spirits. It was 
certainly an honor to have been selected for such a post. 
It was quite possible that it would be a dangerous one. 
It was sure to be altogether different from the ordinary 
life of a subaltern in the company’s army. Peters was 
very sorry when he heard from Charlie that they were 
at last to be separated. It was now nearly two years 
since they had first met on board the Lizzie Anderson , 


Il6 WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 

and since that time they had been constantly together, 
and were greatly attached to each other. Charlie, per- 
haps, had taken the lead. The fact of his having a stock 
of firearms, and being able to lend them to Peters, had 
given him perhaps the first slight and almost impercepti- 
ble advantage. His feat of jumping overboard to rescue 
Tim Kelly had been another step in advance, and 
although Charlie would have denied it himself there was 
no doubt that he generally took the lead, and that his 
friend was accustomed to lean upon him and to look to 
him always for the initiative. It was therefore a severe 
blow to Peters to find that Charlie was about to be sent 
on detached service. As for Tim Kelly, he was uproari- 
ous in his grief when he heard that he was to be separated 
from his master. 

“ Shure, Mr. Charlie, ye’ll never have the heart to lave 
a poor boy that sarved ye be night and day for eighteen 
months. Tim Kelly would gladly give his life for ye, 
and ye wouldn’t go and lave him behind ye and go all 
alone among these black thaves of the world.” 

“ But it is impossible that I can take you, Tim,” Charlie 
said. “ You know yourself that you cannot speak ten 
words of the language. How then could you possibly 
pass undetected, whatever disguise you put on? ” 

“ But I’d never open my mouth at all at all, yer honor, 
barring for mate arid drink.” 

“ It’s all very well for you to say so, Tim,” Charlie 
answered; “but I do not think that anything short of 
a miracle would silence your tongue. But leave us now, 
Tim, and I will talk the matter over with Mr. Peters. 
I should be glad enough to have you with me if we could 
arrange it.” 

The moonshee was taken into their counsels, and was 
asked his opinion as to the disguise which Charlie could 
adopt with least risk of detection. The moonshee replied 
that he might pass as a Bheel. These hill tribes speak 
a dialect quite distinct from that of the people around 
them, and the moonshee said that if properly attired 
Charlie would be able to pass anywhere for one of these 


AN IMPORTANT MISSION. 1 1 7 

people, provided always that he did not meet with another 
of the same race. “ You might assert/’ he said, “ that 
your father had taken service with some rajah on the 
plain, and that you had there learned to speak the lan- 
guage. In this way you would avoid having to answer 
any difficult questions regarding your native place; but 
as to that, you can get up something of the geography 
before you leave.” 

“ There are several Bheels among our Sepoys,” Charlie 
said. “ I can pick out three or four of them who would 
be just the men for me to take. I believe they are 
generally very faithful and attached to their officers.” 

When Tim again entered the room he inquired anx- 
iously if his master had hit upon any disguise which 
would suit him. “ What do you say, Mr. Moonshine? ” 
Tim said. 

The moonshee shook his head. Between these two 
a perpetual feud had existed ever since the native had 
arrived at Arcot to take his place as a member of Char- 
lie’s establishment. In obedience to Charlie’s stringent 
orders Tim never was openly rude to him; but he never 
lost an opportunity of making remarks of a disparaging 
nature as to the value of Charlie’s studies. The moon- 
shee, on his part, generally ignored Tim’s existence alto- 
gether, addressing him, when obliged to do so, with a 
ceremonious civility which annoyed Tim more than open 
abuse would have done. “ I think,” he said gravely, in 
reply to Tim’s demand, “ that the very worshipful one 
would have most chance of escaping detection if he went 
in rags, throwing dust on his hair and passing for one 
afflicted.” 

“ And what does he mean by afflicted, Mr. Charles?” 
the Irishman said wrathfully, as the two young officers 
laughed. 

“ He means one who is a born fool, Tim.” 

Tim looked furiously at the moonshee. 

“ It would,” the latter said sententiously, “ be the char- 
acter which the worshipful one would support with the 
greatest ease.” 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


iiS 

“ The black thief is making fun of me,” Tim muttered; 
“ but Til be aven with him one of these days or my name 
isn’t Tim Kelly. I was thinking, yer honor, that I might 
represent one deaf and dumb.” 

“ But you’re always talking, Tim, and when you’re 
not talking to others you talk to yourself. It’s quite 
impossible you could go as a dumb man; but you might 
go, as the moonshee suggests, as a half-witted sort of 
chap with just sense enough to groom a horse and look 
after him, but with not enough to understand what’s said 
to you or to answer any questions.” 

“ I could do that asy enough, Mr. Charles.” 

“ And you have to keep from quarreling, Tim. I hear 
you quarreling on an average ten times a day; and as in 
such a character as we’re talking about you would, of 
course, be exposed to all sorts of slights and unpleasant- 
nesses, you would be in continual hot water.” 

“ Now, yer honor,” Tim said reproachfully, “ you’re 
too hard on one entirely. I like a bit of a row as well 
as any man, but it’s all for divarsion; and I could go 
on for a year without quarreling with a soul. Just try 
me, Mr. Charles, just try me for a month, and if at the 
end of that time you find me in your way, or that I 
don’t keep my character, then send me back agin to the 
regiment.” 

It was arranged that the moonshee should remain with 
Peters, who, seeing that Charlie owed his appointment 
to a post which promised excitement and adventure to 
his skill in the native languages, was determined that he 
would again set to in earnest and try and master its 
intricacies. The moonshee went down to the bazaar and 
purchased the clothes which would be necessary for the 
disguises, and Charlie found in his company four Sepoys 
who willingly agreed to accompany him in the character 
of his retainers upon his expedition. As to their costume 
there was no difficulty. When off duty the Sepoys in 
the company’s service were accustomed to dress in their 
native attire. Consequently it needed only the addition 
of a tulwar or short curved sword, a shield thrown over 


AN IMPORTANT MISSION. II9 

one shoulder, a long matchlock, and two or three pistols 
and daggers stuck into a girdle to complete their equip- 
ment. Charlie himself was dressed gayly in the garb of 
a military officer in the service of an Indian rajah. He 
was to ride, and a horse, saddle, and gay housings were 
procured. He had at last given in to Tim’s entreaties, 
and that worthy was dressed as a syce or horse-keeper. 

Both Charlie and Tim had had those portions of their 
skin exposed to the air darkened, and both would pass 
muster at a casual inspection. Charlie in thus conceal- 
ing his nationality desired only to hide the fact that he 
was an officer in the company’s service. He believed 
that it would be impossible for him to continue to pass 
as a Bheel. This, however, would be of no consequence 
after a time. Many of the native princes had Europeans 
in their service. Runaway sailors, deserters from Eng- 
lish, French, and Dutch armed forces in their possessions 
on the sea-coast, adventurers influenced either by a love 
of a life of excitement, or whom a desire to escape the 
consequences of folly or crime committed at home had 
driven to a roving life — such men might be found in 
many of the native courts. Once settled, then, in the 
sei*vice of the rajah, Charlie intended to make but little 
farther pretense or secrecy as to his nationality. Out- 
wardly he would still conform to the language and ap- 
pearance of the character he had chosen, but he would 
allow it to be supposed that he was an Englishman, a 
deserter from the company’s service, and that his com- 
rades were Sepoys in a similar position. His employ- 
ment, then, at the court of the rajah would have an effect 
the exact reverse of that which it would have done had 
he appeared in his proper character. Deserters were of 
all men the most opposed to their countrymen, to whom 
they had proved traitors. In battle they could be relied 
upon to fight desperately, for they fought with ropes 
around their necks. Therefore, while the appearance of 
an English officer as instructor of the forces of the rajah 
would have drawn upon himself the instant hostility of all 
opposed to the British, the circulation of a report that 


120 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


his troops were being disciplined by some English and 
native deserters from the company’s forces would excite 
no suspicion whatever. 

To avoid attracting attention Charlie Marryat and his 
party set out before daylight from Madras. Their ap- 
pearance, indeed, would have attracted no attention when 
they once had passed beyond the boundaries of the por- 
tion of the town occupied by the whites. In the native 
quarter the appearance of a small zemindar or landowner, 
attended by four or five armed followers on foot, was of 
such common occurrence as to attract no attention what- 
ever; and, indeed, numbers of these come in to take 
service in the Sepoy regiments, the profession of arms 
being always considered honorable in India. 

For a fortnight they traveled by easy stages without 
question or suspicion being excited that they were not 
what they seemed. They were now among the hills, and 
soon arrived at Ambur, the seat of the rajah. The town 
was a small one, and above it rose the fortress, which 
stood on a rock rising sheer from the bottom of the 
valley, and standing boldly out from the hillside. The 
communication was effected by a shoulder which, start- 
ing from' a point halfway up the rock, joined the hill 
behind it. Along this shoulder were walls and gateways. 
An enemy attacking these would be exposed to the fire 
from the summit of the rock. From the point where the 
shoulder joined the rock a zigzag road had been cut with 
enormous labor, in the face of the rock, to the summit. 

“ It is a strong place,” Charlie said to Tim Kelly, who 
was walking by his horse’s head, “ and should be able 
to hold out against anything but starvation, that is to say, 
if properly defended.” 

“ It’s a powerful place, surely,” Tim said; “ and would 
puzzle the ould boy himself to take. Even Captain Clive, 
who is afeared of nothing, would be bothered by it.” 

As they rode up the valley two horsemen were seen 
spurring toward them from the town. They drew rein 
before Charlie, and one bowing, said: 

“ My master, the rajah, sends his greetings to you, and 


AN IMPORTANT MISSION. 


I 2 1 


begs to know if you are the illustrious soldier, Nadir Ali, 
for whom his heart has been longing? ” 

“ Will you tell your lord that Nadir Ali is here,” 
Charlie said, “ and that he longs to see the face of the 
rajah.” 

One of the horsemen at once rode off, and the other 
took his place by the side of Charlie; and having intro- 
duced himself as captain of the rajah’s body-guard, rode 
with him through the town. Had Charlie appeared in 
his character as English officer the rajah and all his 
troops would have turned out to do honor to his arrival. 
As it was, a portion of the garrison only appeared at the 
gate and lined the walls. Through these the little party 
passed, and up the sharp zigzags, which were so sjeep 
that had it not been that his dignity prevented him from 
dismounting, Charlie would gladly have got off and pro- 
ceeded on foot; for it was as much as the animal could 
do to struggle up the steep incline. At each turn there 
was a gateway, with little flanking towers on which 
jingalls or small wall-pieces commanded the road. 

“ Faith, then, it’s no fool that built this place. I 
shouldn’t like to have to attack it wid all the soldiers of 
the king’s army, let alone those of the company.” 

“ It is tremendously strong, Tim; but it is astonishing 
what brave men can do.” 

In the after wars which England waged in India the 
truth of what Charlie said was over and over again 
proved. Numerous fortresses, supposed by the natives 
to be absolutely impregnable, and far exceeding in 
strength that just described, have been carried by assault 
by the dash and daring of English troops. 

They gained at last the top of the rock. It was uneven 
in surface, some portions being considerably more ele- 
vated than others. Roughly, its extent was about a hun- 
dred yards either way. The lower level was covered with 
buildings occupied by the garrison and storehouses. On 
the upper level, some forty feet higher, stood the palace 
of the rajah. It communicated with the courtyard below 
by a broad flight of steps. These led to an arched gate- 


122 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


way, with a wall and battlements, forming an interior 
line of defense should an assailant gain a footing in the 
lower portion of the stronghold. Alighting from his 
horse at the foot of the steps, Charlie, followed by his five 
retainers, mounted to the gateway. Here another guard 
of honor was drawn up. Passing through these they 
entered a shady courtyard, on one side of which was a 
stone pavilion. The flat ceiling was supported by 
massive columns closely covered with intricate sculpture. 
The roof was arabesqued with deeply cut patterns picked 
out in bright colors. A fountain played in the middle. 
On the farther side the floor, which was of marble, was 
raised, and two steps led to a wide recess, with windows 
of lattice stonework giving a view over the town and 
valley below. In this recess were piles of cushions and 
carpets, and here reclined the rajah, a spare and active- 
looking man of some forty years old. He rose as Charlie 
approached, the soldiers and Sepoys remaining beyond 
the limits of the pavilion. 

“Welcome, brave Nadir Ali,” he said courteously; 
“ my heart is glad, indeed, at the presence of one whose 
wisdom is said to be far beyond his years, and who has 
learned the arts of war of the infidels from beyond the 
seas.” Then inviting Charlie to take a seat on the divan 
with him, he questioned him as to his journey, and the 
events which were taking place in the plains, until the 
attendants, having handed around refreshments, retired 
at his signal. “ I am glad to see you, Sahib,” he said, 
when they were alone; “though, in truth, I looked for 
one older than yourself. The great English governor of 
Madras tells me, however, in a letter which I received 
four days since, that you are skilled in war, that you 
fought by the side of that great Captain Clive at Arcot, 
Arni, Kavaripak, and at Trichinopoli, and that the great 
warrior himself chose you to come to me. Therefore I 
doubt neither your valor nor your prudence, and put 
myself in your hands wholly. The governor has already 
told you, doubtless, of the position in which I am placed 
here.” 


AN IMPORTANT MISSION. 


I23 


“ Governor Saunders explained the whole position to 
me,” Charlie said. “ You are at present menaced on all 
sides by powerful neighbors. You believe that the for- 
tunes of the English are on the increase, and as you think 
the time may come ere long when they will turn the 
French out of the Deccan and become masters there, as 
they have already become masters in the Carnatic, you 
wish to fight by their side, and share their fortunes. In 
the meantime, you desire to be able to defend yourself 
against your neighbors, for at present the English are 
too far away to assist you. To enable you to do this 
I have been sent to drill and discipline your troops like 
our Sepoys, and to give you such advice as may be best 
for the general defense of your country. I have brought 
with me five soldiers, four Bheels, and one of my country- 
men. The latter will be of little use in drilling your 
troops, for he is ignorant of the language, and has come 
as my personal attendant. The other four will assist me 
in my work. Your followers here will, no doubt, dis- 
cover in a very short time that I am an Englishman. Let 
it be understood that I am a deserter, that I have been 
attracted to your court by the promise of high pay, and 
that I have assumed the character of a Bheel lest my 
being here might put you on bad terms with the Eng- 
lish.” Charlie then asked the rajah as to the strength of 
his military force. 

“ In times of peace,” the rajah said, “ I keep 300 men 
under arms ; in case of taking the field, 3000. To defend 
Ambur against an attack of an enemy I could muster 
10,000 men.” 

“ You could not call out 3000 men without attracting 
the attention of your neighbors? ” Charlie asked. 

“ No,” the rajah said; “ that would bring my neighbors 
upon me at once.” 

“ I suppose, however, you might assemble another 500 
men without attracting attention.” 

“ Oh, yes,” the rajah said; “ 800 men are not a force 
which could attract any great attention.” 

“ Then I should propose that we begin with 800,” 


124 WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 

Charlie said. “ For a month, however, I will confine 
myself to the troops you at present have. We must 
in the first place train some officers. If you will pick 
out those to whom you intend to give commands and 
sub-commands I will choose from the men, after drilling 
them for a few days, 40 of the most intelligent as what 
we call non-commissioned officers. For the first month 
we will work hard in teaching these officers and sub- 
officers their duties. Then, when the whole 800 assem- 
ble, we can divide them into four parties. There will 
be one of my drill-instructors to each party, 10 under 
officers, and 4 or 5 of the officers whom you appoint. 
Six weeks’ hard work should make these 800 men fairly 
acquainted with drill. The English Sepoys have often 
gone out to fight with less. At the end of the six weeks 
let the 500 men you have called out, in addition to your 
body-guard of 300, return to their homes, and replace 
them by an equal number of fresh levies, and so proceed 
until you have your 3000 fighting men thoroughly 
trained. In nine months all will have had their six 
weeks of exercise, and could take their places in the ranks 
again at a day’s notice. Two hundred of your men I 
will train in artillery; although I do not belong to that 
branch of the service, I learned the duties at Arcot.” 

The rajah agreed heartily to Charlie’s proposals, well 
pleased at the thought that he should, before the end of 
a year, be possessed of a trained force which would 
enable him to hold his own against his powerful neigh- 
bors until an opportunity might occur when, in alliance 
with the English, he should be able to turn the tables 
upon them, and to aggrandize himself at their expense. 


A MURDEROUS ATTEMPT. 


I2 5 


CHAPTER XII. 

A MURDEROUS ATTEMPT. 

Handsome rooms with a suite of attendants were 
assigned to Charlie in the rajah’s palace, and he was for- 
mally appointed commander of his forces. The four 
Sepoys were appointed to junior ranks, as was also Tim 
Kelly, who, however, insisted on remaining in the posi- 
tion of chief attendant upon his master, being, in fact, 
a sort of major-domo and valet in one, looking after his 
comforts when in the palace, and accompanying him as 
personal guard whenever he rode out. 

“ You niver know, yer honor, what these natives may 
be up to. They’ll smile with you one day and stab ye 
the next. They’re treacherous varmint, yer honor, if 
you do but give ’em the chance.” 

At first Charlie perceived that his position excited 
some jealousy in the minds of those surrounding the 
rajah. He therefore did all in his power to show to them 
that he in no way aspired to interfere in the internal 
politics or affairs of the little state — that he was a soldier 
and nothing more. He urged upon the rajah, who 
wished to have him always by him, that it was far better 
that he should appear to hold aloof, and to avoid all 
appearance of favoritism, or of a desire to obtain domi- 
nance in the counsels of the rajah. He wished that the 
appointments to the posts of officers in the new force 
should be made by the rajah, who should lend an ear to 
the advice of his usual councilors; but that once ap- 
pointed they should be under his absolute command and 
control, and that he should have power to dismiss those 
who proved themselves indolent and incapable, to pro- 
mote active and energetic men, wholly regardless of 
influence or position. 

The next morning Charlie and his four assistants set 
to work to drill the 300 men of the garrison, taking them 


126 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


in parties of 20. They were thus able, in the course of 
a few days, to pick out the most active and intelligent 
for the sub-officers, and these, with the existing officers 
of the body and the new ones appointed by the rajah, 
were at once taken in hand to be taught their duty. 

For a month the work went on steadily and without 
interruption, and from morn till night the courtyard 
echoed with the words of command. At the end of that 
time the 20 officers and 40 sub-officers had fairly learned 
their duty. The natives of India are very quick in learn- 
ing drill, and a regiment of newly raised Sepoys will per- 
form maneuvers and answer to words of command in the 
course of a fortnight as promptly and regularly as would 
one of English recruits in three months. A good many 
changes had taken place during the month’s work. 
Many of the officers became disgusted with the hard and 
continuous work, to which they were unaccustomed, 
while some of the sub-officers showed a deficiency of the 
quickness and intelligence needed for the work. Their 
places, however, were easily filled, and as the days went 
on all took an increasing degree of interest, as they 
acquired facility of movement, and saw how quickly, 
according to the European methods, maneuvers were 
gone through. At the end of a month, then, the 60 
men were able in turn to instruct others, and a body of 
500 men being called out, the work of drilling on a large 
scale began. 

The drill-ground now was a level space in the valley 
below the town, and the whole population assembled 
day after day to look on with astonishment at the exer- 
cises. The four great companies, or battalions as Charlie 
called them, were kept entirely separate, each under the 
command of one of the Sepoys, under whom were a pro- 
portion of the officers and sub-officers. Every evening 
Charlie came down for an hour and put each body 
through its drill, distributing blame or praise as it was 
deserved, thus keeping up a spirit of emulation between 
the battalions. At the end of a fortnight, when the 
simpler maneuvers had been learned, Charlie, for two 


A MURDEROUS ATTEMPT. 


127 


hours each day, worked the whole together as one regi- 
ment, and was surprised himself to find how rapid was 
the progress which each day effected. The rajah him- 
self often came down to the drill-ground and took the 
highest interest in the work. He himself would fain 
have had regular uniforms, similar to those worn by the 
Sepoys in the service of the European powers, provided 
for the men; but Charlie strongly urged him not to do 
so. He admitted that the troops would look immensely 
better if clad in regular uniform than as a motley band, 
each dressed according to his own fancy. He pointed 
out, however, that while the news that the rajah was 
having some of his men drilled by European deserters 
would attract but little attention among his neighbors, 
the report that he was raising Sepoy battalions would 
certainly be received by them in a hostile spirit. 

“ By all means,” Charlie said, “ get the uniforms made 
for the whole force and keep them by you in store. They 
can be at once served out in case of war, and the sight 
of a number of Sepoy battalions where they expected 
only to meet an irregular force will have an immense 
effect upon any force opposed to you.” 

The rajah saw the force of this argument, and at once 
ordered five thousand suits of white uniforms, similar to 
those worn by the Sepoys in the English and French 
service, to be made and stored up in the magazines. 
While his lieutenants were drilling the main body Charlie 
himself took in hand a party of 40 picked men, and 
instructed them in the use of field-guns. The superiority 
of Europeans in artillery was one of the reasons which 
gave to them such easy victory in their early battles with 
the native forces in India. The latter possessed a very 
powerful artillery in point of numbers, but there was no 
regular drill nor manner of loading. They were in the 
habit, too, of allowing each gun to cool after it was fired 
before being loaded again. It was thought, therefore, 
good practice if a gun were discharged once in a quarter 
of an hour. They were then utterly astounded and dis- 
mayed at the effects of the European guns, each of 


128 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


which could be loaded and fired twice, or even three 
times, a minute. 

So month passed after month until Rajah Boorhau 
was in a position to put, if necessary, five battalions of 
Sepoys, each 700 strong, into the field, with thirty guns, 
served by trained artillerymen. So quietly had the work 
gone on that it attracted no attention among his neigh- 
bors. The mere rumor that the rajah had some Euro- 
pean deserters in his service, and that these were drilling 
400 or 500 men, was considered of so little moment that 
it passed altogether unheeded. 

The accounts of the state of affairs in the Carnatic 
which reached Charlie were not satisfactory. Dupleix, 
with his usual energy, was aiding the son of Chunda 
Sahib with men and money in his combat with the British 
protege, and most of the native allies of the latter had 
fallen away from him. Trichinopoli was again besieged, 
and the fortunes of England, lately so flourishing, were 
waning again. In the Deccan French influence was 
supreme. Bussy, with a strong and well-disciplined 
French force, maintained Salabut Jung, whom the 
French had placed on the throne, against all opponents. 
At one time it was the Peishwar, at another the Marattas, 
against whom Bussy turned his arms, and always with 
success, and the French acquired the four districts on 
the coast known as the Northern Sircas. It was in vain 
that Charlie endeavored to gain an accurate knowledge 
of the political position, so quickly and continually did 
this change. At one time the Peishwar and the Nizam, 
as the Subadar of the Deccan was now called, would be 
fighting in alliance against one or other of the Maratta 
chiefs. At another time they would be in conflict with 
each other, while the Rajah of Mysore, Murara Reo, and 
other chiefs were sometimes fighting on one side, some- 
times on another. 

Proud of his rapidly increasing force, Boorhau Reo 
would, more than once in the course of the year, have 
joined in the warfare going on around. Charlie, how- 
ever, succeeded in restraining him from doing so, point- 


A MURDEROUS ATTEMPT. 


129 


ing out that the victor of one day was the vanquished 
of the next, and that it was worse than useless to join 
in a struggle of which the conditions were so uncertain, 
and the changes of fortune so rapid, that none could 
count upon others for aid, however great the assistance 
they might have rehdered only a short time before. 

“ Were you to gain territory, rajah, which you might, 
perhaps, largely do, from the efficient aid which you 
might render to one party or the other, you would be 
the object of a hostile combination against which you 
could not hope to struggle.” 

The rajah yielded at once to Charlie’s arguments; but 
the influence of the latter added to the hostility which 
the favor shown him by the rajah had provoked among 
many of the leading men of the state. Where the sides 
were often so closely balanced as was the case in these 
intestine struggles, the aid of every rajah, however small 
his following, was sought by one or other of the com- 
batants, and the counselors of those able to place a 
respectable force in the field were heavily bribed by one 
side or the other. Those around Rajah Boorhau found 
their efforts completely baffled by the influence of the 
English commander of his forces, and a faction of 
increasing strength and power was formed to overthrow 
him. The rajah himself had kept his secret well, and 
one or two only of his advisers knew that the English- 
man was a trusted agent of the company. 

The soldiers were much attached to their English 
leader. They found him always just and firm. Com- 
plaints were always listened to, tyranny or ill-treatment 
by the officers suppressed and punished, merit rewarded. 
Among the officers the strictness of the discipline alien- 
ated many, who contrasted the easy life which they 
had led before the introduction of the European system 
with that which they now endured. So long as they 
were engaged in mastering the rudiments of drill they 
felt their disadvantage; but when this was acquired each 
thought himself capable of taking the place of the Eng- 
lish adventurer and of leading the troops he had organ- 


130 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


ized to victory. Already Charlie had received several 
anonymous warnings that danger threatened him. The 
rajah was, he knew, his warm friend, and he, in his 
delight at seeing the formidable force which had been 
formed from his irregular levies, had presented him, as 
a token of his gratitude, with large sums of money. 

In those days this was the method by which Indian 
princes rewarded European officers who rendered them 
service, and it was considered by no means derogatory 
to the latter to accept the money. This was, indeed, 
the universal custom, and Charlie, knowing that Captain 
Clive had received large presents of this kind, had no 
hesitation in following his example. The treasures stored 
up by many of these Indian princes were immense, and 
a lac of rupees, equivalent to ten thousand pounds, was 
considered by no means a large present. Charlie, fore- 
seeing that sooner or later the little state would become 
involved in hostilities, took the precaution of forwarding 
the money he had received down to Madras, sending it 
piecemeal, in charge of native merchants and traders. 
It was by these paid into the Madras treasury, where a 
large rate of interest for all moneys lent by its employees 
was given by the company. 

For those at home he felt no uneasiness. It was very 
seldom that their letters reached him ; but he learned that 
they were still in high favor with his uncle, that his 
mother continued installed as the head of his house, and 
that the girls were both at excellent schools. 

Charlie mentioned to the rajah the rumors which had 
reached him of a plot against him. The rajah assured 
him of his own support under all circumstances, and 
offered that a strong guard should be placed night and 
day over the apartments he occupied. 

This Charlie declined. “ A guard can always.be cor- 
rupted,” he said. “ My Irish servant sleeps in my ante- 
room, my four lieutenants are close at hand, and knowing 
that the soldiers are, for the most part, attached to me, 
I do not think that open force will be used. I will, how- 
ever, cause a large bell to be suspended above my quar- 


A MURDEROUS ATTEMPT. 


*3* 

ters; its ringing will be a signal that I am attacked, in 
which case I rely upon your highness putting yourself 
at the head of the guard and coming to my assistance.” 

Tim Kelly was at once furious and alarmed at the 
news that danger threatened his master, and took every 
precaution that he could imagine to insure his safety. 
He took to going down to the town himself to purchase 
provisions, and so far as possible prepared these himself. 
He procured two or three monkeys, animals which he 
held in horror, and offered them a portion of everything 
that came on the table, before he placed it before his 
master. Charlie at first protested against this, as his 
dinner became cold by waiting, but Tim had an oven 
prepared and ordered dinner half an hour before the 
time fixed by his master. Each dish as brought in was, 
after a portion had been given to a monkey, placed in the 
oven, and thus half an hour was given to allow the poison 
to work. This was done without Charlie’s knowledge, 
the oven being placed in the ante-room, and the dishes 
thence brought in in regular order by the body servant, 
whom even Tim allowed to be devoted to his master. 

One day Charlie was just sitting down to his soup 
when Tim ran in. 

“ For the love of Heaven, Mr. Charles, don’t put that 
stuff to your mouth! It’s pisoned, or at any rate, if it 
isn’t, one of the other dishes is.” 

“Poisoned, Tim! Nonsense, man; you are always 
thinking of poisonings and plots.” 

“ And it’s lucky for your honor that I am,” Tim said. 
“ Jist come into the next room and look at the 
monkeys.” 

Charlie went in. One of the little creatures was lying 
upon the ground evidently in a state of great agony. 
The other was sitting up rocking itself backward and for- 
ward like a human being in pain. 

“ They look bad, poor little beasts,” Charlie said; “ but 
what has that got to do with my soup? ” 

“ Shure, yer honor, isn’t that jist what I keep the 
cratures for, just to give them a taste of everything yer 


132 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


honor has, and I claps it into the oven there to kape it 
warm till I’ve had time to see by the monkeys whether 
it’s good.” 

“ It looks very serious,” Charlie said gravely. “ Do 
you go quietly out, Tim, call two men from the guard- 
house and seize the cook, and place one or two men as 
sentries over the other servants. I will go across to the 
rajah.” 

The latter, on hearing what had happened, ordered 
the cook to be brought before him, together with the 
various dishes prepared for the dinner. 

The man upon being interrogated vehemently denied 
all knowledge of the affair. 

“We shall see,” the rajah said. “ Eat up that plate 
of soup.” 

The man turned pale. 

“ Your highness will observe,” he stammered, “ that 
you have already told me that one of these dishes is 
poisoned. I cannot say which, and whichever I eat may 
be the fatal one.” 

The rajah made a signal to him to obey his orders, but 
Charlie interposed. 

“ There is something in what he says, your highness. 
Whether the man is innocent or guilty he would shrink 
equally from eating any of them. It is really possible 
that he may know nothing of it. The poison may have 
been introduced into the materials beforehand. If the 
man is taken to a dungeon, I think I could suggest a plan 
by which we could test him. I believe him to be guilty,” 
he said, when the prisoner had been removed. 

“ Then why not let him be beheaded at once? ” the 
rajah asked. 

“ I would rather let ten guilty men escape,” Charlie 
replied, “ than run the risk of putting one innocent one 
to death. I propose, sir, that you order the eight dishes 
of food, which have been prepared for my dinner, to be 
carefully weighed. Let these be all placed in the cell 
of the prisoner, and there let him be left. In the course 
of two or three days he will, if guilty, endeavor to assuage 


A MURDEROUS ATTEMPT. 


133 


his hunger by eating little bits of food from every dish 
except that which he knows to be poisoned, but will 
take such a small portion from each that he will think 
it will not be detected. If he is innocent, and is really 
ignorant which dish is poisoned, he will not touch any 
of them until driven to desperation by hunger. Then 
he will seize on one or more and devour them to the end, 
running the chance of death by poison rather than 
endure the pangs of hunger longer.” 

“ Your plan is a wise one,” the rajah said. “ It shall 
be tried. Let the dishes be taken to him every morning 
and removed every evening. Each evening they shall 
be weighed.” 

These orders were carried out, and on the following 
morning the dishes were placed in the cell of the prisoner. 
When removed at night they were found to be untouched. 
The next evening several of the dishes were found to 
have lost some ounces in weight. The third evening 
all but one had been tasted. 

“ Let the prisoner be brought in again,” the rajah 
ordered when informed of this. “ Dog,” he said, “ you 
have betrayed yourself. Had you been innocent you 
could not have known in which of the dishes the poison 
had been placed. You have eaten of all but one. If 
that one contains poison you are guilty.” 

Then turning to an attendant he ordered him to take 
a portion of the untouched food and to throw it to a dog. 
Pending the experiment the prisoner was removed. Half 
an hour later the attendant returned with the news that 
the dog was dead. 

“ The guilt of the man is confirmed,” the rajah said. 
“ Let him be executed.” 

“ Will you give him to me, your highness? ” Charlie 
asked. “ His death would not benefit me now, and to 
save his life he may tell me who is my enemy. It is of 
no use punishing the instrument and letting the instigator 
go free.” 

“ You are right,” the rajah agreed. “ If you can find 


*34 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


out who bribed him, justice shall be done though it were 
the highest in the state.” 

Charlie returned to his own quarters, assembled his 
lieutenants and several other of his officers, and had the 
man brought before him. 

“ Hossein,” he said, “ you have taken money to take 
my life. I looked upon you as my faithful servant. I 
had done you no wrong. It has been proved that you 
attempted to poison me. You, when driven by hunger, 
ate small quantities, which you thought would pass unob- 
served, of all the dishes but one. That dish has been 
given to a dog and he has died. You knew then which 
was the poisoned dish. The rajah has ordered your exe- 
cution. I offer you life if you will tell me who it was that 
tempted you.” 

The prisoner preserved a stolid silence. 

“ We had better proceed to torture him at once,” one 
of the rajah’s officers said. 

The man turned a little paler. He knew well the 
horrible torture which would in such an instance be 
inflicted to extort the names of those who had bribed 
him. 

“ I will say nothing,” he said firmly, “ though you tear 
me limb from limb.” 

“ I have no intention of torturing you,” Charlie said. 
“ A confession extorted by pain is as likely to be false 
as true, and even did you tell me one name there might 
still be a dozen engaged in it who would remain un- 
known. No, Hossein, you have failed in your duty, you 
have tried to slay a master who was kind to you and 
trusted you.” 

“ No, sahib,” the man exclaimed passionately. “ You 
did not trust me. The food I sent you was tested and 
tried. I knew it; but I thought that the poison would 
not have acted on the monkeys until you had eaten the 
dish. The fool who sold it me deceived me. Had you 
trusted me I would never have done it. It was only 
when I saw that I was suspected and doubted without 
cause that my heart turned against you, and I took the 


A MURDEROUS ATTEMPT. 


135 


gold which was offered to me to kill you. I swear it by 
the Prophet.” 

Charlie looked at him steadily. 

“ I believe you,” he said. “ You were mistaken. I 
had no suspicions. My servant feared for me and took 
these precautions without telling me. However, Hos- 
sein, I pardon you, and if you will swear to me to be 
faithful in future I will trust you. You shall again be 
my cook, and I will eat the food as you prepare it for me.” 

“ I am my lord’s slave,” the man said in a low tone. 
“ My life is his.” 

Charlie nodded, and the guard standing on either side 
of the prisoner stepped back, and without another word 
he left the room a free man. 

Charlie’s officers remonstrated with him upon having 
not only pardoned the man, but restored him to his posi- 
tion of cook. 

“ I think I have done wisely,” Charlie said. “ I must 
have a cook, for Tim Kelly here is not famous that way, 
and although he might manage for me when alone, he 
certainly could not turn out a dinner which would be 
suitable when I have some of the rajah’s kinsmen and 
officers dining with me. Did I get another cook he 
might be just as open to the offers of my enemies as 
Hossein has been, and do you not think that, after what 
has passed, Hossein will be less likely to take bribes than 
any other man? ” 

Henceforth the oven was removed from the ante- 
chamber, and Charlie took his meals as Hossein prepared 
them for him. The man said little, but Charlie felt sure 
from the glances that he cast at him that he could rely 
upon Hossein now to the death. 

Tim Kelly, who felt the strongest doubts as to the 
prudence of the proceeding, observed that Hossein no 
longer bought articles from men who brought them up 
to sell to the soldiers, but that every morning he went 
out early and purchased all the supplies he desired from 
the shopkeepers in the town. Tim mentioned the fact 
to his master, who said: 


*36 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


“ You see, Tim, Hossein has determined that I shall 
not be poisoned without his knowing it. The little 
peddlers who come up here with herbs, and spices, and 
the ingredients for curry might be bribed to sell Hossein 
poisoned goods. By going down into the town and buy- 
ing in the open market it is barely possible that the goods 
could be poisoned. You need have no more anxiety 
whatever, Tim, as to poison. If the attempt is made 
again it will probably be by sword or dagger.” 

“ Well, yer honor,” said Tim, “ anything’s better than 
pison. I’ve got to sleep almost with one eye open. And 
you’ve got sentries outside your windows. What a pity 
it is that we aint in a climate where one can fasten the 
windows and boult the shutters! But now the wet sea- 
son is over again ye might have yer bed put, as ye did 
last year, on the roof of your room, with a canopy over 
it to keep off the dew. Ye would be safe thin, except 
from anyone coming through the room where I sleeps.” 

Charlie’s bedroom was at the angle of a wall, and on 
two sides he could look down from his windows two 
hundred feet, sheer into the valley below. The view 
from the flat terraced roof was a charming one, and, as 
Tim said, Charlie had, in the fine weather, converted the 
terrace into a sleeping-room. A broad canopy supported 
by poles at the corner, stretched over it, and even in the 
hottest weather the nights were not unpleasant here. 


CHAPTER XIII. 

AN ATTEMPT AT MURDER. 

The house, of which the bedroom occupied by Charlie 
formed part, was elsewhere two stories higher, this room 
jutting out alone into the angle of the wall. The rest of 
the suite of rooms were in the house itself, but access 
could be obtained to this room through the window, 
which looked on to the terrace of the wall. Charlie’s 
lieutenants always took pains to place men upon whom 


AN ATTEMPT AT MURDER. 


*37 


they could thoroughly rely as sentries on this terrace. 
One night, a fortnight after the events which have been 
described, Charlie was asleep on his bed on the flats 
above his room. On one side the house rose straight 
beside it. On two others was the fall to the valley, on 
the fourth side was the wall, along which two sentries 
were pacing to and fro. From time to time, from a door 
some distance along the side of the house, opening on 
to the wall, a white figure came out, stretched himself as 
if unable to sleep, looked for a while over the parapet 
down into the valley, appeared to listen intently, and 
then sauntered into the house again. It was the cook, 
Hossein. It was his custom. Successive sentries had 
for many nights past seen him do the same, but in a 
country where the nights are hot, a sleepless servant 
attracts but little attention. Upon the occasion of one 
of these visits to the parapet he stood in an attitude of 
deep attention longer than usual. Then he carelessly 
sauntered back. It was but a moment later that his face 
appeared at the window next to that of Charlie’s bed- 
room. He stretched his head out and again listened in- 
tently. Then he went to Tim, who was sleeping heavily 
on a couch placed there, and touched him. He put his 
hand on his lips as Tim sprang up. “ Take arm,” he said 
in Hindostanee. “ Bad man coming.” 

Tim understood the words, and seizing a sword and 
pistol which lay close to the bedside, followed Hossein, 
who had glided up the stairs with a drawn tulwar in his 
hand. At the moment he did so there was a noise of 
heavy bodies dropping, followed by a sudden shout from 
Charlie. There was a sound of clashing of arms and the 
report of a pistol. As Tim’s eyes came on a level with 
the terrace he saw Hossein bound with uplifted blade 
into the midst of a group of men in the corner. Three 
times the blade rose and fell, and each time a loud shriek 
followed. Then he disappeared in the midst. Tim was 
but a few seconds behind him. Discharging his pistol 
into the body of one of the men, and running his sword 
into another, he, too, stood by the side of his mastef. 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


138 

Charlie, streaming with blood, was half sitting, half lying 
in the angle of the parapet. Hossein, his turban off, his 
long hair streaming down his back, was standing over 
him, fighting furiously against some ten men who still 
pressed forward, while several others lay upon the 
ground. 

In spite of the arrival of Charlie’s two allies they still 
pressed forward, but the shots of the pistols had been 
echoed by the muskets of the sentries. Loud shouts were 
heard, showing that the alarm was sounding through the 
palace. One more desperate effort the assailants made 
to beat the two men who opposed them over the parapet, 
but Hossein and the Irishman stood firm. The weight 
and numbers of their opponents, however, told upon 
them, when the first of the sentries appeared upon the 
platform, followed closely by his comrade, and both with 
leveled bayonets charged into the fray. The assailants 
now thought only of escape, but their position was a 
desperate one. Some rushed to the end of the terrace 
and tried to climb the ropes by which they had slid down 
from the upper roof of the house. Others endeavored to 
rush down the staircase, but Tim with one of the sentries 
guarded this point, until a rush of feet below told that the 
guard were coming to their assistance. It was well that 
help was at hand, for the conspirators, desperate at find- 
ing themselves in a trap, gathering themselves together, 
rushed with the fury of wild beasts upon Tim and the 
sentry. One was impaled upon a bayonet, another cut 
down by Tim, and then, borne back by the weight of 
their opponents, they were hurled backward down the 
stairs. As the assailants followed them with a rush, the 
guard sprang through the open window from the terrace 
below into the room. There was a short and desperate 
conflict. Then two of the conspirators bounded up the 
staircase on to the roof, ran to the parapet and leaped 
over into the valley, two hundred feet below. They were 
the last of the eighteen men who had lowered themselves 
from the roof above to attack Charlie. 

As soon as Tim picked himself up he hastened to 


AN ATTEMPT AT MURDER. 


139 


ascend the stairs again, and to run to the side of his mas- 
ter. Charlie was insensible. Leaning against the para- 
pet, too weak to stand, but still holding his sword and 
ready to throw himself once more before him, stood 
Hossein, who now, seeing Tim approach, and that all 
danger was over, dropped his sword and sank upon the 
ground. A minute or two later the rajah himself, sword 
in hand, hurried up. He was greatly concerned and 
excited at the sight which met his eyes. Charlie was at 
once lifted and carried down to one of the rajah’s own 
rooms, where he was instantly attended to. A hasty 
examination showed that only two of the attacking party 
still breathed. None of those who had fallen above sur- 
vived, so fierce and deadly had been the blows struck by 
Hossein and Tim. Charlie himself had cut down one 
and shot another before he fell, slashed in many places, 
just as Hossein bounded through his assailants. 

The bodies of the dead were by the rajah’s orders laid 
together for identification in the morning. The two 
who still lived were carried to the guard-room, and their 
wounds dressed in order that the names of their em- 
ployers might be obtained from them. In the mean- 
time Charlie’s lieutenants had hastily formed a body of 
their soldiers together, and these at once fell upon a num- 
ber of men who were crowding up the steps to the palace 
with shouts of “ Death to the Englishman.” A few 
volleys poured among these effectually scattered them, 
and they broke and hurried down the steep road, through 
the gates to the town, the sentries on the way offering no 
opposition, but many falling under the fire from the para- 
pet of the fort. In ten minutes all was over. The gates 
were again closed and a strong guard placed over them, 
and the attempted insurrection was at an end. 

The native surgeon who attended Charlie pronounced 
that none of the five wounds he had received, although 
for the most part severe, were necessarily fatal, and that 
there was every chance of his recovery. Hossein’s 
wounds, three in number, were pronounced to be more 
dangerous, one being a deep stab in the body given by a 


140 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


man who had rushed at him as he was guarding the blow 
of another. Tim’s wounds were comparatively slight, 
and he suffered more from the bruises he had received 
when hurled backward down the stone staircase. How- 
ever, with one arm in a sling and his head bandaged, he 
was able to take his place by his master’s bedside. Hav- 
ing heard from him that it was entirely due to Hossein 
that Charlie’s life had been saved, the rajah directed that 
every attention should be paid to him, and several times 
during the night Tim stole away to his bedside to press 
his hand, and call down blessings upon him. The 
stanching of his wounds and the application of strong 
restoratives presently caused Charlie to open his eyes. 

“ The Lord be praised, Mr. Charles,” Tim said, “ that 
you’re coming to yourself again. Don’t you trouble, sir. 
We’Ve done for the murdhering rascals, and plase God 
you’ll soon be about again. Jist drink this draught, yer 
honor, and go off to sleep if you can. In the morning 
I’ll tell you all about it. You’re in the rajah’s own 
room,” he continued, seeing Charlie’s eyes wander won- 
deringly around him, “ and all you’ve got to do is just to 
lie still and get well as soon as you can.” 

It was a fortnight before Charlie, still very weak and 
feeble, was able to totter from his room to that in which 
Hossein was lying. He himself knew nothing of what 
had passed after he fell. The conflict had to him been 
little more than a dream. Awakened from sleep by the 
sound of his assailants as they dropped from the ropes, 
he had leaped up as a rush of figures came toward him, 
catching up his sword and pistol as he did so. He had 
shot the first and cut down the next who rushed at him, 
but at the same moment he had felt a sharp pain and 
remembered no more. Tim heard from Hossein, when 
the latter, two days after the fight, was able to speak, that 
he had suspected that some renewed attempt might be 
made upon his master’s life, and that for many nights he 
had not slept, contenting himself with such repose as he 
could snatch in the daytime, between the intervals of 
preparing meals. A few minutes before the attack he 


AN ATTEMPT AT MURDER. 141 

fancied he heard a movement on the roof of the house, 
and running to Charlie’s room he had from the window 
seen some dark figures sliding down the wall. Then he 
roused Tim and rushed up to the rescue. Tim elo- 
quently described to his master the manner in which 
Hossein sprung upon his foes, and cut his way through 
in time to drive back those who were hacking at him as 
he lay prostrate, and how he found him standing over 
him, keeping at bay the whole of his assailants. 

Charlie with difficulty made his way to the bedside of 
the brave Mahommedan. The latter, however, did not 
know him. He was in the delirium of fever. He was 
talking rapidly to himself. “ He trusted me,” he said. 
“ He gave me my life. Should I not give mine for him? 
Anyone else would have had me hung as a dog. I will 
watch; I will watch; he shall see that Hossein is not 
ungrateful.” 

Charlie’s eyes filled with tears as he looked at the 
wasted form of his follower. “ Is there any hope for 
him? ” he asked the doctor. 

“ It is possible, just possible that he may live,” the 
latter said. “ Allah only knows.” 

“ Do all you can to save him,” Charlie said; “ I shall 
be ever grateful to you if you do.” 

Tim, now that his master could dispense with his 
services, transferred his attentions to the bedside of Hos- 
sein, and was unremitting in the care and attention with 
which he kept the bandages on his head cool with fresh 
water, and wetted his hot lips with refreshing drinks. It 
was another week before his illness took a turn. Then 
the fever left him, and he lay weak and helpless as an 
infant. Strong soups now took the place of the cooling 
drinks, and in a few days the native doctor was able to 
say confidently that the danger was passed, and that 
Hossein would recover. 

In the meantime the investigations of the rajah had 
brought to light the details of the conspiracy. The 
wounded men had confessed that they were employed by 
three of the principal persons at the rajah’s court, one of 


142 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


them being the rajah’s brother. The information, how- 
ever was scarcely needed, as it was found in the morning 
that their apartments were empty, they having fled with 
the men who had attacked the gates of the palace. These 
consisted partly of soldiers whom they had bribed, and 
of desperadoes from the town, who had singly entered the 
fort during the day, and had been concealed in the apart- 
ments of the conspirators until the signal for attack was 
given. The intention of the conspirators was not only to 
kill the Englishman but to dethrone the rajah, and install 
his brother in his place. The attack had commenced 
with the attempt upon Charlie’s life, because it was be- 
lieved that his death would paralyze the troops who were 
faithful to the rajah. 

At the end of six weeks Charlie was able to resume his 
duties, and his appearance at the parade ground was 
hailed with enthusiastic shouts by the soldiers. The 
rajah was more attached to him than ever, and had again 
made him large presents in token of the regret he felt at 
the sufferings he had endured in his cause. Drilling was 
now carried on with redoubled energy, and large num- 
bers of new levies had been summoned to the standard. 
A storm was gathering over Ambur. The rajah’s 
brother was raising a force to attack him, and had, by 
means of large promises in case of success, persuaded 
Murari Reo to take up his cause and he had, it was said, 
also sent messages to the nizam, pointing out that, in 
case of war with the English, the Rajah of Ambur would 
be a thorn in his side. He told of the numbers of troops 
who had been drilled, and how formidable such a force 
would be if opposed to him at a critical moment, while if 
he, the claimant, gained power the army of Ambur would 
be at the disposal of the nizam. 

The rajah on his side had also sent messengers to 
Hyderabad with assurances to the nizam of 'his fidelity 
and friendship. He urged that the preparations he had 
made were intended solely for the defense of his state 
against marauding bands of Marattas, and especially 
against those of Murari Reo, who was a scourge to all his 


AN ATTEMPT AT MURDER. 


M3 


neighbors. In the meantime every effort was made to 
strengthen the defenses of Ambur. The walls surround- 
ing the town were repaired, and although these in them- 
selves could have offered but a slight defense to a 
determined assault, the approaches to the town were all 
covered by the guns of the fort above. The weak point 
of the defense was the hill behind the town. This sloped 
up gradually to a point higher than the level of the pro- 
jecting rock upon which the castle stood. It then rose 
in rugged cliffs some two hundred feet higher, and then 
fell away again steeply to its summit. This was too far 
back for the fire of guns placed upon it to injure the 
castle or town. Guns placed, however, at the foot of the 
rocky wall would dominate the castle and render it at 
last untenable. Charlie had often looked with an 
anxious eye at this point, and one morning, accom- 
panied by the rajah, he rode up to examine the position. 
The highest point of the slope at the foot of the crag was 
nearly opposite the castle, and it was here that an active 
enemy, making his way along the slope, would place his 
guns. Here Charlie determined to establish a battery. 
News had arrived that the rajah’s brother had raised 
a force of 3000 men, and that with 7000 Marattas he was 
about to march. This force Charlie felt certain that he 
could meet and defeat in the open. But more disquieting 
news was that Bussy, hearing that the rajah’s troops had 
been trained by an Englishman, had advised the nizam 
to declare for his rival and to send a considerable force 
to his assistance, if necessary. Fresh messengers were 
sent off with new assurances of the rajah’s loyalty to the 
nizam. 

“ It may not do much good,” Charlie said, “ but if we 
can induce him to remain quiet until we have defeated 
Murari Reo, it will be so much gained.” Charlie him- 
self dispatched a messenger to Mr. Saunders, begging 
that assistance might be sent to the rajah. Having de- 
cided upon the position for a battery, energetic steps 
were taken to form it. A space large enough for the 
construction of the battery, and for the tents and stores 


144 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


of the artillerymen and 200 infantry, was marked out, 
and the rajah ordered the whole population of Ambur, 
men, women, and children to assist at the work. The 
troops, too, were all employed, and under Charlie’s super- 
intendence a wondrous change was soon effected. The 
spot chosen was leveled, a strong earthwork was erected 
around it, and then the surrounding ground was re- 
moved. This was a work of immense labor, the ground 
consisting first of a layer of soil, then of debris which 
had fallen from the face of the rock above, stones and 
boulders, to the depth of some fifteen feet, under which 
was the solid earth. 

The slope resembled an ant-hill. The soldiers and 
able-bodied men broke up the boulders and rock with 
sledge-hammers, or, when necessary, with powder, and 
blasted the rock when needed. The women and children 
carried away the fragments in baskets. The work lasted 
for a fortnight, at the end of which a position of an almost 
impregnable nature was formed. At the foot of the 
earthworks protecting the guns, both at the face and 
sides, the ground, composed of great boulders and stones, 
sloped steeply out, forming a bank fifteen feet deep. 
At its foot, again, the solid rock was blasted away so as 
to form a deep chasm thirty feet wide and ten feet high 
around the foot of the fort. For a hundred yards on 
each side the earth and stones had been entirely removed 
down to the solid rock. Ten guns were placed in the 
battery, and the fire of these swept the slopes behind 
the town and castle, rendering it impossible, until the 
fort was carried, for an enemy to attack the town on that 
side, or to operate in any way against the only point at 
which an attack could be made upon the castle. 

The rajah was delighted at this most formidable acces- 
sion to the defensive power of his fortress, which was 
now in a position to defy any attack which could be made 
against it. A store of provisions and ammunition was 
collected there, and the command given to one of 
Charlie’s Sepoy lieutenants, with 100 trained artillery- 
men and 200 infantry. Numbers of cattle had been 


AN ATTEMPT AT MURDER. 1 45 

driven into the town and castle, and stores of provisions 
collected. 

It was but two days after the battery was complete 
that the news arrived that the rajah’s brother with Murari 
Reo had entered the rajah’s dominions, and was march- 
ing up the valley to the assault. The rajah had in the 
first placed wished to defend a strong gorge through 
which the enemy would have to pass, this having hitherto 
been considered the defensible point of his capital against 
an invasion. Charlie pointed out, however, that although 
no doubt a successful defense might be made here, it 
would only be a repulse which would leave the enemy 
but little weakened for further operations. He argued 
that it was better to allow them to advance to the point 
where the valley opened out into a plain, some two miles 
wide. He had no doubt whatever that the rajah’s troops 
would be able to inflict a crushing defeat upon the in- 
vaders, who would be so disheartened thereby that they 
would be little likely to renew the attack. 

Two bodies of troops, each 300 strong, were sent down 
to the gorge, with orders to remain in hiding among the 
heights, to allow the invading army to pass unmolested, 
and then to inflict the greatest possible loss upon them 
as they returned. These were under the command of 
another of Charlie’s lieutenants, who received orders from 
him to erect breastworks of rock on the slope above the 
entrance to the gorge, after the enemy had passed on, 
and to line these with a portion of his men who should 
pour a heavy fire into the enemy as they came down the 
valley, while the rest were to line the heights above the 
gorge and to roll down rocks upon those who passed 
through the fire of their comrades. 

The uniforms were served out to the soldiers, and 
Charlie surveyed with pride the five battalions of trained 
troops which, with twelve guns, marched down into the 
valley and took up their post beyond it, at a point which 
he had carefully chosen, where the guns of the castle 
would be able to play upon an advancing body of troops. 
A body of trained artillerymen were told off for this 


146 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


service, and the last-raised levies were posted in the castle 
and on the walls of the town. The position was so 
chosen that the flanks of the line rested on the slopes 
on either side. These were broken by inclosures and 
gardens, into which on either side half a battalion was 
thrown forward so as to deliver a flanking fire upon an 
enemy advancing against the center. Across the valley, 
two hundred yards in front of the position, the stream 
which watered it made a sharp turn, running for some 
distance directly across it, and several small canals for 
the irrigation of the fields rendered the ground wet and 
swampy. Across the line occupied by his troops, a 
breastwork had been thrown up, and in front of this 
rows of sharp-pointed stakes had been stuck in the 
ground. Altogether the position was a formidable one. 

An hour or two after the position so carefully prepared 
had been taken up, large bodies of Maratta horse were 
seen dashing up the valley, and smoke rising from several 
points showed that they had begun their usual work of 
plundering and destroying the villages on their way. A 
few discharges from the field-pieces — those in the castle 
had been ordered to be silent until the raising of a white 
flag gave them the signal to open fire — checked the 
advance of the horsemen, and these waited until their 
infantry should arrive. 

The force of Murari Reo was at that time the most 
formidable of any purely native army of Southern India. 
Recruited from desperadoes from all the Maratta tribes, 
well disciplined by its leader, it had more than once 
fought without defeat against bodies of Europeans, while 
it had in all cases obtained easy victories over other native 
armies. 

Presently the horsemen opened, and a compact body 
of 3000 Maratta infantry, accompanied by an equal num- 
ber of the irregulars of the rajah’s brother, advanced 
to the attack, while the cavalry at their sides swept down 
upon the flanks of the rajah’s position, and thirty pieces 
of artillery opened fire. Not a shot was fired in return, 
Charlie ordering his men to lie down behind the breast- 


AN ATTEMPT AT MURDER. 


147 


works until they received the word of command to show 
themselves. The Maratta horsemen, compelled by the 
bends of the stream to keep near the foot of the slopes, 
came forward in gallant style, until suddenly from every 
wall and every clump of bushes on the slopes above 
them a tremendous fire of musketry broke out, while 
the twelve field-guns, six of which were posted on either 
side of Charlie’s center, poured a destructive fire into 
them. So deadly was the rain of iron and lead that the 
Maratta horsemen instantly drew bridle, and leaving the 
ground strewn with their dead, galloped back. 

By this time the infantry, covered by the fire of their 
artillery, had reached the stream. This was waist deep, 
and the banks were some two feet above its level. As 
they scrambled up after crossing it, from the line of 
embankment in front of them a tremendous fire was 
opened. Although mowed down in scores the seasoned 
warriors of the Maratta chief, cheered on by his voice 
as, recklessly exposing himself, he rode among them, 
pressed forward. Ever increasing numbers gained a 
footing across the stream, those in front keeping up 
a heavy fire at the breastwork, whose face was plowed 
by their cannon-shot. As they advanced the guns of the 
castle opened fire, not upon those in front, for these were 
too near the line of intrenchment, but upon the strug- 
gling mass still crossing the stream, into which a cease- 
less fire of musketry was poured from the slopes on their 
flanks. 

Still the Maratta infantry struggled bravely on until 
within a few yards of the intrenchments. Then, sud- 
denly with a mighty shout the rajah’s troops leaped to 
their feet, poured a volley from the crest of the breastr 
work into the enemy, and then, with fixed bayonets, 
flung themselves upon them. The effect was decisive. 
The Marattas had at the commencement of the fight 
scarcely outnumbered the troops of the rajah in front of 
them, and had derived but little assistance from the levies 
of their ally, who indeed had contented themselves with 
keeping up a fire upon the defenders of the slopes. They 


148 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


had already suffered very severely, and the charge made 
upon them along the whole line was irresistible. Before 
the bayonets crossed they broke and fled, hotly pursued 
by the troops of the rajah. These, in accordance with 
Charlie’s orders, did not scatter, but kept in a close line, 
four deep, which advanced pouring tremendous volleys 
into their foe. In vain did Murari Reo endeavor to rally 
his men. His infantry, all order lost, fled at the top of 
their speed, their flight covered by their cavalry, who 
sacrificed themselves in two or three brilliant charges 
right up to the line of pursuers, although suffering terri- 
bly from the withering volleys poured into their ranks. 

The troops were now formed into heavy columns, and 
these rapidly marched down the valley after their flying 
enemy. An hour later the sound of heavy firing was 
heard in front, and at redoubled speed the troops pressed 
onward. When they arrived, however, at the gorge they 
found that the last of the fugitives had passed through. 
The ground in front was strewn with dead and dying, 
for as the mass of fugitives had arrived at the gorge 
the infantry from above had opened fire upon them. 
Several times the frightened throng had recoiled, but 
at last, impelled by the greater fear of their pursuers 
behind, they had dashed forward through the fire, only 
to fall in hundreds in the gorge, crushed beneath the rain 
of rocks showered down upon them from above. 


CHAPTER XIV. 

THE SIEGE OF AMBUR. 

The victory was a complete and decisive one. A 
thousand of the best troops of Murari Reo had fallen, 
besides some hundreds of their irregular allies, whose 
loss was incurred almost wholly at the gorge in the re- 
treat. The rajah was in the highest state of delight at 
the splendid result obtained by the European training of 
his troops,. and these, proud of their victory over such 


THE SIEGE OF AMBUR. 


149 


formidable opponents, were full of enthusiasm for their 
young English leader. The rejoicings in Ambur that 
night were great, and all felt confident that the danger 
was at an end. 

“ What think you,” the rajah said to Charlie, as, the 
long feast at an end, they sat together in the divan 
smoking their narghileys, “ will be the result when the 
news of the defeat of Murari Reo reaches Hyderabad?” 

“ It is difficult to say,” Charlie replied. “ It is possi- 
ble, of course, that it may be considered that it is better 
to leave you in peace, but, upon the other hand, it may be 
that they will consider that you are so formidable a 
power that it is absolutely necessary to crush you at once, 
rather than to give you the chance of joining against 
them in the war which must sooner or later take place 
between them and the English. In that case it will be 
a very different affair from that which we have had 
to-day. Still, I should send off a messenger to-morrow 
to acquaint the nizam with the defeat you inflicted upon 
the Marattas who have invaded you, to assure him again 
of your loyalty, and to beg him to lay his authority upon 
Murari Reo not to renew the attack.” 

Ten days later a messenger arrived from the nizam 
ordering the rajah to repair at once to Hyderabad to 
explain his conduct. The latter sent back a message of 
humble excuses, saying that his health was so injured 
by the excitement of recent events that he was unable 
to travel, but that when he recovered he would journey 
to Hyderabad to lay his respects at the feet of the nizam. 
Two or three days later a messenger arrived from Mr. 
Saunders with a letter to Charlie. In this he expressed 
his great satisfaction at the defeat Murari Reo had re- 
ceived, a defeat which would for some time keep him 
quiet, and so relieve the strain upon the English. Affairs 
had, he said, since the departure of Clive for England, 
been going badly. Dupleix had received large reinforce- 
ments, and the English had suffered several reverses. 
Mr. Saunders begged him to assure the rajah of the 
respect and friendship of England, and to give him the 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


* 5 <> 

promise that if he should be driven from his capital he 
would be received with all honor at Madras, and should 
be reinstated in his dominions, with much added terri- 
tory, when the English were again in a position to take 
the field in force and to settle their long feud with the 
French. 

Ten days later they heard that the army of the nizam, 
of 15,000 troops, with 800 French under Bussy, were 
marching against them, and that the horsemen of Murari 
Reo were devastating the villages near the frontier. A 
council of war was held. Charlie would fain have fought 
in the open again, believing that his trained troops, 
flushed with their recent victory, would be a match even 
for the army of the nizam. But the rajah and the rest 
of the council, alarmed at the presence of the French 
troops, who had hitherto proved invincible against 
vastly superior forces of natives, shrank from such a 
course, and it was decided that they should content 
themselves with the defense of the town and castle. 
Orders were accordingly issued that the old men, the 
women, and children should at once leave the town, and, 
under guard of one battalion of troops, take refuge in 
an almost impregnable hill fort some miles away. One 
battalion was placed in garrison in the castle. The other 
three, with the irregulars, took post in the town, whence 
they could, if necessary, retreat into the castle. The day 
following the removal of the non-combatants the enemy 
appeared coming down the valley, having marched over 
the hills, while the Maratta cavalry again poured up 
from below. 

Charlie had taken the command of the town, as it was 
against this that the efforts of the enemy would be first 
directed. It was an imposing sight as the army of the 
nizam wound down the valley, the great masses of men 
with their gay flags, the elephants with the gold em- 
broidery of their trappings glistening in the sun, the 
bands of horsemen careering here and there, the lines of 
artillery drawn by bullocks, and, less picturesque but far 
more menacing, the dark body of French infantry who 


THE SIEGE OF AMBUR. 


I 5 I 

formed the nucleus and heart of the whole. The camp 
was pitched just out of range of the guns of the fort, and 
soon line after line of tents, gay with the flags that floated 
above them, rose across the valley. Charlie had mounted 
to the castle the better to observe the movements of the 
enemy, and he presently saw a small body of horsemen 
ride out of the camp and mount the hillside across the val- 
ley. A glass showed that some of these were native offi- 
cers, while others were in the dark uniform of the French. 

“ I have no doubt,” Charlie said to the rajah, “ that is 
the nizam himself with Bussy gone up to reconnoiter the 
position. I wonder how he likes the look of it. I wish 
we could have turfed the battery above and the newly 
stripped land. We might in that case have given them 
a pleasant surprise. As it is they are hardly likely to 
begin by an attack along the slopes in the rear of the 
town, and you will see that they will commence the attack 
at the farther face of the town. The battery above can- 
not aid us in our defense there, and although the castle 
may help it will only be by a direct fire. If they try to 
carry the place by a coup dc main I think we can beat 
them off, but they must succeed by regular approaches. 
We must inflict as much loss as we can and then fall 
back. However, it will be some time before that comes.” 

The next morning Charlie found that the enemy had 
during the night erected three batteries on the slopes 
facing the north wall of the town, that farthest removed 
from the castle. They at once opened fire, and guns on 
the walls facing them replied, while those on the castle 
hurled their shot over the town into the enemy’s battery. 
For three days the artillery fire was kept up without inter- 
mission. The guns on the wall were too weak to silence 
the batteries of the besiegers, although these were much 
annoyed by the fire from the fort, which dismounted 
four of their guns and blew up one of their magazines. 
Several times the town was set on fire by the shell from 
the French mortars; but Charlie had organized the 
irregulars into bands with buckets, and these succeeded 
in extinguishing the flames before they spread. Seeing 


152 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


that the mud wall of the town was crumbling rapidly 
before the besiegers’ fire, Charlie set his troops to work 
and leveled every house within fifty yards of it, and with 
the stones and beams formed barricades across the end 
of the streets beyond. Many of the guns from other 
portions of the walls were removed and placed on these 
barricades. The ends of the houses were loopholed, and 
all was prepared for a desperate defense. 

Charlie’s experiences at Arcot stood him in good stead 
and he imitated the measures taken by Clive at that 
place. When these defenses were completed he raised 
a second line of barricades some distance further back, 
and here, when the assault was expected, he placed one 
of his battalions, with orders that if the inner line of 
intrenchments was carried they should allow all the 
defenders of that post to pass through, and then resist 
until the town was completely evacuated, when they were 
to fall back upon the fort. He had, however, little feat- 
that his position would be taken at the first assault. 

Upon the evening of the third day the besiegers'’ fire 
had done its work, and a gap in the wall some eighty 
yards wide was formed. The garrison were ordered to 
hold themselves in readiness, and a strict watch was set. 
Toward morning a distant hum in the nizam’s camp pro- 
claimed that the troops were mustering for the assault. 
The besiegers’ guns had continued their fire all night, 
to prevent working parties from placing obstacles in the 
breach. As the first shades of daylight appeared the fire 
ceased, and a great column of men poured forward to 
the assault. 

The few remaining guns upon the end wall opened 
upon them, as did the infantry who lined the parapet, 
while the guns in the castle at once joined in. The 
mighty column, however, composed of the troops of the 
nizam, pressed forward, poured over the fragments of the 
wall, and entered the clear space behind it. Then, from 
house-top and loophole, and from the walls on either 
side, a concentrated fire of musketry was poured upon 
them, while twelve guns, four on each barricade, swept 


THE SIEGE OE AMBUR. 


153 

them with grape. The head of the column withered 
away under the fire, long lines were swept through the 
crowded mass, and after a minute or two’s wild firing 
at their concealed foes, the troops of the nizam, appalled 
and shattered by the tremendous fire, broke and fled. 
The instant they had cleared the breach the guns of the 
besiegers again opened furiously upon it, to check any 
sortie which the besieged might attempt. 

An hour later the besiegers hoisted a white flag and 
requested to be allowed to bury their dead and remove 
their wounded. This Charlie agreed to, with the pro- 
viso that these should be carried by his own men beyond 
the breach, as he did not wish that the enemy should 
have an opportunity of examining the internal defenses. 
The task occupied some time, as more than 500 dead 
and dying lay scattered in the open space. During the 
rest of the day the enemy showed no signs of resuming 
the assault. During the night they could be heard hard 
at work, and although a brisk fire was kept up to hinder 
them, Charlie found that they had pushed trenches from 
the batteries a considerable distance around each corner 
of the town. 

For four days the besiegers worked vigorously, 
harassed as they were by the guns of the fort and by 
those of the battery high up on the hillside, which were 
now able to take in flank the works across the upper 
angle of the town. At the end of that time they had 
erected and armed two batteries, which at daylight 
opened upon the walls which formed the flanks of the 
clear space behind the breach. Although suffering 
heavily from the fire of the besieged and losing many 
men these batteries kept up their fire unceasingly night 
and day, until great gaps had been made in the walls, and 
Charlie was obliged to withdraw his troops from them 
behind the line of barricades. During this time the fire 
of the batteries in front had been unceasing and had 
destroyed most of the houses which formed the connect- 
ing line between the barricades. Each night, however, 
the besieged worked to repair damages, and to fill up 


154 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


the gaps thus formed with piles of stones and beams, so 
that, by the end of the fourth day after the repulse of the 
first assault, a line of barricades stretched across the line 
of defense. 

The enemy this time prepared to attack by daylight, 
and early in the morning the whole army of the nizam 
marched to the assault. Heedless of the fire of the castle, 
they formed up in a long line of heavy masses along the 
slope. One huge column moved forward against the 
main breach, two advanced obliquely toward the great 
gaps in the walls on either side. The latter columns 
were each headed by bodies of French troops. In vain 
the guns of the fort, aided by those of the battery on the 
hill, swept them, the columns advanced without a check 
until they entered the breaches. Then a line of fire 
swept along the crest of the barricade from end to end, 
and the cannon of the besieged roared out. Pressed by 
the mass from behind, the columns advanced torn and 
rent by the fire, and at last gained the foot of the barri- 
cade. Here those in front strove desperately to climb 
up the great mound of rubbish, while those behind cov- 
ered them with a storm of bullets aimed at its summit. 
More than once the troops of the rajah, rushing down 
the embankment, drove back the struggling masses, but 
so heavily did they suffer from the fire when they thus 
exposed themselves, that Charlie forbade them to repeat 
the attempt. He knew that there was safety behind, and 
was unwilling that his brave fellows should throw away 
their lives. 

In the center of the position the native troops, although 
they several times climbed some distance up the barri- 
cade, were yet unable to make way. But the French 
troops at the flanks were steadily forcing their way up. 
Many had climbed up by the ruins of the wall, and from 
its top were firing down on the defenders of the barri- 
cade. Inch by inch they won their way up the barricade, 
already thickly covered with dead, and then Charlie, 
seeing that his men were beginning to waver, gave the 
signal. 


THE SIEGE OF AMBUR. 


155 


The long blast of a trumpet was heard even above the 
tremendous din. In an instant the barricades were de- 
serted, and the defenders rushed into the houses. The 
partition walls between these on the lower floors had 
already been knocked down, and without suffering from 
the heavy fire which the assailants opened as soon as 
they gained the crest of the barricade, the defenders 
retreated along these covered ways until in rear of the 
second line of defense. This was held by the battalion 
placed there until the whole of the defenders of the town 
had left it by the gate leading up to the fort. Then 
Charlie withdrew this battalion also, and the town re- 
mained in the hands of the enemy, who had lost, Charlie 
reckoned, fully 1500 men in the assault. During the 
fight Tim and the faithful Hossein, now fully recovered 
and promoted to the rank of an officer, had remained 
close beside him, and were, with him, the last to leave 
the town. 

The instant the evacuation was complete, the guns of 
the hill battery opened upon the town and a tremendous 
fire of musketry was poured upon it from every point of 
the castle which commanded it; while the guns, which 
from their lofty elevation could not be depressed suffi- 
ciently to bear upon the town, directed their fire upon the 
bodies of troops still beyond the walls. The enemy had 
captured the town, indeed, but its possession aided them 
but little in their assault upon the fort. The only advan- 
tage it gave them would have been that it would have 
enabled them to attack the lower gate of the fort, pro- 
tected by its outer wall from the fire of the hill battery. 
Charlie had, however, perceived that this would be the 
case, and had planted a number of mines under the wall 
at this point. These were exploded when the defenders 
of the town entered the fort, and a hundred yards of the 
wall were thus destroyed, leaving the space across which 
the enemy must advance to the attack of the gate exposed 
to the fire of the hill battery, as well as of the numerous 
guns of the fort bearing upon it. 

Two days passed without any further operations on the 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


* 5 6 

part of the enemy, and then Bussy, seeing that nothing 
whatever could be done toward assaulting the fortress so 
long as the battery remained in the hands of the besieged, 
determined to make a desperate effort to carry it, igno- 
rant of its immense strength. At night, therefore, he 
ordered two bodies of men, each 1500 strong, to mount 
the hillside far to the right and left of the town, to 
move along at the foot of the wall of rock, and to carry 
the battery by storm at daybreak. Charlie, believing 
that such an attempt would be made, had upon the day 
following the fall of the town taken his post there, and 
had ordered a most vigilant watch to be kept up each 
night, placing sentries some hundred yards away on 
either side to give warning of the approach of an enemy. 

Toward daybreak on the third morning a shot upon 
the left, followed a few seconds later by one on the right, 
told that the enemy were approaching. A minute or 
two afterward the sentries ran in, climbed from the ditch 
by ladders which had been placed there for the purpose, 
and, hauling these up after them, were soon in the battery 
with the news that large bodies of the enemy were ap- 
proaching on either flank. Scarcely were the garrison 
at their posts when the French were seen approaching. 
At once they broke into a run, and, gallantly led, dashed 
across the space of cleared rock in spite of the heavy fire 
of musketry and grape. When they came, however, to 
the edge of the deep gulf in the solid rock they paused. 
They had had no idea of meeting with such an obstacle 
as this. It was easy enough to leap down, but impossi- 
ble to climb up the steep fac^ ten feet high in front of 
them, and which, in the dim light, could be plainly seen. 
It was, however, impossible for those in front to pause. 
Pressed upon by those behind, who did not know what 
was stopping them, large numbers were compelled to 
jump into the trench, where they found themselves 
unable either to advance or retreat. 

By this time every gun on the upper side of the castle 
had opened on the assailing columns, taking them in 
flank, while the fire of the battery was continued without 


THE SIEGE OF AMBUR. 


J 57 


a moment’s intermission. Bussy himself, who was com- 
manding one of the columns, pushed his way through his 
struggling soldiers to the edge of the trench, when, see- 
ing the impossibility of scaling the sides, unprovided as 
he was with scaling-ladders, he gave the orders to retreat; 
and the columns, harassed by the flanking fire of the guns 
of the castle and pursued by that of the battery, retreated, 
having lost some hundreds of their number, besides 150 
of their best men prisoners in the deep trench around the 
battery. These were summoned to surrender, and re- 
sistance being impossible they at once laid down their 
arms. Ladders were lowered to them and they were 
marched as prisoners to the fort. 

The next morning when the defenders of the fortress 
looked over the valley, the great camp was gone. The 
nizam and Bussy, despairing of the possibility of carrying 
the position at once so enormously strong by nature and 
so gallantly defended, had raised the siege, which had 
cost them over 2000 of their best soldiers, including 200 
French — killed and prisoners, and retreated to the plateau 
of the Deccan. 

The exultation of the rajah and his troops was un- 
bounded. They felt that now and henceforth they were 
safe from another invasion, and the rajah saw that in the 
future he should be able to gain greatly increased terri- 
tory as the ally of the English. His gratitude to Charlie 
was unbounded, and he literally loaded him with costly 
presents. 

Three weeks later a letter was received by the latter 
from Mr. Saunders, congratulating him upon the inesti- 
mable service which he had rendered, and appointing him 
to the rank of captain in the company’s service. Now 
that the rajah would be able to protect himself should 
any future assault be made upon him — an event most un- 
likely to happen, as Bussy and the nizam would be 
unwilling to risk a repetition of a defeat which had 
already so greatly injured their prestige — he had better 
return to Madras, where, as Mr. Saunders said, the 
services of so capable an officer were greatly needed. He 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


158 

warned him, however, to be careful in the extreme how 
he made his way back, as' the country was in a most dis- 
turbed state, the Maratta bands being everywhere out 
plundering and burning. Subsequent information that 
the Marattas were swarming in the plains below, deter- 
mined Charlie to accept an offer which the rajah made 
him, that he should, under a strong escort, cross the 
mountains and make his way to a port on the west coast 
in the state of a friendly rajah, where he would be able to 
take ship and coast round to Madras. The rajah prom- 
ised to send Charlie's horses and other presents down to 
Madras when an opportunity should offer, and Charlie, 
accompanied by the four Sepoys, all of whom had been 
promoted to the rank of officers, by Tim Kelly and Hos- 
sein, who would not separate himself a moment from 
his side, started from Ambur with an escort of thirty 
horsemen. 

The rajah was quite affected at the parting, and the 
army which he had formed and organized paraded before 
him for the last time and then shouted their farewell. 
Charlie himself, although glad to return among his coun- 
trymen, from whom he had been nearly two years sepa- 
rated, was yet sorry to leave the many friends he had 
made. His position was now a very different one from 
that which he held when he left Madras. Then he was 
a newly made lieutenant, who had distinguished himself, 
indeed, under Clive, but who was as yet unknown save 
to his commander, and who was as poor as when he had 
landed eighteen months before in India. Now he had 
gained a name for himself, and his successful defense of 
Ambur had been of immense service to the company. 
He was, too, a wealthy man, for the presents in money 
alone of the rajah had amounted to over twenty-five thou- 
sand pounds, a sum which in these days may appear ex- 
traordinary, but which was small to that frequently 
bestowed by wealthy native princes upon British officers 
who had done them a good service. Clive himself after 
his short campaign had returned to England with a far 
larger sum. 


THE SIEGE OF AMBUR. 


159 


For several days the party rode through the hills with- 
out incident, and on the fifth day they saw stretched at 
their feet a rich flat country dotted with villages, beyond 
which extended the long blue line of the sea. The dis- 
tance was greater than Charlie imagined, and ’twas only 
after two days’ long ride that he reached Calicut, where 
he was received with great honor by the rajah, to whom 
the leader of the escort brought letters of introduction 
from the Rajah of Ambur. For four days Charlie re- 
mained as his guest, and then took a passage in a large 
native vessel bound for Ceylon, whence he would have 
no difficulty in obtaining passage to Madras. 

These native ships are very high out of water, rising 
considerably toward the stem and stern, and in form 
they somewhat resemble the Chinese junk, but are with- 
out the superabundance of grotesque painting, carving, 
and gilding which distinguish the latter. The rajah 
accompanied Charlie to the shore, and a salute was fired 
by his followers in honor of the departure of the guest. 

The weather was lovely, and the clumsy craft with all 
sail set was soon running down the coast. When they 
had sailed some hours from Calicut, from behind a head- 
land four vessels suddenly made their appearance. They 
were lower in the water and much less clumsy in appear- 
ance than the ordinary native craft, and were propelled 
not only by their sails but by a number of oars on each 
side. No sooner did the captain and crew of the ship be- 
hold these vessels than they raised a cry of terror and 
despair. The captain, who was part owner of the craft, 
ran up and down the deck like one possessed, and the 
sailors seemed scarcely less terrified. 

“ What on earth is the matter? ” Charlie exclaimed. 
“ What vessels are those, and why are you afraid of 
them? ” 

“ Tulagi Angria! Tulagi Angria! ” the captain cried, 
and the crew took up the refrain. The name that they 
uttered fully accounted for their terror. 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


160 


CHAPTER XV. 

THE PIRATES’ HOLD. 

Sivagi, the founder of the Maratta Empire, had, in 
1662, seized and fortified Vijiyadrug, or, as the Eng- 
lish call it, Gheriah, a town at the mouth of the river 
Kanui, 170 miles south of Bombay, and also the 
island of Suwarndrug, about halfway between Gheriah 
and Bombay. Here he established a piratical fleet. 
Fifty years later Kanhagi Angria, the commander of 
the Maratta fleet, broke off this connection with the 
successors of Sivagi, and set up as a pirate on his own 
account. Kanhagi not only plundered the native vessels, 
but boldly preyed upon the commerce of the European 
settlements. The ships of the East India Company, the 
French Company, and the Dutch, were frequently cap- 
tured by these pirates. Tulagi Angria, who succeeded 
his father, was even bolder and more successful, and 
when the man-of-war brig the Restoration, with twenty 
guns and 200 men, was fitted out to attack him, he de- 
feated and captured her. After this he attacked and cap- 
tured the French man-of-war Jupitre, with forty guns, 
and had even the insolence to assail an English convoy, 
guarded by two men-of-war, the Vigilant, of sixty-four 
guns, and the Ruby, of fifty. The Dutch, in 1735, sent a 
fleet of seven ships of war, two bomb-vessels, and a 
strong body of troops against Gheriah. The attack was, 
however, repulsed with considerable loss. From that 
date the pirates grew bolder and bolder, and were a per- 
fect scourge to the commerce of Western India. Charlie 
Marryat had, of course, frequently heard of the doings of 
these noted pirates, and the cry of Tulagi Angria at once 
explained to him the terror of the master and crew. 

“ What is it, Mr. Charles, what on earth is the bothera- 
tion about? Is it the little ships they’re afeered of? ” 

“ Those ships belong to a pirate called Tulagi Angria,” 


THE PIRATES’ HOLD. 


161 

Charlie said, “ and I am very much afraid, Tim, that we 
are likely to see the inside of his fortress.” 

“ But shure, yer honor, we’re not afeered of those four 
little boats.” 

“ We are, Tim, and very much afraid, too. Each of 
those boats, as you call them, carries four or five times as 
many men as this ship. They are well armed, while we 
have only those two little guns, which are useless except 
for show. If the crew were Englishmen we might at- 
tempt a defense, although even then the odds would be 
terribly against us; but with these natives it is hopeless 
to think of it, and the attempt would only insure our 
throats being cut.” 

It was clear that the idea of resistance did never even 
enter the minds of the crew of the trader. Some ran to 
and fro with gesticulations and cries of despair, some 
threw themselves upon the deck of the vessel, tore their 
hair, and rolled as if in convulsions. Some sat down 
quietly with the air of apathetic resignation, with which 
the natives of India are used to meet what they consider 
the inevitable. Hossein, who at the first alarm had 
bounded to his feet with his hand on his knife, subsided 
into an attitude of indifference when he saw that Charlie 
did not intend making any defense. 

“ It’s mighty lucky,” Tim said, “ that yer honor left all 
your presents to be forwarded to Madras. I thought you 
were wrong, Mr. Charles, when you advised me to send 
them thousand rupees the rajah gave me along with 
your money. A hundred pounds wasn’t a sum that Tim 
Kelly was likely to handle again in a hurry, and it went 
agin the grain with me to part with them out of my 
hands; sure and it’s well I took yer honor’s advice.” 

The four Sepoy officers also exchanged a few words 
with Charlie. They, too, would have resisted had he 
given the word, hopeless though the effort would have 
been. But they acquiesced at once in his decision. 
They had little to lose, but the thought of a prolonged 
captivity, and of being obliged, perhaps, to enter the 
service of the Maratta freebooters just when about to 


162 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


return to their wives and families at Madras, was a ter- 
rible blow for them. 

“ Keep up your spirits,” Charlie said. “ It is a bad 
business, but we must hope for the best. If we bide our 
time we may see some chance of escape. You had better 
lay down your arms in a pile here. Then we will sit 
down quietly and await their coming on board. They 
will be here in a minute now.” 

Scarcely had the seven passengers taken their seats in 
a group on the poop, when the freebooters ranged along- 
side and swarmed over the sides on to the deck. Be- 
yond bestowing a few kicks upon the crew, they paid no 
attention whatever to them, but tore off the hatches and 
at once proceeded to investigate the contents of the hold. 
The greater portion of this consisted of native grains, but 
there were several bales of merchandise consigned by 
traders at Calicut for Ceylon. The cargo was, in fact, 
rather more valuable than that generally found in a native 
coaster, and the pirates were satisfied. The leader of the 
party, leaving to his followers the task of examining the 
hold, walked toward the group on the poop. They rose 
at his approach. 

“ Who are you? ” the Maratta asked. 

“ I am an officer in the English Company’s service,” 
Charlie said, “ as are these five natives. The other Eng- 
lishman is a soldier under my orders.” 

“ Good,” the Maratta said emphatically. “ Tulagi 
Angria will be glad to have you. When your people 
capture any of our men, which is not often, they hang 
them. Tulagi is glad to have people he can hang too.” 

After being stripped of any small valuables on their 
persons the captives were taken on board one of the 
pirate boats. A score of the Marattas remained in 
charge of the trader. Her head was turned north, and, 
accompanied by the four Maratta boats, she proceeded 
up the coast again. Another trader was captured on the 
way, but two others evaded the pirates by running into 
the port of Calicut. The trader was a slow sailer, and 
they were eight days before they approached Gheriah. 


THE PIRATES’ HOLD. 


163 


Early in the morning a heavy cannonade was heard in 
the distance, causing the greatest excitement among the 
Marattas. Every sail was hoisted, the sweeps got out, 
and leaving the trader to jog along in their rear, the four 
light craft made their way rapidly along the coast. The 
firing became heavier and heavier, and as it became light 
three large ships could be seen about two miles ahead, 
surrounded by a host of smaller craft. 

“ That’s a big fight, Mr. Charles,” Tim exclaimed. 
“ It reminds me of three big bulls in a meadow attacked 
by a host of little curs.” 

“ It does, Tim; but the curs can bite. What a fire 
they are keeping up! But those war-ships ought to 
thrash any number of them. Count the ports, I can see 
them now.” 

“ The biggest one,” Tim said, “ has got twenty-five.” 

“Yes; and the others eighteen and nine. They are 
two frigates, one of fifty and the other of thirty-six guns, 
and a sloop of eighteen. I can’t make out the colors, 
but I don’t think they are English.” 

“ They’re not English, yer honor,” Tim said confi- 
dently, “ or they would soon make an end of them var- 
mint that’s tormenting them.” 

The scene as the boats approached was very exciting. 
The three ships were pouring their broadsides without 
intermission into the pirate fleet. This consisted of ves- 
sels of all sizes, from the Jupitre and Restoration down to 
large rowing galleys. Although many were sunk and 
more greatly damaged by the fire of the Dutch, they 
swarmed round the great ships with wonderful tenacity, 
and while the larger vessels fought their guns against 
those of the men-of-war, the smaller ones kept, close to 
them, avoiding as much as possible their formidable 
broadsides, but keeping up a perpetual musketry fire at 
their bulwarks and tops, throwing stink-pots, and shoot- 
ing burning arrows through the ports and getting along- 
side under the muzzles of the guns and trying to climb 
up into the ports. 

The four newly arrived craft joined in the fray. 


164 WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 

“ This is mighty unpleasant, yer honor,” Tim said, as 
a shot from one of the Dutch men-of-war struck the craft 
they were in, crashing a hole through her bulwarks, and 
laying five or six of her crew upon the deck, killed or 
wounded by the splinters. “ Here we are in the middle 
of a fight in which we’ve no consarn whatever, and which 
is carried on without asking our will or pleasure; and we 
are as likely to be killed by a Christian shot as these 
haythen niggers. Hear them yell, yer honor. A fac- 
tion fight’s nothing to it. Look, yer honor, look! 
There’s smoke curling up from a hatchway of the big 
ship. If they haven’t set her afire! ” 

It was as Tim said. A cloud of black smoke was 
rising from the Dutch fifty-gun frigate. A wild yell of 
triumph broke from the Marattas. The fire of their 
guns upon her redoubled, while that from the man-of-war 
died away as the crew were called off to assist in extin- 
guishing the flames. Now the smaller boats pressed still 
more closely round her, and a rain of missiles was poured 
through the open ports. Several times the Marattas 
climbed on board, but each time were driven out again. 
The smoke rose thicker and thicker, and tongues of flame 
could be seen shooting up. 

“ She is doomed!” Charlie exclaimed. “Even if un- 
molested the crew could not extinguish the fire now. It 
has got too much hold. Ah! the other frigate is on 
fire too.” 

Fresh yells of triumph rose from the Marattas. On 
board the sloop every sail was hoisted in spite of the con- 
tinued fire of muskets and arrows, which killed many of 
the sailors employed. The Jupitrc , however, ran along- 
side her and grappled with her, and a furious combat 
could be seen proceeding on the decks. Meanwhile the 
flames mounted higher and higher on board the two 
frigates. The crew now could be seen leaping overboard 
from the ports, choosing any death rather than that by 
fire. It was but a choice. Many were drowned, the rest 
cut or shot down by the Marattas. Down came the 
Dutch flag, fluttering from the masthead of the sloop, and 


THE PIRATES’ HOLD. 


165 

the wild Maratta yell proclaimed that the victory was 
everywhere complete. The frigates were now a sheet of 
flames, and the Maratta craft drew away from them, until 
with two tremendous explosions their magazines blew up 
and they sank beneath the waters. 

“ I should scarcely have believed it possible,” Charlie 
said, “ that three fine ships of war, mounting 104 
guns, could be destroyed by a fleet of pirates, how- 
ever numerous. Well, Tim, there is no doubt that 
these natives can fight when well led. It is just as well, 
you see, that we did not attempt to offer any resistance in 
that clumsy craft we were on board.” 

“ You’re right there, yer honor. They would have 
aten us up in five minutes. It makes my heart bleed to 
think of the sailors of those two fine ships, I don’t be- 
lieve that a soul has escaped: but in the small one some 
may have been taken prisoners.” 

When the fight was over the craft in which were the 
captives ran alongside the flagship of the pirate leader, 
and the captain reported to him the capture he had 
made. Fortunately, Tulagi Angria was in a high state 
of delight at the victory he had just won, and instead of 
ordering them to be instantly executed, he told the cap- 
tain to take them on to Suwarndrug and to imprison 
them there until his arrival. , He himself with the rest of 
his fleet, and the captured Dutch sloop, sailed into 
Gheriah, and the craft in which Charlie and his com- 
panions were imprisoned continued her course to the 
island stronghold of the pirates. 

Suwarndrug was built on a rocky island. It lay within 
gunshot of the shore. Here, when Kanhagi Angria had 
first revolted from the authority of the Maratta kingdom, 
the ruler of the Deccan had caused three strong forts to 
be built in order to reduce the island fort. The pirates, 
however, had taken the initiative and had captured these 
forts as well as the whole line of seacoast, 120 miles in 
length, and the country behind, 20 or 30 miles broad, 
extending to the foot of the mountains. 

On their arrival at Suwarndrug the prisoners were 


i66 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


handed over to the governor, and were imprisoned in 
one of the casemates of the fort. The next day they 
were taken out and ordered to work, and for weeks they 
labored at the fortifications with which the pirates were 
strengthening their already naturally strong position. 
The labor was very severe, but it was a consolation to 
the captives that they were kept together. By Charlie’s 
advice they exerted themselves to the utmost, and thus 
succeeded in pleasing their masters and in escaping with 
but a small share of the blows which were liberally dis- 
tributed among other prisoners, native and European, 
employed upon the work. Charlie, indeed, was ap- 
pointed as a sort of overseer, having under him not only 
his own party but 30 others, of whom 20 were natives, 
and 10 English sailors, who had been captured in a mer- 
chantman. Although closely watched he was able to 
cheer these men by giving them a hope that a chance of 
escape from their captivity might shortly arrive. All 
expressed their readiness to run any risk to regain their 
liberty. 

From what he heard the pirates say, Charlie learned 
that they were expecting an attack from an expedition 
which was preparing at Bombay. The English sailors 
were confined in a casemate adjoining that occupied by 
Charlie and his companions. The guard kept over them 
was but nominal, as it was considered impossible that 
they could escape from the island, off which lay a large 
fleet of the pirate vessels. One morning upon starting 
to work they perceived by the stir in the fortress that 
something unusual was taking place, and presently, on 
reaching the rampart, they saw in the distance a small 
squadron approaching. They could make out that it 
consisted of a ship of forty-four guns, one of sixteen, and 
two bomb vessels, together with a fleet of native craft. 

The pirate fleet were all getting up sail. 

“ It’s a bold thing, Tim, to attack this fortress with 
only two ships, when the pirates have lately beaten a 
Dutch squadron mounting double the number of guns.” 

“ Ah, yer honor, but thin there is the Union Jack 


THE PIRATES* HOLD. 


16-J 

floating at the masthead. Do you think the creeturs 
don’t know the differ? ” 

“ But the Dutchmen are good sailors and fought well, 
Tim. I think the difference is that in the last case they 
attacked the Dutch, while in the present we are attack- 
ing them. It makes all the difference in the world with 
Indians. Let them attack you and they’ll fight bravely 
enough. Go right at them and they’re done for. Look, 
the pirate fleet are already sailing away.” 

“ And do you think the English will take the fort, yer 
honor? ” 

“ I don’t know, Tim. The place is tremendously 
strong, and built on a rock. There are guns which bear 
right down on the ships if they venture in close, while 
theirs will do but little damage to these solidly built walls. 
Suwarndrug ought to resist a fleet ten times as strong as 
that before us.” 

“ Shure thin, yer honor, and will we have to remain 
here all our lives, do ye think? ” 

“ No, Tim, I hope not. Besides I think that we ought 
to be able to render some assistance to them.” 

“And how will we do it, yer honor? You have but 
to spake the word and Tim Kelly is ready to go through 
fire and water, and so is Hossein; ye may be shure of 
that.” 

Seeing that the pirates were now mustering round their 
guns, and that the ships were ranging up for action, 
Charlie thought it prudent to retire. Hitherto no atten- 
tion had been paid to them, but ’twas probable enough* 
that when the pirates’ blood became heated by the fight, 
they would vent their fury upon their captives. He 
therefore advised not only the native officers but the 
sailors to retire to their casemates, which, as the guns 
placed in them did not command the position taken up 
by the ships were at present untenanted by any of the 
garrison. Presently the noise of guns proclaimed that 
the engagement had begun. The boom of the cannon of 
the ships was answered by an incessant fire from the far 
more numerous artillery of the fortress, while now and 


i68 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


then a heavy explosion close at hand told of the bursting 
of the bombs from the mortar vessels, in the fortress. 

Charlie had been thinking of the best measures to be 
taken to aid his friends ever since the squadron came in 
sight, and after sitting quietly for half an hour he called 
his officers around him. 

“ I am convinced,” he said, “ that if unaided from 
within, the ships will have no chance whatever of taking 
this fortress; but I think that we may help them. The 
upper fort, which contains the magazine, commands the 
whole of the interior. But its guns do not bear upon the 
ships where they are anchored. Probably the place at 
present is almost deserted. As no one pays any atten- 
tion to us, I propose, with Tim Kelly and the ten Eng- 
lish sailors, to seize it. We can close the gate and dis- 
charge the guns upon the defenders of the sea face. We 
could not, of course, defend it for five minutes if they 
attacked us ; but we would threaten to blow up the maga- 
zine if they did so. I propose that to-morrow morning 
you four and Hossein shall strip to your loin-clothes, and 
just before it becomes light go along the walls, and stop 
up, with pieces of wood, the touch-holes of as many of 
the cannon as you can. It would not do to use nails, 
even if we had them. No one will notice in the dark that 
you are not Marattas, and if you scatter about you may 
each manage to close up four or five guns at least. It 
is, I know, a desperate service, and if discovered you will 
be instantly killed. But if it succeeds the pirates, scared 
by discovering, just as our ships open fire, that a number 
of their guns are disabled, while we take them in the rear 
from the fort behind, may not improbably surrender at 
once. At any rate it’s worth trying, and I for one would 
rather run the risk of being killed, than be condemned to 
pass my life the slave of these pirates, who may at any 
moment cut our throats in case of any reverse happen- 
ing to them.” 

The four native officers at once stated their willingness 
to join in the plan. Hossein did not consider any reply 
necessary. With him it was a matter of course to do 


THE PIRATE'S HOLD. 


169 


whatever Charlie suggested. The latter then went into 
the next casemate and unfolded his plan to the sailors, 
who heartily agreed to make an effort for their liberty. 

The fire continued all day unabated, and at nightfall 
when a man as usual brought the captives food, he 
exultingly told them that no damage whatever had been 
effected by the guns of the fleet. In the evening the 
party cut a number of pieces of wood; these, measuring 
by the cannon in the casemate, they made of just suffi- 
cient size and length to push down with a slight effort, 
through the touch-hole. When pushed down to their 
full length they touched the interior of the cannon below, 
and were just level with the top of the touch-hole. Thus 
it would be next to impossible to extricate them in a 
hurry. They might, indeed, be broken and forced in by 
a solid punch of the same size as the touch-hole, but this 
would take time, and would not be likely to occur on the 
moment to the pirates. The skewers, for this is what 
they resembled, were very strong and tough, being made 
of slips of bamboo. The prisoners had all knives which 
they used for cutting their food. With these the work 
was accomplished. 

Toward morning the five natives, with the skewers 
hidden away in their loin-clothes and their turbans 
twisted in Maratta fashion, stole out from the casemate. 
Charlie had ordered, that, in case they should see that 
the ships had drawn off from the position they occupied 
on the preceding day, they should return without at- 
tempting to carry out their task. He himself, with Tim, 
joined the sailors, and, first ascending the ramparts and 
seeing that the ships were still at anchor abreast of the 
fort, he and his comrades strolled across the interior of 
the fort in the direction of the magazine. They did not 
keep together, nor did all move directly toward the posi- 
tion which they wished to gain. 

The place was already astir. Large numbers of the 
pirates thronged the interior. Groups were squatted 
round fires, busy in cooking their breakfasts, 'numbers 
were coming from the magazines with powder to fill up 


170 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


the small magazines on the walls, others again were 
carrying shot from the pyramids of missiles piled up here 
and there in the courtyard. None paid any attention to 
the English prisoners. Presently a dull boom was heard. 
There was a whistling sound, and with a thud, followed 
by a loud explosion, a bomb fell and burst in the open 
space. 

This was the signal for action. 

The pirates in a moment hurried down to the bastions 
overlooking the sea, and the Englishmen gathered in a 
group near the entrance to the magazine. Besides their 
knives they had no arms, but each had picked up two or 
three heavy stones. A minute after the explosion of the 
shell the cannonade of the ships broke out. It was 
answered by only a few guns from the fortress, and yells 
of astonishment and rage were heard to arise. A mo- 
ment later five natives ran up to the group of English- 
men. Their work had been well done, and more than 
three-fourths of the guns on the sea face had been ren- 
dered temporarily useless. 

Charlie gave the word, and with a rush they entered 
the upper fort. There were but two or three men there, 
who were just hurrying out with their bags of powder. 
These, before they realized the position, were instantly 
knocked down and bound. The gate of the fort was 
then shut and barred, and the party ran up to the bastion 
above. Not a single pirate was to be seen there. The 
six guns which stood there were at once loaded with 
grape, and a heavy discharge was poured into the 
crowded masses of pirates upon the bastions on the sea 
face. These, already greatly disturbed at finding that 
most of their guns had in some way been rendered use- 
less, were panic-stricken at this sudden and unexpected 
attack from the rear. Many of them broke from their 
guns and fled to shelter, others endeavored to turn their 
cannon to bear upon the magazine. 

The wildest confusion raged. At last some of their 
leaders rallied the men, and with yells of fury a rush was 
made toward the magazine. They were received with 


THE PIRATES* HOLD. 


171 

another discharge of grape, which took terrible effect. 
Many recoiled, but their leaders, shouting to them that 
the guns were discharged, and there were but a dozen 
men there, led them on again. 

Charlie leaped upon the edge of the parapet and 
shouted : 

“ If you attack us we will blow up the magazine. I 
have but to lift my hand and the magazine will be fired.” 

The boldest of the assailants were paralyzed by the 
threat. Confusion reigned throughout the fortress. 

The fleet kept up their fire with great vigor, judging 
by the feebleness of the reply that something unusual 
must be happening within the walls. The gunners, dis- 
heartened by finding their pieces useless, and unable to 
extract the wooden plugs, while Charlie’s men continued 
to ply them with grape, left their guns and with the 
greater portion of the garrison, disorganized and panic- 
stricken, retired into shelter. A shell from the ships 
falling on to a thatched building set it on fire. The 
flames rapidly spread, and soon all the small huts occu- 
pied by the garrison were in flames. The explosion of 
a magazine added to the terror of the garrison, and the 
greater portion of them, with the women and children, 
ran down to the water, and taking boats attempted to 
cross to Fort Goa, on the mainland. They were, how- 
ever, cut off by the English boats and captured. Com- 
modore James, who commanded the squadron, now 
directed his fire at Fort Goa, which was being feebly at- 
tacked on the land side by a Maratta force, which had 
been landed from the Maratta fleet accompanying the 
English ships, a few miles down the coast. The fort 
shortly surrendered ; but while the Marattas were march- 
ing to take possession, the governor, with some of his 
best men, took boat and crossed over to the island, of 
which, although the fire had ceased after the explosion 
of the magazine, the English had not taken possession. 

The fire from its guns again opened, and as Commo- 
dore James thought it probable that the pirates would 
in the night endeavor to throw in large reinforcements, 


172 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


he determined to carry it by storm. The ships opened 
fire upon the walls, and under cover of this half the sea- 
men were landed; these ran up to the gate and thun- 
dered at it with their axes. Charlie and his companions 
aided the movement by again opening a heavy fire of 
grape upon the guns which bore upon the sally-port, 
and when the gates were forced the garrison, utterly 
dispirited by the cross-fire to which they were subjected, 
at once laid down their arms. 


CHAPTER XVI. 

A TIGER HUNT. 

Commodore James was greatly astonished at the easy 
success which he had gained. The extraordinary cessa- 
tion of fire from the sea face and the sound of artillery 
within the walls had convinced him that a mutiny among 
the garrison must have taken place; but, upon entering 
the fort he was surprised indeed at being received with a 
hearty English cheer from a little body of men on the 
summit of an interior work. The gate of this was at 
once thrown open, and Charlie, followed by his party, 
advanced toward the commodore. 

“ I am Captain Marryat, sir, of the company’s service 
in Madras, and was captured three months ago by these 
pirates. When you attacked the place yesterday I 
arranged to effect a small diversion, and with the assist- 
ance of these five native officers, of my soldier servant 
here, and these ten men of the merchant service, we have, 
I hope, been able to do so. The native officers disabled 
the greater portion of the guns during the night, and 
when you opened fire this morning we seized this inner 
work, which is also the magazine, and opened fire upon 
the rear of the sea defenses. By dint of our guns and of 
menaces to blow up the place if they assaulted it, we 
kept them at bay until their flag was hauled down.” 

“ Then, sir,” Commodore James said warmly; “ I have 


A TIGER HUNT. 


*73 


to thank you most heartily for the assistance you have 
given. In fact it is you who have captured the fortress. 
I was by no means prepared to find it so strong, and, 
indeed, had come to the conclusion last night that the 
force at my command was wholly insufficient for its 
capture. Fortunately, I determined to try the effect of 
another day’s fire. But had it not been for you this 
would assuredly have been as ineffectual as the first. 
You have, indeed, performed a most gallant action, and 
I shall have great pleasure in reporting vour conduct to 
the authorities at home.” 

The sailors had now landed in considerable force. 
The garrison were disarmed and taken as prisoners on 
board the ships. Very large quantities of powder were 
found stored up, and strong parties at once began to 
form mines for the blowing up of the fortifications. This 
was a labor of some days; when they were completed 
and charged a series of tremendous explosions took 
place. Many of the bastions were completely blown to 
pieces ; in others the walls were shattered. The prisoners 
were again landed and set to work, aided by the sailors. 
The great stones which composed the walls were toppled 
over the steep faces of the rock on which the fort stood, 
and at the end of a fortnight the pirate hold of Suwarn- 
drug, which had so long been the terror of the Indian 
seas, had disappeared. 

The fleet returned to Bombay, for it was evidently 
wholly insufficient to attempt an assault on Gheriah, de- 
fended as that place would be by the whole pirate fleet, 
which had, even without the assistance of its guns, 
proved itself a match for a squadron double the strength 
of that under the command of Commodore James. The 
rejoicings at Bombay were immense, for enormous 
damage had been inflicted on the commerce of that place 
by this pirate hold, situated but eighty miles from the 
port. Commodore James and his officers were feted, 
and Charlie Marryat had his full share of honor; the 
gallant sailor everywhere assigning to him the credit of 
its capture. 


i74 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


Charlie would now have sailed at once for Madras, but 
the authorities wished him to remain, as Clive was shortly 
expected to arrive with a considerable force which was 
destined to act against the French at Hyderabad. The 
influence of Bussy with the nizam rendered this impor- 
tant province little better than a French possession, and 
the territory of our rivals upon the sea-coast had been 
immensely increased by tfce grant of the five districts 
known as the Northern Sirdars to Bussy. It was all that 
the English could do to hold their own around Madras, 
and it was out of the question for them to think of at- 
tempting singlehanded to dislodge Bussy from Hydera- 
bad. Between the nizam, however, and the Peishwar of 
the Deccan there was a long standing feud, and the com- 
pany had proposed to this prince to aid him with a strong 
English force in an attack upon Hyderabad. 

Colonel Scott had in the first place been sent out to 
command this expedition; but when Clive, wearied with 
two years’ life of inactivity in England, applied to be 
appointed to active service, the directors at once ap- 
pointed him governor of Fort St. David, and obtained 
for him the rank of lieutenant-colonel in the royal army. 
They directed him to sail at once for Bombay with three 
companies of the royal artillery, each ioo strong, and 
300 infantry recruits. Upon his arrival there he was to 
give Colonel Scott any assistance he required. That 
officer, however, had died before Clive arrived. 

Upon reaching Bombay Clive found that events had 
occurred in the south which would prevent the intended 
expedition from taking place. The French government 
had suddenly recalled Dupleix, the great man whose 
talent and statesmanship had sustained their cause. On 
his return to France, instead of treating him with honor 
for the work he had done for them, they even refused 
to repay him the large sums which he had advanced 
from his private fortune to carry on the struggle against 
the English, and Dupleix died in poverty and obscurity. 
In his place the French government had sent out a man 
by the name of Godchen, who was weak and wholly 


A TIGER HUNT. 


X 7S 


destitute of ability. At the time of his arrival the Eng- 
lish were hardly pressed, and a strong French fleet and 
force were expected on the coast. When, however, Mr. 
Saunders proposed to him a treaty of neutrality between 
the Indian possessions of the two powers he at once 
accepted it, and thus threw away all the advantages which 
Dupleix had struggled so hard to obtain. The result of 
this treaty, however, was that the English were unable 
to carry out their proposed 'alliance with the peishwar 
against the nizam and Bussy. 

Upon Clive’s arrival Charlie at once reported himself 
to him. For a time, however, no active duty was as- 
signed to him, as it was uncertain what steps would now 
be taken. Finally it was resolved that, taking advantage 
of the presence of Clive and his troops, and of a squadron 
which had arrived under Admiral Watson, the work 
commenced by Commodore James should be completed 
by the capture of Gheriah and the entire destruction of 
the pirate power. 

The peishwar had already asked them to aid him in 
his attack upon Angria, and Commodore James was now 
sent with the Protector and two other ships to reconnoiter 
Gheriah, which no Englishman then living had seen. 
The natives described it as of enormous strength, and it 
was believed that it was an Eastern Gibraltar. Com- 
modore James found the enemy’s fleet at anchor in the 
harbor. Notwithstanding this he sailed in until within 
cannon-shot, and so completely were the enemy cowed 
and demoralized by the loss of Suwarndrug that they did 
not venture out to attack him. 

After ascertaining the position and character of the 
defenses he returned, at the end of December, to Bom- 
bay, and reported that while exceedingly strong the 
place was by no means impregnable. The Maratta army 
under the command of Ramajee Punt marched to 
blockade the place on the land side; and on the nth 
of February, 1756, the fleet, consisting of four ships of 
the line, of 70, 64, 60, and 50 guns, a frigate of 44 and 
three of 20, a native ship called a grab, of 12 guns, and 


176 


WITH CLIVE IK INDIA. 


five mortar ships arrived before the place. Besides the 
seamen the fleet had on board a battalion of 800 Euro- 
peans and 1000 Sepoys. 

The fortress of Gheriah was situated on a promontory 
of rock a mile and a quarter broad, lying about a mile 
up a large harbor forming the mouth of a river. The 
promontory projects to the southwest on the right of the 
harbor on entering, and rises sheer from the water in 
perpendicular rocks fifty feet high. On this stood the 
fortifications. These consisted of two lines of walls, with 
round towers, the inner wall rising several feet above 
the outer. The promontory was joined to the land by 
a sandy slip, beyond which the town stood. On this 
neck of land between the promontory and the town were 
the docks and slips on which the pirate vessels were 
built or repaired, and ten of these, among which was the 
Derby , which they had captured from the company, lay 
moored side by side close by the docks when the fleet 
arrived off the place. 

Charlie Marryat had been sent by Clive as commis- 
sioner with the Maratta army. A party of Maratta horse- 
men came down to Bombay to escort him to Chaule, at 
which place the Maratta army were assembled for their 
march. He was accompanied by Tim and Hossein, who 
were, of course, like him, on horseback. A long day’s 
ride took them to their first halting place, a few miles 
from the foot of a splendid range of hills which rise like 
a wall from the low land, for a vast distance along the 
coast. At the top of these hills — called in India ghauts 
— lay the plateau of the Deccan, sloping gradually away 
to the Ganges, hundreds of miles to the east. 

“ Are we going to climb up to the top of them moun- 
tains, your honor? ” 

“ No, Tim, fortunately for our horses. We shall skirt 
their foot for 150 miles till we get behind Gheriah.” 

“ You wouldn’t think that a horse could climb them,” 
Tim said. “ They look as steep as the side of a house.” 

“ It many places they are, Tim, but you see there are 
breaks in them. At some points, either from the force 


A TIGER HUNT. 


177 


of streams or from the weather, the rocks have crumbled 
away, and the great slopes, which everywhere extend 
halfway up, reach the top. Zigzag paths are cut in these 
which can be traveled by horses and pack animals. 
There must be quantities of game,” Charlie said to the 
leader of the escort, “ on the mountain sides.” 

“ Quantities,” the Maratta said. “ Tigers and bears 
swarm there, and are such a scourge that there are no 
villages within miles of the foot of the hills. Even on 
the plateau above the villages are few and scarce near 
the edge so great is the damage done by wild beasts. 
But that is not all. There are numerous bands of 
Dacoits, who set the authority of the peishwar at defi- 
ance, plunder travelers and merchants going up and 
down, make raids into the Deccan, and plunder the low 
land nearly up to the gates of Bombay. Numerous ex- 
peditions have been sent against them, but the Dacoits 
know every foot of the hills. They have numerous im- 
pregnable strongholds on the rocks, which you can see 
rising sheer up hundreds of feet from among the woods 
on the slopes, and can, if pressed, shift their quarters and 
move fifty miles away among the trees, while the troops 
are in vain searching for them.” 

“ I suppose there is no chance of their attacking us,” 
Charlie said. 

“ The Dacoit never fights if he can help it, and then 
only when driven into a corner, or when there appears 
a chance of very large plunder. He will always leave 
a strong party of armed men, from whom nothing but 
hard blows is to be got, in peace.” 

The journey occupied five days and was most enjoy- 
able. The officer of the escort, as the peishwar’s agent, 
would have requisitioned provisions at each of the vil- 
lages, but Charlie insisted, under one pretense or another, 
on buying a couple of sheep or kids at each halting place 
for the use of his own party and the escort. For a few 
copper coins an abundant supply of fruit and vegetables 
was obtainable; and, as each night they spread their 
rugs under the shade of some overhanging tree and 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


I 7 8 

smoked their pipes lazily after the very excellent meal 
which Hossein always prepared, Charlie and Tim agreed 
that they had spent no pleasanter time in India than that 
occupied by their journey. 

Charlie was received with much honor by Ramajee 
Punt, and was assigned a gorgeous tent next to his own. 

“ People in England, Mister Charles,” said Tim that 
evening, “ turn up their noses at the thought of living 
in tents, but what do they know of them? The military 
tent is an uncomfortable thing, and as for the gypsy tent 
a dacent pig wouldn’t look at it. Now this is like a 
palace, with its carpet under foot and its sides covered 
with silk hangings, and its furniture fit for a palace. 
Father Murphy wouldn’t believe me if I told him about 
it on oath. If this is making war, yer honor, I shall be 
in no hurry for pace.” 

The Maratta force took up its position beleaguering 
the town on the land side for some weeks before the 
arrival of the fleet, Commodore James with his two ships 
blockading it at sea. There was little to do, and Charlie 
accepted with eagerness an offer of Ramajee Punt that 
they should go out for two or three days’^tiger hunting 
at the foot of the hills. 

“ Well, Mr. Charles,” Tim said when he heard of the 
intention, “ if you want to go tiger hunting, Tim Kelly 
is not the boy to stay behind. But, shure, yer honor, 
if the creeturs will lave ye alone why should you meddle 
with them? I saw one in a cage at Arcot, and it’s a baste 
I shouldn’t wish to see on a lone road on a dark night. 
It had a way of wagging its tail that made you feel un- 
comfortable like to the sole of yer boots, and after look- 
ing at me for some time, the baste opened its mouth and 
gave a roar that shook the whole establishment. It’s 
a baste safer to let alone than to meddle with.” 

“ But we shall be up on top of an elephant. We shall 
be safe enough there, you know.” 

“Maybe, yer honor,” Tim said doubtfully; “but I 
mind me that when I was a boy me and my brother 
Peter was throwing sods at an old tom-cat of my 


A TIGER HUNT* 


179 


mother s who had stolen our dinners, and it ran up a wall 
ten feet high. Well, yer honor, the tiger is as big as a 
hundred tom-cats, and by the same token he ought to 
be able to run up a wall ” 

“A thousand feet high, Tim? He can’t do that; in- 
deed, I question whether he could run up much higher 
than a cat. We are to start this evening and shall be 
there by midnight. The elephants have gone on ahead.” 

At sunset the party started. It consisted of Ramajee 
Punt, one of his favorite officers, and a score of soldiers. 
An officer had already gone on to enlist the services of 
the men of two or three villages as beaters. A small 
but comfortable tent had been erected for the party and 
supper prepared. The native shikari or sportsman of 
the neighborhood had brought in the news that tigers 
were plentiful, and that one of unusual size had been 
committing great depredations, and had only the day 
before carried off a bullock into the thickets a mile from 
the spot at which they were encamped. 

“The saints preserve us!” Tim said when he heard 
the news; “ a cat big enough to carry off a mouse in her 
mouth as big as a bullock.” 

“ It seems almost impossible, Tim, but it is a fact that 
tigers can carry in their mouths full-sized bullocks for 
considerable distances, and that they can kill them with 
one stroke of their paw. However, they are not as 
formidable as you would imagine, as you will see 
to-morrow.” 

In the morning the elephants were brought out. 
Charlie took his place in the front of a howdah with 
Tim behind him. Three rifles were placed in the seat, 
and these Tim was to hand to his master as he dis- 
charged them. Ramajee Punt and his officer were also 
mounted on elephants, and the party started for their 
destination. 

“ It’s as bad as being at sea, Mr. Charles,” Tim said. 

“ It does roll about, Tim. You must let your body 
go with the motion just as on board ship. You will soon 
get accustomed to it.” 


l8o WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 

On reaching the spot, which was a narrow valley with 
steep sides running up into the hill, the elephants came 
to a stand. The mouth of the valley was some fifty 
yards wide, and the animal might break from the trees 
at any point. The ground was covered with high coarse 
grass. Ramajee Punt placed himself in the center, as- 
signing to Charlie the position on his right, telling him 
that it was the best post, as it was on this side the tiger 
had been seen to enter. Soon after they had taken their 
places a tremendous clamor arose near the head of the 
valley. Drums were beaten, horns blown, and scores of 
men joined in with shouts and howls. 

“ What on arth are they up to, Mr. Charles? ” 

“ They are driving the tiger this way, Tim. Now, sit 
quiet and keep a sharp lookout, and be ready to hand 
me a rifle the instant I have fired.” 

The noise increased and was plainly approaching. The 
elephant figeted uneasily. 

“ That baste has more sinse than we have,” said Tim; 
“ and would be off if that little black chap, astraddle of 
his neck, didn’t keep on patting his head.” 

Presently the mahout pointed silently to the bushes 
ahead, and Charlie caught sight for a moment of some 
yellow fur. Apparently the tiger had heard or scented 
the elephants, for it again turned and made up the valley. 
Presently a redoubled yelling, with the firing of guns, 
showed that it had been seen by the beaters. Ramajee 
Punt held up his hand to Charlie as a signal that next 
time the tiger might be expected. Suddenly there was 
a movement among the bushes, a tiger sprang out about 
halfway between Charlie’s elephant and that of Ramajee 
Punt. It paused for a moment on seeing them, and 
then, as it was about to spring forward, two balls struck 
it. It sprang a short distance, however, and then fell, 
rolling over and over. One ball had broken a foreleg, 
the other had struck it on the head. Another ball from 
Ramajee Punt struck it as it rolled over and over, and it 
lay immovable. 


A TIGER HUNT. 


181 


“Why didn’t you hand me the next rifle, Tim?” 
Charlie said sharply. 

“ It went clane out of my head altogether. To think, 
now, and you kilt it in a moment. The tiger is a poor 
baste anyhow. I’ve seen a cat make ten times as strong 
a fight for its life. Holy Moses! ” 

The last exclamation was called from Tim’s lips by 
a sudden jerk. A huge tiger, far larger than that which 
had fallen, had sprung up from the brushwood and 
leaped upon the elephant. With one forepaw he grasped 
the howdah, with the other clung to the elephant’s shoul- 
der an inch or two only behind the leg of the mahout. 
Charlie snatched the rifle from Tim’s hand and thrust 
the muzzle into the tiger’s mouth just as the elephant 
swerved around with sudden fright and pain. At the 
same moment the weight of the tiger on the howdah 
caused the girths to give way, and Charlie, Tim, and 
the tiger fell together on the ground. Charlie had pulled 
his trigger just as he felt himself going, and at the same 
moment he heard the crack of Ramajee Punt’s rifle. 
The instant they touched the ground Tim and Charlie 
cast themselves over and over two or three times and 
then leaped to their feet, Charlie grasping his rifle to 
make the best defense he could if the tiger sprang upon 
him. The creature lay, however, immovable. 

“It is dead, Tim,” Charlie exclaimed; “you needn’t 
be afraid.” 

“ And no wonder, yer honor, when I pitched head first 
smack on to his stomach. It would have killed a horse.” 

“ It might have done, Tim, but I don’t think it would 
have killed a tiger. Look there.” 

Charlie’s gun had gone off at the moment when the 
howdah turned around, and had nearly blown off a por- 
tion of the tiger’s head, while almost at the same instant 
the ball of Ramajee Punt had struck it in the back, 
breaking the spine. Death had, fortunately for Tim, 
been instantaneous. The tiger last killed was the great 
male which had done so much damage, the first, a female. 
The natives tied the legs together, placed long bamboos 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


182 

between them, and carried the animals off in triumph to 
the camp. The elephant on which Charlie had ridden 
ran some distance before the mahout could stop him. 
He was, indeed, so terrified by the onslaught of the tiger 
that it was not considered advisable to endeavor to get 
him to face another that day. Ramajee Punt, therefore, 
invited Charlie to take his seat with him on his elephant, 
an arrangement which greatly satisfied Tim, whose 
services were soon dispensed with. 

“ Pd rather walk on my own feet, Mister Charles, than 
ride any more on those great bastes. They’re uncom- 
fortable, anyhow. It’s a long way to fall if the saddle 
goes round, and next time one might not find a tiger 
handy to light on.” 

* Two more tigers were killed that afternoon, and, well 
pleased with his day’s sport, Charlie returned to the 
hunting camp. The next day Hossein begged that he 
might be allowed to accompany Charlie in Tim’s place, 
and as the Irishman was perfectly willing to surrender 
it, the change was agreed upon. The march was a longer 
one than it had been on the previous morning. A no- 
torious man-eating tiger was known to have taken up 
his abode in a large patch of jungle at the foot of an 
almost perpendicular wall of rock about ten miles from 
the place where the camp was pitched. The patch of 
jungle stood upon a steep terrace whose slopes were 
formed of bowlders, the patch being some fifty or sixty 
yards long and thirty deep. 

“ It is a nasty place,” Ramajee Punt said, “ to get him 
from. The beaters cannot get behind to drive him out, 
and the jungle is too thick to penetrate.” 

“ How do you intend to proceed?” Charlie asked. 

“ We will send a party to the top of the hill and they 
will throw down crackers. We have brought some 
rockets, too, which we will send in from the other side. 
We will take our places on our elephants at the foot of 
the terrace.” 

The three elephants took their posts at the foot of the 
bowlder-covered rise. As soon as they had done so the 


A TIGER HUNT. 183 

men at the top of the rock began to throw down numbers 
of lighted crackers, while from either side parties sent 
rockets whizzing into the jungle. For some time the 
tiger showed no signs of his presence, and Charlie began 
to doubt whether he could be really there. The shikaris, 
however, declared that he was certainly in the jungle. 
He had on the day before carried off a woman from 
a neighboring village, and had been traced to the jungle, 
around which a watch had been kept all night. Sud- 
denly, uttering a mighty roar, the tiger bounded from 
the jungle and stood at the edge of the terrace. Startled 
at his sudden appearance the elephants recoiled, shaking 
the aim of their riders. Three shots were, however, fired 
almost at the same moment, and the tiger with another 
roar bounded back into the jungle. 

“ I think,” the rajah said, “ that he is badly hit. Listen 
to his roarings.” 

The tiger for a time roared loudly at intervals. Then 
the sounds became lower and less frequent, and at last 
ceased altogether. In vain did the natives above shower 
down crackers. In vain were the rockets discharged 
into the jungle. An hour passed since he had last been 
heard. 

“ I expect that he’s dead,” Charlie said. 

“ I think so too,” Ramajee Punt replied; “ but one can 
never be certain. Let us draw off a little and take our 
luncheon. After that we can try the fireworks again. 
If he will not move then we must leave him.” 

“ But surely,” Charlie said, “ we might go in and see 
whether he’s dead or not.” 

“ A wounded tiger is a terrible foe,” the Ramajee 
answered. “ Better leave him alone.” 

Charlie, however, was anxious to get the skin to send 
home, with those of the others he had shot, to his 
mother and sisters. It might be very long before he 
had an opportunity of joining in another tiger hunt, and 
he resolved that if the tiger gave no signs of life when 
the bombardment of the jungle with fireworks recom- 
menced, he would go in and look for his body. 


184 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


CHAPTER XVII. 

THE CAPTURE OF GHERIAH. 

After having sat for an hour under the shade of some 
trees, and partaken of luncheon, the party again moved 
forward on their elephants to the jungle. The watchers 
declared that no sound whatever had been heard during 
their absence, nor did the discharge of fireworks, which 
at once recommenced, elicit the slightest response. After 
this had gone on for half an hour Charlie, convinced that 
the animal was dead, dismounted from his elephant. He 
had with him a heavy double-barreled gun of the rajah’s, 
and Hossein, carrying a similar weapon and a curved 
tulwar which was sharpened almost to a razor edge, pre- 
pared to follow immediately behind him. Three or four 
of the most courageous shikaris, with cocked guns, fol- 
lowed in Hossein’s steps. 

Holding his gun advanced before him, in readiness to 
fire instantly, Charlie entered the jungle at the point 
where the tiger had retreated into it. Drops of blood 
spotted the grass, and the bent and twisted brushwood 
showed the path that the tiger had taken. Charlie 
moved as noiselessly as possible. The path led straight 
forward toward the rocks behind, but it was not until 
within four or five yards of this that any sign of the tiger 
could be seen. Then the bushes were burst asunder, 
and the great yellow body hurled itself forward upon 
Charlie. The attack was so sudden and instantaneous 
that the latter had not even time to raise his rifle to his 
shoulder. Almost instinctively, however, he discharged 
both of the barrels, but was at the same moment hurled 
to the ground, where he lay crushed down by the weight 
of the tiger, whose hot breath he could feel on his face. 
He closed his eyes only to open them again at the sound 
of a heavy blow, while a deluge of hot blood flowed over 
him. He heard Hossein’s voice, and then became in- 
sensible. When he recovered he found himself lying 
with his head supported by Hossein outside the jungle. 


THE CAPTURE OF GHERlAH. 


i8 5 


“ Is he dead? ” he asked faintly. 

“ He is dead, sahib,” Hossein replied. “ Let the sahib 
drink some brandy and he will be strong again.” 

Charlie drank some brandy and water which Hossein 
held to his lips. Then the latter raised him to his feet. 
Charlie felt his limbs and his ribs. He was bruised all 
over, but otherwise unhurt, the blood which covered 
him having flowed from the tiger. 

One of the balls which he had fired had entered the 
tiger’s neck, the other had broken one of its forelegs, 
and Charlie had been knocked down by the weight of 
the animal, not by the blow of its formidable paw. 
Hossein had sprung forward on the instant, and with 
one blow of his sharp tulwar had shorn clear through 
skin and muscle and bone, and had almost severed the 
tiger’s head from its body. It was the weight upon him 
which had crushed Charlie into a state of insensibility. 
Here he had lain for four or five minutes before Hossein 
could get the frightened natives to return and assist him 
to lift the great carcass from his master’s body. Upon 
examination it was found that two of the three bullets 
first fired had taken effect. One had broken the tiger’s 
shoulder and lodged in his body, the other had struck 
him fairly on the chest and had passed within an inch 
or two of his heart. 

“ I thought,” Ramajee Punt said, as he viewed the 
body, “ that one of his legs must have been rendered 
useless. That was why he lay quiet so long in spite of 
our efforts to turn him out.” 

Charlie was too much hurt to walk, and a litter was 
speedily formed and he was carried back to the camp, 
where his arrival in that state excited the most lively 
lamentations on the part of Tim. 

The next morning he was much recovered, and was 
able in the cool of the evening to take his place in a 
howdah, and to return to the camp before Gheriah. 

A few days later the fleet made its appearance off the 
town, and the same evening Tulagi Angria rode up to 
Ramajee Punt’s camp. Charlie was present at the inter- 


i8 6 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


view, at which Angria endeavored to prevail on Ramajee 
Punt and Charlie to accept a large ransom for his fort, 
offering them each great presents if they would do their 
utmost to prevail on Admiral Watson and Colonel Clive 
to agree to accept it. Charlie said at once that he was 
sure it was useless, that the English had now made a 
great effort to put a stop to the ravages which he and 
his father before him had, for so many years, inflicted 
upon their commerce, and that he was sure nothing short 
of the total destruction of the fort and fleet would satisfy 
them. The meeting then broke up, and Charlie, sup- 
posing that Angria would immediately return, went back 
to his tent, where he directed Hossein at once to mingle 
with the men who had accompanied Angria and to find 
out anything that he could concerning the state of things 
in the fort. Hossein returned an hour later. 

“ Sahib,” he said, “ Ramajee Punt is thinking of cheat- 
ing the English. He is keeping Angria a prisoner. He 
says that he came into his camp without asking for a 
safe conduct, and that therefore he shall detain him. 
But this is not all. Angria has left his brother in com- 
mand of the fort, and Ramajee, by threatening Angria 
with instant execution, has induced him to send an order 
to deliver the fort at once to him. Ramajee wants, you 
see, sahib, to get all the plunder of the fort for himself 
and his Marattas.” 

“ This is very serious,” Charlie said, “ and I must let 
the admiral know at once what is taking place.” 

When it became dark Charlie, with Tim and Hossein, 
made his way through the Maratta camp down to the 
shore of the river. Here were numbers of boats hauled 
up on the sand. One of the lightest of these was soon 
got into the water and rowed gently out into the force 
of the stream. Then the oars were shipped and they 
lay down perfectly quiet in the boat, and drifted past the 
fort without being observed. When they once gained 
the open sea the oars were placed in the rowlocks, and 
half an hour’s rowing brought them alongside the fleet. 
Charlie was soon on board the flagship and informed 


THE CAPTURE OF GHERIAH. 187 

the admiral and Colonel Clive what Hossein had heard. 
It was at once resolved to attack upon the following 
day. The two 4 officers did not think it was likely that 
the pirates would, even in obedience to their chief’s 
orders, surrender the place until it had been battered by 
the fleet. 

The next morning the fort was summoned to sur- 
render. No answer was received, and as soon as the 
sea breeze set in, in the afternoon, the fleet weighed 
anchor and proceeded toward the mouth of the river. 
The men-of-war were in line on the side nearest to the 
fort to protect the mortar vessels and smaller ships from 
its fire. Passing the point of the promontory they stood 
into the river, and anchored at a distance of fifty yards 
from the north face of the fort. A gun from the ad- 
miral’s ship gave the signal, and a hundred and fifty 
pieces of cannon at once opened fire, while the mortar 
vessels threw shell into the fort and town. In ten minutes 
after the fire began a shell fell into one of Angria’s large 
ships and set her on fire. The flames soon spread to the 
others fastened together on either side of her, and in less 
than an hour this fleet, which had for fifty years been 
the terror of the Malabar coast, was utterly destroyed. 

In the meantime the fleet kept up their fire with the 
greatest vigor upon the enemy’s works, and before night- 
fall the enemy’s fire was completely silenced. No white 
flag, however, was hung up, and the admiral had little 
doubt that it was intended to surrender the place to the 
Marattas. As soon, therefore, as it became dark, Colonel 
Clive landed with the troops, and took up a position 
between the Marattas and the fort, where, to his great 
disappointment and disgust Ramajee Punt found him in 
the morning. The admiral again summoned the fort, 
declaring that he would renew the attack and give no 
quarter unless it was surrendered immediately. The 
governor sent back to beg the admiral to cease from hos- 
tilities until next day, as he was only waiting for orders 
from Angria to surrender. Angria declared that he had 
already sent the orders. 


i88 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


At four in the afternoon, therefore, the bombardment 
was renewed and in less than half an hour a white flag 
appeared above the wall. As, however, the garrison 
made no further sign of surrender, and refused to admit 
Colonel Clive with his troops when he advanced to take 
possession, the bombardment was again renewed more 
vigorously than ever. The enemy were unable to sup- 
port the violence of the fire, and soon shouted over the 
walls to Clive that they surrendered, and he might enter 
and take possession. He at once marched in, and the 
pirates laid down their arms and surrendered themselves 
prisoners. It was found that a great part of the fortifica- 
tions had been destroyed by the fire, but a resolute garri- 
son might have held the fort itself against a long siege. 
Two hundred guns fell into the hands of the captors, 
together with great quantities of ammunition and stores 
of all kinds. The money and effects amounted to a hun- 
dred and twenty thousand pounds, which was divided 
among the captors. The rest of Angria’s fleet, among 
them two large ships on the stocks, was destroyed. 
Ramajee Punt sent parties of his troops to attack the 
other forts held by the pirates. These, however, surren- 
dered without resistance, and thus the whole country 
which the pirates had held for seventy years fell again 
into the hands of the Marattas, from whom they had 
wrested it. 

Admiral Watson and the fleet then returned to Bom- 
bay in order to repair the damages which had been in- 
flicted upon them during the bombardment. There were 
great rejoicings upon their arrival there, the joy of the 
inhabitants, both European and native, being immense 
at the destruction of the formidable pirate colonies which 
had so long ravaged the seas. 

After the repairs were completed, the fleet with the 
troops which had formed the expedition were to sail for 
Madras. Charlie, however, did not wait for this, but, 
finding that one of the company’s ships would sail in the 
course of a few days after their return to Bombay, he 
obtained leave from Colonel Clive to take a passage in 


THE CAPTURE OF GHERIAH. 


189 


her and to proceed immediately to Madras. Tim and 
Hossein of course accompanied him, and the voyage 
down the west coast of India and round Ceylon was per- 
formed without any marked incident. 

When within but a few hours of Madras the barometer 
fell rapidly. Great clouds rose up upon the horizon, and 
the captain ordered all hands aloft to reduce sail. 

“We are in,” he said, “ for a furious tempest. It is 
the breaking up of the monsoon. It is a fortnight earlier 
than usual. I had hoped that we should have got safely 
up the Hoogly before it began.” 

Half an hour later the hurricane struck them, and for 
the next three days the tempest was terrible. Great 
waves swept over the ship, and every time that the cap- 
tain attempted to show a rag of canvas it was blown from 
the bolt ropes. The ship, however, was a stout one and 
weathered the gale. Upon the fourth morning the 
passengers, who had, during the tempest, been battened 
below, came on deck. The sky was bright and clear, 
and the waves were fast going down. A good deal of 
sail was already set, and the hands were at work to repair 
damages. 

“ Well, captain,” Charlie said to that officer, “ I 
congratulate you on the behavior of the ship. It has 
been a tremendous gale, and she has weathered it 
stoutly.” 

“ Yes, Captain Marryat, she has done well. I have 
only once or twice been out in so severe a storm since I 
came to sea.” 

“ And where are we now? ” Charlie asked, looking 
round the horizon. “ When shall we be at Madras? ” 

“Well,” the captain said with a smile, “I am afraid 
that you must give up all idea of seeing Madras just at 
present. We have been blown right up the bay, and are 
only a few hours’ sail from the mouth of the Hoogly. I 
have a far larger cargo for that place than for Madras, 
and it would be a pure waste of time for me to put back 
now. I intend, therefore, to go to Calcutta first, dis- 
charge and fill up there, and then touch at Madras on my 


190 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


way back. I suppose it makes no great difference to 
you.” 

“ No, indeed,” Charlie said. “ And I am by no means 
sorry of the opportunity of getting a glimpse of Calcutta, 
which I might never otherwise have done. I believe 
things are pretty quiet at Madras at present, and I have 
been so long away now that a month or two, sooner or 
later, will make but little difference.” 

A few hours later Charlie noticed a change in the color 
of the sea, the mud-stained waters of the Hoogly dis- 
coloring the Bay of Bengal far out from its mouth. The 
voyage up was a tedious one. At times the wind fell 
altogether, and, unable to stem the stream, the ship lay 
for days at anchor, the yellow tide running swiftly by it. 

“ The saints presarve us, Mr. Charles! did you ever see 
the like? ” Tim Kelly exclaimed. “ There’s another 
dead body floating down toward us, and that is the eighth 
I’ve seen this morning. Are the poor hathen craturs all 
committing suicide together?” 

“ Not at all, Tim,” Charlie said, “ the Hoogly is one of 
the sacred rivers of India, and the people on its banks, 
instead of burying their dead, put them into the river 
and let them drift away.” 

“ I calls it a bastly custom, yer honor, and I wonder it 
is allowed. One got athwart the cable this morning, and 
it frightened me nigh out of my sjnses, when I happened 
to look over the bow, and saw the thing bobbing up and 
down in the water. This is tadious work, yer honor, and 
I’ll be glad when we’re at the end of the voyage.” 

“ I shall be glad, too, Tim. We have been a fortnight 
in the river already, but I think there is a breeze getting 
up, and there is the captain on deck giving orders.” 

In a few minutes the ship was under way again and 
the same night dropped her anchor in the stream abreast 
of Calcutta. Charlie shortly after landed, and, proceed- 
ing to the company’s offices, reported his arrival and that 
of the four Sepoy officers. Hossein, who was not in the 
company’s service, was with him merely in the character 
of a servant. 


THE CAPTURE OF GHERIAH. 191 

As the news of the share Charlie had had in the cap- 
ture of Suwarndrug had reached Calcutta he was well 
received, and one of the leading merchants of the town, 
Mr. Haines, who happened to be present when Charlie 
called upon the governor, at once invited him warmly to 
take up his residence with him during his stay. Hospi- 
tality in India was profuse and general. Hotels were 
unknown, and a stranger was always treated as an hon- 
ored guest. Charlie, therefore, had no hesitation what- 
ever in accepting the offer. The four native officers 
were quartered in the barracks, and, returning on board 
ship, Charlie, followed by Tim and Hossein, and by some 
coolies bearing his luggage, was soon on his way to the 
bungalow of Mr. Haines. On his way he was surprised 
at the number and size of the dwellings of the merchants 
and officials, which offered a very strong contrast to the 
quiet and unpretending buildings around the fort of 
Madras. The house of Mr. Haines was a large one, and 
stood in a large and carefully kept garden. Mr. Haines 
received him at the door, and at once led him to his 
room, which was spacious, cool, and airy. Outside was 
a wide veranda, upon which, in accordance with the 
customs of the country, servants would sleep. 

“ Here is your bathroom/’ Mr. Haines said, pointing 
to an adjoining room. “ I think you will find everything 
ready. We dine in half an hour.” 

Charlie was soon in his bath, a luxury which in India 
every European indulges in at least twice a day. Then 
in his cool white suit, which at that time formed the 
regular evening dress, he found his way to the drawing 
room. Here he was introduced to the merchant’s wife 
and to his daughter, a girl of some thirteen years old, 
as well as to several guests who had arrived for dinner. 

The meal was a pleasant one, and Charlie, after being 
cooped up for some weeks on board ship, enjoyed it 
much. A dinner in India is to one unaccustomed to it 
a striking sight. The punkah waving slowly to and fro 
overhead drives the cool air which comes in through the 
open windows down upon the table. Each guest brings 


192 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


his own servant, who, either in white or colored robes, 
and in turbans of many different hues and shapes, ac- 
cording to the wearer’s caste, stands behind his master’s 
chair. The light is always a soft one, and the table richly 
garnished with bright-colored tropical flowers. 

Charlie was the hero of the hour, and was asked many 
questions concerning the capture of Suwarndrug, and 
also about the defense of Amb.ur, which, though now an 
old story, had excited the greatest interest through 
India. Presently, however, the conversation turned to 
local topics, and Charlie learned from the anxious looks 
and earnest tones of the speakers that the situation was 
considered a very serious one. He asked but fe\y ques- 
tions then; but after the guests had retired and Mr. 
Haines proposed to him to smoke one more quiet cigar 
in the cool of the veranda before retiring to bed, he took 
the opportunity of asking his host to explain to him the 
situation, with which he had no previous acquaintance. 

“ Up to the death of Ali Kerdy, the old viceroy of Ben- 
gal, on the 9th of April, we were on good terms with our 
native neighbors. Calcutta has not been, like Madras, 
threatened by the rivalry of a European neighbor. The 
French and Dutch, indeed, have both trading stations 
like our own, but none of us have taken part in native 
affairs. Ali Kerdy has been all-powerful, there have 
been no native troubles, and therefore no reason for our 
interference. We have just gone on, as for many years 
previously, as a purely trading company. At his death 
he was succeeded in the government by Suraja Dowlah, 
his grandson. I suppose in all India there is no prince 
with a worse reputation than this young scoundrel has 
already gained for himself for profligacy and cruelty. 
He is constantly drunk, and is surrounded by a crew of 
reprobates as wicked as himself. At the death of Ali 
Kerdy, Sokut Jung, another grandson of Ali, set up in 
opposition to him, and the new viceroy raised a large 
force to march against him. As the reputation of Sokut 
Jung was as infamous as that of his cousin it would have 
made little difference to us which of the two obtained 


THE CAPTURE OF GHERIAH. 


*93 


the mastery; within the last few days, however, circum- 
stances have occurred which have completely altered the 
situation. 

“ The town of Dacca was about a year ago placed 
under the governorship of Rajah Ragbullub, a Hindoo 
officer in high favor with Ali Kerdy. His predecessor 
had been assassinated and plundered by order of Suraja 
Dowlah, and when he heard of the accession of that 
prince he determined at once to fly, as he knew that his 
great wealth would speedily cause him to be marked out 
as a victim. He therefore obtained a letter of recom- 
mendation from Mr. Watts, the agent of the company 
at their factory at Cossimbazar, and sent his son Kis- 
sendas with a large retinue, his family and treasures, to 
Calcutta. Two or three days after his accession Suraja 
Dowlah dispatched a letter to Mr. Drake, our governor, 
ordering him to surrender Kissendas and the treasures 
immediately. The man whom he sent down arrived in 
a small boat without any state or retinue, and Mr. Drake, 
believing that he was an impostor, paid no attention to 
the demand, but expelled him from the settlement. Two 
days ago a letter came from the viceroy, or, as we gener- 
ally call him, the nabob, to Mr. Drake, ordering him 
instantly to demolish all the fortifications which he 
understood he had been erecting. Mr. Drake has sent 
word back assuring the nabob that he is erecting no new 
fortifications, but simply executing some repairs in the 
ramparts facing the river, in view of the expected war 
between England and France. That is all that has been 
done at present; but, seeing the passionate and overbear- 
ing disposition of this young scoundrel, there is no say- 
ing what will come of it.” 

“ But how do we stand here? ” Charlie asked. “ What 
are the means of defense, supposing he should take it 
into his head to march with the army which he has raised 
to fight against his cousin to the attack of Calcutta? ” 

“ Nothing could be worse than our position,” Mr. 
Haines said. “ Ever since the capture of Madras, nine 
years ago, the directors have been sending out orders 


194 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


that this place should be put in a state of defense. Dur- 
ing the fifty years which have passed peacefully here, the 
fortifications have been entirely neglected. Instead of 
the space round them being kept clear, warehouses have 
been built close against them, and the fort is wholly 
unable to resist any attack. The authorities of the com- 
pany here have done absolutely nothing to carry out the 
orders from home. They think, I am sorry to say, only 
of making money with their own trading ventures; and 
although several petitions have been presented to them 
by the merchants here, urging upon them the dangers 
which might arise at the death of Ali, they have taken no 
steps whatever, and, indeed, have treated all warnings 
with scorn and derision.” 

“ What force have we here? ” Charles asked. 

“ Only 174 men, of whom the greater portion are 
natives.” 

“ What sort of a man is your commander? ” 

“ We have no means of knowing,” Mr. Haines said. 
“ His name is Minchin. He is a great friend of the gov- 
ernor’s, and has certainly done nothing to counteract the 
apathy of the authorities. Altogether, to my mind, 
things look as bad as they possibly can.” 

A week later, on the 15th of June, a messenger arrived 
with the news that the nabob with 50,000 men was 
advancing against the town, and that in two days he 
would appear before it. All was confusion and alarm. 
Charlie at once proceeded to the fort, and placed his 
services at the disposal of Captain Minchin. He found 
that officer fussy and alarmed. 

“ If I might be permitted to advise,” Charlie said, 
“ every available man in the town should be set to work 
at once pulling down all the buildings around the walls. 
It would be clearly impossible to defend the place when 
the ramparts are on all sides commanded by the musketry 
fire of surrounding buildings.” 

“ I know what my duty is, sir,” Captain Minchin said, 
“ and do not require to be taught it by so very young 
an officer as yourself.” 


THE CAPTURE OF GHERIAH. 


J 95 


'‘Very well, sir,” Charlie replied calmly. „ “I have 
seen a great deal of service, and have taken part in the 
defense of two besieged towns; while you, I believe, have 
never seen a shot fired. However, as you’re in com- 
mand, you will, of course, take what steps you think fit; 
but I warn you that, unless those buildings are de- 
stroyed, the fort cannot resist an assault for twenty-four 
hours.” 

Then, bowing quietly, he retired, and returned to Mr. 
Haines’ house. That gentleman was absent, having 
gone to the governor’s. He did not come back until 
late in the evening. Charlie passed the time in en- 
deavoring to cheer up Mrs. Haines and her daughter, 
assuring them that, if the worst came to the worst, there 
could be no difficulty in their getting on board ship. 
Mrs. Haines was a woman of much common sense and 
presence of mind, and under the influence of Charlie’s 
quiet chat she speedily recovered her tranquillity. Her 
daughter Ada, who was a very bright and pretty girl, 
was even sooner at her ease, and they were laughing 
and chatting brightly when Mr. Haines arrived. He 
looked fagged and dispirited. 

“ Drake is a fool,” he said. “ Just as hitherto he has 
scoffed at all thought of danger, now he is prostrated 
at the news that danger is at hand. He can decide on 
nothing. At one moment he talks of sending messen- 
gers to Suraja Dowlah, to offer to pay any sum he may 
demand in order to induce him to retire; the next he 
talks of defending the fort to the last. We can get him 
to give no orders, to decide on nothing, and the other 
officials are equally impotent and imbecile.” 

On the 18th the army of the nabob approached. Cap- 
tain Minchin took his guns and troops a considerable 
distance beyond the walls and opened fire upon the 
enemy. Charlie, enraged and disgusted at the folly of 
conduct which could only lead to defeat, marched with 
them as a simple volunteer. The result was what he 
had anticipated. The* enemy opened fire with an im- 
mensely superior force of artillery. His infantry ad- 


196 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


vanced, and clouds of horsemen swept round the flanks 
and menaced the retreat. In a very few minutes Cap- 
tain Minchin gave the order to retire, and, abandoning 
their guns, the English force retreated in all haste to the 
town. 

Charlie had, on setting out, told Mr. Haines what was 
certain to occur, and had implored him to send all his 
valuables at once on board ship, and to retire instantly 
into the fort. Upon the arrival of the troops at the gate 
they found it almost blocked with the throng of fright- 
ened Europeans and natives flying from their houses 
beyond it to its protection. Scarcely were all the fugi- 
tives within and the gates closed when the guns of Suraja 
Dowlah opened upon the fort, and his infantry, taking 
possession of the houses around it, began a galling mus- 
ketry fire upon the ramparts. Captain Minchin re- 
mained closeted with the governor, and Charlie, finding 
the troops bewildered and dismayed, without leading or 
orders, assumed the command, placed them upon the 
walls, and kept up a vigorous musketry fire in reply to 
that of the enemy. 

Within all was confusion and dismay. In every spot 
sheltered from the enemy’s fire Europeans and natives 
were huddled together. There was neither head nor 
direction. With nightfall the fire ceased, but still Mr. 
Drake and Captain Minchin were undecided what steps 
to take. At two o’clock in the morning they summoned 
a council of war, at which Charlie was present, and it 
was decided that the women and children should at once 
be sent on board. There should have been no difficulty 
in carrying this into effect. A large number of mer- 
chantmen were lying in the stream opposite the fort, 
capable of conveying away in safety the whole of the 
occupants. Two of the members of the council had 
early in the evening been dispatched on board ship to 
make arrangements for the boats being sent on shore; 
but these cowardly wretches, instead of doing so, ordered 
the ships to raise their anchors and drop two miles 
farther down the stream. The boats, however, were sent 


THE CAPTURE OF GHER1AH. 


197 


up the river to the fort. The same helpless imbecility 
which had characterized every movement again showed 
itself. There was no attempt whatever at establishing 
anything like order or method. The water-gate was 
open, and a wild rush of men, women, and children took 
place down to the boats. 

Charlie was on duty on the walls. He had already 
said good-by to Mrs. Haines and her daughter, and, 
though he heard shouts and screams coming from the 
water-gate, he had no idea what had taken place until 
Mr. Haines joined him. 

“ Have you seen them safely off? ” Charlie asked. 

“ My wife has gone,” Mr. Haines said; “ my daughter 
is still here. There has been a horrible scene of con- 
fusion. Although the boats were amply sufficient to 
carry all, no steps whatever had been taken to secure 
order. The consequence was, there was a wild rush; 
women and children were knocked down and trampled 
upon. They leaped into the boats in such wild haste 
that several of these were capsized and numbers of people 
drowned. I kept close to my wife and child till we 
reached the side of the stream. I managed to get my 
wife into a boat and then a rush of people separated me 
from my daughter, and before I could find her again 
the remaining boats had all pushed off. Many of the 
men have gone with them, and among them, I am 
ashamed to say, several of the officers. However, I 
trust the boats will come up again to-morrow and take 
away the rest. Two have remained, a guard having 
been placed over them, and I hope to get Ada off to her 
mother in the morning.” 

Toward morning Mr. Haines again joined Charlie. 
“What do you think?” he said. “Those cowardly 
villains, Drake and Minchin, have taken the two boats 
and gone off on board ship! ” 

“ Impossible ! ” Charlie exclaimed. 

“ It is too true,” Mr. Haines said. “ The names of 
these cowards should be held as infamous as long as the 
English nation exists. Come now, we are just assem- 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


198 

bling to choose a commander. Mr. Peeks is the senior 
agent; but I think we shall elect Mr. Holwell, who is an 
energetic and vigorous man.” 

It was as Mr. Haines had expected. Mr. Holwell was 
elected and at once took the lead. He immediately 
assigned to Charlie the command of the troops. Little 
was done at the council beyond speaker after speaker 
rising to express his execration of the conduct of the 
governor and Captain Minchin. With daybreak the 
enemy’s fire recommenced. All day long Charlie hur- 
ried from post to post, encouraging his men and aiding 
in working the guns. Two or three times when the 
enemy showed in masses, as if intending to assault, the 
fire of the artillery drove them back, and up to nightfall 
they had gained but little success. The civilians, as well 
as the soldiers, had done their duty nobly, but the loss 
had been heavy from the fire of the enemy’s sharp- 
shooters in the surrounding buildings, and it was evident 
that, however gallant the defense, the fort could not 
much longer resist. All day long signals had been kept 
flying for the fleet, two miles below, to come up to the 
fort; but, although these could be plainly seen, not a ship 
weighed anchor. 


CHAPTER XVIII. 

THE “ BLACK HOLE ” OF CALCUTTA. 

At nightfall, when the fire of the enemy slackened, 
Charlie went to Mr. Holwell. 

“ It is impossible, sir,” he said, “ that the fort can hold 
out, for in another three or four days the whole of the 
garrison will be killed. The only hope of safety is for 
the ships to come up and remove the garrison, which 
they can do without the slightest danger to themselves. 
If you will allow me, sir, I will swim down to the ships 
and represent our situation. Cowardly and inhuman as 
Mr. Drake has proved himself, he can hardly refuse to 
give orders for the fleet to move up.” 


THE “BLACK HOLE” OF CALCUTTA. I99 

“I don’t know,” said Mr. Holwell; “after the way in 
which he has behaved there are no depths of infamy of 
which I believe him incapable. But you are my right 
hand here. Supposing Mr. Drake refuses, you could 
not return.” 

“ I will come back, sir,” Charlie answered. “ I will, 
if there be no other way, make my way along by the 
river bank. It is comparatively free of the enemy, as 
our guns command it. If you will place Mr. Haines at 
the corner bastion with a rope, he will recognize my 
voice, and I can regain the fort.” 

Mr. Holwell consented, and as soon as it was perfectly 
dark Charlie issued out at the water-gate, took off his 
coat, waistcoat, and boots, and entered the stream. The 
current was slack; but he had no difficulty in keeping 
himself afloat until he saw, close ahead of him, the lights 
of the ships. He hailed that nearest him. A rope was 
thrown and he was soon on board. Upon stating who 
he was a boat was at once lowered, and he was taken to 
the ship upon which Mr. Drake and Captain Minchin 
had taken refuge. Upon saying that he was the bearer 
of a message from the gentleman now commanding the 
fort he was conducted to the cabin, where Mr. Drake 
and Captain Minchin, having finished their dinner, were 
sitting comfortably over their wine with Captain Young, 
the senior captain of the company’s ships there. 

“ I have come, sir,” Charlie said to Mr. Drake, “ from 
Mr. Holwell, who has, in your absence, been elected to 
the command of the fort. He bids me tell you that our 
losses have been already very heavy, and that it is impos- 
sible that the fort can hold out for more than twenty-four 
hours longer. He begs you, therefore, to order up the 
ships to-night, in order that the garrison may embark.” 

“ It is quite out of the question,” Mr. Drake said 
coldly — “ quite. It would be extremely dangerous. 
You agree with me, Captain Young, that it would be 
most dangerous? ” 

“ I consider that it would be dangerous,” Captain 
Young said. 


200 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


“ And you call yourself,” Charlie exclaimed indig- 
nantly, “a British sailor! You talk of danger, and 
would desert 1000 men, women, and children, including 
200 of your own countrymen, and leave them at the 
mercy of an enemy! ” 

“ You forget whom you are speaking to, sir,” Mr. 
Drake said angrily. 

“ I forget nothing, sir,” Charlie replied, trying to 
speak calmly. “ Then, sir, Mr. Holwell has charged 
me that if — which, however, he could not believe for 
a moment to be possible — you refuse to move up the 
ships to receive the garrison on board, that you would 
at least order all the boats up, as these would be amply 
sufficient to carry them away. Even in the daytime 
there would be no danger for the ships, and at night, at 
least, boats might come up without being exposed to any 
risk whatever.” 

“ I shall certainly do nothing of the sort,” Mr. Drake 
said. “ The danger is even greater for the boats than 
for the ships.” 

“ And am I, sir, to return to the garrison of that fort 
with the news that you utterly desert them; that you 
intend to remain quietly here while they are sacrificed 
before your eyes? Is it possible that you are capable of 
such infamy as this? ” 

“Infamy!” exclaimed the three men, rising to their 
feet. 

“ I place you in arrest at once, for your insolence,” 
Mr. Drake said. 

“ I despise your arrest as I do yourself. I did not 
believe it possible,” Charlie said, at last giving vent to 
his anger and scorn; “ and England will not believe that 
three Englishmen so cowardly, so infamous as your- 
selves, are to be found. As for you, Captain Minchin, 
if ever after this I come across you, I will flog you puE- 
licly first and shoot you afterward like a dog if you dare 
to meet me. As for you, Mr. Drake — as for you, 
Captain Young — you will be doomed to infamy by 
the contempt and loathing which Englishmen will feel 


THE “BLACK HOLE” OF CALCUTTA. 


201 


when this deed is known. Cowards; base, infamous 
cowards ! ” 

Charlie stepped back to go. 

“Seize him!” Mr. Drake said, himself rushing for- 
ward. 

Charlie drew back a step, and then with all his strength 
smote the governor between the eyes, and he fell in 
a heap beneath the table. Then Charlie grasped a 
decanter. 

“ Now,” he said, “ if either of you hounds move a 
finger I’ll brain you.” 

The two officers stood paralyzed. Charlie walked to 
the door and sprang up the cabin stairs, and as he did 
so, heard shouts for assistance from behind. He gained 
the deck, walked quietly to the bulwark, and, placing his 
hand upon it, sprang over the side into the river. He 
swam to shore, and, climbing up the bank, made his way 
along it back to the fort, where he arrived without any 
misadventure. A fury of indignation seized all in the 
fort when the result of Charlie’s mission became known. 

With daybreak the attack recommenced, but the gar- 
rison all day bravely repulsed every attempt of the enemy 
to gain a footing. The fire from the houses was, how- 
ever, so severe that by nightfall nearly half the garrison 
were killed or wounded. All day the signals to the fleet 
were kept flying, but not a ship moved. All night an 
anxious watch was kept, in hopes that at the last moment 
some returning feeling of shame might induce the rec- 
reants to send up the boats of the ships. But the night 
passed without a movement on the river, and in the 
morning the fleet was seen still lying at anchor. 

The enemy recommenced the attack even more vigor- 
ously than before. The men fell fast, and, to Charlie’s 
great grief, his friend, Mr. Haines, was shot by a bullet 
as he was standing next to him. Charlie anxiously knelt 
beside him. 

“ It is all over with me,” he murmured. “ Poor little 
Ada! Do all you can for her, Marryat. God knows 
what fate is in store for her.” 


202 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


“ I will protect her with my life, sir,” Charlie said 
earnestly. 

Mr. Haines pressed his hand feebly in token of grati- 
tude, and two or three minutes later breathed his last. 

By midday the loss had been so heavy that the men 
would no longer stand to their guns. Many of the 
European soldiers broke open the spirit stores, and soon 
drank to intoxication. After a consultation with his 
officers Mr. Holwell agreed that further resistance was 
hopeless. The flag of truce was therefore hoisted, and 
one of the officers at once started for the nabob’s camp, 
with instructions to make the best terms he could for the 
garrison. When the gates were opened the enemy, 
seizing the opportunity, rushed in in great numbers, and, 
as resistance was impossible, the garrison laid down their 
arms. Charlie at once hurried to the spot where Ada 
and the only other European lady who had not escaped 
were anxiously awaiting news. Both were exhausted 
with weeping. 

“ Where is papa, Captain Marryat? ” Ada asked. 

Charlie knew that the poor girl would need all her 
strength for what she might have to undergo, and at 
once resolved that, for the present at least, it would be 
better that she should be in ignorance of the fate of her 
father. He therefore said that for the present Mr. 
Haines was unable to come, and had asked him to look 
after her. It was not until five o’clock that the nabob 
entered the fort. He was furious at hearing that only 
five lacs of rupees had been found in the treasury, as he 
had expected to become possessed of a vastly larger sum. 
Kissendas, the first cause of the present calamities, was 
brought before him; but the capricious tyrant, contrary 
to expectation, received him courteously and told him 
he might return to Dacca. The whole of the Eurasians, 
or half-castes, and natives found in the fort were also 
allowed to return to their homes. Mr. Holwell was then 
sent for, and, after the nabob had expressed his resent- 
ment at the small amount found in the treasury, he was 
dismissed, the nabob assuring him of his protection. 


THE “BLACK HOLE” OF CALCUTTA. 203 

Mr. Holwell returned to his English companions, who, 
146 in number, including the two ladies, were drawn up 
under the veranda in front of the prison. The nabob 
then returned to his camp. 

Some native officers went in search of some building 
where the prisoners could be confined, but every room 
in the fort had already been taken possession of by the 
nabob’s soldiers and officers. At eight o’clock they re- 
turned with the news that they could find no place 
vacant, and the officer in command at once ordered the 
prisoners into a small room, used as a guardroom for 
insubordinate soldiers, eighteen _ feet square. In vain 
they protested that it was impossible the room could 
contain them, in vain implored the officer to allow some 
of them to be confined in an adjoining cell. The wretch 
was deaf to their entreaties. He ordered his soldiers to 
charge the prisoners, and these, with blows of the butt- 
ends of the muskets and prods of the bayonets, were 
driven into the narrow cell. Tim Kelly had kept close 
to his master during the preceding days. The whole of 
the four native officers who had so distinguished them- 
selves under Charlie were killed during the siege. Hos- 
sein, who would fain have shared his master’s fortunes, 
was forcibly torn from him when the English prisoners 
were separated from the natives. 

The day had been unusually hot. The night was close 
and sultry, and the arched veranda outside further hin- 
dered the circulation of the air. This was still heavy 
with the fumes of powder, creating an intolerable thirst. 
Scarcely were the prisoners driven into their narrow cell, 
where even standing wedged closely together there was 
barely room for them, than cries for water were raised. 

“ Tim, my boy,” Charlie said to his companion, “ we 
may say good-by to each other now, for I doubt if one 
will be alive when the door is opened in the morning.” 

On entering Charlie, always keeping Ada Haines by 
his side, had taken his place against the wall farthest 
from the window, which was closed with iron bars. 

“ I think, yer honor,” Tim said, “ that if we could get 


204 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


nearer to the window we might breathe a little more 
easily.” 

“ Ay, Tim; but there will be a fight for life round that 
window before long. You and I might hold our own 
if we could get there, though it would be no easy matter 
where all are struggling for life; but this poor little girl 
would be crushed to death. Besides, I believe that what 
chance there is, faint as it may be, is greater for us here 
than there. The rush toward the window, which is be- 
ginning already, as you see, will grow greater and 
greater; and the more men struggle and strive, the more 
air they require. Let us remain where we are. Strip 
off your coat and waistcoat, and breathe as quietly and 
easily as you can. Every hour the crowd will thin, and 
we may yet hold on till morning.” 

The conversation had been held in a low voice. 
Charlie then turned to the girl. 

“How are you feeling, Ada?” he asked cheerfully. 
“ It’s hot, isn’t it? ” 

“ It is dreadful,” the girl panted, “ and I seem chok- 
ing from want of air; and oh, Captain Marryat, I am so 
thirsty! ” 

“ It is hot, my dear, terrible hot, but we must make the 
best of it; and I hope in a few days you will join your 
mamma on board ship. That will be pleasant, won’t it? ” 

“ Where is papa? ” the girl wailed. 

“ I don’t know where he is now, my child. At any 
rate we must feel very glad that he’s not shut up here 
with us. Now take your bonnet off and your shawl, and 
undo the hooks of your dress, and loosen everything 
you can. We must be as quiet and cheerful as possible. 
I’m afraid, Ada, we have a bad time before us to-night. 
But try to keep cheerful and quiet, and, above all, dear, 
pray God to give you strength to carry you through it, 
and to restore you safe to your mamma in a few days.” 

As time went on the scene in the dungeon became 
terrible. Shouts, oaths, cries of all kinds, rose in the air. 
Round the window men fought like wild beasts, tearing 
each other down, or clinging to the bars for dear life, 


205 


THE “BLACK HOLE” OF CALCUTTA. 

for a breath of the air without. Panting, struggling, 
crying, men sank exhausted upon the floor, and the last 
remnants of life were trodden out of them by those who 
surged forward to get near the window. In vain Mr. 
Holwell implored them to keep quiet for their own 
sakes. His voice was lost in the terrible din. Men, a 
few hours ago rich and respected merchants, now fought 
like maddened beasts for a breath of fresh air. In vain 
those at the window screamed to the guards without, 
imploring them to bring water. Their prayers and en- 
treaties were replied to only with brutal scoffs. 

Several times Charlie and Tim, standing together 
against the wall behind, where there was now room to 
move, lifted Ada between them, and sat her on their 
shoulders in order that, raised above the crowd, she 
might breathe more freely. Each time, after sitting 
there for a while, the poor girl begged to come down 
again, the sight of the terrible struggle ever going on 
at the window being too much for her, and when re- 
leased, leaning against Charlie, supported by his arm, 
with her head against his shoulder and her hands over 
her ears to shut out the dreadful sounds which filled the 
cell. Hour passed after hour. There was more room 
now, for already half the inmates of the place had suc- 
cumbed. The noises, too, had lessened, for no longer 
could the parched lips and throats utter articulate 
sounds. Charlie and Tim, strong men as they were, 
leaned utterly exhausted against the wall, bathed in 
perspiration, gasping for air. 

“ Half the night must be gone, Tim,” Charlie said, 
“ and I think, with God’s help, we shall live through it. 
The numbers are lessening fast, and everyone who goes 
leaves more air for the rest of us. Cheer up, Ada dear, 
’twill not be very long till morning.” 

“ I think I shall die soon,” the girl gasped. “ I shall 
never see papa or mamma again. You have been very 
kind, Captain Marryat, but it is no use.” 

“ Oh, but it is of use,” Charlie said cheerfully. u I 
don’t mean to let you die at all, but to hand you over 


206 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


to mamma, safe and sound. There, lay your head against 
me, dear, and say your prayers, and try and go off to 
sleep. ,, 

Presently, however, Ada’s figure drooped more and 
more, until her whole weight leaned upon Charlie’s arm. 

“ She has fainted, Tim,” he said. “ Help me to raise 
her well in my arms, and lay her head on my shoulder. 
That’s right. Now you’ll find her shawl somewhere 
under my feet; hold it up and make a fan of it. Now try 
to send some air into her face.” 

By this time not more than 50 out. of the 146 who 
entered the cell were alive. Suddenly a scream of joy 
from those near the window proclaimed that a native 
was approaching with some water. The struggle at the 
window was fiercer than ever. The bowl was too wide 
to pass through the bars, and the water was being spilt 
in vain; each man who strove to get his face far enough 
through to touch the bowl being torn back by his eager 
comrades behind. 

“ Tim,” Charlie said, “ you are now much stronger 
than most of them. They are faint from the struggles. 
Make a charge to the window. Take that little shawl 
and dip it into the bowl or whatever they have there, 
and then fight your way back with it.” 

“ I will do it, yer honor,” said Tim, and he rushed into 
the struggling group. Weak as he was from exhaustion 
and thirst, he was as a giant to most of the poor wretches 
who had been struggling and crying all night, and, in 
spite of their cries and curses, he broke through them 
and forced his way to the window. 

The man with the bowl was on the point of turning 
away, the water being spilt in the vain attempts of those 
within to obtain it. By the light of the fire which the 
guard had lit without Tim saw his face. 

“ Hossein,” he exclaimed, “ more water, for God’s 
sake ! The master’s alive yet.” 

Hossein at once withdrew, but soon again approached 
with the bowl. The officer in charge angrily ordered 
him to draw back. 


THE “BLACK HOLE” OF CALCUTTA. 


207 


“ Let the infidel dogs howl!” he said. “They shall 
have no more.” 

Regardless of the order Hossein ran to the window, 
and Tim thrust the shawl into the water at that moment 
when the officer, rushing forward, struck Hossein to the 
ground; a cry of anguish rising from the prisoners as 
they saw the water dashed from their lips. Tim 'made 
his way back to the side of his master. Had those who 
still remained alive been aware of the supply of water 
which he carried in the shawl they would have torn it 
from him; but none save those just at the window had 
noticed the act, and inside it was still entirely dark. 

“Thank God, yer honor, here it is,” Tim said; “and 
who should have brought it but Hossein. Shure, yer 
honor, we both owe our lives to him this time, for I’m 
sure I should have been choked by thirst before 
morning.” 

Ada was now lowered to the ground, and, forcing her 
... teeth asunder, a corner of the folded shawl was placed 
between her lips and the water allowed to trickle down. 
With a gasping sigh she presently recovered. 

“That is delicious!” she murmured. “That is 
delicious! ” 

Raising her to her feet Charlie and Tim both sucked 
the dripping shawl until the first agonies of thirst were 
relieved. Then, tearing off a portion in case Ada should 
again require it, Charlie passed the shawl to Mr. Hol- 
well, who, after sucking it for a moment, again passed 
it on to several standing round, and in this way rjiany 
of those who would otherwise have succumbed were en- 
abled to hold on until morning. 

Presently the first dawn of daylight appeared, giving 
fresh hopes to the few survivors. There were now only 
some six or eight standing by the window and a few 
standing or leaning against the walls around. The room 
itself was heaped high with the dead. 

It was not until two hours later that the doors were 
opened and the guard entered, and it was found that of 
the 146 Englishmen inclosed there the night before, but 


208 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


23 still breathed. Of these very few retained strength 
to stagger out through the door. The rest were carried 
out and laid in the veranda. When the nabob came 
into the fort in the morning he ordered Mr. Holwell to 
be brought before him. He was unable to walk, but 
was carried to his presence. The brutal nabob ex- 
pressed no regret for what had happened, but loaded 
him with abuse on account of the paucity of the treasure, 
and ordered him to be placed in confinement. 

The other prisoners were also confined in a cell. Ada, 
the only English female who had survived the siege, 
was torn, weeping, from Charlie’s arms, and conveyed 
to the zenana, or ladies’ apartments, of one of the nabob’s 
generals. 

A few days later the English captives were all con- 
veyed to Moorshedabad, where the rajah also returned, 
after having extorted large sums from the French and 
Dutch, and confiscated the whole of the property of the 
English in Bengal. 

The prospect was a gloomy one for the captives. That 
the English would in time return and extort a heavy 
reckoning from the nabob they did not doubt for a mo- 
ment. But nothing was more likely than that, at the news 
of the first disaster which befell his troops, the nabob 
would order his captives to be put to death. Upon the 
march up the country Charlie had, by his cheerfulness 
and good temper, gained the good will of the officer 
commanding the guard, and upon arriving *at their desti- 
nation he recommended him so strongly to the com- 
mander of the prison that the latter, instead of placing 
him in the apartment allotted to the remainder of the 
prisoners, assigned a separate room to him, permitting 
Tim, at his request, to occupy it with him. It was a 
room of fair size, in a tower on one of the angles of the 
walls. It had bars, but these did not prevent those be- 
hind them looking out at the country which stretched 
around. The governor of the prison, finding that 
Charlie spoke the language fluently, often came up to 
sit with him, conversing with him on the affairs of that 


THE “BLACK HOLE ” OF CALCUTTA. 209 

unknown country, England. Altogether they were 
fairly treated. Their food was plentiful, and beyond 
their captivity they had little to complain of. Over and 
over again they talked about the possibilities of effecting 
an escape, but, on entering the prison, they had noticed 
how good was the watch, how many and strong the doors 
through which they had passed. They had meditated 
making a rope and escaping from the window; but 
they slept on the divan, each with a rug to cover 
him, and these torn into strips and twisted would not 
reach a quarter of the way from their window to the 
ground, and there was no other material of which a rope 
could possibly have been formed. 

“ Our only hope,” Charlie said one day, “ is in Hos- 
sein. I am sure he will follow us to the death, and if 
he did but know where we are confined he would not, 
I am certain, rest night or day till he had opened a com- 
munication with us. See, Tim; there is my regimental 
cap, with its gold lace. Let us fasten it outside the bars 
with a thread from that rug. Of course we must remove 
it when we hear anyone coming.” 

This was speedily done, and for the next few days one 
or other remained constantly at the window. 

“Mr. Charles!” Tim exclaimed in great excitement, 
one day, “ there is a man I’ve been watching for the last 
half hour. He seems to be picking up sticks, but all 
the while he keeps getting nearer and nearer, and two 
or three times it seems to me that he has looked up in 
this direction.” 

Charlie joined Tim at the window. 

“ Yes, Tim, you are right. That’s Hossein, I’m pretty 
sure.” 

The man had now approached within two or three 
hundred yards of the corner of the wall. He was appar- 
ently collecting pieces of dried brushwood for firing. 
Presently he glanced in the direction of the window. 
Charlie thrust his arm through the bar and waved his 
hand. The man threw up his arm with a gesture which, 
to a casual observer, would have appeared accidental, 


210 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


but which the watchers had no doubt whatever was in- 
tended for them. He was still too far off for them to 
be able to distinguish his features, but they had not the 
least doubt that it was Hossein. 


CHAPTER XIX. 

A DARING ESCAPE. 

“ And what’s to be done next, Mister Charles? That’s 
Hossein, sure enough, but it don’t bring us much nearer 
to getting out.” 

“ The first thing is to communicate with him in some 
way, Tim.” 

“ If he’d come up to the side of the moat, yer honor 
might spake to him.” 

^That would never do, Tim. There are sure to be 
sentries on the walls of the prison. We must trust to 
him. He can see the sentries and will know best what 
he can do.” 

It was evident that Hossein did not intend doing any- 
thing at present, for still stooping, and gathering brush- 
wood, he gradually withdrew farther and farther from 
the wall. Then they saw him make his sticks into a 
bundle, put them on his shoulder, and walk away. Dur- 
ing the rest of the day they saw no more of Hossein. 

“ I will write,” Charlie said — “ fortunately I have a 
pencil — telling him that we can lower a light string down 
to the moat if he can manage to get underneath with a 
cord which we can hoist up, and that he must have two 
disguises in readiness.” 

“ I don’t think Hossein can read,” Tim said, “ any 
more than I can myself.” 

“ I dare say not, Tim, but he will probably have 
friends in the town. There are men who were employed 
in the English factory at Kossimbazar hard by. These 
will be out of employment and will regret the expulsion 
of the English. We can trust Hossein. At any rate, 


A DARING ESCAPE. 


2 1 1 


I will get it ready. Now the first thing we have to do 
is to loosen one of these bars. I wish we had thought 
of doing it before. However, the stonework is pretty 
rotten and wt shall have no difficulty about that. The 
first thing is to get a tool of some sort.” 

They looked around the room and for some time saw 
nothing which could in any way serve. The walls, floor, 
and wide bench running round upon which the cushions 
which served as their beds were laid, were all stone. 
There was no other furniture of any kind. 

“ Divil a bit of iron do I see in the place, Mister 
Charles,” Tim said. “ They don’t even give us a knife 
for dinner, but stew all their meats up into a smash.” 

“ There is something, Tim,” Charlie said, looking at 
the door. “ Look at those long hinges.” 

The hinges were of ornamented iron-work, extending 
half across the door. Upon one of the scrolls of this 
iron-work they set to work. Chipping a small piece of 
stone off an angle of the wall outside the window, with 
great difficulty they thrust this under the end of the 
scroll as a wedge. Another piece, slightly larger, was 
then pushed under it. The gain was almost impercepti- 
ble, but at last the piece of iron was raised from the 
woodwork sufficiently to allow them to get a hold of 
it with their thumbs. Then little by little they bent it 
upward until at last they could obtain a firm hold of it. 
The rest was comparatively easy. The iron was tough 
and strong, but by bending it up and down they suc- 
ceeded at last in breaking it off. It was the lower hinge 
of the door upon which they had operated, as the loss 
of a piece of iron there would be less likely to catch the 
eye of anyone coming in. They collected some dust 
from the corner of the room, moistened it and rubbed 
it on to the wood so as to take away its freshness of 
appearance; and they then set to work with the piece of 
iron, which was of a curved shape, about three inches 
long, an inch wide, and an eighth of an inch thick. Tak- 
ing it by turns they ground away the stone around the 
bottom of one of the bars. For the first inch the stone 


212 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


yielded readily to the iron, but below that it became 
harder and their progress was slow. They filled the hole 
which they had made with water to soften the stone 
and worked steadily away till night, when, to their great 
joy, they found that they had reached the bottom of the 
bar. They then enlarged the hole inward in order that 
the bar might be pulled back. Fortunately it was much 
decayed by age, and they had no doubt that by exerting 
all their strength together they could bend it sufficiently 
to enable them to get through. At the hour when their 
dinner was brought they had ceased their work, filled 
up the hole with dust collected from the floor, put some 
dust of the stone over it and smoothed it down, so that 
it would not have been noticed by anyone casually look- 
ing from the window. 

It was late at night before they finished their work. 
Their hands were sore and bleeding, and they were com- 
pletely worn out with fatigue. They had saved from 
their dinner a good-sized piece of bread. They folded 
up into a small compass the leaf from his pocketbook 
upon which Charlie had written in Hindustanee his letter 
to Hossein, and thrust this into the center of the piece 
of bread. Then Charlie told Tim to lie down and rest 
for three hours while he kept watch, as they must take 
it in turns all night to listen in case Hossein should 
come outside. The lamp was kept burning. 

Just as Charlie’s watch was over he thought he heard 
a very faint splash in the water below. Two or three 
minutes later he again thought he heard the sound. He 
peered out of the window anxiously, but the night was 
dark and he could see nothing. Listening intently, it 
seemed to him several times that he heard the same faint 
sound. Presently something whizzed by him, and, look- 
ing round, to his delight he saw a small arrow with a 
piece of very thin string attached. The arrow was 
made of very light wood. Round the iron point was 
a thick wrapping of cotton which would entirely deaden 
its sound as it struck a wall. It was soaked in water, 
and Charlie had no doubt that the sound he heard was 


A DARING ESCAPE. 


213 


caused by its fall into the moat after ineffectual trials to 
shoot through the window. Round the center of the 
arrow a piece of greased silk was wrapped. Charlie took 
this off, and found beneath it a piece of paper on which 
was written in Hindustanee: “ If you have a bar loosed, 
pull the string and haul up a rope; if not, throw the 
arrow down. I will come again to-morrow night.” 

Tim had by this time joined Charlie, and they speedily 
began to pull in the string. Presently a thicker string 
came into their hands. They continued to pull, and 
soon the end of a stout rope, in which knots were tied 
every two feet, came up to them. They fastened this to 
one of the bars and then took hold of that which they 
had loosened, and, putting their feet against the wall, 
exerted themselves to the utmost. The iron was tougher 
than they had expected, but they were striving for lib- 
erty, and, with desperate exertions, they bent it inward, 
until at last there was room enough for them to creep 
through. 

“ Can you swim, Tim? ” 

“Not a stroke, yer honor. Shure you should know 
that, when you fished me out of the water.” 

“ Very well, Tim; as I kept you up then ’twill be easy 
enough for me now to take you across the moat. I 
will go first, and when I get into the water will keep hold 
of the rope till you come down. Take off your boots, 
for they would be heard scraping against the wall. Be 
sure you make as little noise as possible, and lower your- 
self quietly into the water.” 

Charlie then removed his own boots, squeezed him- 
self through the bars, and, grasping the rope tightly, 
began to descend. He found the knots of immense 
assistance, for had it not been for them, unaccustomed 
as he was to the work, he would have been unable to 
prevent himself from sliding down too rapidly. The 
window was fully sixty feet above the moat and he was 
very thankful when at last he felt the water touch his 
feet. Lowering himself quietly into it, he shook the 
rope to let Tim know that he could begin his descent. 


214 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


Before Tim was halfway down Charlie could hear his 
hard breathing and muttered ejaculations to himself: 

“ Shure I’ll never get to the bottom at all, my arms 
are fairly breaking. I shall squash Mr. Charles if I fall 
on him.” 

“Hold your tongue, Tim!” Charlie said in a loud 
whisper. 

Tim was silent, but the panting and puffing increased, 
and Charlie swam a stroke or two away, expecting 
every moment that Tim would fall. The Irishman, how- 
ever, held on, but let himself into the water with a splash 
which aroused the attention of the sentry above, who 
instantly challenged. Tim and Charlie remained per- 
fectly quiet. Again the sentry challenged. Then there 
was a long silence. The sentry probably was unwilling 
to rouse the place by a false alarm, and the splash might 
have been caused by the fall of a piece of decayed stone 
from the face of the wall. 

“ Tim, you clumsy fellow,” whispered Charlie, “ you 
nearly spoiled all.” 

“ Shure, yer honor, I was kilt entirely, and my arms 
were pulled out of the sockets. Holy Mother, who’d 
have thought ’twould be so difficult to come down a rope ! 
The sailors are great men entirely.” 

“ Now, Tim, lie quiet; I will turn you on your back 
and swim across with you.” 

The moat was some twenty yards wide. Charlie 
swam across, towing Tim after him, and taking the 
greatest pains to avoid making the slightest splash. 
The opposite side was of stonework and rose six feet 
above the water. As soon as they touched the wall a 
stout rope was lowered to them. “ Now, Tim, you climb 
up first.” 

“ Is it climb up, yer honor? I couldn’t do it if it was 
to save my sowl. My arms are gone altogether, and 
I’m as weak as a child. You go, Mister Charles; I’ll 
hould on by the rope till morning. They can but 
shoot me.” 

“ Nonsense, Tim! Here, I will fasten the rope round 


A DARING ESCAPE. 215 

your body. Then I will climb up and we will pull you 
up after me.” 

In another minute Charlie stood on the bank and 
grasped the hand of his faithful follower. Hossein 
threw himself on his knees and pressed his master to 
him. Then he rose, and at a word from Charlie they 
hauled Tim to the top. The rope was taken off him, 
and noiselessly they made their way across the country. 
Not a word was spoken till they were at a considerable 
distance from the fort. 

“ Where are you taking us, Hossein?” Charlie asked 
at last. 

“ I have two peasants’ dresses in a deserted cottage 
a quarter of a mile away.” Not another word was 
spoken until they reached the hut, which stood at the 
end of a small village. When they had entered this 
Charlie first thanked, in the warmest terms, his follower 
for having rescued them. 

“ My life is my lord’s,” Hossein answered simply; “ he 
gave it me. It is his again whenever it is useful to him.” 

“ No, Hossein, the balance is all on your side now. 
You saved my life that night at Ambur; you saved it 
that night at Calcutta, for, without the water you 
brought us, I question whether we could have lived till 
morning. Now you have procured our freedom. The 
debt is all on my side now, my friend.” 

“ Hossein is glad that his lord is content,” the Ma- 
hommedan murmured; “ now what will my lord do?” 

“ Have you any place in the town to which we could 
go, Hossein?” 

“ Yes, sahib, I hired a little house. I was dressed as 
a trader. I have been here for two months, but I could 
not find where you were confined, although I have tried 
all means, until I saw your cap.” 

“ It was foolish of me not to have thought of it be- 
fore,” Charlie said. “ Well, Hossein, for a little time we 
had better take refuge in your house. They will not 
think of searching in the city, and as Calcutta is in their 
hands there is nowhere we could go. Besides, I must 


2l6 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


discover, if possible, where Miss Haines is kept a pris- 
oner, and rescue her if it can be done.” 

“ The white girl is in the zenana of Rajah Dulab 
Ram,” Hossein replied. 

“ Where is the rajah’s palace? ” 

“ He has one in the city, one at Ajervam, twenty miles 
from here. I do not know at which she is lodged.” 

“ We must find that out presently,” Charlie said. “ It 
is something to know she is in one of two houses. Now, 
about getting back into the town.” 

“ I have thought of that,” Hossein said. “ I have 
bought a quantity of plantains and two large baskets. 
After the gates are opened you will go boldly in with the 
baskets on your heads. No questions are asked of the 
country people who go in and out. I have some stain 
here which will darken your skins. I will go in first in 
my merchant’s dress which I have here. I will stop a 
little way inside the gate, and when I see you coming 
will walk on. Do you follow me a little behind. My 
house is in a quiet street. When I reach the door, do 
you come up and offer to sell me plantains. If there are 
people about I shall bargain with you until I see that no 
one is noticing us. Then you can enter. If none are 
about you can follow me straight in.” 

Hossein now set about the disguises. A light was 
struck, and both Tim and Charlie were shaved up to the 
line which the turban would cover. Charlie’s whiskers, 
which were somewhat faint, as he was still under twenty- 
one years old, gave but little trouble. Tim, however, 
grumbled at parting with his much more bushy appen- 
dages. The shaven part of the heads, necks, and faces 
were then rubbed with a dark fluid, as were the arms and 
legs. They were next wrapped in dark blue clothes in 
peasant fashion and turbans wound round their heads. 
Hossein then, examining them critically, announced that 
they would pass muster anywhere. 

“ I feel mighty quare,” Tim exclaimed; “ and it seems 
to me downright ondacent to be walking about with my 
naked legs.” 


A DARING ESCAPE. 


217 


Charlie laughed. “ Why, Tim, you are accustomed 
to see thousands of men every day with nothing on but a 
loin-cloth.” 

“ Yes, yer honor, but then they’re hathens, and it 
seems natural for them to do so; but for a dacent boy to 
go walking about in the streets with a thing on which 
covers no more than his shirt, is onnatural altogether. 
Mother of Moses, what a shindy there would be in the 
streets of Cork if I were to show myself in such a state ! ” 

Charlie now lay down for a sleep till morning, while 
Tim, who had had three hours’ repose, settled himself 
for a comfortable chat with Hossein, to whom sleep ap- 
peared altogether unnecessary. Between Hossein and 
Tim there was a sort of brotherly attachment, arising 
from their mutual love of their master. During the two 
years which Tim had spent apart from all Europeans 
save Charlie, he had contrived to pick up enough of the 
language to make himself fairly intelligible; and since 
the day when Hossein had saved Charlie’s life at Ambur 
the warmest friendship had sprung up between the good- 
humored and warm-hearted Irishman and the silent and 
devoted Mahommedan. Tim’s friendship even extended 
so far as to induce a toleration of Hossein’s religion. He 
had come to the conclusion that a man who at stated 
times in the day would leave his employment, whatever 
it might be, spread his carpet, and be for some minutes 
lost in prayer, could not be altogether a hathen, espe- 
cially when he learned from Charlie that the Mahom- 
medans, like ourselves, worship one God. For the sake 
of his friend, then, he now generally excluded the Ma- 
hommedans from the general designation of heathen, 
which he still applied to the Hindoos. 

He learned from Hossein that the latter, having ob- 
served from a distance the Europeans driven into the cell 
at Calcutta, perceived at once how fatal the consequences 
would be. He had, an hour or two after they were con- 
fined there, approached with some water, but the officer 
on guard had refused to let him give it. He had then 
gone into the native town, but being unable to find any 


2l8 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


fruit there, had walked out to the gardens and had picked 
a large basketful. This he had brought as an offering to 
the officer, and the latter had then consented to his giv- 
ing one bowl of water to the prisoners, among whom, as 
he had told him, was his master. For bringing a second 
bowl contrary to his orders, Hossein had, as Tim saw, 
been struck down, but had the satisfaction of believing 
that his master and Tim had derived some benefit from 
his effort. On the following morning, to his delight, he 
saw them issue among the few survivors from the dun- 
geon, and had, when they were taken up the country, fol- 
lowed close behind them, arriving at the town on the 
same day as themselves. He had ever since been wan- 
dering round the prison. He had taken a house so close 
to it that he could keep a watch on all the windows fac- 
ing the town, and had day after day kept his eyes fixed 
upon these without success. He had at last found out 
from one of the soldiers that the white prisoners were 
confined on the other side of the prison, but until he saw 
Charlie’s cap he had been unable to discover the room in 
which they were confined. 

In the morning they started for the town. Groups of 
peasants were already making their way toward the gate 
with fruit and grain, and keeping near one of these par- 
ties, while sufficiently distant to prevent the chance of 
their being addressed, Charlie and Tim made their way 
to the gate, the latter suffering acutely in his mind from 
the impropriety of his attire. No questions were asked 
as they passed the guard. They at onc£ perceived Hos- 
sein standing a little way off, and followed him through 
the busy streets. They soon turned off into a quieter 
quarter, and stopped at a house in a street in which 
scarcely anyone was stirring. Hossein glanced round, 
as he opened the door, and beckoned to them to enter at 
once. This they did, and were glad, indeed, to set down 
the heavy baskets of plantains. 

“ My lord’s room is upstairs,” Hossein said, and led 
the way to a comfortably furnished apartment. “ I think 
that you might stay here for months unsuspected. A 


A DARING ESCAPE. 


219 


sweeper comes every day to do my rooms downstairs. 
He believes the rest of the house to be untenanted, and 
you must remain perfectly quiet during the half hour he 
is here. Otherwise, no one enters the house but myself.” 

Hossein soon set to work and prepared an excellent 
breakfast. Then he left them, saying that he would now 
devote himself to finding out whether the young white 
lady was in the town palace of the rajah. He returned 
in the afternoon. 

“ She is here, sahib,” he said. “ I got into conversa- 
tion with one of the retainers of the rajah, and by giving 
him some wonderful bargains in Delhi jewelry succeeded 
in opening his lips. I dare not question him too closely, 
but I am to meet him to-morrow to show him some more 
silver bracelets.” 

“ It is fortunate, Hossein, that you have some money, 
for neither Tim nor I have a rupee.” 

“Thanks to the generosity of my lord,” Hossein said, 
“ I am well supplied.” 

The next day Hossein discovered that the windows 
of the zenana were at the back of the palace, looking .nto 
the large garden. “ I hear, however,” he said, “ that the 
ladies of the zenana are next week going to the rajahs 
other palace. The ladies will, of course, travel in palam 
quins; but upon the road I might get to talk with one c-f 
the waiting-women, and might bribe her to pass a note 
into the hands of the white lady.” 

“ I suppose they will have a guard with them, Hos- 
sein?” 

“ Surely, a strong guard,” Hossein answered. > 

The time passed until the day came for the depi. ^ure 
of the rajah’s zenana. Charlie wrote a note as folloivs: 

“ My Dear Ada: I am free and am on the lookour for 
an opportunity to rescue you. Contrive to put a little bit 
of your handkerchief through the lattice-work of the 
window of your room, as a signal to us which it is. On 
the second night after your arrival we will be under 
with a ladder. If others, as is probable, sleep in your 


220 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


room, lie down without undressing more than you can 
help. When they are asleep get up and go to the win- 
dow and open the lattice. If any of them wake, say you 
are hot and cannot sleep, and wait quietly till they are off 
again. Then stretch out your arm and we shall know 
you are ready. Then we will put up the ladder, and you 
must get out and come to us as quickly as possible. 
Once with us you will be safe.” 

This note was wrapped up very small and put into a 
quill. As soon as the gates were open Hossein and his 
companions left the town and proceeded as far as a grove 
halfway between the town and the rajah’s country palace. 

“ They are sure to stop here for a rest,” Hossein said. 
“ I will remain here and try to enter into conversation 
with one of them. It will be better for you to go on for 
some distance and then turn aside from the road. When 
they have all passed, come back into the road again and 
I fell join you.” 

After waiting two hours Hossein saw two carts full of 
w%nen approaching, and had no doubt that these were 
the servants of the zenana. As he had expected, the 
drivers halted their cattle in the shade of the trees, and 
the women, delighted to enjoy their liberty, alighted from 
the carts and scattered in the grove. Presently one of 
‘hem, a middle-aged woman, approached the spot where 
Hossein had seated himself. Hossein drew out a large 
and f beautiful silver bracelet of Delhi workmanship. 

“Would you like to buy this?” he asked. 

“How should I buy it?” she said; “I am only a 
servant. It is very beautiful; ” and she looked at it with 
lodging eyes. 

“ I have two of them,” he said, “ and they will both be 
yours if you will do me a service.” 

‘What is it?” she asked. 

, “ They will be yours if you will give this quill to the 
little white girl who is in the zenana.” 
i The woman hesitated. “ It is dangerous,” she said. 

“ Not at all,” Hossein replied. “ It only gives her 


THE RESCUE OF THE WHITE CAPTIVE. 221 

news of a friend who she thought was dead. It will 
cheer her heart and will be a kind action. None can 
ever know it.” 

“ Give them to me,” the woman said, holding out her 
hand; “ I will do it.” 

“ No,” Hossein replied. “ I will give you one now, 
the other when I know that the note is delivered. I shall 
be watching to-morrow. If she places her handkerchief 
■in her lattice, I shall know that she has got it. When 
she does this I will bury the other bracelet a few inches 
in the ground just under that window. You can dig it 
up when you will.” 

“ I understand,” the woman said; “ you can trust me. 
We all like the white girl. She is very gentle, but very 
sad. I would gladly give her pleasure.” 

Hossein handed to..her the bracelet and the quill. She 
hid them in her dress and sauntered away. 

Hossein lay back as if taking a sleep, and so remained 
until, half an hour later, he heard the shouts of the drivers 
to the women to take their places in the carts. Then the 
sound of retreating wheels was heard. Hossein was 
about to rise when he heard the clatter of horses’ hoofs. 
Looking round he saw eight elephants, each carrying a 
closed pavilion, moving along the road escorted by a 
troop of horsemen. In the pavilions, as he knew, were 
the ladies of the rajah’s zenana. 


CHAPTER XX. 

THE RESCUE OF THE WHITE CAPTIVE. 

After the cavalcade had passed, Hossein rose to his 
feet and followed them, allowing them to go some dis- 
tance ahead. Presently he was joined by Charlie and 
Tim, and the three walked quietly along the road until 
within sight of the rajah’s palace. In front stood a great 
courtyard; behind, also surrounded by a high wall, was 
the garden. As this was always devoted to the zenana 


222 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


they had little doubt that the rooms of the ladies were on 
this side, and two hours later they were delighted at see- 
ing a small piece of white stuff thrust through one of the 
lattices. The woman had been faithful to her trust. 
Ada had received the letter. They then retired to a dis- 
tance from the palace, and at once set to work on the 
fabrication of a ladder. Hossein, followed by Charlie, 
who better enacted the part than Tim, went into a village 
and purchased four long bamboo poles, saying he wanted 
them for the carrying of burdens. Charlie placed these 
on his shoulder and followed Hossein. 

When they arrived at the grove they set to work, hav- 
ing brought with them all the necessary materials. The 
bamboos were spliced together two and two, and while 
Charlie and Tim set to to bore holes in these, Hossein 
chopped down a young tree, and cutting it into lengths 
prepared the rungs. It took them all that evening and 
the greater part of the next day before they had satis- 
factorily accomplished their work. They had then a 
ladder thirty feet long, the height which they judged the 
window to be above the terrace below. It was strong 
and at the same time light. They waited until darkness 
had completely fallen, and then taking their ladder went 
round to the back of the garden. They mounted the 
wall, and sitting on the top dragged the ladder after 
them and lowered it on the other side. It was of equal 
thickness the whole length, and could therefore be used 
indifferently either way. They waited patiently until 
they saw the lights in the zenana windows extinguished. 
Then they crept quietly up and placed the ladder under 
the window at which the signal had been shown, and 
found that their calculations were correct, and that it 
reached to a few inches below the sill. 

Half an hour later the lattice above opened. They 
heard a murmur of voices, and then all was quiet again. 
After a few minutes Charlie climbed noiselessly up the 
ladder, and just as he reached the top an arm was 
stretched out above him, and a moment afterward Ada’s 
face appeared. 


THE RESCUE OF THE WHITE CAPTIVE. 223 

“ I ani here, dear,” he said in a whisper; “ lean out 
and I will take you.” 

The girl stretched out over the window. Charlie took 
her in his arms and lifted her lightly out, and then slowly 
descended the ladder. No sooner did he touch the 
ground than they hurried away, Ada sobbing with ex- 
citement and pleasure on Charlie’s shoulder, Tim and 
Hossein bearing the ladder; Hossein having already 
carried out his promise of concealing the second bracelet 
under the window. In a few minutes they had safely 
surmounted the wall, and hurried across the country 
with all speed. 

Before leaving the town Hossein had . purchased a 
cart with two bullocks, and had hired a man, who was 
recommended to him by one of his coreligionists there 
as one upon whose fidelity he could rely. This cart was 
awaiting them at a grove. Paying them the amount 
stipulated, Hossein took the ox-goad and started the 
bullocks, Tim walking beside him, while Charlie and 
Ada took their places in the cart. They were sure that a 
hot pursuit would be set up. The rage of the nabob at 
the escape of Charlie and his servant had been extreme, 
and the whole country had been scoured by parties of 
horsemen, and they were sure that the rajah would use 
every possible means to discover Ada before he ventured 
to report to the nabob that the prisoner committed to his 
charge had escaped. 

“ Of course I can’t see you very well,” Ada said, “ but 
I should not have known you in the least.” 

“ No, I am got up like a peasant,” Charlie answered. 
“ We shall have to dress you so before morning. We 
have got things here for you.” 

“ Oh, how delighted I was,” Ada exclaimed, “ when I 
got your note ! I found it so difficult to keep on looking- 
sad and hopeless when I could have sung for joy. I had 
been so miserable. There seemed no hope, and they 
said some day I should be sent to the nabob’s zenana — 
wretches! How poor mamma will be grieving for me, 
and papa! Ah, Captain Marryat, he is dead, is he not? ” 


224 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


“Yes, my dear,” Charlie said gently; “he was killed 
by my side that afternoon. With his last breath he 
asked me to take care of you.” 

“ I thought so,” Ada said, crying quietly. “ I did not 
think of it at the time; everything was so strange and so 
dreadful that I scarcely thought at all. But afterward, 
on the way here, when I turned it all over, it seemed to 
me that it must be so. He did not come to me at all that 
afternoon. He was not shut up with us in that dreadful 
place, and everyone else was there. So it seemed to me 
that he must have been killed, but that you did not like 
to tell me.” 

“ It was better for him, dear, than to have died in that 
terrible cell. Thank God your mamma is safe, and some 
day you will join her again. We have news that the 
English are coming up to attack Calcutta. A party are 
already in the Hoogly, and the nabob is going to start 
in a few days to his army there. I hope in a very short 
time you will be safe among your friends.” 

After traveling for several hours they stopped. 
Charlie gave Ada some native clothes and ornaments, 
and told her to stain her face, arms, and legs, to put on 
the bangles and bracelets, and then to rejoin them. Half 
an hour later Ada took her seat in the cart, this time 
transformed into a Hindoo girl, and the party again pro- 
ceeded. They felt sure that Ada’s flight would not be 
discovered until daybreak. It would be some little time 
before horsemen could be sent off in all directions in pur- 
suit, and they could not be overtaken until between 
eleven and twelve. The wagon was filled with grain, on 
the top of which Charlie and Ada were seated. When 
daylight came Charlie alighted and walked by the cart. 
Unquestioned they passed through several villages. 

At eleven o’clock Hossein pointed to a large grove at 
some little distance from the road. “ Go in there,” he 
said, “ and stay till nightfall. Do you then come out and 
follow me. I shall go into the next village and remain 
there till after dark. I shall then start and wait for you 
half a mile beyond the village.” 


THE RESCUE OF THE WHITE CAPTIVE. 225 

An hour after the wagon had disappeared from sight 
the party in the grove saw ten or twelve horsemen gallop- 
ing rapidly along the road. An hour passed and the 
same party returned at an equal speed. They saw no 
more of them, and after it became dark they continued 
their way, passed through the village, which was three 
miles ahead, and found Hossein waiting a short distance 
beyond. Ada climbed into the cart and they again went 
forward. 

“ Did you put the rajah’s men on the wrong track, 
Hossein? We guessed that you had done so when we 
saw them going back.” 

“ Yes,” Hossein said. “ I had unyoked the bullocks 
and had lain down in the caravanserai when they arrived. 
They came in, and their leader asked who I was. I said 
that I was taking down a load of grain for the use of the 
army at Calcutta. He asked where were the two men 
and the woman who were with me. I replied that I knew 
nothing of them. I had overtaken them on the road, and 
they had asked leave for the woman to ride in the cart. 
They said they were going to visit their mother, who was 
sick. He asked if I was sure they were natives, and I 
counterfeited surprise and said that certainly they were, 
for which lie Allah will, I trust, be merciful, since it was 
told to an enemy. I said that they had left me just when 
we had passed the last village and had turned off by 
the road to the right, saying they had many miles to 
go. They talked together and decided that, as you 
were the only people who had been seen along the 
road, they must follow and find you, and so started at 
once, and I dare say they’re searching for you now miles 
away.” 

Their journey continued without any adventure until 
within a few miles of Calcutta. Hossein then advised 
them to take up their abode in a ruined mud hut at a dis- 
tance from the road. He had bought at the last village 
a supply of provisions sufficient to last them for some 
days. 

“ I shall now,” he said, “ go into the town, sell my 


226 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


grain, bullocks, and cart, and find out where the soldiers 
are.” 

As soon as the news of the nabob’s advance against 
Calcutta reached Madras, Mr. Pigot, who was now gov- 
ernor there, dispatched a force of 230 men under the 
orders of Major Kilpatrick. The party reached Falta on 
the Hoogly on the 2d of August, and there heard of the 
capture of Calcutta. By detachments who came down 
from some of the company’s minor posts the force was 
increased to nearly 400. But sickness broke out among 
them, and finding himself unable to advance against so 
powerful an army as that of the nabob, Major Kilpatrick 
sent to Madras for further assistance. When the news 
reached that place Clive had recently arrived with a 
strong force, which was destined to operate against the 
French at Hyderabad. 

The news, however, of the catastrophe at Calcutta at 
once altered the destination of the force, and on the 16th 
of October the expedition sailed for Calcutta. The force 
consisted of 250 men of the 39th Foot, the first regiment 
of the regular English army which had been sent out to 
India; 570 men of the Madras European force; 80 
artillerymen; and 1200 Sepoys. Of the 900 Europeans 
only 600 arrived at that time at the mouth of the Hoogly, 
the largest ship, the Cumberland , with 300 men on board, 
having grounded on the way. The remainder of the 
fleet, consisting of three ships of war, five transports, and 
a fire-ship, reached Falta between the nth and 20th of 
December. 

Hossein had returned from Calcutta with the news 
that the party commanded by Major Kilpatrick had been 
for some weeks at Falta, and the party at once set off 
toward that place, which was but forty miles distant. 
Traveling by night and sleeping by day in the woods, 
they reached Falta without difficulty, and learning that 
the force was still on board ship they took possession of 
a boat moored by the bank some miles higher up and 
rowed down. 

Great was their happiness indeed at finding them- 


THE RESCUE OF THE WHITE CAPTIVE. 227 

selves once more among friends. Here were assembled 
many of the ships which had been at Calcutta at the 
time it was taken, and to Ada’s delight she learned that 
her mother was on board one of these. They were soon 
rowed there in a boat from the ship which they had first 
boarded, and Ada, on gaining the deck, s^w her mother 
sitting among some other ladies, fugitives like herself. 
With a scream of joy she rushed forward, and with a cry 
of, “ Mamma, mamma! ” threw herself into her mother’s 
arms. It was a moment or two' before Mrs. Haines 
could realize that this dark-skinned Hindoo girl was her 
child, and then her joy equaled that of her daughter. It 
was some time before any coherent conversation could 
take place, and then Ada, running back to Charlie, drew 
him forward to her mother and presented him to her as 
her preserver, the Captain Marryat who had stayed with 
them at Calcutta. Mrs. Haines’ gratitude was extreme, 
and Charlie was soon surrounded and congratulated by 
the officers on board, to many of whom, belonging as 
they did to the Madras army, he was well known. Fore- 
most among them, and loudest in his expressions of de- 
light, was his friend Peters. 

“ You know, Charlie, I suppose,” he said presently, 
“ that you are a major now? ” 

“ No, indeed,” Charlie said. “ How is that? ” 

“ When the directors at home received the report of 
Commodore James that the fort of Suwarndrug had been 
captured entirely through you, they at once sent out your 
appointment as major. You are lucky, old fellow. 
Here are you a major, while I’m a lieutenant still. How- 
ever, don’t think I’m jealous, for I’m not a bit, and you 
thoroughly deserve all, and more than you’ve got.” . 

“And this is Tim,” Charlie said; “he has shared all 
my adventures with me.” 

Tim was standing disconsolately by the bulwark, shift- 
ing uneasily from foot to foot with the feeling of the ex- 
treme shortness of his garments stronger upon him than 
ever. 

Peters seized him heartily by the hand. “ I am glad to 


2 28 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


see you, Tim, very glad. And so you’ve been with 
Major Marryat ever since? ” 

“ For the Lord’s sake, Mr. Peters,” Tim said in an 
earnest whisper, “ git me a pair of trousers. I’m that 
ashamed of myself in the presence of the ladies that I’m 
like to drop.” 

“Come along below, Tim; come along, Charlie. 
There are lots of poor felloes have gone done and uni- 
forms are plentiful. We’ll soon rig you out again.” 

“ There is one more introduction, Peters. This is my 
man Hossein. He calls himself my servant; I call him 
my friend. He has saved my life twice, and has been of 
inestimable service. Had it not been for him, I should 
still be in prison at Moorshedabad.” 

Peters said a few hearty words to Hossein and they 
then went below, returning on deck in half an hour, 
Charlie in the undress uniform of an officer, Tim in that 
of a private in the Madras infantry. 

Mrs. Haines and Ada had gone below, where they 
could chat nnrestrained-.-hv.th e presence of .. others, and 
where an attempt could be made to restore Ada to her 
former appearance. Mrs. Haines had heard of her hus- 
band’s death on the day after the capture of Calcutta, 
Mr. Holwell having been permitted to send on board the 
ships a list of those who had fallen. She had learned 
that Ada had survived the terrible night in the dungeon, 
and that she had been sent up country a captive. She 
almost despaired of ever hearing of her again, but had 
resolved to wait to see the issue of the approaching cam- 
paign. Now that Ada was restored to her she deter- 
mined to leave for England in a vessel which was to sail 
in the course of a week with a large number of fugitives. 
Mr. Haines was a very wealthy man and had intended 
retiring altogether in the course of a few months, and 
she would therefore be in the enjoyment of an ample 
fortune in England. 

Among those on board the ships at Falta was Mr. 
Drake, who at once, upon hearing of Charlie’s arrival, 
ordered him to be arrested. Major Kjlpatrick, however, 


THE RESCUE OF THE WHITE CAPTIVE. 229 

firmly refused to allow the order to be carried out, say- 
ing that, as Charlie was under his orders as an officer in 
the Madras army, Mr. Drake had no control or author- 
ity over him. He could, however, upon Clive’s arrival 
lay the case before him. 

A week later Mrs. Haines and Ada sailed for England, 
the latter weeping bitterly at parting from Charlie, who 
promised them that, when he came home to England on 
leave, he would pay them a visit. He gave them his 
mother’s address; and Mrs. Haines promised to call upon 
her as soon as she reached England, and give her full 
news of him, adding that she hoped that his sisters, the 
youngest of whom was little older than Ada, would be 
great friends with her. 

Very slowly and wearily the time passed at Falta. The 
mists from the river were deadly, and of the 230 men 
whom Kilpatrick brought with him from Madras in July 
only about 30 remained alive, and of these but 10 were fit 
for duty when Clive at last arrived. The fleet left Falta 
on the 27th of December and anchored off Moiapur on 
the following day. The fort of Baj-baj, near this place, 
was the first object of attack, and it was arranged that 
while Admiral Watson should bombard with the fleet, 
Clive should attack it on the land side. 

Clive, who now held the rank of lieutenant colonel in 
the army, had manifested great pleasure at again meet- 
ing the young officer who had served under him at Arcot, 
and who had in his absence obtained a fame scarcely 
inferior to his own by the defense of Ambur and the 
capture of Suwarndrug. A few hours after Clive’s ar- 
rival Mr. Drake had made a formal complaint of the 
assault which Charlie had committed; but after hearing 
from Charlie an account of the circumstances Clive sent 
a contemptuous message to Mr. Drake, to the effect that 
Charlie had only acted as he should himself have done 
under the same circumstances, and that at the present 
time he should not think of depriving himself of the 
services of one gallant soldier, even if he had maltreated 
a dozen civilians. 


230 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


As Clive had been given paramount authority in 
Bengal, and as Mr. Drake had every reason to suppose 
that he himself would be recalled as soon as the circum- 
stances attending the capture of Calcutta were known 
in England, he was unable to do anything further in the 
matter, and Charlie landed with Clive on the 28th. The 
force consisted of 250 Europeans and 1200 Sepoys, who 
were forced to drag with them, having no draft animals, 
two field-pieces and a wagon of ammunition. The 
march was an excessively fatiguing one. The country 
was swampy in the extreme, and intersected with water- 
courses, and after a terribly fatiguing night march and 
fifteen hours of unintermittent labor, they arrived, at 
eight o’clock in the morning, at the hollow bed of a lake, 
now perfectly dry. It lay some ten feet below the sur- 
rounding country, and was bordered with jungle. In 
the wet season it was full of water. On the eastern and 
southern banks lay an abandoned village, and it was 
situated about a mile and a half from the fort of Baj-baj. 

Clive was ill and unable to see after matters himself; 
indeed, accustomed only to the feeble forces of Southern 
India, who had never stood for a moment against him in 
battle, he had no thought of danger. Upon the other 
hand the troops of the nabob, who had had no experi- 
ence whatever of the superior fighting powers of the 
Europeans, and who had effected so easy a conquest 
at Calcutta, flushed with victory, regarded their Euro- 
pean foes with contempt, and were preparing to anni- 
hilate them at a blow. Manak Chand, the general com- 
manding the nabob’s forces, informed by spies of the 
movements of the English troops, moved out with 
1500 horse and 2000 foot. So worn out were the 
British upon their arrival at the dried bed of the lake 
that, after detaching a small body to occupy a village 
near the enemy’s fort, from which alone danger was 
expected, while another took up the post in some jungles 
by the side of the main road, the rest threw themselves 
down to sleep. Some lay in the village, some in the 
shade of the bushes along the sides of the hollow. Their 


THE RESCUE OF THE WHITE CAPTIVE. 231 

arms were all piled in a heap sixty yards from the eastern 
bank. The two field-pieces stood deserted on the north 
side of the village. Not a single sentry was posted. 
Manak Chand, knowing that after marching all night 
they would be exhausted, now stole upon them and sur- 
rounded the tank on three sides. Happily he did not 
perceive that their arms were piled at a distance of sixty 
yards from the nearest man. Had he done so the 
English would have been helpless in his hands. After 
waiting an hour, to be sure that the last of the English 
were sound asleep, he ordered a tremendous fire to be 
opened on the hollow and village. 

Astounded at this sudden attack the men sprang up 
from their deep sleep and a rush was instantly made to 
their arms. Clive, ever coolest in danger, shouted to 
them to be steady/ and his officers well seconded his 
attempts. Unfortunately the artillerymen, in their sud- 
den surprise, instead of rushing to their cannon, joined 
the rest of the troops as they ran back to their arms, and 
the guns at once fell into the hands of the enemy. 
These had now climbed the eastern bank, and a fire 
from all sides was poured upon the troops huddled 
together in a mass. 

“ Major Marryat,” Clive said, “ if we fall back now, 
fatigued as the men are and shaken by this surprise, we 
are lost. Do you take a wing of the Sepoy battalion and 
clear the right bank. I will advance with the main body 
directly on the village.” 

“ Come on, my lads,” Charlie shouted in Hindustanee; 
“ show them how the men of Madras can fight.” 

The Sepoys replied with a cheer, advanced with a 
rush against the bank, drove the defenders at once from 
the point where they charged, and then swept round 
the tank toward the village, which Clive had already 
attacked in front. The loss of Charlie’s battalion was 
small, but the main body, exposed to the concentrated 
fire, suffered more heavily. They would not, however, 
be denied. Reaching the bank they poured a volley 
into the village and charged with the bayonet, just as 


232 WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 

Charlie’s men dashed in at the side. The enemy fled 
from the village and, taking shelter in the jungles 
around, opened fire. The shouts of their officers could 
be heard urging them again to sally out and fall upon the 
British; but at this moment the party which had been 
sent forward along the road, hearing the fray, came 
hurrying up and poured their fire into the jungle. Sur- 
prised at this re-enforcement the enemy paused as they 
were issuing from the wood, and then fell back upon 
their cavalry. The British artillerymen ran out and 
seized the guns and opened with them upon the retiring 
infantry. Clive now formed up his troops in line and 
advanced against the enemy’s cavalry, behind which their 
infantry had massed for shelter. Manak Chand ordered 
his cavalry to charge, but just as he did so a cannon-ball 
from one of Clive’s field-pieces passed close to his head. 
The sensation was so unpleasant that he at once changed 
his mind. The order for retreat was given, and the 
beaten army fell back in disorder to Calcutta. 

CHAPTER XXI. 

THE BATTLE OUTSIDE CALCUTTA. 

After the defeat of the enemy, who had surprised 
and so nearly annihilated him, Clive marched at once 
toward the fort of Baj-baj. On the way he met Major 
Kilpatrick, who was advancing, with a force which had 
been landed from the ships when the sound of firing was 
heard, to his assistance. 

The fleet had at daybreak opened a heavy fire upon 
the ramparts, and by the afternoon effected a breach. 
As his men were greatly fatigued and had had but an 
hour’s sleep, Clive determined upon delaying the attack 
until the morning, and a party of 250 sailors with two 
guns landed to take part in the storming. 

Many of these sailors had drunk freely before landing, 
and as night fell some of them strolled toward the fort. 
One of the number named Strahan moved along, unob- 


THE BATTLE OUTSIDE CALCUTTA. 233 

served by the enemy, to the foot of the breach, climbed 
up it, and came suddenly upon a party of its defenders 
sitting around a fire smoking. Strahan immediately 
fired his pistol among them with a shout of “ The fort is 
mine! ” and then gave three rousing cheers. The enemy 
leaped to their feet and ran off for a little way. Then, see- 
ing Strahan was alone, they rushed back and attacked 
him, firing as they came. Strahan, drawing his cutlass, 
defended himself vigorously for some time, but his 
weapon broke off at the hilt just as a number of Sepoys 
and men of the 39th, who had been awakened from 
their sleep by the shouting and firing, came running 
up. Re-enforcements of the garrison also joined their 
friends, but these were dispirited by the sudden and 
unexpected attack, and as the troops continued to stream 
up the breach the garrison were pressed, and, losing 
heart, fled through the opposite gate of the fort. The 
only casualty on the British side was that Captain Camp- 
bell, marching up at the head of the Sepoys, was mis- 
taken for an enemy by the sailors and shot dead. 
Strahan was in the morning severely reprimanded by the 
admiral for his breach of discipline, and retiring from 
the cabin said to his comrades: 

“ Well, if I am flogged for this here action, I will never 
take another fort by myself as long as I live.” 

Manak Chand was so alarmed at the fighting powers 
shown by the English in these two affairs that, leaving 
only a garrison of 500 men at Calcutta, he retired with 
his army to join the nabob at Moorshedabad. When 
the fleet arrived before the town the enemy surrendered 
the fort at the first shot, and it was again taken posses- 
sion of by the English. Major Kilpatrick was at once 
sent up with five ships and a few hundred men to capture 
the town of Hoogly, twenty miles further up. The de- 
fenses of the place were strong. It was held by 2000 
men, and 3000 horsemen lay around it. The ships, how- 
ever, at once opened a cannonade upon it and effected 
a breach before night, and at daybreak the place was 
taken by storm. 


234 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


Two days after the capture of Calcutta the news ar- 
rived that war had again been declared between England 
and France. It was fortunate that this was not known 
a little earlier; for had the French forces been joined to 
those under Manak Chand the reconquest of Calcutta 
would not have been so easily achieved. The nabob, 
furious at the loss of Calcutta and the capture and sack 
of Hoogly, at once dispatched a messenger to the gov- 
ernor of the French colony of Chandranagore to join 
him in crushing the English. The governor, however, 
had received orders that in the event of war being de- 
clared between England and France he was, if possible, 
to arrange with the English that neutrality should be 
observed between them; he therefore refused the nabob's 
request, and then sent messengers to Calcutta to treat. 



The Territory of Calcutta in 1757. 


The nabob had gathered an army of 10,000 foot and 
15,000 horse and advanced against Calcutta, arriving be- 
fore the town on the 2d of February, 1757. Clive’s force 
had now, owing to the arrival of some re-enforcements 
from Europe and the enlisting of fresh Sepoys, been 


THE BATTLE OUTSIDE CALCUTTA. 235 

raised to 700 European infantry, 100 artillerymen, and 
1500 Sepoys, with fourteen light field-pieces. 

The whole of the town of Calcutta was surrounded 
by a deep cut, with a bank behind, called the Maratta 
Ditch. A mile beyond this was a large salt-water lake, 
so that an enemy advancing from the north would have 
to pass within a short distance of Clive’s intrenched posi- 
tion outside the town, affording him great opportunities 
for a flank attack. On the day of their arrival Clive 
marched out, but the enemy opened a heavy fire and he 
retired. 

Clive determined to attack the enemy next morning. 
Admiral Watson, at his request, at once landed 560 
sailors, under the command of Captain Warwick of the 
Thunderer. A considerable portion of the enemy had 
crossed the Maratta Ditch and encamped within it. The 
nabob himself pitched his tent in the garden of Omi- 
chund (a native Calcutta merchant who, though in the 
nabob’s camp from motives of policy, sympathized en- 
tirely with the English), which occupied an advanced 
bastion within the Maratta Ditch. The rest of the army 
were encamped between the ditch and the salt-water lake. 

Clive’s intentions were to march first against the bat- 
tery which had played on him so effectually the day 
before, and having carried this, to march directly against 
the garden in which the nabob was encamped. The force 
with which he started at three o’clock in the morning 
of the 3d consisted of the 560 sailors, who drew with 
them six guns; 650 European infantry, 100 European 
artillery, and 800 Sepoys. Half the Sepoys led the ad- 
vance, the remainder covered the rear. Soon after day- 
break the Sepoys came in contact with the enemy’s 
advanced guard, placed in ditches along a road leading 
from the head of the lake to the Maratta Ditch. These 
discharged their muskets and some rockets and took to 
flight. One of the rockets caused a serious disaster. 
The Sepoys had their ammunition pouches open and 
the contents of one of these was fired by the rocket. 
The flash of the flame communicated the fire to the 


236 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


pouch of the next Sepoy, and so the flame ran along 
the line, killing, wounding, and scorching many, and 
causing the greatest confusion. Fortunately the enemy 
were not near, and Captain Eyre Coote, who led the 
British infantry behind them, aided Charlie, who led the 
advance, in restoring order, and the forward movement 
again went on. 

A new obstacle had, however, arisen. With the morn- 
ing a dense fog had set in, rendering it impossible for 
the troops to see even a few yards in advance of them. 
Still they pushed on, and, unopposed, reached a point 
opposite Omichund’s garden, but divided from it by the 
Maratta Ditch. Presently they heard the thunder of a 
great body of approaching cavalry. They waited quietly 
until the unseen horse had approached within a few yards 
of them, and then poured a mighty volley into the fog. 
The noise ceased abruptly, and was followed by that of 
the enemy’s cavalry in retreat. The fog was now so dense 
that it was impossible even to judge of the directions in 
which the troops were moving. Clive knew, however, 
that the Maratta Ditch was on his right, and, moving 
a portion of his troops till they touched this, he again 
advanced; his object being to gain a causeway which, 
raised several feet above the country, led from Calcutta 
across the Maratta Ditch into the country beyond. 
Toward this Clive now advanced, his troops firing as 
they marched, into the fog ahead of them, and the guns 
firing from the flanks obliquely to the right and left. 

Without experiencing any opposition Clive reached 
the causeway, and the Sepoys, turning to their right, ad- 
vanced along this toward the ditch. As they crossed 
this, however, they came in the line of fire of their 
own guns, the officer commanding them being ignorant 
of what was taking place in front and unable to' see a 
foot before him. Charlie, closely accompanied always 
by Tim, was at the head of his troops when the iron hail 
of the English guns struck the head of the column, 
mowing down numbers of men. A panic ensued and 
the Sepoys, terror-stricken at this discharge from a 


THE BATTLE OUTSIDE CALCUTTA. 


237 


direction in which they considered themselves secure, 
leaped from the causeway into the dry ditch and shel- 
tered themselves there. Charlie and his companion 
were saved by the fact that they were a few paces ahead 
of the column. 

“ Run back, Tim! ” Charlie said. “ Find Colonel Clive 
and tell him that we are being mowed down by our own 
artillery. If you can’t find him, hurry back to the guns 
and tell the officer what he is doing.” 

Charlie then leaped down into the ditch and endeav- 
ored to rally the Sepoys. A few minutes later Clive 
himself arrived, and the Sepoys were induced to leave 
the ditch and to form by the side of the causeway, along 
which the British troops were now marching. 

Suddenly, however, from the fog burst out the dis- 
charge of two heavy guns which the enemy had mounted 
on a bastion flanking the ditch. The shouts of the 
officers and the firing of the men indicated precisely the 
position of the column. The grape-shot tore through 
it, and 22 of the English troops fell dead and wounded. 
Immediately afterward another discharge followed, and 
the column, broken and confused, bewildered by the 
dense fog, and dismayed by the fire of these unseen guns, 
fell back. 

Clive now determined to push on to the main road, 
which he knew crossed the fields half a mile in front of 
him. The country was, however, here laid out in rice- 
fields, each inclosed by banks and ditches. Over these 
banks it was impossible to drag the guns, and the sailors 
could only get them along by descending into the ditches 
and using these as roads. The labor was prodigious, 
and the men, fatigued and harassed by this battle in the 
darkness, and by the fire from the unseen guns which 
the enemy continued to pour in their direction from either 
flank, began to lose heart. Happily, however, the fog 
began to lift. The flanks of the columns were covered 
by bodies of troops thrown out on either side, and after 
more than an hour’s hard work, and abandoning two 
of the guns which had broken down, Clive reached the 


23 $ 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


main road, again formed his men in columns, and ad- 
vanced toward the city. 

The odds were overwhelmingly against him. There 
were guns, infantry, and cavalry, both in front and behind 
them. The column pressed on in spite of the heavy fire, 
crossed the ditch, and attacked a strong body of the 
enemy drawn up on the opposite side. While it did so, 
a great force of the nabob’s cavalry swept down on the 
rear, and for a moment captured the guns. Ensign 
Yorke, of the 39th, faced the rear company about and 
made a gallant charge upon the horsemen, drove them 
back, and recaptured the guns. 

Clive’s whole army was now across the ditch, and it 
was open to him either to carry out his original plan of 
attacking Omichund’s garden or of marching forward 
into the fort of Calcutta. Seeing that his men were 
fatigued and worn out with six hours of labor and 
marching under the most difficult circumstances, he 
took the latter alternative, entered Calcutta, and then, 
following the stream, marched back to the camp which 
he had left in the morning. His loss amounted to 39 
Europeans killed and 18 Sepoys, 82 Europeans wounded 
and 35 Sepoys; the casualties being caused almost en- 
tirely by the enemy’s cannon. 

The expedition, from a military point of view, had been 
an entire failure. He had carried neither the battery 
nor Omichund’s garden. Had it not been for the fog 
he might have succeeded in both these objects; but, upon 
the other hand, the enemy were as much disconcerted 
by the fog as he was, and were unable to use their forces 
with any effect. Military critics have decided that the 
whole operation was a mistake; but although a mistake 
and a failure its consequences were no less decisive. 

The nabob, struck with astonishment at the daring and 
dash of the English in venturing with so small a force 
to attack him, and to march through the very heart of his 
camp, was seized with terror. He had lost 1300 men in 
the fight, among whom were 24 rajahs and lesser chiefs, 
and the next morning he sent in a proposal for peace. 


THE BATTLE OUTSIDE CALCUTTA. 


239 


A less determined man than Clive would, no doubt, 
have accepted the proposal. Calcutta was still besieged 
by a vastly superior force, supplies of all kinds were run- 
ning short, the attack of the previous day had beer a 
failure. He knew, however, the character of the Asiatics, 
and determined to play the game of bounce. The very 
offer of the nabob showed him that the latter was 
alarmed. He therefore wrote to him, saying that he had 
simply marched his troops through his highness’ camp 
to show him of what British soldiers were capable; but 
that he had been careful to avoid hurting anyone except 
those who actually opposed his progress. He concluded 
by expressing his willingness to accede to the nabob’s 
proposal and to negotiate. 

The nabob took it all in. If all this destruction and 
confusion had been wrought by a simple march through 
his camp, what would be the result if Clive were to take 
it into his head to attack him in earnest. He therefore 
at once withdrew his army three miles to the rear, and 
opened negotiations. He granted all that the English 
asked: that all the property and privileges of the com- 
pany should be restored; that all their goods should 
pass into the country free of tax; that all the company’s 
factories, and all moneys and properties belonging to it 
or its servants, should be restored or made good, and 
that permission should be given to them to fortify Cal- 
cutta as they pleased. 

Having agreed to these conditions the nabob, upon 
the nth of February, retired with his army to his capital, 
leaving Omichund with a commission to propose to the 
English a treaty of alliance, offensive and defensive, 
against all enemies. This proposal was a most accept- 
able one, and Clive determined to seize the opportunity 
to crush the French. His previous experiences around 
Madras had taught him that the French were the most 
formidable rivals of England in India. He knew that 
large re-enforcements were 011 their way to Pondicherry, 
and he feared that the nabob, when he recovered from 
his panic, might regret the conditions which he had 


240 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


granted, and might ally himself with the French in an 
effort again to expel the English. 

He therefore determined at once to attack the French. 
The deputies sent by M. Renault, the governor of 
Chandranagore, had been kept waiting from day to day 
under one pretense or another, and they now wrote to 
the governor that they believed that there was no real 
intention on the part of the English to sign an agreement 
of neutrality with him, and that they would be the objects 
of attack. M. Renault immediately sent messengers to 
the nabob, urging upon him that if the English were 
allowed to annihilate the French they would be more 
dangerous enemies than ever, and Suraja Dowlah, hav- 
ing now recovered from his terror, wrote at once to Cal- 
cutta, peremptorily forbidding any hostilities against the 
French. To show his determination he dispatched 1500 
men to Hoogly, which the English had abandoned after^ 
capturing it, with instructions to help the French if at- 
tacked, and he sent a lac of rupees to M. Renault to aid 
him in preparing for his defense. 

Clive, unwilling to face a coalition between the French 
and the nabob, was in favor of acceding to the nabob’s 
orders. The treaty of neutrality with the French was 
drawn up, and would have been signed had it not been 
for the obstinate refusal of Admiral Watson to agree to 
it. Between that officer and Clive there had never been 
any cordial feeling, and from the time of their first con- 
nection, at the siege of Gheriah, differences of opinion, 
frequently leading to angry disputes, had taken place be- 
tween them. Nor was it strange that this should be so; 
both were brave and gallant men; but while Watson had 
the punctilious sense of honor which naturally belongs 
to an English gentleman, Clive was wholly unscrupulous 
as to the means which he employed to gain his ends. 

Between two such men it is not singular that disagree- 
ments arose. Admiral Watson, impelled by feelings of 
personal dislike to Clive, often allowed himself to be car- 
ried to unwarranted lengths. On the occasion of the 
capture of Calcutta he ordered Captain Eyre Coote, who 


THE BATTLE OUTSIDE CALCUTTA. 


241 


first entered it, to hold it in the king’s name, and to dis- 
obey Clive’s orders, although the latter had been granted 
a commission in the royal army as lieutenant colonel, and 
was, moreover, the chief authority of the company in all 
affairs on land. Upon Clive’s asserting himself, Admiral 
Watson absolutely threatened to open fire upon his 
troops. Apparently from a sheer feeling of opposition 
he now opposed the signing of the treaty with the French, 
and several days were spent in stormy altercations. 

Circumstances occurred during this time which 
strengthened the view he took and changed those of 
Clive and his colleagues of the council. Just then the 
news reached Suraja Dowlah that Delhi had been cap- 
tured by the Afghans, and, terrified at the thought that 
the victorious northern enemy might next turn their arms 
against him, he wrote to Clive, begging him to march 
to his assistance, and offering a lac of rupees a month 
toward the expense of his army. On the same day that 
Clive received the letter he heard that Commodore James 
and three ships, with re-enforcements from Bombay, had 
arrived at the mouth of the Hoogly, and that the Cum- 
berland, with 300 troops, which had grounded on her way 
from Madras, was now coming up the river. 

Almost at the same moment he heard from Omichund, 
who had accompanied the nabob to Moorshedabad, that 
he had bribed the governor of Hoogly to offer no opposi- 
tion to the passage of the troops up the river. Clive was 
now ready to agree to Admiral Watson’s views, and to 
advance at once against Chandranagore; but the admiral 
again veered around and refused to agree to the measure 
unless the consent of the nabob was obtained. He wrote, 
however, himself, a threatening, and indeed violent, letter 
to the nabob, ordering him to give his consent. The 
nabob, still under the influence of his fears from the 
Afghans, replied in terms which amounted to consent, 
but the very next day, having received news which 
calmed his fears as to the Afghans, he wrote peremptorily 
forbidding the expedition against the French. This 
letter, however, was disregarded and the expedition pre- 


2\2 


WITH CLIVE TN INDIA. 


pared to start. It consisted of 700 Europeans and 1500 
native infantry, who started by land, 150 artillery pro- 
ceeding in boats, escorted by three ships of war and 
several smaller vessels under Admiral Watson. 

The French garrison consisted only of 146 French and 
300 Sepoys. Besides these were 300 of the European 
population and sailors of the merchant ships in port, who 
had been hastily formed into a militia. The governor, 
indignant at the duplicity with which he had been 
treated, had worked vigorously at his defenses. The set- 
tlement extended along the river banks for two miles. 
In the center stood the fort, which was a hundred and 
twenty yards square, mounting ten thirty-two pounder 
guns on each of its four bastions. Twenty-four pounder 
guns were placed on the ramparts, facing the river on 
the south. On an outlying work commanding the 
water-gate eight thirty-two pounders were mounted. 
M. Renault set to work to demolish all the houses within 
a hundred yards of the fort, and to erect batteries com- 
manding the approaches. He ordered an officer to sink 
several ships in the only navigable channel, about a 
hundred and fifty yards to the south of the fort, at a point 
commanded by the guns of one of the batteries. The 
officer was a traitor. He purposely sank the ships in 
such a position as to leave a channel through which the 
English ships might pass, and then, seizing his oppor- 
tunity, deserted to them. 

On approaching the town Clive, knowing that Charlie 
could speak the native language fluently, asked him 
whether he would undertake to reconnoiter the position 
of the enemy, with which he was entirely unacquainted. 
Charlie willingly agreed. When, on the night of the 
13th of March, the army halted a few miles from the 
town, Charlie, disguising himself in a native dress and 
accompanied by Hossein, left the camp and made his 
way to the town. This he had no difficulty in entering. 
It extended a mile and a half back from the river, and 
consisted of houses standing in large gardens and inclo- 
sures. The whole of the Europeans were laboring at 


PLASSEY. 


243 


the erection of the batteries and the destruction of the 
houses surrounding them, and Charlie and his com- 
panion, approaching closely to one of these, were 
pounced upon by the French officer in command of a 
working party, and set to work with a number of na- 
tives in demolishing the houses. Charlie, with his usual 
energy, threw himself into the work, and would speedily 
have called attention to himself by the strength and 
activity which he displayed, had not Hocsein begged 
him to moderate his efforts. 

“ Native man never work like that, sahib. Not when 
he’s paid ever so much. Work still less, no pay. The 
French would soon notice the sahib if he labored like 
that.” 

Thus admonished Charlie adapted his actions to those 
of his companions, and after working until dawn ap- 
proached he managed, with Hossein, to evade the atten- 
tion of the officer, and, drawing off, hurried away to 
rejoin Clive. The latter was moving from the west by 
a road leading to the northern face of the fort. It was at 
the battery which Renault was erecting upon this road 
that Charlie had been laboring. The latter informed 
Clive of the exact position of the work, and also that, 
although strong by itself, it was commanded by many 
adjoining houses, which the French, in spite of their 
efforts, had not had time to destroy. This news decided 
Clive to advance immediately without giving the enemy 
further time to complete their operations. 


CHAPTER XXII. 

PLASSEY. 

As the English troops advanced they were met on the 
outskirts of the settlement by the enemy, who contested 
bravely every garden and inclosure with them. The 
British force was, however, too strong to be resisted, 
and gradually the French were driven back until they 


244 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


formed in rear of the battery. Clive at once took 
possession of the houses surrounding it, and from them 
kept up all day a heavy fire upon the defenders, until at 
nightfall these fell back upon the fort after spiking their 
guns. The loss of this position compelled the French to 
abandon the other outlying batteries, from which, during 
the night, they withdrew their guns into the fort. The 
next four days Clive spent in bringing up the guns 
landed from the fleet and establishing batteries around 
the fort, and on the 19th he opened fire against it. On 
the same day the three men-of-war, the Kent of sixty- 
four guns, the Tiger of sixty, and the Salisbury of fifty, 
anchored just below the channel which the governor be- 
lieved he had blocked up. The next four days were 
spent by the fleet in sounding, to discover whether the 
statements of the French deserter were correct. During 
this time a heavy cannonade was kept up unceasingly 
between Clive and the fort. In this the garrison had 
the best of it: silenced some of the English guns, killed 
many of the assailants, and would certainly have beaten 
off the land attack had the fleet not been able to interfere 
in the struggle. 

All this time the governor was hoping that aid would 
arrive from the nabob. The latter, indeed, did send a 
force under Rajah Dulab Ram, but the governor of 
Hoogly, bribed by Omichund, sent messages to this 
officer urging him to halt, as Chandranagore was about 
to surrender, and he would only incur the anger of the 
English uselessly. On the morning of the 23d, having 
ascertained that a channel was free, the fleet advanced. 
The Tiger, leading, made her way through the passage 
and, taking up a position abreast of the northeast bastion 
of the fort, opened a heavy fire upon it with her guns, 
and harassed the besieged with a musketry fire from 
her tops. The Kent was on the point of anchoring oppo- 
site the water-gate, when so heavy a fire was poured upon 
her that, in the confusion, the cable ran out and the ship 
dropped down till she anchored at a point exposed to 
a heavy cross-fire from the southeast and southwest 


PLASSEY. 


245 


bastions. Owing to this accident the Salisbury was 
forced to anchor a hundred and fifty yards below the fort. 
The French fought with extreme bravery. Vastly 
superior as were the English force and guns, the French 
fire was maintained with the greatest energy and spirit, 
the gunners being directed and animated by M. De 
Vignes, captain of one of the ships which had been sunk. 
No advantage was gained by the Tiger in her struggle 
with the northeast bastion, and the guns of the south- 
west bastion galled the Kent so severely that the admiral, 
neglecting the southeast bastion, was forced to turn the 
whole of his guns upon it. De Vignes concentrated 
his fire against one point in the Kent, and presently suc- 
ceeded in setting her on fire. The conflagration spread, 
a panic ensued, and some 70 or 80 men jumped into the 
boats alongside. The officers, however, rallied the rest 
of the crew. The fire was extinguished, the men re- 
turned to their duty, and the cannonade was recom- 
menced. 

After the battle had raged for two hours the fire of 
the fort began to slacken, as one after another of the guns 
was dismounted. M. Renault saw that the place could 
be no longer defended. Of his 146 soldiers over 90 had 
been killed and wounded. Collecting the remainder and 
their officers, with 20 Sepoys, the governor ordered them 
to leave the fort immediately, making a detour to avoid 
the English who were aiding the fleet by attacking the 
land side, and to march to Kossimbazar to join M. Law 
who commanded there. Then, there remaining in the 
fort only the clerks, women, and wounded, he hoisted 
a flag of truce. Terms were speedily arranged. The 
governor and all the civilians and natives were allowed 
to go where tht*y chose with their clothes and linen. 
The wounded French soldiers were to remain as prisoners 
of war. 

Chandranagore cost the English 206 men. The attack 
upon the French colony was blamed by many at the 
time, for in the hour of English distress they had offered 
to remain neutral instead of joining the nabob in crush- 


246 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


ing us. Upon the other hand there was force in the 
arguments with which Admiral Watson had defended 
his refusal to sign the treaty of neutrality. That treaty 
would not be binding unless ratified by Pondicherry, and 
to Pondicherry it was known that the most powerful 
fleet and army France had ever sent to India was on its 
way. It was also known that Bussy, at the court of the 
Nizam of the Deccan, was in communication with the 
nabob. Thus then, in a short time, English interests in 
India might be menaced more formidably than ever be- 
fore, and the crushing out of the French colony, almost 
at the gates of Calcutta, was a measure of extreme impor- 
tance. It was hard upon the gallant governor of Chan- 
dranagore, but public opinion generally agreed that the 
urgency of the case justified the course adopted by the 
English authorities at Calcutta. 

Suraja Dowlah was filled with fury at the news of 
the capture of Chandranagore, but hearing a rumor two 
days later that the Afghans were upon their march to 
attack him, he wrote letters to Clive and Watson con- 
gratulating them upon their success, and offering to them 
the territory of Chandranagore on the same terms upon 
which it had been held by the French. But the young 
tyrant of Moorshedabad was swayed by constant fluc- 
tuating feeling. At one moment his fears were upper- 
most; the next, his anger and hate of the English. In- 
stead of recalling the army of Rajah Dulab Ram, as he 
had promised, he ordered it to halt at Plassey, a large 
village twenty-two miles south of Moorshedabad. The 
English were represented at his court by Mr. Watts, 
who had the greatest difficulty in maintaining his posi- 
tion in the -constantly changing moods of the nabob. 
One day the latter would threaten to order him to be 
led to instant execution, the next he would load him with 
presents. 

Besides Mr. Watts, the English affairs were conducted 
by Omichund, who, aided by the Sets or native bankers, 
whom Suraja Dowlah had plundered and despoiled, 
got up a conspiracy among the nabob’s most intimate 


PLASSEY. 


247 


followers. The history of these intrigues is the most 
unpleasant feature in the life of Clive. Meer Jaffier, the 
nabob’s general, himself offered to Mr. Watts to turn 
traitor if the succession to the kingdom was bestowed 
upon him. This was agreed to upon his promise to pay 
not only immense sums to the company, but enormous 
amounts to the principal persons on the English side. So 
enormous, indeed, were these demands that even Meer 
Jaffier, anxious as he was to conclude the alliance, was 
aghast. The squadron was to have 2,500,000 rupees 
and the same amount was to be paid for the army; 
presents amounting to 6,000,000 of rupees were to be 
distributed between Clive, Major Kilpatrick, the gov- 
ernor, and the members of the council. Clive’s share 
'of these enormous sums amounted to 2,080,000 rupees. 
In those days a rupee was worth half a crown. Never 
did an English officer make such a bargain for himself. 

But even this is not the most dishonorable feature of 
the transaction. Omichund had for some time been kept 
in the dark as to what was going forward, but obtaining 
information through his agents he questioned Mr. Watts 
concerning it. The latter then informed him of the whole 
state of affairs, and Omichund, whose services to the 
English had been immense, naturally demanded a share 
of the plunder. Whether or not he threatened to 
divulge the plot to the nabob, unless his demands were 
satisfied, is doubtful. At any rate, it was considered 
prudent to pacify him, and he was accordingly told that 
he should receive the sum he named. Clive and the 
members of the council, however, although willing to 
gratify their own extortionate greed at the expense of 
Meer Jaffier, determined to rob Omichund of his share. 
In order to do this two copies of the treaty with Meer 
Jaffier were drawn up on different colored papers. They 
were exactly alike, except that in one the amount to be 
given to Omichund was entirely omitted. This was the 
real treaty. The other was intended to be destroyed 
after being shown to a friend of Omichund in order to 
convince the latter that all was straight and honorable. 


248 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


All the English authorities placed their signatures to the 
real treaty, but Admiral Watson indignantly refused to 
have anything to do with the fictitious one, or to be a 
party in any way to the deceit practiced on Omichund. 
In order to get out of the difficulty Clive himself forged 
Admiral Watson’s signature to the fictitious treaty. 

A more disgraceful transaction was never entered into 
by a body of English gentlemen. That Mr. Drake and 
the members of his council, the pitiful cowards who fled 
from Calcutta and refused to allow the ships to draw off 
its brave garrison, should consent to such a transaction 
was but natural, but that Clive, the gallant and dashing 
commander, should have stooped to it is sad indeed. 
It may be said that to the end of his life Clive defended 
his conduct in this transaction, under the excuse that 
Omichund was a scoundrel. The Indian was not, in- 
deed, an -estimable character. Openly he was the friend 
and confidant of the nabob, while all the time he was 
engaged in bribing and corrupting his officers and in 
plotting with his enemies. This, however, in no way 
alters the facts that he rendered inestimable service to 
the English, and that the men who deceived and cheated 
him were to the full as greedy and grasping as himself, 
without, in the case of the governor and his council, 
having rendered any service whatever to the cause. 

At last the negotiations were complete. More and 
more severely did Clive press upon the nabob. Having 
compelled him to expel Law and the French, first from 
Moorshedabad and then from his dominions, he pressed 
fresh demands upon him, until the unfortunate prince, 
driven to despair, and buoyed up with the hope that he 
should receive assistance from Bussy, who had just ex- 
pelled the English from their factory at Vizagapatam, 
ordered Meer jaffier to advance with 15,000 men to re- 
enforce Rajah Dulab Ram at Plassey. Clive, in fact, 
forced on hostilities. His presence, with that of a con- 
siderable portion of his army, was urgently required at 
Madras. He was sure, however, that the instant he had 
gone, and the English force was greatly weakened, the 


PLASSEY. 


249 


nabob would again commence hostilities; and the belief 
was shared by all in India. He was, therefore, deter- 
mined to force on the crisis as soon as possible, in order 
that, the nabob being disposed of, he should be able to 
send re-enforcements to Madras. 

While these negotiattions had been going on Charlie 
Marryat had remained in Calcutta. He had been se- 
verely wounded in the attack on Chandranagore, and 
was carried down to Calcutta in a boat. On arriving 
there he heard that the Lizzie Anderson had just cast 
anchor off the fort. He caused himself at once to be 
conveyed on board, and was received with the greatest 
heartiness and pleasure by his old friend, the captain, and 
assiduously attended by the doctor of the ship. In order 
that he might have as much air as possible the captain 
had a sort of tent, with a double covering, erected on 
deck. During the daytime the sides of this were lifted 
so that the air could pass freely across the bed. Charlie’s 
wound was a severe one, and had he been nursed in a 
hospital on shore, it is probable that it would have been 
fatal. Thanks, however, to the comforts on board ship, 
the freshness and coolness of the situation, and the care 
of all surrounding him, he was, after some weeks’ illness, 
pronounced convalescent, and was sufficiently recov- 
ered to join the force with which Clive marched against 
Plassey. 

This force consisted of 950 European infantry, 100 
artillerymen, 50 sailors, and 2100 Sepoys. The artillery 
consisted of eight six-pounders and two small howitzers. 
The army of the nabob was 50,000 strong, and against 
such a force it was indeed an adventurous task for an 
army of 3000 men, of whom only one-third were Euro- 
peans, to advance to the attack. Everything depended, 
in fact, upon Meer Jaffier and his two colleagues in 
treachery, Rajah Dulab Ram and Yar Lutf Khan. The 
nabob, on hearing of Clive’s advance, had sent to 
M. Law, who was, with 150 men, at a place over a hun- 
dred miles distant, to which he had in accordance with 
the orders of Clive been obliged to retire, and begged 


250 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


him to advance to join him with all speed. The nabob 
had with him 40 or 50 Frenchmen commanded by M. St. 
Frais, formerly one of the council of Chandranagore. 
These had some field-pieces of their own, and also 
directed the native artillery of fifty-three guns, princi- 
pally thirty-two, twenty-four, and eighteen pounders. 

Had Clive been sure of the co-operation of Meer 
Jaffier and his confederates, who commanded three out 
of the four divisions of the nabob’s army, he need not 
have hesitated. But he was till the last moment in igno- 
rance whether to rely upon them. The. nabob, having 
become suspicious of Meer Jaffier, had obtained from him 
an oath, sworn on the Koran, of fidelity, and although 
the traitor continued his correspondence with Clive his 
letters were of a very dubious character, and Clive was 
in total ignorance as to his real intentions. So doubtful, 
indeed, was he that, when only a few miles of ground 
and the river Bhagirathi lay between him and the enemy, 
Clive felt the position so serious that he called a council 
of war, and put to them the question whether they should 
attack the nabob or fortify themselves at Katwa and 
hold that place until the rainy season, which had just set 
in with great violence, should abate. All the officers 
above the rank of subalterns, 20 in number, were present. 
Clive himself, contrary to custom, gave his vote first in 
favor of halting at Katwa. Major Kilpatrick, who com- 
manded the company’s troops, Major Grant of the 37th, 
and ten other officers voted the same way. Major Eyre 
Coote declared in favor of an immediate advance. He 
argued that the troops were in high spirits and had 
hitherto been everywhere successful, and that a delay 
would allow M. Law and his troops to arrive. He con- 
sidered'that, if they determined not to fight, they should 
fall back upon Calcutta. Charlie Marryat supported 
him, as did five other officers, all belonging to the Indian 
service. The decision taken, the council separated, and 
Clive strolled away to a grove and sat down by himself. 
There he thought over in his mind the arguments which 
had been advanced by both sides. He saw the force of 


PLASSEY. 


25! 


the arguments which had been adduced by Major Eyre 
Coote and Charlie Marryat, and his own experience 
showed him that the daring course is always the most 
prudent one in fighting with Asiatics. At last he came 
to a conclusion. Rising, he returned to the camp, and 
meeting Major Coote on the way, informed him that he 
had changed his mind and would fight the next day. 

Charlie returned to his tent after the council broke up, 
disheartened at the result. He was greeted by Tim. 

“ Shure, yer honor, Hossein is in despair. The water 
has filled up the holes where he makes his fires and the 
rain has soaked the wood. Yer dinner is not near cooked 
yet, and half the dishes are spoilt.” 

“ It does not matter a bit, Tim,” Charlie said. “ You 
know I’m not particular about my eating, though Hos- 
sein will always prepare a dinner fit for an alderman.” 

“ We are going to fight them to-morrow, yer honor, I 
hope,” Tim said. “ It’s sick to death I am of wading 
about here in the wet like a duck. It’s as bare as the 
bogs of ould Ireland, without the blessings of the pigs 
and potatoes, to say nothing of the colleens. 

“ No, Tim, I’m afraid we’re going to stop where we 
are for a bit. The council of war have decided not to 
fight.” 

“Shure and that’s bad news,” Tim said; “the worst 
I’ve heard for many a day. What if there be 50,000 of 
’em, Mister Charles; haven’t we bate ’em at long odds 
before, and can’t we do it again? ” 

“I think we could, Tim,” Charlie replied; “but the 
odds of fifty-three heavy cannon, which the spies say 
they’ve got, to our ten pop-guns is serious. However, 
I’m sorry we’re not going to fight, and I’m afraid that 
you must make up your mind to the wet, and Hossein 
his to giving me bad dinners for some weeks to 
come; that is to say, if the enemy don’t turn us out 
of this.” 

A few minutes later Lieutenant Peters entered the tent. 
“Is it true, Charlie, that we are not going to fight, after 
all?” 


252 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


“ True enough/’ Charlie said. “ We are to wait till 
the rains are over.” 

“Rains!” Peters said in disgust; “what have the 
rains got to do with it? If we had a six-weeks’ march 
before us I could understand the wet weather being a 
hindrance. Men are not water-rats, and to march all day- 
in those heavy downpours, and to lie all night in the mud, 
would soon tell ppon our strength. But here we are 
within a day’s march of the enemy, and the men might as 
well get wet in the field as here. Everyone longs to be 
at the enemy, and a halt will have a very bad effect. 
What have you got to drink, Charlie?” 

“ I have some brandy and rum; nothing else,” Charlie 
said. “ But what will be better than either for you is a 
cup of tea; Hossein makes it as well as ever. I suppose 
you have dined? ” 

“ Yes, half an hour ago.” 

Just as Charlie finished his meal, Major Eyre Coote 
put his head into the tent. “ Marryat, the chief has 
changed his mind. We cross the river the first thing in 
the morning and move at once upon Plassey.” 

“ Hurrah! ” Charlie shouted; “ Clive is himself again. 
That is good news indeed.” 

“ You will move your Sepoys down to the river at day- 
break, and will be the first to cross. There is no chance 
of any opposition, as the spies tell us that the nabob has 
not arrived yet at Plassey.” 

Several other officers afterward dropped into the tent, 
for the news rapidly spread through the camp. There 
was, as had been the case at the council, considerable 
differences of opinion as to the prudence of the measure, 
but among the junior officers and men the news that 
the enemy were to be attacked at once was received with 
hearty satisfaction. 

“ Here, major,” a fellow subaltern of Peters’ said, as 
he entered the tent followed by a servant, “ I have 
brought in half a dozen bottles of champagne. I started 
with a dozen from Calcutta, and had intended to keep 
these to celebrate our victory. But as in the first place 


PLASSEY. 


253 


all heavy baggage is to be left here, and in the second, it 
has occurred to me that possibly I may not come back 
to help to drink it, we may as well turn it to the good 
purpose of drinking success to the expedition.” 

Some of the bottles were opened and a merry evening 
was spent, but the party broke up early, for they had a 
heavy day’s work before them on the morrow. 

At daybreak the troops were in movement toward the 
banks of the Bhagirathi. They had brought boats with 
them from Chandranagore, and the work of crossing the 
river continued without intermission until four in the 
afternoon, when the whole force was landed on the left 
bank. Here Clive received another letter from Meer 
Jaffier, informing him that the nabob had halted at Man- 
karah and intended to. intrench himself there. He sug- 
gested that the English should undertake a circuitous 
march and attack him in the rear; but as this march 
would have exposed Clive to being cut off from his 
communications, and as he was still very doubtful of the 
good faith of the conspirators, he determined to march 
straight forward, and sent word to Meer Jaffier to that 
effect. 

From the point where Clive had crossed the Bhagirathi 
it was fifteen miles to Plassey, following as they did the 
curves of the river. It was necessary to do this as they 
had no carriage, and the men were obliged to tow their 
supplies in boats against the stream. Orders were 
issued that as soon as the troops were across they should 
prepare to eat their dinners, as the march was to be re- 
sumed at once. The rain was coming down in a steady 
pour as the troops, drenched to the skin, started upon 
their march. The stream, swollen by the rains, was in 
full flood, and the work of towing the heavy-laden barges 
was wearisome in the extreme. All took a share in the 
toil. In many cases the river had overflowed its banks, 
and the troops had to struggle through the water, up to 
their waists, while they tugged and strained at the ropes. 

Charlie, as a mounted officer, rode at the head of his 
Sepoys, who formed the advance of the force. Three 


254 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


hundred men preceded the main body who were towing 
the boats, to guard them from any sudden surprise. Tim 
marched beside him, occasionally falling back and taking 
a turn at the ropes. “ This is dog’s work, Mister 
Charles,” he said. “ It’s lucky that it’s raining, for the 
river can’t make us wetter than we are. My hands are 
fairly sore with pulling at the ropes.” 

“ Ah, Tim! you’re not fond of ropes, you know. You 
remember that night at Moorshedabad.’ 

“ Faith, yer honor, and I’ll not forget it if I live to be 
as old as Methuselah. Well, yer honor, it will be hard 
on us if we do not thrash them niggers to-morrow after 
all the trouble we are taking to be at them.” 

At one o’clock in the morning the weary troops 



PLASSEY. 


255 


CHAPTER XXIII. 

plassey — Continued. 

Scarcely had the soldiers taken off their packs when 
the sound of martial music was heard. Charlie was 
speaking at the time to Major Coote. “ There are the 
enemy, sure enough,” the latter said. “ That old rascal 
Meer Jaffier must have been deceiving us when he said 
that the nabob had halted at Mankarah. Pm afraid he 
means to play us false.” 

“ I expect,” Charlie remarked, “ that he does not know 
what he means himself. These Asiatics are at any time 
ready to turn traitors, and to join the strongest. At 
present Jaffier does not know which is the stronger, and 
I think it likely enough that he will take as little share as 
he can in the battle to-morrow till he sees which way it is 
going. Then, if we are getting the best of it, the rascal 
will join us for the sake of the advantages which he ex- 
pects to gain. If the day is going against us he will do 
his best to complete his master’s victory; and should 
proofs of his intended treachery ever come to light he 
will clear himself by saying that he intended to deceive 
us all along, and merely pretended to treat with us in 
order to throw us off our guard, and so deliver us into 
the hands of his master.” 

“Yes,” Major Eyre Coote replied. “These Mahom- 
medan chiefs are indeed crafty and treacherous rascals. 
The whole history of India shows that gratitude is a feel- 
ing altogether unknown to them, and that whatever 
favors a master may have lavished upon them they are 
always ready to betray him if they think that by so doing 
they will better their position. Now I shall lie down and 
try to get a few hours’ sleep before morning. I am wet 
to the skin, but fortunately in these sultry nights that 
matters little.” 

“ I must go my rounds,” Charlie said, “ and see that 
the sentries are on the alert. If the men were not so 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


256 

tired I should have said that the best plan would have 
been to make a dash straight at the enemy’s camp. It 
would take them quite unprepared, even if they know, as 
I dare say they do, that we are close at hand, and they 
would lose all the advantage of their artillery.” 

“ Yes, if we had arrived an hour before sunset so as to 
be able to learn something of the nature of the ground, 
that would be our best course,” Major Coote agreed. 
“ But, even if the troops had been fresh, a night attack on 
an unknown position is a hazardous undertaking. Good- 
night; I must see Clive and take his last orders.” 

At daybreak the English were astir, and the position 
of the enemy became visible. He occupied strongly in- 
trenched works which the Rajah Dulab Ram had thrown 
up during his stay. The right of these works rested on 
the river, and extended inland at a right angle to it for 
about two hundred yards, and then swept round to the 
north at an obtuse angle for nearly three miles. At the 
angle was a redoubt mounted with cannon. In advance 
of this was a mound covered with jungle. Halfway be- 
tween the intrenchments and the mango grove were two 
large tanks near the river, surrounded by high mounds of 
earth. These tanks were about half a mile from the Eng- 
lish position. On the river’s bank, a little in advance of 
the grove, was a hunting-box belonging to the nabob, 
surrounded by a masonry wall. Clive took possession 
of this immediately he heard the sound of the nabob’s 
music on his arrival. 

Soon after daylight the nabob’s troops moved out from 
their intrenchments, and it was evident that he was aware 
of the position of the English. The French with their 
four field-guns took up their post on the mound of the 
tank nearest to the grove, and about half a mile distant 
from it, and in the narrow space between them and the 
river two heavy guns under a native officer were placed. 
Behind the French guns was the division of Mir Mudin 
Khan, the one faithful general of the nabob. It consisted 
of 5000 horse and 7000 foot. Extending in the arc of a 
circle toward the village of Plassey, were the troops of 


PLASSEY. 


257 


the three traitor generals, Rajah Dulab Ram, Yar Lutf 
Khan, and Meer Jaffier. Thus the English position was 
almost surrounded, and in advancing against the camp 
they would have to expose themselves to an attack in the 
rear by the troops of the conspirators. These generals 
had between them nearly 38,000 troops. 

From the roof of the hunting-box Clive watched the 
progress of the enemy’s movements. He saw at once 
that the position which they had taken up was one which 
would entail the absolute destruction of his force should 
he be defeated, and that this depended entirely upon the 
course taken by the conspirators. Against such a force 
as that opposed to him, if these remained faithful to their 
master, success could hardly be hoped for. However, it 
was now too late to retreat, and the only course was to 
show a bold front. Clive accordingly moved his troops 
out from the mango trees to a line with the hunting-box. 
The Europeans were formed in the centre with three 
field-pieces on each side. The native troops were on 
either flank. Two field-guns and the two howitzers were 
placed a little in advance of the hunting-box, facing the 
French position on the mound. 

At eight o’clock in the morning of the 23d of June, a 
memorable day in the annals of India, the preparations 
on both sides were complete, and St. Frais opened the 
battle by the discharge of one of his guns at the English. 
At the signal the whole of the artillery round the long 
curve opened their fire. The ten little guns replied to 
this overwhelming discharge, and for half an hour con- 
tinued to play on the dense masses of the enemy. But 
however well they might be handled they could do little 
against the fire of the fifty pieces of cannon concentrated 
upon them. Had these been all served by European 
artillerymen the British force would have been speedily 
annihilated as they stood. The natives of India, how- 
ever, were extremely clumsy gunners. They fired but 
slowly, and had the feeblest idea of elevation. Conse- 
quently their balls, for the most part, went far over the 
heads of the English, and the four field-guns of St. Frais 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


25 * 

did more execution than the fifty pieces of the nabob. At 
the end of half an hour, however, Clive had lost thirty of 
his men, and determined to fall back to the mango grove. 

Leaving a party in the hunting-box and in the brick 
kilns in front of it, in which the guns had been posted, to 
harass St. Frais’ battery with their musketry fire, he with- 
drew the rest of his force into the grove. Here they were 
in shelter, for it was surrounded by a high and thick bank. 
Behind this the men sat down, while parties set to work 
piercing holes through the banks as embrasures for the 
guns. 

The enemy, on the retreat of the British within the 
grove, advanced with loud shouts of triumph, and, bring- 
ing their guns closer, again opened fire. The British had 
by this time pierced the holes for their- field-pieces, and 
these opened so vigorously that several of the enemy’s 
cannon were disabled, numbers of their gunners killed, 
and some ammunition wagons blown up. On the other 
hand the English, now in perfect shelter, did not suffer 
at all, although the tops of the trees were cut off in all 
directions by the storm of cannon balls which swept 
through them. 

Although the English fire was producing considerable 
loss among the enemy, this was as nothing in comparison 
to his enormous numbers, and at eleven o’clock Clive 
summoned his principal officers around him, and it was 
agreed that as Meer Jaffier and his associates, of whose 
position in the field they were ignorant, showed no signs 
of drawing off or of treachery to their master, it was im- 
possible to risk an attack upon the front, since they 
would, as they pressed forward, be enveloped by the 
forces in the rear. It was determined, therefore, that 
unless any unexpected circumstance occurred they should 
hold their present position till nightfall, and should at 
midnight attack the enemy’s camp. 

A quarter of an hour later a tremendous tropical 
shower commenced, and for an hour the rain came down 
in torrents. Gradually the enemy’s fire slackened. The 
English had tarpaulins to cover their ammunition, which, 


PLASSEY. 


2 59 


therefore, suffered no injury. The natives had no such 
coverings, and their powder was soon completely wetted 
by the deluge of rain. Mir Mudin Khan, knowing that 
his own guns had been rendered useless, believed that 
those of the English were in a similar condition, and lead- 
ing out his cavalry, made a splendid charge down upon 
the grove. 

The English were in readiness. As the cavalry swept 
up a flash of fire ran from a thousand muskets from the 
top of the embankments, while each of the field-guns 
sent its load of grape-shot through the embrasures into 
the throng of horsemen. The effect was decisive. The 
cavalry recoiled before the terrible fire, and rode back 
with their brave leader mortally wounded. 

This blow was fatal to the fortunes of Suraja 
Dowlah. When the news of the death of his brave and 
faithful general reached him he was struck with terror. 
He had long suspected Meer Jaffier of treachery, but he 
had now no one else to rely upon. Sending for that 
general he reminded him in touching terms of the benefits 
which he had received at the hands of his father, and con- 
jured him to be faithful to him. Throwing his turban 
upon the ground, he said, “ Jaffier, you must defend that 
turban.” 

Jaffier responded with assurances of his loyalty and 
sincerity, and promised to defend his sovereign with his 
life. Then riding off, he at once dispatched a messenger 
to Clive informing him of what had happened, and urg- 
ing him to attack at once. As long as Mir Mudin Khan 
lived it is probable that Meer Jaffier was still undecided 
as to the part he should play. While that general lived it 
was possible, even probable, that the English would be 
defeated, even should the traitors take no part against 
them. His death, however, left the whole management 
of affairs in the hands of the three conspirators, and their 
course was now plain. 

Scarcely had Meer Jaffier left the nabob than the un- 
happy young man, who was still under twenty years old, 
turned to Rajah Dulab Ram for counsel and advice. The 


26o 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


traitor gave him counsel that led to his destruction. He 
told him that the English could not be attacked in their 
position, that his troops, exposed to the fire of their guns, 
were suffering heavily and losing heart, and he advised 
him at once to issue orders for them to fall back within 
their intrenchments. He also advised him to leave the 
field himself, and to retire to Moorshedabad, leaving it to 
his generals to annihilate the English should they ven- 
ture to attack them. Suraja Dowlah, at no time 
capable of thinking for himself, and now bewildered by 
the death of the general he knew to be faithful to him, 
and by his doubts as to the fidelity of the others, fell into 
the snare. He at once issued orders for the troops to 
retire within their intrenchments, and then mounting a 
swift camel, and accompanied by 2000 horsemen, he left 
the field and rode off to Moorshedabad. 

The movement of retirement at once commenced. 
The three traitor generals drew off their troops, and those 
of Mir Mudin Khan also obeyed orders and fell back. 
St. Frais, however, refused to obey. He saw the ruin 
which would follow upon the retreat, and he pluckily con- 
tinued his fire. 

Clive, after the council had decided that nothing 
should be done till nightfall, had lain down in the hunt- 
ing-box to snatch a little repose, his thoughts having 
kept him awake all night. Major Kilpatrick, seeing the 
retirement of the enemy, and that the French artillerymen 
remained unsupported on the mound, at once advanced 
with 250 Europeans and two guns against it, sending 
word to Clive what he was doing Clive, angry that any 
officer should have taken so important a step without con- 
sulting him, at once ran after the detachment and severely 
reprimanded Major Kilpatrick for moving from the grove 
without orders. Immediately, however, that he compre- 
hended the whole position he recognized the wisdom of 
the course Kilpatrick had taken, and sent him back to 
the grove to order the whole force to advance. 

St. Frais, seeing that he was entirely unsupported, fired 
a last shot, and then limbering up fell back in perfect 


PLASSEY. 


261 


order to the redoubt at the corner of the intrenchment, 
where he again posted his field-pieces in readiness for 
action. 

Looking round the field Clive saw that two of the 
divisions which formed the arc of the circle were march- 
ing back toward the intrenchments, but that the third, 
that on the left of their line, had wheeled round and was 
marching toward the rear of the grove. Not having re- 
ceived the letter which Meer Jaffier had written to him, 
he supposed that this movement indicated an intention to 
attack his baggage, and he therefore detached some 
European troops with a field-gun to check the advance. 
Upon the gun opening fire the enemy’s division halted. 
It ceased its advance, but continued apart from the rest 
of the enemy. In the mean time Clive had arrived upon 
the mound which St. Frais had left, and planting his guns 
there opened fire upon the enemy within their intrench- 
ments. 

The Indian soldiers and inferior officers, knowing noth- 
ing of the treachery of their chiefs, were indignant at 
being thus cannonaded in their intrenchments by a foe 
so inferior in strength, and horse, foot, and artillery 
poured out again from the intrenchments and attacked 
the British. 

The battle now raged in earnest. Clive posted half his 
infantry and artillery on the mound of the tank nearest to 
the enemy’s intrenchments, and the greater part of the 
rest on rising ground two hundred yards to the left of it, 
while he placed 160 picked shots, Europeans and natives, 
behind the tank close to the intrenchments, with orders 
to keep up a continuous musketry fire upon the enemy 
as they sallied out. 

The enemy fought bravely. St. Frais worked his guns 
unflinchingly at the redoubt, the infantry poured in volley 
after volley, the cavalry made desperate charges right up 
to the British lines. But they had no leader, and were 
fighting against men well commanded and confident in 
themselves. Clive observed that the division on the 
enemy’s extreme left remained inactive and detached 


262 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


from the army, and it for the first time struck him that 
this was the division of Meer Jaffier. Relieved for the 
safety of his baggage, and from the attack which had 
hitherto threatened in his rear, he at once determined to 
carry the hill in advance of St. Frais battery, and the 
redoubt occupied by the French leader. Strong columns 
were sent against each position. The hill was carried 
without opposition, and then so heavy and searching a 
fire was poured into the intrenched camp that the enemy 
began to fall back in utter confusion. St. Frais finding 
himself isolated and alone in the redoubt, as he had be- 
fore been on the mound, was forced to retire. 

At five o’clock the battle was over, and the camp of the 
Nabob of Bengal in the possession of the English. The 
British loss was trifling. Seven European and 16 native 
soldiers were killed, 13 Europeans and 36 natives 
wounded. It was one of the decisive battles of the world, 
for the fate of India hung in the balance. Had Clive 
been defeated and his force annihilated, as it must have 
been if beaten, the English would have been swept out of 
Bengal. The loss of that presidency would have had a 
decided effect on the struggle in Madras, where the 
British were with the greatest difficulty maintaining 
themselves against the French. Henceforth Bengal, 
the richest province in India, belonged to the English, 
for although for a time they were content to recognize 
Meer Jaffier and his successors as its nominal rulers, 
these were but puppets in their hands, and they were 
virtual masters of the province. 

After the battle Meer Jaffier arrived. Conscious of 
his own double-dealing he by no means felt sure of the 
reception he should meet with. It suited Clive, how- 
ever, to ignore the doubtful part he had played, and he 
was saluted as Nabob of Bengal. It would have been 
far better for him had he remained one of the great 
chiefs of Bengal. The enormous debt with which Clive 
and his colleagues had saddled him crushed him. The 
sum was so vast that it was only by imposing the most 
onerous taxation upon his people that he was enabled 


PLASSEY. 263 

to pay it, and the discontent excited proved his de- 
struction. 

Omichund had no greater reason for satisfaction at 
the part which he had played in the ruin of his country. 
The fact that he had been deceived by the forged treaty 
was abruptly and brutally communicated to him, and the 
blow broke his heart. He shortly afterward became 
insane and died before eighteen months were over. 

Suraja Dowlah fled to Moorshedabad, where the rem- 
nants of his army followed him. At first the nabob en- 
deavored to secure their fidelity by issuing a considerable 
amount of pay. Then, overpowered by his fears of 
treachery, he sent off the ladies of the zenana and all his 
treasures on elephants, and a few hours afterward he 
himself, accompanied by his favorite wife and slave with 
a casket of his most valuable jewels, fled in disguise. A 
boat had been prepared and lay in readiness at the wharf 
of the palace. Rowing day and night against the stream 
the boat reached Rajmahal, ninety miles distant, on the 
night of the fourth day following his flight. Here the 
rowers were so knocked up by their exertions that it was 
impossible to proceed farther, and they took refuge in a 
deserted hut by the bank. 

The following morning, however, they were seen by a 
fakir, whose ears the young tyrant had had cut off thir- 
teen months previously, and this man, recognizing the 
nabob even in his disguise, at once took the news to 
Meer Jaffier’s brother, who happened to reside in the 
town. The latter immediately sent a party of his re- 
tainers, who captured the nabob without difficulty. He 
was again placed in the boat and taken back to Moorshe- 
dabad, where he was led into the presence of Meer 
Jaffier. The wretched young man implored the mercy 
of his triumphant successor, the man who owed station 
and rank and wealth to his grandfather, and who had 
nevertheless betrayed him to the English. 

His entreaties so far moved Meer Jaffier that he was 
irresolute for a time as to the course he should pursue. 
His son, however, Mirav, a youth of about the same age 


264 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


as the deposed nabob, insisted that it was folly to show 
mercy, as Meer Jaffier would never be safe so long as 
Suraja Dowlah remained alive, and his father at last 
assigned the captive to his keeping, knowing well what 
the result would be. In the night Suraja Dowlah was 
murdered. His mangled remains were in the morning 
placed on an elephant and exposed to the gaze of the 
populace and soldiery. 

Suraja Dowlah was undoubtedly a profligate and ra- 
pacious tyrant. In the course of a few months he alien- 
ated his people and offended a great number of his most 
powerful chiefs. The war which he undertook against 
the English, although at the moment unprovoked, must 
still be regarded as a patriotic one, and had he not soiled 
his victory by the massacre of the prisoners, which he 
first permitted and then approved, the English would 
have had no just cause of complaint against him. From 
the day of the arrival of Clive at Calcutta he was doomed. 
It is certain that the nabob would not have remained 
faithful to his engagements when the danger which 
wrung the concessions from him had passed. Neverthe- 
less the whole of the circumstances which followed the 
signature of the treaty, the manner in which the unhappy 
youth was alternately cajoled and bullied to his ruin, the 
loathsome treachery in which those around him en- 
gaged with the connivance of the English, and lastly the 
murder in cold blood, which Meer Jaffier, our creature, 
was allowed to perpetrate, rendered the whole transac- 
tion one of the blackest in the annals of English history. 

CHAPTER XXIV. 

MOUNTED INFANTRY. 

A few days after Plassey Colonel Clive sent for 
Charlie. 

“ Marryat,” he said, “ I must send you back with 200 
men to Madras. The governor there has been writing 
to me by every ship which has come up the coast, beg- 


MOUNTED INFANTRY. 


265 


ging me to move down with the bulk of the force as soon 
as affairs are a little settled here. That is out of the 
question. There are innumerable matters to be ar- 
ranged. Meer Jaffier must be sustained. The French 
under Law must be driven entirely out of Bengal. The 
Dutch must be dealt with. Altogether I have need of 
every moment of my time, and of every man under my 
orders, for at least two years. However, I shall at once 
raise a Bengal native army, and so release the Sepoys of 
Madras. If there be any special and sore need I must, 
of course, denude myself here of troops to succor 
Madras; but I hope it will not come to that. In the 
meantime I propose that you shall take back 200 of the 
Madras Europeans. Lawrence will be glad to have 
you, and your chances of fighting are greater there than 
they will be here. Bengal is overawed, and so long as I 
maintain the force I now have, it is unlikely in the ex- 
treme to rise; whereas battles and sieges, great and 
small, are the normal condition of Madras.” 

The next day Charlie, with 200 European troops, 
marched down toward Calcutta. Clive had told him to 
select any officer he pleased to accompany him as second 
in command, and he chose Peters, who, seeing that there 
were likely to be far more exciting times in Madras than 
in Bengal at present, was very glad to accompany him. 
Three days after reaching Calcutta Charlie and his party 
embarked on board a ship, which conveyed them with- 
out adventure to Madras. The authorities were glad in- 
deed of the re-enforcement, for the country was disturbed 
from end to end. Since the departure of every available 
man for Calcutta the company had been able to afford 
but little aid to Muhammud Ali, and the authority of the 
latter had dwindled to a mere shadow in the Carnatic. 
The Marattas made incursions in all directions. The 
minor chiefs revolted and refused to pay tribute, and 
many of them entered into alliance with the French. 
Disorder everywhere reigned in the Carnatic, and Trichi- 
nopoli was again the one place which Muhammud Ali 
held. 


266 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


The evening after landing Charlie Marryat had a long 
chat with Colonel Lawrence, who, after explaining to 
him exactly the condition of affairs in the country, asked 
him to tell him frankly what command he would like to 
receive. 

“ I have thought for some time,” Charlie said, “ that 
the establishment of a small force of really efficient 
cavalry, trained to act as infantry also, would be invalu- 
able. The Maratta horsemen, by their rapid move- 
ments, set our infantry in defiance, and the native horse 
of our allies are useless against them. I am convinced 
that 200 horsemen, trained and drilled like our cavalry 
at home, would ride through any number of them. In 
a country like this, where every petty rajah has his castle, 
cavalry alone could, however, do little. They must be 
able to act as infantry, and should have a couple of little 
four-pounders to take about with them. A force like 
this would do more to keep order in the Carnatic than 
one composed of infantry alone of ten times its strength. 
It could act as a police force, call upon petty chiefs who 
refuse to pay their share of the revenue, restore order in 
disturbed places, and permit the peasants to carry on 
their agricultural work upon which the revenue of the 
company depends, and altogether render valuable serv- 
ices. Among the soldiers who came down with me is a 
sergeant who was at one time a trooper in an English 
regiment. He exchanged to come out with the 39th to 
India, and has again exchanged into the company’s 
service. I would make him drill instructor, if you will 
give him a commission as ensign. Peters I should like 
as my second in command, and, if you approve of the 
plan, I should be very much obliged if you would get 
him his step as captain. He’s a good officer, but has not 
had such luck as I have.” 

Colonel Lawrence was very much pleased at the idea, 
and gave Charlie full authority to carry it out. The 
work of enlisting at once commenced. Hossein made 
an excellent recruiting sergeant. He went into the 
native bazaars, and by telling of the exploits of Charlie 


MOUNTED INFANTRY. 


267 


at Ambur and Suwarndrug, and holding out bright pros- 
pects of the plunder which such a force would be likely 
to obtain, he succeeded in recruiting 150 of his co- 
religionists. In those days fighting was a trade in India, 
and in addition to the restless spirits of the local com- 
munities, great numbers of the hardy natives of northern 
India, Afghans, Pathans, and others, were scattered over 
India, ever ready to enlist in the service of the highest 
bidder. Among such men as these Hossein had no diffi- 
culty in obtaining 150 picked horsemen. 

Charlie had determined that his force should consist 
of four troops, each of 50 strong. Of these one would be 
composed of Europeans, and he was permitted to take 
this number from the party he had brought down. He 
had no difficulty in obtaining volunteers, for as soon as 
the nature of the force was known the men were eager 
to engage in it. To this troop the two little field-pieces 
would be committed. 

A few days after the scheme had been sanctioned 
Ensign Anstey was at work drilling the recruits as 
cavalry. Charlie and Peters were instructed by him also 
in the drill and words of command, and were soon able 
to assist. Two months were spent in severe work, and 
at the end of that time the little regiment was able to 
execute all simple cavalry maneuvers with steadiness 
and regularity. The natives were all men who had lived 
on horseback from their youth, and therefore required 
no teaching to ride. They were also, at the end of that 
time, able to act as infantry with as much regularity as 
the ordinary Sepoys. When so engaged four horses 
were held by one man, so that 150 men were available 
for fighting on foot. The work had been unusually 
severe, but as the officers did not spare themselves, and 
Charlie had promised a present to each man of the troop 
when fit for service, they had worked with alacrity, and 
had taken great interest in learning their new duties. 
At the end of two months they were inspected by Colo- 
nel Lawrence and Governor Pigot, and both expressed 
their highest gratification and surprise at their efficiency, 


268 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


and anticipated great benefits would arise from the 
organization. 

So urgent, indeed, was the necessity that something 
should be done for the restoration of order that Charlie 
had with difficulty obtained the two months necessary to 
attain the degree of perfection which he deemed neces- 
sary. The day after the inspection the troop marched 
out from Madras. Ensign Anstey commanded the white 
troop, the other three were led by native officers. Cap- 
tain Peters commanded the squadron composed of the 
white troop and one of the others. A Lieutenant Hal- 
lowes, whom Peters knew to be a hard-working and 
energetic officer, was at Charlie’s request appointed to 
the command of the other squadron. He himself com- 
manded the whole. 

They had been ordered in the first place to move to 
Arcot, which was held by a garrison of Muhammud Ali. 
The whole of the country round was greatly disturbed. 
French intrigues and the sight of the diminished power 
of the English had caused most of the minor chiefs in 
that neighborhood to throw off their allegiance. A body 
of Maratta horse were ravaging the country districts, 
and it was against these that Charlie determined in the 
first place to act. He had been permitted to have his 
own way in the clothing and arming of his force. Each 
man carried a musket, which had been shortened some 
six inches, and hung in slings from the saddle, the muzzle 
resting in a piece of leather, technically termed a bucket. 
The ammunition pouch was slung on the other side of 
the saddle, and could be fastened in an instant by two 
straps to the belts which the troopers wore round their 
waists. The men were dressed in brown, thick cotton 
cloth, called karkee. Round their black forage caps 
was wound a long length of blue and white cotton cloth, 
forming a turban, with the ends hanging down to pro- 
tect the back of the neck and spine from the sun. 

Having obtained news that the Maratta horse, 2000 
strong, were pillaging at a distance of six miles from the 
town, Charlie set off the day following his arrival to 


MOUNTED INFANTRY. 


269 


meet them. The Marattas had notice of his coming; 
but hearing that the force consisted only of 200 horse, 
they regarded it with contempt. When Charlie first 
came upon them they were in the open country, and see- 
ing that they were prepared to attack him, he drew up 
his little force in two lines. The second line he ordered 
to dismount to act as infantry, the two guns were 
loaded with grape, and the men of the first line were 
drawn up at sufficient intervals to allow an infantryman 
to pass between each horse. 

With shouts of anticipated triumph the Maratta horse 
swept down. The front line of English horsemen had 
screened the movements of those behind, and when the 
enemy were within fifty yards, Charlie gave the word. 
The troopers already sat musket in hand, and between 
each horse an infantry soldier now stepped forward, while 
toward each end the line opened and the two field-pieces 
were advanced. The Maratta horsemen were astonished 
at this sudden maneuver, but, pressed by the mass from 
behind, they still continued their charge. When but 
fifteen yards from the English line, a stream of fire ran 
along this from end to end, every musket was emptied 
into the advancing force, while the guns on either flank 
swept them with grape. The effect was tremendous. 
Scarcely a man of the front line survived the fire, and the 
whole mass halted and recoiled in confusion. Before 
they could recover themselves another volley of shot and 
grape was fired into them. Then Charlie’s infantry ran 
back, and the cavalry, closing up, dashed upon the foe, 
followed half a minute afterward by the lately dis- 
mounted men of the other two troops, ten white soldiers 
alone remaining to work and guard the guns. The 
effect of the charge of these 200 disciplined horse upon 
the already disorganized mob of Maratta horsemen was 
irresistible, and in a few minutes the Marattas were scat- 
tered and in full flight over the plain, pursued by the 
British cavalry, now broken up into eight half troops. 
The rout was complete, and in a very short time the last 
Maratta had fled, leaving behind them 300 dead upon 


270 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


the plain. Greatly gratified with their success, and feel- 
ing confident now in their own powers, the British force 
returned to Arcot. 

Charlie now determined to attack the fort of Vellore, 
which was regarded as impregnable. The town lay at 
the foot of some very steep and rugged hills, which were 
surmounted by three detached forts. The rajah, en- 
couraged by the French, had renounced his allegiance 
to Muhammud Ali, and had declared himself inde- 
pendent. As, however, it was certain that he was pre- 
pared to give assistance to the French when they took 
the field against the English, Charlie determined to at- 
tack the place. The French had received large re-en- 
forcements, and had already captured many forts and 
strong places around Pondicherry. They were, how- 
ever, awaiting the arrival of still larger forces, known to 
be on the way, before they made a decisive, and as they 
hoped, final attack upon the English. 

The rajah’s army consisted of some 1500 infantry and 
as many cavalry. These advanced to meet the English 
force. Charlie feigned a retreat as they came on, and 
retired to a village some three miles distant. The 
cavalry pursued at full speed, leaving the infantry be- 
hind. Upon reaching the village Charlie at once dis- 
mounted all his men, lined the inclosures, and received 
the enemy’s cavalry, as they galloped up, with so heavy a 
fire that they speedily drew rein. After trying for some 
time to force the position they began to fall back, and 
the English force again mounted, dashed upon them, and 
completed their defeat. The broken horsemen, as they 
rode across the plain, met their infantry advancing, and 
these, disheartened at the defeat of the cavalry, fell back 
in great haste, and abandoning the town, which was 
without fortification, retired at once to the forts com- 
manding it. Charlie took possession of the town, and 
spent the next two days in reconnoitering the forts. The 
largest and nearest of these faced the right of the town. 
It was called Suzarow. The second, on an even steeper 
hill, was called Guzarow. The third, which lay some 


MOUNTED INFANTRY. 


271 


distance behind this, and was much smaller, was called 
Mortz Azur. Charlie determined to attempt in the first 
place to carry Guzarow, as in this, which was considered 
the most inaccessible, the rajah himself had taken up his 
position, having with him all his treasure. Charlie saw 
that it would be next to impossible with so small a force 
to carry it by a direct attack by the road which led to it, 
as this was completely covered by its guns. It appeared 
to him, however, that the rocks upon which it stood were 
by no means inaccessible. 

He left 20 men to guard his guns, placed a guard of 
ten upon the road leading up to the fort, to prevent the 
inhabitants from sending up news of his intentions to the 
garrison, who had, with that of Suzarow, kept up a fire 
from their guns upon the town since his arrival there. 
The moon was not to rise until eleven o’clock, and at 
nine Charlie marched with 170 men from the town. 
Making a considerable detour, he found himself at half- 
past ten at the foot of the rocks, rising almost sheer from 
the upper part of the hill. He was well provided with 
ropes and ladders. The most perfect silence had been 
enjoined upon the men, and in the darkness the march 
had been unseen by the enemy. While waiting for the 
moon to rise the troopers all wound pieces of cloth, with 
which they had come provided, round their boots to pre- 
vent these from making a noise by slipping or stumbling 
on the rocks. When the moon rose the ascent of the 
rocks began at the point which Charlie had, after a close 
inspection through a telescope, judged to be most acces- 
sible. The toil was very severe. One by one the men 
climbed from ledge to ledge, some of the most active hill 
men from northern India leading the way, and aiding 
their comrades to follow them by lowering ropes, and 
placing ladders at the most inaccessible spots.* All this 
time they were completely hidden from the observation 
of the garrison above. 

At last the leaders of the party stood at the foot of the 
walls, which rose a few feet from the edge of the cliff. 
The operation had been performed almost noiselessly. 


272 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


The ammunition pouches had been left behind, each man 
carrying ten rounds in his belt. Every piece of metal 
had been carefully removed from their uniforms, the very 
buttons having been cut off, lest these should strike 
against the rocks, and the muskets had been swathed up 
in thick coverings. The men, as they gained the upper 
ridge, spread along at the foot of the walls until the whole 
body had gathered there. They could hear the voices of 
the sentries thirty feet above them, but these having no 
idea of the vicinity of an enemy, did not look over the 
edge of the wall. Indeed, the parapets of the Indian 
fortifications were always so high that it was only from 
projecting towers that the foot of the wall could be seen. 
When the English force was assembled, the ladders, 
which, like everything else, had been muffled, were 
placed against the walls, and headed by their officers, the 
troops ascended. The surprise was complete. Not 
until the leaders of the storming party stood upon the 
parapet was their presence perceived. The guards dis- 
charged their firelocks and fled hastily. 

As soon as 20 men were collected on the wall Charlie 
took the command of these and hurried forward toward 
the gate. Hallowes was to lead the next party along 
the opposite direction, Peters was to form the rest up as 
they gained the wall, and to follow Charlie with 50 
more, while Anstey was to hold the remainder in reserve, 
to be used as circumstances might demand. The resist- 
ance, however, was slight. Taken absolutely by surprise 
the enemy rushed out from their sleeping places. They 
were immediately fired upon from the walls. The 
greater part ran back into shelter, while some of the more 
determined, gathering together, made for the gate. But 
of this Charlie had already taken possession, and re- 
ceived tlfem with so vigorous a fire that they speedily 
fell back. When the whole circuit of the walls was in 
his possession, Charlie took 100 of his men and de- 
scended into the fort. Each building as he reached it 
was searched, and the garrison it contained made to 
come out and lay down their arms, and were then allowed 


MOUNTED INFANTRY. 


273 


to depart through the gate. Upon reaching the rajah’s 
quarters he at once came out and surrendered himself. 
Two guns were discharged to inform the little body in 
the town of the complete success of the movement; and 
the guard on the road then fell back and joined the party 
with the guns. 

Thus, without losing a man, the fort of Guzarow, re- 
garded by the natives as being impregnable, was carried. 
Fifteen lacs of rupees were found in the treasury. Of 
these, in accordance with the rules of the service, half 
was set aside for the company, the remainder became 
the property of the force. Of this half fell to the officers, 
in proportion to their rank, and the rest was divided 
among the men. The share of each trooper amounted 
to nearly two hundred pounds. Knowing how demoral- 
izing the possession of such a sum would be, Charlie 
assembled his force next morning. He pointed out to 
them that as the greater part of the plunder was in silver, 
it would be impossible for them to carry it on their per- 
sons. He advised them, then, to allow the whole sum 
to remain in the treasury, to be forwarded under an 
escort to Madras, each soldier to receive an order for 
the amount of his share upon the treasury there. This 
was agreed to unanimously, and Charlie then turned his 
attention to the other forts. 

The guns of Guzarow were turned against these, and 
a bombardment commenced. Suzarow, which extended 
partly down the slope, was much exposed to the fire from 
Guzarow, and, although no damage could be done to the 
walls at so great a distance, the garrison, suffering from 
the fire, and intimidated by the fall of Guzarow, lost 
heart. Large numbers deserted, and the governor, in 
the course of two days, thought it prudent to obey the 
orders which the rajah had, upon being made captive, 
sent to him to surrender. The next day the governor 
of Mortz Azur followed his example, and Vellore and 
its three strong forts were thus in the possession of the 
English. 

At Vellore Charlie nearly lost one of his faithful 


274 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


followers. Early in the morning Hossein came into 
Charlie’s room. 

“ Sahib,” he said, “ something is the matter with Tim.” 

“ What is the matter? ” Charlie said, sitting up in his 
bed. 

“ I do not know, sahib. When I went to him he did 
not move. He was wide awake and his eyes are staring. 
When I went beside him he shook his head a little and 
said, ‘ S-s-s-h! ’ He seems quite rigid, and is as pale as 
death.” 

Charlie leaped out and hurried to Tim. The latter 
was lying on the ground in the next room. He had 
carried off three or four cushions from the rajah’s divan 
and had thrown these down and had spread a rug over 
him. He lay on his back exactly as Hossein had de- 
scribed. As Charlie hurried up Tim again gave vent to 
the warning “ S-s-s-h ! ” 

“ What is the matter, Tim? What is the matter, my 
poor fellow? ” 

Tim made a slight motion with his head for his mas- 
ter to bend toward him. Charlie leant over him, and 
he whispered: 

“ There is a sarpent in bed with me.” 

“ Are you quite sure, Tim? ” 

“ He woke me with his cold touch,” Tim whispered. 
“ I felt him crawling against my foot, and now he is lay- 
ing against my leg.” 

Charlie drew back for a minute and consulted with 
Hossein. “ Lie quite still, Tim,” he said, “ and don’t be 
afraid. We will try to kill him without his touching 
you; but even if he should bite you, with help ready at 
hand there will be no danger.” 

Charlie now produced two knives, the one a sharp 
surgical knife, from a case which he had brought, the 
other he placed in a charcoal fire, which one of the men 
speedily fanned until the blade had attained a white heat. 
Charlie had decided that if the snake bit Tim he would 
instantly make a deep cut through the line of the punc- 
tures of the fangs, cutting down as low as these could 


BESIEGED IN A PAGODA. 


275 


penetrate, and immediately cauterize it by placing the 
hot knife in the gash so made. Six men were called 
in with orders to seize Tim on the instant and hold his 
leg firm, to enable the operation to be performed. Two 
others were to occupy themselves with the snake. These 
were armed with sticks. Hossein now approached the 
bed, from which hitherto they had all kept well aloof. 
The snake, Tim said, lay against his leg, between the 
knee and the ankle, and the spot was marked by a slight 
elevation of the rug. Hossein drew his tulwar, exam- 
ined the edge to see that nothing had blunted its razor- 
like keenness, and then took his stand \t the foot of the 
bed. Twice he raised his weapon, and then let it fall 
with a drawing motion. The keen blade cut through 
the rug as if it had been pasteboard, and at the same 
instant Tim sprang from the other side of the bed, and 
fainted in the arms of the men. Hossein threw off the 
rug, and there, severed in pieces, lay the writhing body 
of a huge cobra. Tim soon recovered under the admin- 
istration of water sprinkled in his face and brandy 
poured down his throat. But he was some time ere 
he thoroughly recovered from the effects of the trying 
ordeal through which he had passed. Many of the 
buildings in the fort were in a very bad condition, and 
Charlie had several of the most dilapidated destroyed, 
finding in their walls several colonies of cobras, which 
were all killed by the troops. 


CHAPTER XXV. 

BESIEGED IN A PAGODA. 

A few days later Charlie received a message from the 
Rajah of Permacoil, saying that he was besieged by a 
strong native force aided by the French. He at once 
moved his force to his assistance. He found that the 
besiegers, among whom were 200 French troops, were 
too strong to be attacked. He therefore established 


27 6 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


himself in iheir rear, attacked and captured convoys, and 
prevented the country people from bringing in pro- 
visions. Several times the besieging infantry advanced 
against him, but before these he at once fell back, only 
co return as soon as they retired to their camp. When- 
ever their horse ventured out against him, he beat them 
back with considerable loss. 

Ten days after his arrival the enemy, finding it impos- 
sible to maintain themselves in the face of so active an 
enemy, and suffering greatly from want of provisions, 
raised the siege and fell back. As soon as they had 
drawn off Charlie entered the fort. The rajah received 
him with the greatest warmth. He was, however, much 
distressed at the capture of a hill fort at some distance 
from Permacoil. In this he had stowed his wives and 
treasure, thinking that it would be unmolested. The 
French, however, had, just before Charlie’s arrival, de- 
tached a strong force with some guns and these had 
captured the place. The force which had accomplished 
this had, he now heard, marched to Trinavody, a fort 
and town thirty miles away, upon the road by which 
the force which had besieged the town was retiring. 
The treasure was a considerable one,, amounting to seven 
lacs of rupees, and as the rajah stated his willingness that 
the troops should take possession of this if they could 
but rescue his wom p n, Charlie at once determined to 
attempt the feat. The main body of the enemy would 
not reach the place until the afternoon of the following 
day. Charlie soon collected his men, and, making a 
detour through the country, arrived next morning within 
a mile of Trinavody. 

The town was a small one, and the fort one of the 
ordinary native forts, built in a parallelogram with flank- 
ing towers. The place, however, contained a very large 
and solidly built pagoda or temple. It was surrounded 
by a wall forty feet high, and at the gateway stood an 
immense tower with terraces rising one above the other. 
Capturing a native Charlie learned that the fort was 
tenanted only by the troops of the native rajah of the 


BESIEGED IN A PAGODA. 277 

place, the French detachment being encamped in the 
pagoda. He at once rode forward with his troops, 
dashed through the native town, and in through the 
wide gateway of the tower into the courtyard within. 
Beyond two or three straggling shots from the sentries 
he had so far encountered no opposition, and the native 
troops in the courtyard, thrown into wild confusion by 
this sudden appearance of a hostile force, threw down 
their arms and cried for mercy. From the temple 
within, however, the French infantry, ioo strong, opened 
a brisk fire. 

Charlie sent some of his men on to the tower, whence 
their fire commanded the flat roof of the temple, and 
these speedily drove the defenders from that post. The 
field-pieces were unlimbered and directed toward the 
gate of the inner temple, while a musketry fire was kept 
up against every window and loophole in the building. 
The gate gave way after a few shots had been fired, and 
Charlie led his party to the assault. The French de- 
fended themselves bravely, but they were outnumbered, 
and were driven, fighting, from room to room until the 
survivors laid down their arms. The assault, however, 
had cost the British a loss of 25 men. 

The Rajah of Permacoil’s treasure and his women fell 
into the hands of the captors. Charlie ordered the chests 
to be brought down and placed in bullock wagons. Just 
as he was about to order his men, who were scattered 
through the temple looting, to form up, he heard a shout 
from the tower, and, looking up, saw one of his men 
there gesticulating wildly. He ran up the tower, and, on 
reaching the first terrace, saw to his surprise the whole 
of the force which he believed to be fifteen miles distant 
already entering the town. The French officer in com- 
mand, knowing the activity and dash of his opponent, 
and fearing that an attempt might be made to carry 
Trinavody and recapture the rajah’s treasure, had 
marched all night. When within a mile of the place he 
heard what had happened, and at once pushed forward. 

Charlie saw that already his retreat was cut off, and 


27S 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


running to the edge of the terrace shouted to Peters to 
hurry out with all the men already in the courtyard, to 
occupy the houses outside the gate and to keep back the 
advancing enemy. Summoning another party to the 
tower, four guns upon the terrace were at once loaded, 
and these opened upon the head of the enemy’s column 
as they entered the street leading to the temple. In a 
short time a brisk fight began. The enemy planted 
guns to bear upon the tower. The cannon of the fort 
joined in the assault, the infantry pressed forward 
through the houses and inclosures to the temple and 
were soon engaged with the men under Captain Peters, 
while the guns and musketry from the tower also opened 
upon them. 

Having seen that the preparations to repulse an imme- 
diate attack were complete, Charlie again ran down to 
the courtyard. The weak point of the defenses was the 
gateway. This was fifty feet wide and unprovided with 
gates, and Charlie at once set a strong party to work to 
form a barricade across it. For some hours the party 
outside the gates maintained their position, but they 
were gradually driven back, and toward evening, by 
Charlie’s orders, they retired within the temple. 

The barricade was now eight feet high, the face was 
formed of large slabs of stone piled one upon another 
backed by a considerable thickness of earthwork. This, 
however, although capable of resisting a sudden rush 
of infantry, would, Charlie knew, be incapable of resist- 
ing artillery. During the night he divided his men into 
two parties, which alternately slept and worked at the 
inner defenses which he had designed. These consisted 
of two walls running from each side of the gateway of 
the temple. They were placed a few feet farther back 
than the edge of the gateway, so that an enemy advanc- 
ing to storm would not see them until within the gate. 
These walls he intended to be eight feet high, and to 
be backed with earth four feet high, so as to form a bank 
on which the defenders could stand and fire into the 
space between them. To obtain materials he pulled 


BESIEGED IN A PAGODA. 


279 


down several buildings forming a part of the temple. 
The distance from the gateway to the temple was fifty 
yards, and although the men worked without ceasing 
the wall had made but little progress when daylight 
dawned. During the night Charlie lowered one of his 
men from the wall farthest from the enemy with instruc- 
tions to make his way as fast as possible to Madras to 
ask for succor. 

In the morning Charlie found that the enemy had on 
their side been also busy. A house which faced the end 
of the street leading to the temple had been pulled down 
and a battery of four guns erected there. As soon as 
it was light the combat began. The enemy had sixteen 
pieces of artillery besides those on the fort, and while the 
four guns in front played unceasingly upon the barricade 
across the gateway, the others cannonaded the tower, 
whence the English guns kept up a fire on the battery 
in front. So well were these directed, and so heavy was 
the musketry fire, that the enemy’s guns were several 
times silenced and the artillerymen driven from them. 

Behind the barricade a working party threw up fresh 
earth, to strengthen the part most shaken by the enemy’s 
fire, and then set to work to form a similar barricade in 
a line with the back of the gateway. This was completed 
by nightfall, by which time the enemy’s guns had com- 
pletely shattered the stone facing of the outer barricade, 
rendering it possible for it to be carried with a rush. 
As from the windows of the houses they could see the 
new work behind it, they would, Charlie judged, not 
attempt an assault until this also was destroyed. Dur- 
ing the night large quantities of fresh earth were piled 
on the outer barricade, which was now useful as forming 
a screen to that behind it from the guns. All night the 
work at the parellel walls continued, and by morning 
these had reached a height of three feet. 

During the next two days the fight continued without 
much advantage on either side. Each day the enemy’s 
guns shattered the outer barricade, but this was as regu- 
larly repaired at night in spite of the heavy artillery and 


2 So WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 

matchlock fire which they kept up toward the spot. On 
the fourth day the enemy pulled down a house standing 
just in the rear of their battery, and Charlie found that 
behind it they had erected another. 

It was a solidly built work of fifteen feet in height, and 
the enemy must have labored continuously at it every 
night. It had a strong and high parapet of sandbags 
protecting the gunners from the musketry fire of the 
tower. The muzzles of four guns projected through 
embrasures which had been left for them, and these 
opened fire over the heads of the gunners in the lower 
battery. 

In spite of the efforts of the besieged the enemy kept 
up so heavy a fire that by the afternoon the inner as 
well as the outer barricade was knocked to pieces. By 
this time, however, the inner walls were completed, and 
the English awaited the storm with confidence. The 
doorway of the temple had been closed and blocked up 
behind, but the doors had been shattered to pieces by 
the shot which had passed through the gateway, and the 
entrance now stood open. Inside the temple, out of the 
line of fire, Charlie had the two little field-pieces, each 
crammed to the muzzle with bullets, placed in readiness 
to fire. The lower floor of the tower had been pierced 
above the gateway, and here two huge caldrons filled 
with boiling lead, stripped from the roof, stood ready 
for action. 

At three in the afternoon, after a furious cannonade, 
‘the fire of the enemy’s battery suddenly ceased. They 
had formed communications between the houses on 
either side of the street, and at the signal the troops 
poured out from these in large bodies and rushed to the 
assault. The guns from the tower, which had been 
awaiting the moment, poured showers of grape among 
them, but, believing that the temple now lay at their 
mercy, the enemy did not hesitate but rushed at the gate- 
way. Not a shot was fired as they entered. Scrambling 
over the remains of the two barricades the enemy poured 
with exulting shouts into the courtyard. Then those in 


BESIEGED IN A PAGODA. 


281 


front hesitated. On either hand, as far as the doorway 
of the temple, extended a massive wall eight feet high, 
roughly built certainly, but far too strong to be battered 
down, too steep to be scaled. They would have re- 
treated, but they were driven forward by the mass which 
poured in through the gateway behind them; and seeing 
that their only safety was in victory they pressed forward 
again. 

Not a defender showed himself until the head of the 
column had reached a point two-thirds of the distance 
across the courtyard. Then suddenly, on either side, 
the wall was lined by the British, who at once opened 
a tremendous fire on the mass below. At the same mo- 
ment the guns were run into the doorway and poured 
their contents into the struggling mass. Pent up be- 
tween the walls, unable to return the fire poured down 
upon them, with lanes torn through them by the dis- 
charge of the cannon, the greater portion of the mass 
strove to turn and retire. The officer in command, a 
gallant Frenchman, called upon the survivors of the 50 
French infantry who had led the attack to follow him, 
and rushed forward upon the guns. Here, however, 
Charlie had posted his Europeans, and these, swarming 
out from the temple, poured a volley into the advancing 
French and then charged them with the bayonet. 

The pressure from behind had now ceased. Streams 
of boiling lead poured through the holes above the arch- 
way had effectually checked the advance, and through 
this molten shower the shattered remnants of the assault- 
ing column now fled for their lives, leaving 250 of their 
best men dead behind them. As the last of the column 
issued out the guns of the battery again angrily opened 
fire. As Charlie had anticipated, the enemy, finding 
how strong were the inner defenses, abandoned all 
further idea of attack by the gateway; and leaving only 
two guns there to prevent a sortie, placed their whole 
artillery on the western side of the pagoda and opened 
fire to effect a breach there. 

For a week the siege continued, and then Charlie de- 


282 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


termined to evacuate the place. The rajah’s treasure 
was made up into small sacks, which were fastened to 
the horses’ croups. Had it not been for these animals, 
he would have defended the place to the last, confident 
in his power to devise fresh means to repel fresh assaults. 
The store of forage, however, collected by the enemy 
for their own use in the temple was now exhausted. 
Charlie directed Peters with 20 men to sally out from the 
gate at midnight, to enter the nearest house on the right- 
hand side, and to follow the communications made by 
the enemy before the assault until they came to the end 
of the street. Lieutenant Hallowes, with a similar party, 
was to take the left side. If they found any guards 
within the houses they were to overpower these, and, 
rushing straight on, to attack the battery and spike the 
guns. Should they find the houses deserted they were 
to gather in the houses nearest the battery, when Peters 
was to fire his pistol as a signal to Hallowes and both 
parties were to attack the battery. One of the inner walls 
had been pulled down, and the main body of the force, 
having the wounded and the ladies. of the rajah’s zenana 
in their center, were to sally out the instant the guns 
were taken. 

The plan was carried out with the greatest success. 
The houses on both sides of the street were found to 
be deserted, and as Peters fired his pistol, the party 
dashed at the flanks of the battery. The French gun- 
ners leaped to their feet, and, believing that they were 
attacked in front, discharged their cannon. The grape- 
shot swept along the empty street and through the gate- 
way, and Charlie, leading one of the troops, at once 
dashed down the street. At their first rush Peters and 
Hallowes had carried the battery, cutting down the gun- 
ners. Immediately behind, however, the enemy had 
posted a support several hundred strong, and these 
speedily advanced to recover the battery. Leaving their 
horses in charge of a small party, Charlie dismounted 
his men and joined Peters, and his fire quickly checked 
the assault. In the meantime the rest of the defenders 


BESIEGED IN A PAGODA. 283 

of the temple rode down the street; and leaving a few 
men with the horses of Peters’ and Hallowes’ detach- 
ments, rode out into the open country. After driving 
back his assailants Charlie led his party back to their 
horses, mounted them, and speedily rejoined the main 
body. An hour later they were well on their way to- 
ward Permacoil, which they reached next day. 

The rajah was delighted at recovering his family. 
The treasure was divided, and the portion belonging to 
the troops was, with the company’s share, sent down 
under a strong escort to Madras. 

For a considerable time Charlie’s force were occupied 
with small undertakings. Lally had now arrived from 
France and had taken the command. He had at his 
orders a European force considerably exceeding any that 
had hitherto been gathered in India, and he boasted that 
he was going to capture Madras and drive the English 
out of India. Nothing could have been more unfor- 
tunate for the French than the choice of such a man, and 
his appointment was destined to give the last blow to 
French influence in India, as the supercession of Du- 
pleix had given the first. M. Lally had one virtue: he 
was personally brave; but he was arrogant, passionate, 
and jealous. He had no capacity whatever for either 
awing or conciliating those with whom he came in con- 
tact. He treated the natives with open contempt, and 
was soon as much hated by them as by his own soldiers. 
His first step had been to order Bussy down from Hy- 
derabad with the whole of his force. 

Bussy, a man of great genius, of extreme tact, of per- 
fect knowledge of the Indian character, had for eight 
years maintained French influence supreme at that court, 
and had acquired for France the Northern Sirkars, a 
splendid and most valuable province on the sea-coast 
north of Madras. Salabut Jung, the ruler of Hyderabad, 
the protege of the French, heard with dismay the order 
which Bussy had received. To Bussy himself the blow 
was a heavy one, and he saw that his departure would 
entail the ruin of the edifice of French influence, which 


284 WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 

lie had built up by so many years of thought and toil. 
However, he obeyed at once, and marched with 250 
Europeans and 500 native troops into the Sirkars. He 
made over the charge of this treaty to the Marquis de 
Conflans, whom, although but just arrived from Europe 
and entirely new to Indian affairs, Count de Lally had 
sent to replace M. Moracin, who' had for years ably 
managed the province. He then marched with his 
troops to join the main army under Count de Lally. 
This force, having taken Fort St. David, had operated 
against Tanjore, where it had suffered a repulse. The 
news of this reached the Northern Sirkars soon after the 
departure of Bussy, and Anandraz, the most powerful 
chief of the country, rose in rebellion, and sent a mes- 
senger to Calcutta begging the assistance of the English 
to drive out the French. 

While the rest of the Bengal council, seeing that 
Bengal was at that time threatened with invasion from 
the north and menaced with troubles within, considered 
that it would be an act little short of madness to send 
troops at a time when they could be so little spared to 
assist a chief who, even from his own accounts, was 
only able to raise 3000 irregular followers, Clive thought 
otherwise. He srw the great value of the Northern 
Sirkars, whose possession would complete the line of 
British territory along the sea-coast from Calcutta down 
to Madras. He saw, too, that a movement here would 
effect a diversion in favor of Madras. The situation 
there appeared very serious, and he could spare no troops 
which would suffice to turn the scale. But even should 
Madras be lost, the gain of the Northern Sirkars would 
almost compensate for the disaster. Having gained the 
council to his views he sent Lieutenant Colonel Forde, 
who commanded the company’s troops in Bengal, with 
500 Europeans, 2000 natives, and six six-pounders by 
sea to Vizagapatam, a port which Anandraz had seized. 
These landed on the 20th of October, 1758. 

Had Conflans been an efficient officer he could have 
crushed Anandraz long before the arrival of the Eng- 


BESIEGED IN A PAGODA. 285 

lish. He had under his orders a force composed of 500 
European troops, men trained by Bussy and accustomed 
to victory, 4000 native troops, and a brigade of artillery. 
Instead of marching at once to crush the rebellion, he 
sent messenger after messenger to Lally begging for 
assistance. It was only when he heard from Lally that 
he had directed Moracin, with 300 European troops, to 
support him that he moved against Anandraz. His 
opportunity had, however, slipped from his hands. He 
had thrown away six weeks, and when upon the march 
the news reached him of the landing of the English, he 
took up the very strong position within sight of the Fort 
Peddapur and intrenched himself there. 

Clive had sent to Madras the news that he was dis- 
patching Colonel Forde to the Sirkars, and begged that 
any body of troops which might be available might be 
forwarded. Charlie’s corps had already been recalled 
toward Madras to keep the bodies of French who were 
converging in that direction at a distance as long as pos- 
sible, so as to allow the victualing of Madras to go on 
uninterrupted. Mr. Pigot now instructed Charlie to 
hand over the command of that force to Peters, and with 
50 men to make his way north and effect a junction with 
Forde, who was entirely deficient in cavalry. Avoiding 
the French force, Charlie reached Vizagapatam upon the 
2 d of December, and found that Forde had marched on 
the previous day. He started at once, and on the even- 
ing of the 3d came up to Forde, who had arrived in 
sight of the French position. 

Charlie had already made the acquaintance of Colonel 
Forde in Bengal, and Forde was glad to obtain the assist- 
ance and advice of an officer who had seen so much 
service. An hour after arriving Charlie rode out with 
his commander and reconnoitered the French position, 
which was, they concluded, too strong to be attacked. 
In point of numbers the forces were about even. Con- 
flans had, in addition to his 500 Europeans, 6000 native 
infantry, 500 native cavalry, and thirty guns. Forde 
had 470 Europeans, 1900 Sepoys, and six guns. Anan- 


2 86 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


draz had 40 Europeans, 5000 infantry, 500 horsemen, 
and four guns. These 5000 men were, however, a mere 
ragged mob, of whom very few had firearms and the 
rest were armed with bows and arrows. His horsemen 
were equally worthless, and Forde could only rely upon 
the troops he had brought with him from Calcutta and 
the troop of 50 natives under Charlie Marryat. 

Finding that the French position was too strong to be 
attacked, Forde fell back to a strong position at Cham- 
bol, a village nearly four miles from the French camp. 
Here for four days the two armies remained watching 
each other, the leaders of both sides considering that the 
position of the other was too strong to be attacked. 


CHAPTER XXVI. 

THE SIEGE OF MADRAS. 

At last, weary of inactivity, the Marquis de Conflans 
and Colonel Forde arrived simultaneously, on the 8th of 
December, at a determination to bring matters to a crisis. 
Conflans had heard from a deserter that Forde had 
omitted to occupy a mound which, at a short distance 
from his camp, commanded the position. He deter- 
mined to seize this during the night, and to open fire 
with his guns, and that his main army should take ad- 
vantage of the confusion which the sudden attack would 
occasion to fall upon the English. Forde on his part 
had determined to march at four o’clock in the morning 
to a village named Condore, three miles distant, whence 
he could threaten the French flank. Ignorant of each 
other’s intentions the English and French left their 
camps at night. Forde marched at a quarter past four, 
as arranged with Anandraz; but the rajah and his people, 
with the usual native aversion to punctuality, remained 
quietly asleep, and a few minutes after daybreak they 
were roughly awakened by a deadly fire poured by six 
guns into the camp. The rajah sent messenger after 


THE SIEGE OF MADRAS. 


287 


messenger to Forde urging him to return, and he him- 
self with his frightened army hurried toward Condore. 
Forde had, indeed, retraced his steps immediately he 
heard the fire of the guns, and soon met the rajah’s rabble 
in full flight, and, uniting with them, marched back to 
Condore. 

Conflans supposed that the fire of his guns had driven 
the whole of his opponents in a panic from Chambol, 
and, determining to take advantage of the confusion, 
marched with his force against them. Forde at once 
prepared for the battle. In the center he placed the 
English, including the rajah’s 40 Europeans. Next to 
these, on either side, he placed his Sepoys, and posted 
the troops of Anandraz on the right and left flanks. He 
then advanced toward the enemy. The French guns 
opened fire. Forde halted. In the position in which 
he found himself his centre occupied a field of Indian 
corn, so high that they were concealed from the enemy. 
Conflans had moved toward the English left, with the 
intention apparently of turning that flank, and after the 
artillery battle on both sides had continued for forty 
minutes he ordered his troops to advance. 

In Madras both the English and French dressed their 
Sepoys in white. In Bengal, however, since the raising 
of Sepoy regiments after the recapture of Calcutta the 
English had clothed them in red. Conflans, therefore, 
thought that the force he was about to attack was the 
English contingent, and that if he could defeat this the 
rout of his enemy would be secured. The French ad- 
vanced with great rapidity and attacked the Sepoys in 
front and flank so vigorously that they broke in disorder. 
The rajah’s troops fled instantly, and in spite of the 
exhortations of Forde the Sepoys presently followed 
their example, and fled with the rajah’s troops to Cham- 
bol, pursued by the enemy’s horse. They would have 
suffered even more severely than they did in this pursuit 
had not Charlie Marryat launched his little squadron at 
the .enemy’s horse. Keeping his men well together he 
made repeated charges, several times riding through and 


288 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


through them, until at last they desisted from the pur- 
suit, and, forming in a compact body, fell back toward 
the field of battle; Charlie, who had already lost 12 men, 
not thinking it prudent again to attack so strong a force. 

Conflans’ easy success over the Sepoys was fatal to 
him. Believing that he had defeated the English he 
gave orders to several companies .of the French troops 
to press on in pursuit without delay. They started off 
in hot speed, proceeding without much order or regu- 
larity, when they were suddenly confronted by the whole 
line of English troops in solid order advancing from the 
high corn to take the place lately occupied by the 
Sepoys. In vain the scattered and surprised companies 
of the French endeavored to re-form and make head 
against them. So heavy was the fire of musketry opened 
by the British line, immediately they had taken up their 
position, that the French broke their ranks and ran back 
as fast as they could to regain their guns, which were 
fully half a mile in the rear. 

In the meantime the French Sepoys on their left had 
been gradually driving back the English right; but 
Forde, disregarding this, pressed forward in hot pur- 
suit of the French with his English, behind whom the 
greater portion of the beaten Sepoys had already rallied. 
Keeping his men well together he advanced at the fullest 
speed, following so closely upon the enemy that the 
latter had only time to fire one or two rounds with their 
thirteen guns before the English were upon them. The 
French, who had already lost heart by the serious check 
which had befallen them, were unable to stand the 
shock, and at once retreated, leaving their guns behind 
them. 

As Forde had anticipated, the French Sepoys, seeing 
their center and right defeated, desisted from their attack 
on the English right and fell back upon their camp. 
The English Sepoys at once marched forward and joined 
Forde’s force. The rajah’s troops, however, the whole 
of whom had fled, remained cowering in the shelter of 
a large dry tank. Forde did not wait for them, but, 


THE SIEGE OF MADRAS. 


289 


leaving his guns behind him, pressed forward, an hour 
after the defeat of the French, against their camp. To 
reach this he had to pass along a narrow valley com- 
manded by the French heavy guns. These opened fire, 
but the English pressed forward without wavering. The 
defenders, not yet recovered from the effects of their 
defeat in the plain, at once gave way, and retreated in 
the utmost confusion toward Rajahmahendri. Had the 
cavalry of Anandraz been at hand to follow up the ad- 
vantage great numbers might have been captured. As 
it was, Charlie Marryat with his little force harassed 
them for some miles, but was unable to effect any serious 
damage on so strong a body. The English captured 
thirty-two pieces of cannon, and all the stores, ammuni- 
tion, and tents of the French. 

Forde at once dispatched a battalion of Sepoys under 
Captain Knox in pursuit, and this officer pressed on so 
vigorously that he approached Rajahmahendri the same 
evening. Two more native battalions reached Knox 
during the night. 

So thoroughly dispirited were the enemy that the sight 
of the red-coated Sepoys of Knox, whom they could not 
distinguish from English, induced them to abandon 
Rajahmahendri in all haste, although it contained a 
strong mud fort with several guns. The Godavery is 
two miles wide, and all night the passage of the river in 
boats continued, and when at daybreak next morning 
Knox broke into the town he found 15 Europeans still 
on the banks expecting a returning boat. These he 
captured; and seeing upon the opposite bank a party 
about to disembark guns and stores from another boat, 
he opened fire from the guns of the fort toward it, and 
although the shot could scarcely reach halfway across 
the river, such was the terror of the enemy that they for- 
sook the boat and fled. Knox at once sent a boat across 
and brought back that containing the guns. The 
French retreated to Masulipatam, the capital of the 
province, a port which rivaled Madras in its commerce. 
Forde determined to follow them there, but he was hin- 


290 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


dered by want of money to pay his troops. This the 
Rajah Anandraz, who had promised to supply money, 
now excited and arrogant by the victory which he had 
done nothing toward gaining, refused to supply, and 
many weeks were spent in negotiations before Forde 
was able to move forward. 

Charlie was no longer with him. The very day before 
the fight of Condore letters had arrived from Madras, 
stating the urgency of the position there, and upon the 
night after the battle Colonel Forde ordered Charlie to 
return to aid in the defense of that city, before which the 
French had appeared on the 29th of November. Several 
skirmishes took place outside the city, and the English 
then retired within the fort. The force consisted of 1600 
white troops and 2300 Sepoys. The nabob, who had 
also retired into the town, had 200 horse and a huge 
retinue of attendants. 

On the morning of the 14th the French occupied the 
town, and the next day the English made a sortie with 
600 men. These, for a while, drove the French before 
them through the streets of Madras; but as the French 
gradually rallied, the fire upon the English was so heavy 
that the sortie was repulsed with a loss of 200 soldiers 
and 6 officers, killed, wounded, and prisoners. The 
French loss had been about the same. Had not a large 
quantity of the French troops broken into the wine 
stores on their arrival and drunk to a point of intoxica- 
tion it is probable that none of the British party would 
have returned to the fort. The sortie had, however, the 
effect that Saubinet, one of the best of the French 
officers, was killed, and Count D’Estaign, an able 
general, taken prisoner. For some time the siege pro- 
ceeded slowly, the French waiting for the arrival of their 
siege artillery by ship from Pondicherry. 

The fort of Madras was now a far more formidable 
post than it had been when the French before captured 
it. In the year 1743 Mr. Smith, an engineer, had 
marked out the lines for a considerable increase in the 
fortifications. The ditch was dug and faced with brick, 


THE SIEGE OF MADRAS. 


. 29I 


but on account of the expense nothing further had been 
done. The French had added somewhat to the fortifica- 
tions during their stay there in 1750. Nothing had been 
done by the English, when they recovered the town, until 
the news of the preparations which the French were 
making for the siege of the place had been received. 
Four thousand natives were then set to work, and these 
in eighteen months had completed the fortifications, as 
designed by Mr. Smith, just before the arrival of the 
French. 

The latter determined to attack from the northern 
side. Here the fort was protected by a demi-bastion 
next to the sea, and by the Royal Bastion, the wall be- 
tween the two being covered by a work known as the 
North Ravelin. The defense was also strengthened by 
the fire of the northwest lunette and Pigot’s Bastion. 
Against these the French threw up four batteries. 
Lally’s Battery, erected by the regiment of that name, 
was on the sea-shore directly facing the demi-bastion. 
To its right was the Burying-ground Battery, facing the 
Royal Bastion. Against the western face of this posi- 
tion the French regiment of Lorraine erected a strong 
work, while farther round to the west, on a rising 
ground, they threw up a battery called the Hospital Bat- 
tery, which kept up a cross-fire on the English position. 
To prevent the French from pressing forward along the 
strip of shore between the fort and the sea, the English 
erected a strong stockade, behind which was a battery 
called the Fascine Battery. 

A few days after the siege began it was found that 
the numbers crowded up in the fort could scarcely be 
accommodated, and the rajah was, therefore, invited to 
leave by sea, on board a ship which would land him at 
the Dutch settlement of Negapatam, whence he might 
journey through the Tanjore country to Trichinopoli. 
This proposal he willingly accepted, and embarked with 
his wife, women, and children; his other followers leav- 
ing by the land side opposite to that invested by the 
French. Thus the garrison were relieved of the embar- 


2 92 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


rassment and consumption of food caused by 400 men 
and 200 horses. 

Charlie rode with his troop without interruption 
through the country, avoiding all bodies of the enemy 
until he reached the sea fifteen miles north of Madras. 
Here he hired a native boat, and, leaving the troops 
under the command of Ensign Anstey, sailed for Madras 
in order to inform the garrison of Forde’s victory, over 
the French, and to concert with the governor as to the 
measures which he wished him to carry out to harass 
the enemy. He was accompanied only by Tim and 
Hossein. The wind was fair, and starting an hour before 
sunset, the boat ran into Madras roads two hours later. 
The Harlem , which had that day arrived with artillery 
for the French from Pondicherry, fired at the little craft, 
and the native boatmen were about to turn the head of 
their craft northward again. Charlie, however, drew his 
pistol, and Hossein took his place with his drawn tulwar 
by the helmsman. The boatmen, thereupon, again con- 
tinued their course, and though several shots fell near 
them they escaped untouched, and anchored just out- 
side the surf abreast of the fort. The English had taken 
the precaution of erecting a number of huts under the 
walls of the fort for the boatmen, in order to be able to 
communicate with any ship arriving, or to send mes- 
sages in or out. As soon as the boat anchored a cata- 
maran put out and brought Charlie and his followers to 
shore. There was great joy at the receipt of his news, 
and the guns of the fort fired twenty-one shots toward 
the enemy in honor of the victory. 

Governor Pigot was in general command of the de- 
fense, having under him Colonel Lawrence in command 
of the troops. The latter, after inquiring from Charlie 
the character of the officer he had left in command of his 
troops, and finding that he was able and energetic, re- 
quested Charlie to send orders to him to join either the 
force under Captain Preston at Chingalpatt, or that of 
a native leader, Mahommed Issoof, both of whom were 
ravaging and destroying the country about Conjeveram, 


THE SIEGE OF MADRAS. 293 

whence the French besieging Madras drew most of their 
provisions. Charlie himself was requested to remain in 
the fort, where his experience in sieges would render 
him of great value. 

At daybreak on the 2 d of January the Lorraine and 
Lally batteries opened fire. The English guns, how- 
ever, proved superior in weight and number, dismounted 
two of the cannon, and silenced the others. The French 
mortars continued to throw heavy shell into the fort, and 
that night most of the European women and children 
were sent away in native boats. The French batteries, 
finding the superiority of the English fire, ceased firing 
until the 6th, when seven guns and six large mortars 
from Lally’s Battery, and eight guns and two mortars 
from the Lorraine Battery opened upon the town. The 
cannonade now continued without intermission, but the 
enemy gained but little advantage. Every day, how- 
ever, added to their strength, as fresh vessels with artil- 
lery continued to arrive from Pondicherry. They were 
now pushing their approaches from Lally’s Battery to- 
ward the demi-bastion. The losses on the part of the 
besieged were considerable, many being killed and 
wounded each day. This continued to the end of ithe 
month in spite of many gallant sorties by parties of the 
besieged, who repeatedly killed and drove out the work- 
ing parties in the head of the French trenches. These 
progressed steadily and reached to the outworks of the 
demi-bastion. 

On the 25th the Shaftesbury , one of the company’s 
trading vessels, commanded by Captain Inglis, was seen 
approaching. The five French ships hoisted English 
colors. A catamaran was sent out to warn her, and at 
nine o’clock in the evening she came to anchor. She 
had on board only some invalids, but brought the wel- 
come news that three other ships with troops would soon 
be up. She had on board, too, thirty-seven chests of 
silver and many military stores, among them hand- 
grenades and large shell, which were most welcome to 
the garrison, who had nearly expended their supply. 


294 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


The native boats went off from the fort and brought on 
shore the ammunition and stores. In the afternoon the 
Shaftesbury was attacked by the two French ships, the 
Bristol and the Harlem. She fought them for two hours, 
and then sailed in and anchored again near the fort. 
The French ships lay off at a distance, and these and 
one of their batteries played upon the Shaftesbury after 
she had anchored, and continued to do so for the next 
three days. 

Many of the guns of the fort were dismounted by the 
artillery fire, which had continued with scarcely any in- 
termission for a month. The parapets of the ramparts 
were in many places beaten down, and the walls exposed 
to the enemy’s fire greatly damaged. The enemy now 
opened their breaching battery close to the works, and 
on the 7th two breaches had been effected, and Lally 
ordered his principal engineer and artilllery officers to 
give their opinion as to the practicability of an assault. 
These, however, considered that the assault would have 
no prospect of success, as the guns commanding the 
ditch were still uninjured, and the palisades which 
stormers must climb over before reaching the breach 
untouched. So heavy a cross-fire could be brought to 
bear by the besieged upon an assaulting column that it 
would be swept away before it could mount the breach. 
These officers added their opinion that, considering the 
number of men defending the fort in comparison with 
those attacking it, final success could not be looked for, 
and further prosecution of the works would only entail 
a useless loss of life. 

On the 9th of February the French attacked Mahom- 
med Issoof’s men and those of Captain Preston, the 
whole under the command of Major Calliaud, who had 
come up from Trichinopoli and had taken station three 
miles in the rear of the French position. The greater 
part of the natives, as usual, behaved badly, but Calliaud, 
with the artillery and a few Sepoys, defended himself till 
nightfall and then drew off. 

For the next week the French continued to fire, and 


THE SIEGE OF MADRAS. 


2 95 


their approaches were pushed on. Several sorties were 
made, but matters remained unchanged until the 14th, 
when six English ships were seen standing into the 
roads, and that night the French drew out from their 
trenches and retreated. The next morning 600 troops 
landed from the ships, and the garrison, who had so 
stoutly resisted the assaults made upon them for forty- 
two days, sallied out to inspect the enemy’s works. 
Fifty-two cannon were left in them, and so great was the 
hurry with which the French retreated that they left 
forty-four sick in the hospital behind. The fort fired 
during the siege 26,554 rounds from their cannon, 7502 
shells, threw 1990 hand-grenades, and expended 200,000 
musketry cartridges. Thirty pieces of cannon and five 
mortars had been dismounted during the siege. Of the 
Europeans the loss in killed, wounded, and prisoners 
was 579. Three hundred and twenty-two Sepoys were 
killed and wounded, and 440 deserted during the siege. 

In spite of the resolution with which the French had 
pushed the siege it was from the first destined to failure. 
The garrison was well provisioned, had great stores of 
ammunition, and plenty of spare cannon to replace those 
disabled or dismounted. The works were strong and 
the garrison not greatly inferior in number to the be- 
siegers. The French, on the other hand, had to bring 
their artillery, ammunition, and stores by water from 
Pondicherry, and the activity of the English parties in 
their rear rendered it extremely difficult for them to 
receive supplies of food by land. Lally had disgusted 
even the French officers and soldiers by his arrogance 
and passionate temper, while by the Sepoys he was abso- 
lutely hated. 

During the siege Charlie had been most active in the 
defense. Colonel Lawrence had assigned no special 
post to him, but used him as what would now be called 
his chief of the staff. He was ever where the fire was 
thickest, encouraging the men, and during the intervals 
of comparative cessation of fire he went about the fort 
seeing to the comforts of the men in their quarters, to 


296 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


the issue of stores, and other matters. Upon the very 
morning after the French had withdrawn he asked to 
be allowed to rejoin his troop, which was with Major 
Calliaud, and at once started to rejoin Colonel Forde. 
He wished to take the whole of his corps with him; but 
Colonel Lawrence considered that these would be of 
extreme use in following up the French and in subse- 
quent operations, as cavalry was an arm in which the 
English were greatly deficient. 

Colonel Forde had been terribly delayed by the con- 
duct of Rajah Anandraz, and the delay enabled the 
French again to recover heart. He was not able to 
move forward until the 1 st of March. On the 6th he 



MASULIPATAM. 


297 


arrived before Masulipatam, and the following day 
Charlie joined him with his troop. The fort of Masuli- 
patam stood in an extremely defensible position. It was 
surrounded by a swamp on three sides. The other face 
rested on the river. From the land side it was only 
approachable by a causeway across the swamp, and this 
was guarded by a strong ravelin, which is the military 
name for an outwork erected beyond the ditch of a 
fortress. It was in all respects capable of a prolonged 
defense. In form it was an irregular parallelogram 
about eight hundred yards in length and six hundred 
yards wide, and on the walls were eleven strong bastions. 
The morass which surrounded it was of from three to 
eighteen feet in depth. On the approach of Forde, Con- 
flans evacuated the town, which, also surrounded by 
swamps and lying two miles to the northwest of the fort, 
was itself a most defensible position, and retired across 
the narrow causeway, more than a mile long, to the fort. 


CHAPTER XXVII. 

MASULIPATAM. 

“ I am heartily glad that you have come, Marryat,” 
Colonel Forde said as Charlie rode up. “ I have got 
here at last, as you see, but that is a very different thing 
from getting in. An uglier place to attack I never saw; 
and in other respects matters .are not bright. Anandraz 
is a constant worry and trouble to me. He has every- 
thing to gain by our success, and yet will do nothing to 
aid it. His men are worse than useless in fight, and the 
only thing which we want and he could give us — money 
— he will not let us have. Will you ride with me to the 
spot where I’m erecting my batteries, and you will see 
the prospect for yourself? ” 

The prospect was, as Charlie found when he saw it, 
the reverse of cheerful. The point which Forde had 
selected to erect his batteries was on some sandbanks 


298 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


eight hundred yards from the eastern face of the fort. 
It would be impossible to construct approaches against 
the walls, and should a breach be made, there still re- 
mained a wide creek to be crossed, beyond which lay 
the deep, and in most parts absolutely impassable, 
swamp. Charlie and his men were employed in bringing 
in provisions from the surrounding country; but a short 
distance in the rear a French column under Du Rocher, 
with 200 European and 2000 native troops, with four 
field-pieces, watched the British and rendered the collec- 
tion of provisions difficult. Du Rocher had several 
strong places with European and Sepoy garrisons near 
him, in which to retire in case Forde should advance 
against him. 

“ Well, Mister Charles,” Tim said one morning, “ this 
is altogether a quare sort of a siege. Here we are with 
a place in front of us with ten times as many guns as we 
have got, and a force wellnigh twice as large. Even if 
there were no walls and no guns, I don’t see how we 
could get at ’em, barring we’d wings, for this bog is worse 
than anything in the ould country. Then behind us 
we’ve got another army, which is, they say, with the gar- 
risons of the forts, as strong as we are. W e’ve got little 
food and less money, and the troops are grumbling 
mightily, I can tell you.” 

On the 18th of March, while his batteries were still 
incomplete, Forde received certain news that the Nizam 
of the Deccan, the old ally of the French, was advancing 
with an army of 40,000 men to attack him. No British 
commander ever stood in a position of more imminent 
peril. This completed the terror of Anandraz. Du 
Rocher had caused reports to be circulated that he in- 
tended to march against that chief’s territories, and the 
news of the approach of the nizam, who was his suzerain 
lord, completed his dismay. He refused to advance an- 
other penny. Colonel Forde had already expended the 
prize-money gained by the troops, his own private funds, 
and those of his officers, in buying food for his troops, 
and the men were several months in arrears of their pay. 


MASULIPATAM. 


299 


I m afraid, yer honor,” Tim said that evening to 
Charlie, “ that there’s going to be a shindy.” 

“ What do you mean by a shindy, Tim? ” 

I mane, yer honor, that the men are cursing and 
swearing, and saying the devil a bit will they fight any 
longer. It’s rank mutiny and rebellion, yer honor; but 
there’s something to be said for the poor boys. They 
have seen all the prize-money they had taken spent. 
Not a thraneen have they touched for months. Their 
clothes are in rags, and here they are before a place 
which there’s no more chance of their taking than there 
is of their flying up to the clouds. And now they hear 
that besides the French behind us, there’s the nizam with 
40,000 of his men marching aginst us. It’s a purty 
kettle of fish altogether, yer honor. It isn’t for myself I 
care, Mr. Charles. Haven’t I got an order in my pocket 
on the treasury at Madras for three hundred pound and 
over; but it’s mighty hard, yer honor, just when one has 
become a wealthy man, to be shut up in a French 
prison.” 

“Well, Tim, I hope there will be no trouble; but I 
own that things look bad.” 

“ Hossein has been saying, yer honor, that he thinks 
that the best way would be for him and me to go out 
and chop off the heads of half a dozen of the chief ring- 
leaders. But I thought I’d better be asking after yer 
honor’s pleasure in the affair before I set about it.” 

To Tim’s great disappointment Charlie told him that 
the step was one to which he could hardly assent at 
present. 

The next morning the troops turned out with their 
arms and threatened to march away. Forde spoke to 
them gently but firmly. He told them that he could not 
believe that men who had behaved so gallantly at Con- 
dore would fail now in their duty. He begged them to 
return to their tents, and to send two of their number as 
deputies to him. This they did. The deputies came to 
the colonel’s tent and told him that all were resolved to 
fight no more unless they were immediately paid the 


30 ° 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


amount of prize-money due to them, and were assured 
of the whole booty in case Masulipatam should be taken. 
Colonel Forde promised that they would receive their 
prize-money out of the very first funds which reached 
him. As to the booty which might be taken in Masuli- 
patam, he said he had no power to change the regula- 
tions of the company; but that he would beg them, under 
consideration of the hardships which the troops had en- 
dured and their great services, to forego their half of the 
plunder. Directly Masulipatam was taken, he said, he 
would divide one half among them, and hold the other 
until he obtained the company’s answer to his request. 
Then he would distribute it at once. With this answer 
the troops were satisfied, and returned at once to their 
duty. 

On the 25th the guns of the battery opened fire upon 
the fort, but the damage which they did was incon- 
siderable. On the 27th news came that the French army 
of observation had retaken Rajahmahendri and that the 
nizam with his army had arrived at Baizwara, forty miles 
distant. Letters came in from the nizam to Anandraz, 
ordering him instantly to quit the English camp and join 
him. The rajah was so terrified that that night he 
started with his troops without giving any information of 
his intentions to Colonel Forde; and dilatory as were his 
motions in general, he on this occasion marched sixteen 
miles before daybreak. 

The instant Colonel Forde heard that he had left he 
sent for Charlie Marryat. “ I suppose you have heard, 
Marryat, that that scoundrel Anandraz has bolted. Ride 
off to him with your troop and do your best to persuade 
him to return.” 

“ I will do so, sir,” Charlie said; “ but really it seems 
to me that we are better without him than with him. 
His men only consume our provisions and cause trouble, 
and they are no more good fighting than so many sheep.” 

“ That is so,” Colonel Forde said. “ But in the first 
place his 5000 men, absolutely worthless as they are, 
swell our forces to a respectable size. If Conflans and 


MASULIPATAM. 


301 

Du Rocher saw how small is our really fighting body, 
they would fall upon us together and annihilate us. In 
the second place, if Anandraz goes to the nizam he will 
at once, of course, declare for the French, and will give 
up Vizagapatam and the rest of the ground we won by 
the battle of Condore. The whole of the fruits of the 
campaign would be lost, and we should only hold that 
portion of the Northern Sirkars on which our troops 
here are encamped.” 

“ I beg your pardon, colonel,” Charlie said; “ you are 
right and I am wrong. I will start at once.” 

Putting himself at the head of his five-and-twenty men 
Charlie rode off at once in pursuit of the rajah, fie 
found him encamped in a village. Charlie had already 
instructed his men as to the course which they were to 
pursue, and halted them at a distance of fifty yards from 
the rajah’s tent. Then dismounting, and followed by 
Tim as his orderly and Hossein as his body-servant, he 
walked to the tent. He found Anandraz surrounded by 
his chief officers. The rajah received him coldly; but 
Charlie paying no attention to this, took a seat close to 
him. “ I am come, rajah,” he said, “ from Colonel 
Forde to point out to you the folly of the course which 
you have pursued. By the line which you have taken so 
far, it is evidently your intention to cross the Godavery 
and retire to your own country. What chance have you 
of accomplishing this? By this time the cavalry of the 
nizam will be scattered over the whole country between 
this and the Godavery. At Rajahmahendri is Du 
Rocher with his army, who will take you in flank. Even 
supposing that you reach your own country, what is the 
future open to you? If the English are finally successful 
they will deprive you of your rank and possessions for 
deserting them now. If the French are victorious they 
and the nizam will then turn their attention to you, and 
you cannot hope to escape with life when your treason 
has brought such troubles upon them.” 

The rajah looked for a minute doubtful, and then, en- 
couraged by the murmurs of the officers around him, 


302 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


who were weary of the expedition and its labors, 
although their troops had not fired a single shot, he said 
obstinately: “ No more words are needed. I have made 
up my mind.” 

“ And so have I,” Charlie said, and with a sudden 
spring he leaped upon the rajah, seized him by the 
throat, and placed a pistol to his ear. Hossein drew his 
sword and rushed to his side. Tim ran outside and held 
up his arm, and the little body of cavalry at once rode up, 
and half of them dismounting, entered the tent with 
drawn swords. 

So astounded were the officers of the rajah at Charlie’s 
sudden attack, that for a moment they knew not what to 
do, and before they could recover from their surprise 
Charlie’s troopers entered. 

“ Take this man,” Charlie said, pointing to the rajah, 
“ to that tree and hang him at once. Cut down any of 
these fellows who move a finger.” The rajah was 
dragged to the tree, almost lifeless with terror. “ Now 
rajah,” Charlie said, “ you either give instant orders for 
your army to march back to Masulipatam, or up you go 
on that branch above there.” 

The terrified rajah instantly promised to carry out 
Charlie’s orders and to remain faithful to the English. 
The officers were brought out from the tent and received 
orders from the rajah to set his troops instantly in motion 
on their way back. The rajah was led to his tent and 
there kept under a guard until the army was in motion. 
When the whole of it was well on its way Charlie said: 
“ Now rajah, we will ride on. We will say no more 
about this little affair, and I will ask Colonel Forde to 
forgive your ill-behavior in leaving him. But mind, if at 
any future time you attempt to disobey his orders or to 
retire from the camp, I will blow out your brains, even 
if I have to follow you with my men into the heart of 
your own palace.” 

Upon their return to the British camp Charlie ex- 
plained to Colonel Forde the measures which he was 
obliged to take to convince the rajah of the soundness of 


MASULIPATAM. 


303 


his arguments, and of these Colonel Forde entirely ap- 
proved. He told Charlie that he had sent off to open 
negotiations with Salabut Jung, so as to detain him as 
long as possible at Baizwara. Without any intermission 
the batteries continued to play on the fort from the 25th 
of March to the 6th of April. Several houses had been 
destroyed and some breaches effected, but these the 
French repaired in the night as fast as they were made. 
They were aware of the position of the English, and re- 
garded the siege with contempt. 

On the morning of the 7th news came that the 
nizam was advancing from Baizwara to attack the Eng- 
lish, and that Du Rocher was hurrying from Rajahma- 
hendri to effect a junction with him. The same morning 
the senior artillery officer reported to Colonel Forde that 
only two days’ ammunition for the batteries remained 
in store. He learned, too, that a ship with 300 French 
soldiers would arrive in the course of a day or two. The 
position was, indeed, a desperate one, and there remained 
only the alternatives of success against the fort or total 
destruction. He determined to attack. All day his bat- 
teries kept up a heavier fire than ever, maintaining an 
equal fire against all the bastions in order that, if the 
enemy should obtain any information of the projected 
attack, they would not know against which point it was 
directed. Colonel Forde had ascertained that fishermen 
were in the habit of making their way across th$ swamp 
to the southwest angle of the fort, that on the sea face 
opposite to the British frontiers; he determined to effect 
a diversion by an attack upon that side and therefore 
ordered Captain Knox, with 700 Sepoys, to make a de- 
tour to cross the swamp and to attack upon that side. 
Still further to distract the attention of the garrison he 
instructed Anandraz to advance with his men along the 
causeway and to open fire against the ravelin. The main 
attack, which consisted of the rest of the force, composed 
of 320 European infantry, 30 gunners, 30 sailors, and 700 
Sepoys, was to be delivered against the breach in the 
bastion, mounting ten guns, in the northeast angle of the 
fort. 


3°4 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


At ten o’clock the force drew up under arms. The fire 
of the batteries was kept up much later than usual in 
order that the enemy should have no time to repair the 
breaches. The hour of midnight was fixed for the at- 
tack, as at that time the tide was at its lowest and the 
water in the ditches round the ramparts not more than 
three feet deep. Captain Knox and his party started 
first. The main body should have set out half an hour 
later, but were detained owing to the unaccountable 
absence of Captain Callender, the officer who was to 
command it. As this officer was afterward killed, the 
cause of his absence was never explained. The party 
started without him, and before they could reach the 
ditch they heard the sound of firing from the farther 
corner of the fort, telling that Knox was already at work. 

“ Shure, yer honor,” muttered Tim, as he made his 
way through the swamp, knee-deep beside his master, 
“ this is worse than the day before Plassey. It was 
water then, but this thick mud houlds one’s legs fast at 
every step. I’ve lost one of my boots already.” 

It was indeed hard work; but at last the head of the 
column reached the ditch just as a fresh burst of firing 
told that the Rajah Anandraz was attacking the ravelin. 
The French, in their belief in the absolute security of 
the place, had taken but few precautions against an at- 
tack, and it was not until the leading party had waded 
nearly breast-high through the ditch and began to break 
down the palisade beyond it, that they were discovered. 
Then a heavy artillery and musketry fire from the bas- 
tions on the right and left was opened upon the assail- 
ants. Captain Fisher with the first division attacked the 
breach; Captain Maclean with the second covered them 
by opening fire upon the bastion on their right; while 
the third, led by Captain Yorke, replied to that on their 
left. Charlie, although superior in rank to any of these 
officers, had no specific command, but accompanied the 
party as a simple volunteer. 

The storming party soon mounted the breach, and 
Yorke’s division joined it on the top. Yorke, turning 


MASULIPATAM. 


305 


to the left, seized the bastion which was firing on 
Maclean; while Fisher turned along the ramparts to the 
right to secure the bastions in that direction. Just as 
Yorke was setting out he saw a strong body of French 
Sepoys advancing between the foot of the ramparts and 
the buildings of the town. These had been sent directly 
the firing was heard, to re-enforce the bastion just car- 
ried. Without a moment’s hesitation Yorke ran down 
the rampart, seized the French officervvho commanded, 
and ordered him to surrender at once, as the place was 
already taken. Confused and bewildered, the officer gave 
up his sword and ordered the Sepoys to lay down their 
arms. They were then sent as prisoners into the bas- 
tion. Yorke now pushed forward with his men at the 
foot of the rampart and carried two out of three of the 
bastions on that side. The men, however, separated 
from the rest and alone in the unknown town, were be- 
ginning to lose heart. Suddenly they came upon a small 
magazine, and some of the men called out, “A mine! ” 
Seized with a sudden panic the whole division ran back, 
leaving Yorke alone with two native drummer boys, who 
continued to beat the advance. The soldiers, however, 
did not stop running until they reached the bastion. 
Captain Yorke went back, and found that many of the 
soldiers were proposing to leave the fort together. He 
swore that he would cut down the first man who moved, 
and some of the men who had served with him in the 
39th, ashamed of their conduct, said that they would fol- 
low him. Heading the 36 men who had now come to 
their senses, Captain Yorke again advanced with the 
drummer boys. Just as he was setting out, Charlie, 
who had at first gone with Fisher’s division, hearing an 
entire cessation of firing on the other side, ran up to see 
what was going on. 

“ Major Marryat,” Captain Yorke said, “ will you rally 
these fellows and bring them after me. They’ve been 
frightened with a false alarm of a mine and have lost 
their heads altogether.” 

Charlie aided by Tim, exerted himself to the utmost 


3°6 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


to encourage and command the soldiers, shaming them 
by telling them that while they, European soldiers, were 
cowering in the bastion, their Sepoy comrades were win- 
ning the town. “ Unless,” he said, “ in one minute the 
whole of you are formed up ready to advance, I will take 
care that not one shall have a share in the prize-money 
that will be won to-night.” 

The men now fell in, and Charlie led them after Cap- 
tain Yorke. The first retreat of the latter’s division had 
given the French time to rally a little, and as he now 
made along the rampart toward the bastion on the river, 
the French officer in command there having turned a 
gun, and loaded it with grape, discharged it when the 
English were within a few yards. Captain Yorke fell, 
badly wounded. The two black drummer boys were 
killed, as were several of the men, and sixteen others 
were wounded. Charlie, hurrying along with the rest 
of the party, met the survivors of Captain Yorke’s little 
band coming back carrying their wounded officer. 

“ There,” Charlie shouted to his men, “ that is your 
doing. Now retrieve yourselves. Show you are worthy 
of the name of British soldiers.” With a shout the men 
rushed forward and carried the bastion, and this com- 
pleted the capture of the whole of the wall from the 
northeast angle to the river. 

In the mean time Captain Fisher with his division was 
advancing to the right along the rampart. Maclean’s 
men had joined him, and they were pushing steadily for- 
ward. Colonel Forde continued with the reserve at the 
bastion first taken, receiving reports from both divisions 
as they advanced, and sending the necessary orders. As 
fast as the prisoners were brought in they were sent down 
the breach into the ditch where they were guarded by 
Sepoys, who threatened to shoot any that tried to 
climb up. 

Meanwhile all was disorder in the town. Greatly 
superior as were the besieged to their assailants in num- 
ber, they could, if properly handled, have easily driven 
them back. Instead, however, of disregarding the at- 


MASULIPATAM. 


3 ° 7 


tack by Knox at the southwest angle, which was clearly 
only a feint, and that of Anandraz on the ravelin, which 
might have been disregarded with equal safety, and con- 
centrating all their forces against the main attack, they 
made no sustained effort against either of the columns 
which were rapidly carrying bastion after bastion. Con- 
flans appeared to have completely lost his head as mes- 
senger after messenger arrived at his house by the river 
with news of the progress of the English columns. As 
Fisher’s division advanced toward the bastion in which 
was the great gate, the French who had gathered there 
again attempted to check his progress. But his men 
reserved their fire until close to the enemy, and then, dis- 
charging a volley at a few yards’ distance, they rapidly 
cleared the bastion. Fisher at once closed the great 
gates, and thus cut off all the defenders of the ravelin 
and prevented any of the troops within from joining 
these and cutting their way through the rajah’s troops, 
which would have been no difficult matter. Just as the 
division was again advancing, Captain Callender, to the 
astonishment of everyone, appeared and took his place 
at its head. A few shots only were fired after this, and 
the last discharge killed Captain Callender. 

By this time Conflans, bewildered and terrified, had 
sent a message to Colonel Forde, offering to surrender 
on honorable terms. Colonel Forde sent back to say 
that he would give no terms whatever; that the town 
was in his power and further resistance hopeless, and 
that, if it continued longer, he would put all who did not 
surrender to the sword. On the receipt of this message 
Conflans immediately sent round orders that all his men 
were to lay down their arms and to fall in in the open 
space by the water. The English assembled on the 
parade by the bastion of the gateway. Captain Knox’s 
column was marched round from the southwest into the 
town. A strong body of artillery kept guard over the 
prisoners till morning. Then the gate was opened and 
the French in the ravelin entered the fort and became 
prisoners with the rest of the garrison. The whole num- 


3°8 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


ber of prisoners exceeded 3000, of whom 500 were Euro- 
peans and the rest Sepoys. The loss of the English was 
22 Europeans killed and 62 wounded. The Sepoys had 
50 killed and 150 wounded. The rajah’s people, who had 
kept up their false attack upon the ravelin with much 
more bravery and resolution than had been expected, 
also lost a good many men. 

Considering the natural strength of the position, that 
the garrison was, both in European troops and Sepoys, 
considerably stronger than the besiegers, that the fort 
mounted a hundred and twenty guns, and that a reliev- 
ing army enormously superior to that of the besiegers 
was within fifteen miles at the time the assault was made, 
the capture of Masuli^atam may claim to rank among 
the very highest deeds ever performed by British arms. 


CHAPTER XXVIII. 

THE DEFEAT OF LALLY. 

A large quantity of plunder was obtained at Masuli- 
patam. Half was at once divided among the troops, ac- 
cording to promise, and the other half retained until the 
permission, applied for by Colonel Forde, was received 
from Madras for its division among them. The morn- 
ing after the capture of the town the Maratta horse of 
Salabut Jung appeared. The nizam was furious when 
he found that he had arrived too late; but he resolved 
that when the 300 French troops, daily expected by 
sea, arrived, he would besiege Forde in his turn, as with 
the new arrivals Du Rocher’s force would alone be supe- 
rior to that of Forde, and there would be in addition his 
own army of 40,000 men. The ships arrived off the port 
three days later, and sent a messenger on shore to Con- 
flans. Finding that no answer was returned and that the 
fire had entirely ceased, they came to the conclusion that 
the place was captured by the English, and sailed away 
to Pondicherry again. Had Du Rocher taken the pre- 


THE DEFEAT OF LALLY. 


309 


caution of having boats in readiness to communicate with 
them, inform them of the real state of affairs, and order 
them to land farther along the coast, and join him, Forde 
would have been besieged in his turn, although certainly 
the siege would have been ineffectual. Rajah Anandraz, 
greatly terrified at the approach of the nizam, had, two 
days after the capture of the place, received a portion of 
the plunder as his share, and marched away to his own 
country, Forde, disgusted with his conduct throughout 
the campaign, making no effort whatever to retain him. 

When Salabut Jung heard that the French had sailed 
away to Pondicherry, he felt that his prospects of retak- 
ing the town were small, and at the same time receiving 
news that his own dominions were threatened by an 
enemy, he concluded a treaty with Forde, granting 
Masulipatam and the Northern Sirkars to the English, 
and agreeing never again to allow any French troops to 
enter his dominions. He then marched back to his own 
country. 

Colonel Forde sailed with a portion of the force to 
Calcutta, where he shortly afterward commanded at the 
battle of Chinsurah, where the Dutch, who had made 
vast preparations to dispute the supremacy of the Eng- 
lish, were completely defeated, and thenceforth they, as 
well as the French, sunk to the rank of small trading 
colonies under British protection in Bengal. 

Charlie returned to Madras, and journeying up the 
country he joined the main body of his troop, under 
Peters. They had been engaged in several dashing ex- 
peditions, and had rendered great service; but they had 
been reduced in numbers by action and sickness, and the 
whole force when reunited only numbered eighty sabers 
— Lieutenant Hallowes being killed. Peters had been 
twice wounded. The two friends were greatly pleased 
to meet again, and had much to tell each other of their 
adventures since they parted. 

The next morning a deputation of four of the men 
waited upon Charlie. They said that from their share of 
the booty of the various places they had taken, all were 


3io 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


now possessed of sums sufficient in India to enable them 
to live in comfort for the rest of their lives; they hoped, 
therefore, that Charlie would ask the authorities at Ma- 
dras to disband the corps, and allow them to return 
home. Their commander, however, pointed out to them 
that the position was still a critical one; that the French 
possessed a very powerful army at Pondicherry, which 
would shortly take the field ; and that the English would 
need every one of their soldiers to meet the storm. If 
victorious there could be no doubt that a final blow 
would be dealt to French influence, and that the com- 
pany would then be able to reduce its forces. A few 
months would settle the event, and it would, he knew, 
be useless to apply for their discharge before that time. 
He thought he could promise them, however, that by the 
end of the year at latest their services would be dispensed 
with. The men, although rather disappointed, retired, 
content to make the best of the circumstances. Deser- 
tions were very frequent in the Sepoy force of the com- 
pany, as the men, returning to their native villages and 
resuming their former dress and occupation, were in no 
danger whatever of discovery. But in Charlie’s force 
not a single -desertion had taken place since it was raised, 
as the men knew that by leaving the colors they would 
forfeit their share of the prize-money, held for them in 
the Madras treasury. 

“ Have you heard from home lately? ” Peters asked. 

“ Yes,” Charlie said. “ There was a large batch of 
letters lying for me at Madras. My eldest sister, who 
has now been married three years, has just presented me 
with a second nephew. Katie and my mother are well.” 

“ Your sister is not engaged yet?” Peters asked. 

“ No. Katie says she’s quite heart-whole at present. 
Let me see — how old is she now? It is just eight years 
and a half since we left England, and she was twelve 
years old then. She is now past twenty. She would do 
nicely for you, Peters, when you go back. It would be 
awfully jolly if you two were to fall in love with each 
other.” 


THE DEFEAT OF LALLY. 


311 

“ I feel quite disposed to do so,” Peters said, laughing, 
“ from your descriptions of her. I’ve heard so much of 
her in all the time we’ve been together, and she writes 
such bright, merry letters that I seem to know her quite 
well.” 

For Charlie, during the long evenings by the camp- 
fires, had often read to his friend the lively letters which 
he received from his sisters. Peters had no sisters of 
his own, and he had more than once sent home presents, 
from the many articles of jewelry which fell to his share 
of the loot of captured fortresses, to his friend’s sisters, 
saying to Charlie that he had no one in England to send 
things to, and that it kept up his tie with the old coun- 
try; for he had been left an orphan as a child. 

The day after the deputation from his men had spoken 
to Charlie, Tim said : 

“ I hope, yer honor, that whin the troops are dis- 
banded you will be going home for a bit yerself.” 

“ I intend to do so, Tim. I have been wanting to get 
away for the last two years, but I did not like to ask for 
leave until everything was settled here. And what is 
more, when I once get back I don’t think they will ever 
see me in India again. I have sufficient means to live as 
a wealthy man in England, and I’ve seen enough fight- 
ing to last a lifetime.” 

“ Hooroo! ” shouted Tim. “ That’s the best word I’ve 
heard for a long time. And I shall settle down as yer 
honor’s butler, and look after the grand house and see 
that you’re comfortable.” 

“ You must never leave me, Tim, that’s certain,” 
Charlie said; “at least till you marry and set up an 
establishment of your own.” 

“ If I can’t marry without leaving yer honor, divil 
a wife will Tim Kelly ever take.” 

“ Wait till you see the right woman, Tim. There is 
no saying what the strongest of us will do when he’s 
once caught in a woman’s net. However, we’ll talk of 
that when the time comes.” 

“ And there’s Hossein, your honor. Fire and water 


312 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


wouldn’t keep him away from you, though what he’ll 
do in the colds of the winter at home is more than I 
know. It makes me laugh to see how his teeth chatter 
and how the creetur shivers of a cold morning here. 
But cold or no cold he’d follow you to the north pole, 
and climb up it if yer honor told him.” 

Charlie laughed. “ He is safe not to be put to the 
test there, Tim. However, you may be sure that if Hos- 
sein is willing to go to England with me, he shall go. 
He has saved my life more than once ; and you and he 
shall never part from me so long as you are disposed to 
stay by my side.” 

For some months no great undertaking was attempted 
on either side. Many petty sieges and skirmishes took 
place, each party preparing for the great struggle which 
was to decide the fate of Southern India. At last in 
January, 1760, the rival armies approached each other. 
Captain Sherlock, with 30 Europeans and 300 Sepoys, 
was besieged by the French in the fort of Vandivash, 
which had shortly before been captured by them from 
the French. 

Lally was himself commanding the siege, having as 
his second in command M. Bussy, of whom, however, 
he was more jealous than ever. Lally’s own incapacity 
was so marked that the whole army, and even Lally’s 
own regiment, recognized the superior talent of Bussy. 
But although Lally constantly asked the advice of his 
subordinate, his jealousy of that officer generally im- 
pelled him to neglect it. 

When the English under Colonel Coote, who now 
commanded their forces in Madras, were known to be 
advancing against him, Bussy strongly advised that the 
siege should be abandoned and a strong position taken 
up for a battle. The advice was unquestionably good, 
but Lally neglected it, and remained in front of Vandi- 
vash until the English were seen approaching. The 
French cavalry, among whom were 300 European 
dragoons, and a cloud of Maratta horse moved forward 
against the English, whose troops were scattered on the 


THE DEFEAT OF LALLY. 


313 


line of march. Colonel Coote brought up two guns, 
and these, being kept concealed from the enemy until 
they came within two hundred yards, opened suddenly 
upon them, while the Sepoys fired heavily with their 
muskets. The Marattas rapidly turned and rode off, 
and the French cavalry, finding themselves alone, retired 
in good order. Colonel Coote now drew up his army 
in order of battle, and marched his troops so as to take 
up a position in front of some gardens and other inclo- 
sures which extended for some distance from the foot of 
the mountains out on to the plain. These inclosures 
would serve as a defense in case the army should be 
forced to retire from the open. 

The French remained immovable in their camp. See- 
ing this, Colonel Coote marched his troops to the right, 
the infantry taking up their post in the stony ground 
at the foot of the mountain, at a mile and a half from 
the French camp. Some of the French cavalry came 
out to reconnoiter, but being fired upon returned. Find- 
ing that the French would not come out to attack, 
Colonel Coote again advanced until he reached a point 
where, swinging round his right, he faced the enemy 
in a position of great strength. His right was now cov- 
ered by the fire of the fort, his left by the broken ground 
at the foot of the hills. 

As soon as the English had taken up their position 
the French sallied out from their camp and formed in 
line of battle. The French cavalry were on their right; 
next to these was the regiment of Lorraine, 400 strong; 
in the center the battalion of India, 700 strong. Next 
to these was Lally’s regiment, 400 strong, its left resting 
upon an intrenched tank, which was held by 300 marines 
and sailors from their fleet, with four guns. Twelve 
other guns were in line, three between each regiment. 
Four hundred Sepoys were in reserve at a tank in rear 
of that held by the marines. Nine hundred Sepoys held 
a ridge behind the position, but in front of the camp and 
at each end of this ridge was an intrenchment guarded 
by 50 Europeans. A hundred and fifty Europeans and 


314 WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 

300 Sepoys remained in the batteries facing Vandivash. 
The whole force consisted of 2400 Europeans and 1600 
Sepoys. The Marattas, 3000 strong, remained in their 
own camp and did not advance to the assistance of their 
allies. 

The English army consisted of 1900 Europeans, of 
whom 80 were cavalry, 2100 Sepoys, 1250 irregular 
horse, and twenty-six field guns. The Sepoys were on 
the flanks, the company’s two battalions in the center, 
with Coote’s regiment on their right and Draper’s on 
their left. The four grenadier companies of the white 
regiments were withdrawn from the fighting line, and, 
with 200 Sepoys on each flank, were held as a reserve. 
Ten field-pieces were in line with the troops; two, with 
two companies of Sepoys, were posted a little on the 
left; the rest were in reserve. The English line was 
placed somewhat obliquely across that of the French, 
their left being the nearest to the enemy. 

As the English took up their position Lally led out 
his cavalry, made a wide sweep round the plain, and then 
advanced against the English horse, who were drawn 
up some little distance behind the reserve. Upon see- 
ing their approach the whole of the irregular horse fled 
at once, leaving only Charlie’s troop remaining. The 
Sepoys with the two guns on the left were ordered to 
turn these round so as to take the advancing French in 
flank; but the flight of their horse had shaken the natives, 
and the French cavalry would have fallen unchecked on 
Charlie’s little troop, which was already moving forward 
to meet them, had not Captain Barlow, who commanded 
the British artillery, turned two of his guns and opened 
fire upon them. Fifteen men and horses fell at the first 
discharge, throwing the rest into some confusion, and at 
the next deadly discharge the whole turned and rode off. 
Seeing the enemy retreating, many of the irregular horse 
rode back, and, joining Charlie’s troop, pursued them 
round to the rear of their own camp. 

For a short time a cannonade was kept up by the 
guns on both sides, the English fire, being better di- 


THE DEFEAT OF LALLY. 315 

rected, causing some damage. Upon Lally’s return to 
his camp with the cavalry he at once gave the order to 
advance. Coote ordered the Europeans of his force 
to do the same, the Sepoys to remain on their ground. 
The musketry fire began at one o’clock. The English, 
according to Coote’s orders, retained theirs until the 
enemy came close at hand. Following the tactics which 
were afterward repeated many times in the Peninsula, 
the Lorraine regiment, forming a column twelve deep, 
advanced against that of Coote, which received them in 
line. The French came on at the double. When 
within a distance of fifty yards Coote’s regiment poured 
a volley into the front and flanks of the column. Al- 
though they suffered heavily from this fire the French 
bravely pressed on with levelled bayonets, and the head 
of the column, by sheer weight, broke through the Eng- 
lish line. The flanks of the English, however, closed 
in on the sides of the French column, and a desperate 
hand-to-hand fight ensued. In this the English had all 
the advantage, attacking the French fiercely on either 
side, until the latter broke and ran back to the camp. 

Colonel Coote, who was with his regiment, ordered it 
to form in regular order again before it advanced, and 
rode off to see what was going on in the rest of the line. 
As he was passing on a shot struck an ammunition 
wagon in the intrenched tank held by the French. 
This exploded, killing and wounding 80 men, among 
whom was the commander of the post. The rest of its 
occupants, panic-stricken by the explosion, ran back to 
the next tank. Their panic communicated itself to the 
Sepoys there, and all ran back together to the camp. 
Colonel Coote at once sent orders to Major B rereton, 
who commanded Draper’s regiment, to take possession 
of the tank before the enemy recovered from the con- 
fusion which the explosion would be sure to cause. The 
ground opposite that which Draper’s regiment occupied 
was held by Lally’s regiment, and in order to prevent 
his men being exposed to a flanking fire from these, 
Draper ordered them to file off to the right. Bussy, 


316 WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 

who commanded at this wing, endeavored to rally the 
fugitives, and gathering 50 or 60 together, added two 
companies of Lally’s regiment to them, and posted them 
in the tank; he then returned to the regiment. As 
Major Brereton, moving up his men, reached the in- 
trenchment a heavy fire was poured upon him. Major 
Brereton fell, mortally wounded, and many of his men 
were killed. The rest, however, with a rush carried the 
intrenchment, and firing down from the parapet on the 
guns on Lally’s left, drove the gunners from them. Two 
companies held the intrenchment, and the rest formed 
in the plain on its left to prevent Lally’s regiment at- 
tacking it on this side. Bussy wheeled Lally’s regiment, 
detached a portion of it to recover the intrenchment, and 
with the rest marched against Draper’s troops in the 
plain. 

A heavy musketry fire was kept up on both sides until 
the two guns, posted by Draper’s regiment, and left 
behind when they attacked the intrenchment, came up 
and opened on the French. These began to waver. 
Bussy, as the only chance of gaining the day, put himself 
at their head, and endeavored to lead them forward to 
attack the English with the bayonet. His horse, how- 
ever, was struck with a ball and soon fell; the English 
fire was redoubled, and but 20 of Lally’s men kept 
around him. Two companies of the English rushed 
forward and surrounded the little party, who at once 
surrendered. Bussy was led a prisoner to the rear, and 
as he went was surprised at the sight of the 300 grena- 
diers, the best troops in the English army, remaining 
quietly in reserve. While on either flank the French 
were now beaten, the fight in the center, between the 
European troops of the English and French companies, 
had continued, but had been confined to a hot musketry 
and artillery fire. But, upon seeing the defeat of their 
flanks, the enemy’s center likewise fell back to their 
camp. 

From the moment when the Lorraine regiment had 
been routed, four field-pieces kept up an incessant fire 


THE DEFEAT OF LALLY. 


317 


into their camp to prevent them from rallying. The 
three English regiments now advanced in line and en- 
tered the enemy’s camp without the least opposition. 
The Lorraine regiment had passed through it a mass of 
fugitives, the India regiment and Lally’s went through 
rapidly, but in good order. Lally had in vain endeav- 
ored to bring the Sepoys forward to the attack to restore 
the day. The French cavalry, seeing the defeat of Lor- 
raine’s regiment, advanced to cover it, their appearance 
completely intimidating the English regular horse. 
Charlie’s troop were too weak to charge them single- 
handed. Reanimated by the attitude of their cavalry, 
the men of the Lorraine regiment rallied, yoked up four 
field-pieces which were standing in the rear of the 
camp, and moved off in fair order. They were joined 
in the plain by Lally’s regiment and the India battalion, 
and the whole, setting fire to their tents, moved off in 
good order. The four field-pieces kept in the rear, and 
behind these moved the cavalry. As they retired they 
were joined by the 450 men from the batteries opposite 
Vandivash. 

Colonel Coote sent orders to his cavalry to harass the 
enemy. These followed them for five miles, but as 
the native horse would not venture within range of the 
enemy’s field-guns Charlie, to his great disappointment, 
was able to do nothing. 

Upon neither side did the Sepoys take any part in 
the battle of Vandivash. It was fought entirely between 
the 2250 French, not including those in their battery, 
and 1600 English, excluding the grenadiers,' who never 
fired a shot. Twenty-four pieces of cannon were taken 
and eleven wagons of ammunition, and all the tents, 
stores, and baggage that were not burned. The French 
left 200 dead upon the field. A hundred and sixty were 
taken prisoners, of whom 30 died of their wounds before 
the next morning. Large numbers dropped upon the 
march and were afterward captured. The English had 
63 killed and 124 wounded. 

The news of this victory reached Madras on the follow- 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


318 

in g morning, and excited as much enthusiastic joy as 
that of Plassey had done at Calcutta, and the event was 
almost as important a one. There was no longer the 
slightest fear of danger, and the Madras authorities be- 
gan to meditate an attack upon Pondicherry. So long 
as the great French settlement remained intact, so long 
would Madras be exposed to fresh invasions, and it was 
certain that France, driven now from Bengal, would 
make a desperate effort to regain her shaken supremacy 
in Madras. The force, however, at the disposal of the 
Madras authorities was still far too weak to enable them 
to undertake an enterprise like the siege of Pondicherry, 
for their army did not exceed in numbers that which 
Lally possessed for its defense. Accordingly, urgent 
letters were sent to Clive to ask him to send down in the 
summer as many troops as he could spare, other re-en- 
forcements being expected from England at that time. 
The intervening time was spent in the reduction of Chit- 
tapett, Karical, and many other forts which held out for 
the French. 

After the battle of Vandivash Charlie kept his promise 
to his men. He represented to Mr. Pigot that they had 
already served some months over the time for which 
they were enlisted, that they had gone through great 
hardships and performed great services, and that they 
were now anxious to retire to enjoy the prize-money 
they had earned. He added that he had given his own 
promise that they should be allowed to retire if they 
would extend their service until after a decisive battle 
with the French. Mr. Pigot at once assented to Charlie’s 
request, and ordered that a batta of six months’ pay 
should be given to each man upon leaving. The troop, 
joined by many of their comrades, who had been at dif- 
ferent times sent down sick and wounded to Madras, 
formed up there on parade for the last time. They 
responded with three hearty cheers to the address which 
Charlie gave them, thanking them for their services, bid- 
ding them farewell, and hoping that they would long 
enjoy the prize-money which they had so gallantly won. 


THE SIEGE OF PONDICHERRY. 


319 

Then they delivered over their horses to the authorities, 
drew their prize-money from the treasury, and started 
for their respective homes, the English portion taking 
up their quarters in barracks until the next ship should 
sail for England. 

“ I am sorry to leave them/’ Charlie said to Peters as 
they stood alone upon the parade. “ We have gone 
through a lot of stirring work together, and no fellows 
could have behaved better.” 

“ No,” Peters agreed. “ It is singular that, con- 
temptible as are these natives of India when officered by 
men of their own race and region, they will fight to the 
death when led by us.” 


CHAPTER XXIX. 

THE SIEGE OF PONDICHERRY. 

As the health of the two officers was shaken by their 
long and arduous work, and their services were not for 
the moment needed, they obtained leave for three 
months, and went down in a coasting ship to Columbo, 
where several English trading stations had been estab- 
lished. Here they spent two months, residing for the 
most part among the hills, at the town of a rajah very 
friendly to the English, and with him they saw an ele- 
phant hunt, the herd being driven into a great inclosure 
formed by a large number of natives who had for weeks 
been employed upon it. Here the animals were fastened 
to trees by the natives, who cut through the thick grass 
unobserved, and were one by one reduced to submission, 
first by hunger and then by being lustily belabored by 
the trunks of tamed elephants. Tim highly appreciated 
the hunt, and declared that tiger shooting was not to be 
compared to it. 

Their residence in the brisk air of the hills completely 
restored their health, and they returned to Madras per- 
fectly ready to take part in the great operations which 


320 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


were impending. Charlie, on his return, was appointed 
to serve as chief of the staff to Colonel Coote, Captain 
Peters being given the command of a small body of 
European horse, who were, with a large body of irregu- 
lars, to aid in bringing in supplies to the British army, 
and to prevent the enemy from receiving food from the 
surrounding country. 

Early in June the British squadron off the coast was 
joined by two ships of the line, the Norfolk and Panther , 
from England, and ioo Europeans and a detachment of 
European and native artillery came down from Bombay. 
Around Pondicherry ran a strong cactus hedge strength- 
ened with palisades, and the French retired into this at 
the beginning of July. They were too strongly posted 
there to be attacked by the force with which the Eng- 
lish at first approached them, and they were expecting 
the arrival of a large body of troops from Mysore with 
a great convoy of provisions. 

On the 17th these approached. Major Moore, who 
was guarding the English rear, had 180 European in- 
fantry, 50 English horse, under Peters, 1600 irregular 
horse, and 1100 Sepoys. The Mysoreans had 4000 good 
horse, 1000 Sepoys, and 200 Europeans, with eight pieces 
of cannon. 

The fight lasted but a few minutes. The British native 
horse and Sepoys at once gave way, and the English 
infantry retreated in great disorder to the fort of Trivadi, 
which they gained with a loss of 15 killed and 40 
wounded. Peters’ horse alone behaved well. Several 
times they charged right through the masses of My- 
sorean horse, but when five and twenty were killed and 
most of the rest, including their commander, severely 
wounded, 'they also fell back into the fort. 

Colonel Coote, when the news of the disaster reached 
him, determined, if possible, to get possession of the 
fort of Vellenore, which stood on the river Ariangopang, 
some three miles from Pondicherry, and covered the 
approaches of the town from that side. The English 
encampment was at Perimbe on the main road leading 


THE SIEGE OF PONDICHERRY. 


321 


through an avenue of trees to Pondicherry. Colonel 
Coote threw up a redoubt on the hill behind Perimbe 
and another on the avenue, to check any French force 
advancing from Pondicherry. These works were fin- 
ished on the morning of the 19th of July. The next 
morning the French army advanced along the river 
Ariangopang, but Coote marched half his force to meet 
them, while he moved the rest as if to attack the redoubts 
interspersed along the line of hedge. As the fall of these 
would have placed the attacking force in his rear Lally 
at once returned to the town. The same evening the 
Mysoreans, with 3000 bullocks carrying their artillery 
and drawing their baggage and 3000 more laden with rice 
and other provisions, arrived on the other bank of the 
Ariangopang river, crossed under the guns of the re- 
doubt of that name, and entered the town. 

The fort of Vellenore was strong, but the road had 
been cut straight through the glacis to the gate, and the 
French had neglected to erect works to cover this pas- 
sage. Coote took advantage of the oversight and laid 
his two eighteen-pounders to play upon the gate, while 
two others were placed to fire upon the parapet. The 
English batteries opened at daybreak on the 16th and 
at nine o’clock the whole of the French army with the 
Mysoreans advanced along the bank of the river. Coote 
at once got his troops under arms, and advanced toward 
the French, sending a small detachment of Europeans 
to re-enforce the Sepoys firing at the fort of Vellenore. 
By this time the batteries had beaten down the parapet 
and silenced the enemy’s fire. Two companies of Sepoys 
set forward at full run up to the very crest of the glacis. 

The French commander of the place had really noth- 
ing to fear, as the Sepoys had a ditch to pass and a very 
imperfect breach to mount, and the fort might have held 
out for two days before the English could have been in 
a position to storm it. The French army was in sight, 
and in ten minutes a general engagement would have 
begun. In spite of all this the coward at once hoisted 
a flag of truce and surrendered. The Europeans and 


322 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


Sepoys ran in through the gate, and the former instantly 
turned the guns of the fort upon the French army. This 
halted, struck with amazement and anger, and Lally at 
once ordered it to retire upon the town. 

A week afterward six ships with 600 fresh troops from 
England arrived. 

The Mysoreans who had brought food into Pondi- 



cherry made many excursions in the country, but were 
sharply checked. They were unable to supply them- 
selves with food, and none could be spared them from 
the stores in the magazines. Great distress set in among 
them, and this was heightened by the failure of a party 
with 2000 bullocks with rice to enter the town. This 
party, escorted by the greater portion of the Mysorean 
horse from Pondicherry, was attacked and defeated, and 


THE SIEGE OF PONDICHERRY. 323 

900 bullocks laden with baggage captured. Shortly 
afterward the rest of the Mysorean troops left Pondi- 
cherry and marched to attack Trinomany. 

Seeing that there was little fear of their returning to 
succor Pondicherry the English now determined to com- 
plete the blockade of that place. In order to have any 
chance of reducing it by famine it was necessary to ob- 
tain possession of the country within the hedge, which 
with its redoubts extended in the arc of a circle from the 
river Ariangopang to the sea. The space thus included 
contained an area of nearly seven square miles, affording 
pasture for the bullocks, of which there were sufficient 
to supply the troops and inhabitants for many months. 
Therefore, although the army was not yet strong enough 
to open trenches against the town, and indeed the siege 
artillery had not yet sailed from Madras, it was deter- 
mined to get possession of the hedge and its redoubts. 

Before doing this, however, it was necessary to capture 
the fort of Ariangopang. This was a difficult under- 
taking. The whole European force was but 2000 strong, 
and if 800 of these were detached across the river to at- 
tack the fort, the main body would be scarcely a match 
for the enemy should he march out against them. If, on 
the other hand, the whole army moved round to attack 
the fort the enemy would be able to send out and fetch in 
the great convoy of provisions collected at Jinji. Mr. 
Pigot therefore requested Admiral Stevens to land the 
marines of the fleet. Although, seeing that a large 
French fleet was expected, the admiral was unwilling to 
weaken his squadron, he complied with the request, see- 
ing the urgency of the case, and 420 marines were landed. 

On the 2d of September two more men-of-war, the 
America and Medway , arrived, raising the fleet before 
Pondicherry to seventeen ships of the line. They con- 
voyed several company’s ships, which had brought with 
them the wing of a Highland regiment. 

The same evening Coote ordered 400 men to march 
to invest the fort of Ariangopang, but Colonel Monson, 
second in command, was so strongly against the step that 


324 WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 

at the last moment he countermanded his orders. The 
change was fortunate, for Lally, who had heard from 
his spies of the English intentions, moved his whole 
army out to attack the — as he supposed — weakened 
force. 

At ten at night 1400 French infantry, 100 French 
horse, and 900 Sepoys marched out to attack the Eng- 
lish, who had no suspicion of their intent. Two hundred 
marines and 500 Sepoys proceeded in two columns. 
Marching from the Valdore redoubt one party turned 
to the right to attack the Tamarind redoubt, which the 
English had erected on the Red Hill. Having taken 
this they were to turn to their left and join the other 
column. This skirted the foot of the Red Hill to attack 
the redoubt erected on a hillock at its foot on the 18th 
of July. Four hundred Sepoys and a company of Portu- 
guese were to take post at the junction of the Valdore 
and Oulgarry avenues. The regiments of Lorraine and 
Lally were to attack the battery in this avenue, Lor- 
raine’s from the front, while Lally’s, marching outward 
in the fields, was to fall on its right flank. The Indian 
battalion, with the Bourbon volunteers, 300 strong, were 
to march from the fort of Ariangopang across the river 
to the villages under the fort of Vellenore, and as soon 
as the fire became general were to fall upon the right 
rear of the English encampment. 

At midnight a rocket gave the signal and the attack 
immediately commenced. The attack on the Tamarind 
redoubt was repulsed, but the redoubt on the hillock 
was captured and the guns spiked. At the intrenchment 
on the Oulgarry road the fight was fierce, and Colonel 
Coote himself brought down his troops to its defense. 
The attack was continued, but as, owing to some mis- 
take, the column intended to fall upon the English rear 
had halted and did not arrive in time, the regiments of 
Lorraine and Lally drew off, and the whole force retired 
to the town. 

The ships arriving from England brought a commis- 
sion appointing Monson to the rank of colonel, with 


THE SIEGE OF PONDICHERRY. 


325 


a date prior to that of Colonel Coote, ordering him, how- 
ever, not to assert his seniority so long as Coote re- 
mained at Madras. Coote, however, considered that it 
was intended that he should return to Bengal, and so, 
handing over the command to Monson, he went back 
to Madras. Colonel Monson at once prepared to attack 
the hedge and its redoubts. Leaving sufficient guards 
for the camp he advanced at midnight with his troops 
divided into two brigades, the one commanded by him- 
self, the other by Major Smith. Major Smith’s division 
was first to attack the enemy outside the hedge in the 
village of Oulgarry, and, driving them hence, to carry 
the Vellenore redoubt, while the main body were to 
make a sweep round the Red Hill and come down to the 
attack of the Valdore redoubt. 

Smith, moving to the right of the Oulgarry avenue, 
attacked that position on the left, and the advance led 
by Captain Myers carried by storm a redoubt in front 
of the village and seized four pieces of cannon. Major 
Smith, heading his grenadiers, then charged the village, 
tore down all obstacles, and carried the place. 

The day had begun to dawn when Colonel Monson 
approached the Valdore redoubt. But at the last mo- 
ment, making a mistake in their way, the head of the 
column halted. At this moment the enemy perceived 
them and discharged a twenty-four pounder, loaded with 
small shot into the column. Eleven men were killed 
and 26 wounded by this terrible discharge, among the 
latter Colonel Monson himself, his leg being broken. 
The grenadiers now rushed furiously to the attack, 
swarmed round the redoubt, and although several times 
repulsed, at last forced their way through the embrasures 
and captured the position. 

The defenders of the village of Oulgarry had halted 
outside the Vellenore redoubt, but, upon hearing the fir- 
ing to their right, retreated hastily within it. Major 
Smith pressed them hotly with his brigade, and followed 
so closely upon their heels that they did not stop to 
defend the position, but retreated to the town. Major 


3 2 6 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


Smith was soon joined by the Highlanders under Major 
Scott, who had forced a way through the hedge between 
the two captured redoubts. Thus the whole line of the 
outer defense fell into the hands of the English, with the 
exception of the Ariangopang redoubt on the left, which 
was held by the India regiment. Major Gordon, who 
now took the command, placed the Bombay detachmeat 
of 350 men in the captured redoubts, and encamped the 
whole of the force in the fields to the right of Oulgarry. 
Major Smith advised that at least 1000 men should be 
left near at hand to succor the garrisons of the redoubts, 
which, being open at the rear, were liable to an attack. 
Major Gordon foolishly refused to follow his advice, and 
the same night the French attacked the redoubts. The 
Bombay troops, however, defended themselves with ex- 
treme bravery until assistance arrived. Three days later 
the French evacuated and blew up the fort of Ariango- 
pang which the English were preparing to attack, and 
the India regiment retired into the town, leaving, how- 
ever, the usual guard in the Ariangopang redoubt. 

Colonel Coote had scarcely arrived at Madras when 
he received a letter from Colonel Monson saying that 
he was likely to be incapacitated by his wound for some 
months, and requesting that he would resume the com- 
mand of the army. The authorities of Madras strongly 
urged Coote to return, representing the extreme impor- 
tance of the struggle in which they were engaged. He 
consented and reached camp on the night of the 20th. 
He at once ordered the captured redoubts to be fortified 
to prevent the enemy again taking the offensive, and 
erected a strong work called the North redoubt near 
the sea-shore and facing the Madras redoubt. A few 
days later, on a party of Sepoys approaching the Arian- 
gopang redoubt, the occupants of that place were seized 
with a panic, abandoned the place, and went into the 
town. The English had now possession of the whole 
of the outward defenses of Pondicherry, with the excep- 
tion of the two redoubts by the sea-shore. 

A day or two later Colonel Coote advancing along the 


THE SIEGE OF PONDICHERRY. 327 

sea-beach as if with a view of merely making a recon- 
naissance, pushed on suddenly, entered the village called 
the Blancherie, as it was principally inhabited by washer- 
women, and attacked the Madras redoubt. This was 
carried, but the same night the garrison sallied out again 
and fell upon the party of Sepoys posted there. Ensign 
MacMahon was killed, but the Sepoys, although driven 
out from the redoubt, bravely returned and again at- 
tacked the French, who, thinking that the Sepoys must 
having received large re-enforcements, fell back into the 
village, from which, a day or two later, they retired into 
the town. The whole of the ground outside the fort, 
between the river Ariangopang and the sea, was now in 
the hands of the English. The French still maintained 
their communications with the south by the sandy line 
of coast. By this time the attacks which the English 
from Trichinopoli and Madura had made upon the Myso- 
reans and compelled the latter to make peace and recall 
their army, which was still hovering in the neighborhood 
of Pondicherry. 

Charlie, who had suffered from a slight attack of fever, 
had for some time been staying on board ship for 
change. In the road of Pondicherry three of the French 
Indiamen, the Hcrmione , Baleine , and the Compagnie des 
Indes, were at anchor near the edge of the surf, under 
the cover of a hundred guns mounted on the sea face 
of the fort. These ships were awaiting the stormy 
weather at the breaking of the monsoon, when it would 
be difficult for the English fleet to maintain their posi- 
tion off the town. They then intended to sail away to 
the south, fill up with provisions, and return to Pondi- 
cherry. Admiral Stevens, in order to prevent this con- 
tingency, which would have greatly delayed the reduc- 
tion of the place, determined to cut them out. Charlie’s 
health being much restored by the sea breezes, he asked 
leave of the admiral to accompany the expedition as a 
volunteer. On the evening of the 6th, six-and-twenty 
of the boats of the fleet, manned by 400 sailors, were low- 
ered and rowed to the Tiger, which was at anchor within 


328 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


two miles of Pondicherry, the rest of the fleet lying some 
distance farther away. 

When at midnight the cabin lights of the Hermione 
were extinguished, the expedition started. The boats 
moved in two divisions, one of which was to attack the 
Hermione , the other the Baleine. The third vessel lay 
nearer in shore, and was to be attacked if the others 
were captured. The night was a very dark one, and 
the boats of each division moved in line with ropes 
stretched from boat to boat to insure their keeping to- 
gether in the right direction. Charlie was in one of the 
boats intended to attack the Hermione. Tim accom- 
panied him, but the admiral had refused permission for 
Hossein to do so, as there were many more white volun- 
teers for the service than the boats would accommodate. 
They were within fifty yards of the Hermione before they 
were discovered, and a scattering musket fire was at 
once opened upon them. The crews gave a mighty 
cheer and, casting off the ropes, separated,- five making 
for each side of the ship, while two rowed forward to cut 
the cables at her bows. The Compagnie des Indes opened 
fire upon the boats, but these were already alongside 
the ship, and the sailors swarmed over the side at ten 
points. The combat was a short one. The 70 men on 
board fought bravely for a minute or two, but they were 
speedily driven below. The hatches were closed over 
them, and the cables being already cut, the mizzen top- 
sail, the only sail bent, was hoisted, and the boats, taking 
tow-ropes, began to row her away from shore. 

The instant, however, that the cessation of fire in- 
formed the garrison the ship was captured, a tremendous 
cannonade was opened by the guns of the fortress. The 
lightning was flashing vividly, and this enabled the gun- 
ners to direct their aim upon the ship. Over and over 
again she was struck, and one shot destroyed the steer- 
ing wheel, cut the tiller rope, and killed two men who 
were steering. The single sail was not sufficient to assist 
in steering her, and the men in the boats rowed with such 
energy that the ropes continually snapped. The fire 


THE SIEGE OF PONDICHERRY. 329 

continued from the shore, doing considerable damage, 
and the men in the boats, who could not see that the 
ship was moving through the water, concluded that she 
was anchored by a concealed cable and anchor. The 
officer in command, therefore, called up the Frenchmen 
from below, telling them that he was about to fire the 
ship. They came on deck and took their places in the 
boats, which rowed back to the Tiger. Upon arriving 
there Captain Dent, who commanded her, sternly re- 
buked the officer, and said that, unless the boats returned 
instantly and brought the Hermione out, he should send 
his own crew in their boats to fetch her. The division 
thereupon returned and met the ship half a mile off 
shore, the land wind having now sprung up. The 
Baleine had been easily captured, and having several sails 
bent she was brought out without difficulty. No at- 
tempt was made to capture the third vessel. 

The rains had now set in, but the English labored 
steadily at their batteries. The French were becoming 
pressed for provisions, and Lally turned the whole of the 
natives remaining in the town, to the number of 1400 
men and women, outside the fortifications. On their 
arrival at the English lines they were refused permission 
to pass, as Colonel Coote did not wish to relieve the gar- 
rison of the consumption of food caused by them. They 
returned to the French lines and begged to be again 
received, but they were by Lally’s orders fired upon and 
several killed. For seven days the unhappy wretches 
remained without food, save the roots they could gather 
in the fields. Then Colonel Coote, seeing that Lally 
was inflexible, allowed them to pass. 

On the 10th of November the batteries opened, and 
every day added to the strength of the fire upon the 
town. The fortifications, however, were strong, and the 
siege progressed but slowly. On the 30th of December 
a tremendous storm burst, and committed the greatest 
havoc both at land and sea. The Newcastle, man-of-war, 
the Queenborough , frigate, and the Protector, fire-ship, 
were driven ashore and dashed to pieces, but the crews, 


330 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


with the exception of seven, were saved. The Duke of 
Aquitaine, the Sunderland, and the Duke, store-ship, were 
sunk, and noo sailors drowned. Most of the other 
ships were dismasted. 

CHAPTER XXX. 

HOME. 

The fire of the batteries increased, and by the 13th of 
January the enemy’s fire was completely silenced. The 
provisions in the town were wholly exhausted, and on 
the 15th the town surrendered, and the next morning 
the English took possession. Three days afterward 
Lally was embarked on board ship to be taken a pris- 
oner to Madras, and so much was he hated that the 
French officers and civilians assembled and hissed and 
hooted him, and had he not been protected by his 
guard, would have torn him to pieces. After his return 
to France he was tried for having by his conduct caused 
the loss of the French possessions in India, and being 
found guilty of the offense, was beheaded. 

At Pondicherry 2072 military prisoners were taken, 
and 381 civilians. Five hundred cannon and a hundred 
mortars fit for service, and immense quantities of ammu- 
nition, arms, and military stores fell into the hands of 
the captors. Pondicherry was handed over to the com- 
pany, who, a short time afterward, entirely demolished 
both the fortress and town. This hard measure was the 
consequence of a letter which had been intercepted from 
the French government to Lally, ordering him to raze 
Madras to the ground when it fell into his hands. 

Charlie, after the siege, in which he had rendered great 
services, received from the company, at Colonel Coote’s 
earnest recommendation, his promotion to the step of 
lieutenant colonel, while Peters was raised to that of 
major. 

A fortnight after the fall of Pondicherry they returned 
to Madras and thence took the first ship for England. 


HOME. 


33 1 


It was now just ten years since they had sailed, and in 
that time they had seen Madras and Calcutta rise from 
the rank of two trading stations, in constant danger of 
destruction by their powerful neighbors, to that of vir- 
tual capitals of great provinces. Not as yet, indeed, had 
they openly assumed the sovereignty of these territories, 
but Madras was, in fact, the absolute master of the broad 
tract of land extending from the foot of the mountains 
to the sea, from Cape Comorin to Bengal, while Calcutta 
was master of Bengal and Oressa, and her power already 
threatened to extend itself as far as Delhi. The con- 
quest of these vast tracts of country had been achieved 
by mere handfuls of men, and by a display of heroic 
valor and constancy scarce to be rivaled in the history 
of the world. 

The voyage was a pleasant one and was, for the times, 
quick, occupying only five months. But to the young 
men, longing for home after so long an absence, it 
seemed tedious in the extreme. Tim and Hossein were 
well content with their quiet, easy life after their long 
toils. They had nothing whatever to do, except that 
they insisted upon waiting upon Charlie and Peters at 
meals. The ship carried a large number of sick and 
wounded officers and men, and as these gained health 
and strength the life on board ship became livelier and 
more jovial. Singing and cards occupied the evenings, 
while in the daytime they played quoits, rings of rope 
being used for that purpose, and other games with which 
passengers usually while away the monotony of long 
voyages. It was late in June when the Madras sailed 
up the Thames, and as soon as she came to anchor the 
two officers and their followers landed. The din and 
bustle of the streets seemed almost as strange to Charlie 
as they had done when he came up a boy from Yar- 
mouth. Hossein was astonished at the multitude of 
white people, and inquired of Charlie why, when there 
were so many men, England had sent so few soldiers to 
fight for her in India, and for once Charlie was unable 
to give a satisfactory reply. 


332 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


“ It does seem strange,” he said to Peters, “ that when 
such mighty interests were at stake, a body of even 
10,000 troops could not have been raised and sent out. 
Such a force would have decided the struggle at once, 
and in three months the great possessions, which have 
cost the company twelve years’ war, would have been at 
their feet. It would not have cost them more, indeed, 
nothing like as much as it now has done, nor one tithe 
of the loss in life. Somehow England always seems to 
make war in driblets.” 

Charlie knew that his mother and Kate had for some 
years been residing at a house which their uncle had 
taken in the fashionable quarter of Chelsea. They 
looked in at the office, however, to see if Charlie’s uncle 
was there, but found that he was not in the city, and, 
indeed, had now almost retired from the business. They 
therefore took a coach, placed the small articles of lug- 
gage which they had brought with them from the ship 
on the front seats, and then, Hossein and Tim taking 
their places on the broad seat beside the driver, they 
entered the coach and drove to Chelsea. Charlie had 
invited Peters, who had no home of his own, to stay 
with him, at least for a while. Both were now rich men, 
from their shares of the prize-money of the various forts 
and towns in whose capture they had taken part, al- 
though Charlie possessed some twenty thousand pounds 
more than his friend, this being the amount of the 
presents he had received from the Rajah of Ambur. 

Alighting from the carriage, Charlie ran up to the door 
and knocked. Inquiring for Mrs. Marryat, he was shown 
into a room in which a lady, somewhat past middle age, 
and three younger ones were sitting. They looked up 
in surprise as the young man entered. Ten years had 
changed him almost beyond recognition, but one of the 
younger ones at once leaped to her feet and exclaimed, 
“ Charlie!” 

His mother rose with a cry of joy, and threw herself 
into his arms. After rapturously kissing her he turned 
to the others. Their faces were changed, yet all seemed 


HOME. 


333 


equally familiar to him, and in his delight he equally 
embraced them all. 

“ Hullo !” he exclaimed, when he freed himself from 
their arms. “Why, there are three of you! What on 
earth am I doing? I have somebody’s pardon to beg, 
and yet, although your faces are changed, they seem 
equally familiar to me. Which is it? But I need not 
ask,” he said as a cloud of color flowed over the face of 
one of the girls, while the others smiled mischievously. 

“ You are Katie,” he said, “and you are Lizzie, cer- 
tainly, and this is — why, it is Ada! This is a surprise, 
indeed; but I shan’t beg your pardon, Ada, for I kissed 
you at parting and quite intended to do so when I met 
you again, at least if you had offered no violent objection. 
How you are all grown and changed, while you, mother, 
look scarcely older than when I left you. But, there, I 
have quite forgotten Peters. He has come home with 
me, and will stay till he has formed his own plans.” 

He hurried out and brought in Peters, who, not wish- 
ing to be present at the family meeting, had been paying 
the coachman and seeing to the things being brought 
into the house. He was warmly received by the ladies, 
as the friend and companion of Charlie in his adventures; 
scarcely a letter having been received from the latter 
without mention having been made of his comrade. 

In a minute or two Mr. Tufton, who had been in the 
large garden behind the house, hurried in. He was now 
quite an old man, and under the influence of age and the 
cheerful society of Mrs. Marryat and her daughters he 
had lost much of the pomposity which had before distin- 
guished him. 

“ Ah, nephew! ” he said, when the happy party had sat 
down to dinner, their number increased by the arrival of 
Mrs. Haines, who had a house close by, “ willful lads will 
go their own way. I wanted to make a rich merchant of 
you, and you have made of yourself a famous soldier. 
But you’ve not dond badly for yourself after all, for you 
have in your letters often talked about prize-money.” 

“ Yes, uncle, I have earned in my way close upon a 


334 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


hundred thousand pounds, and I certainly shouldn’t 
have made that if I had stuck to the office at Madras, 
even with the aid of the capital you offered to lend me to 
trade with on my own account.” 

There was a general exclamation of surprise and 
pleasure at the mention of the sum, although this amount 
was small in comparison to that which many acquired in 
those days in India. 

“ And you’re not thinking of going back again, 
Charlie?” his mother said anxiously. “There can be 
no longer any reason for your exposing yourself to that 
horrible climate, and that constant fighting.” 

“ The climate is not so bad, mother, and the danger 
and excitement of a soldier’s life there at present render 
it very fascinating. But I have done with it. Peters 
and I intend, on the expiration of our leave, to resign 
our commissions in the company’s service, and to settle 
down under our own vines and fig trees. Tim has 
already elected himself to the post of my butler, and Hos- 
sein intends to be my valet and body-servant.” 

Immediately after their arrival Charlie had brought in 
his faithful followers and introduced them to the ladies, 
who, having often heard of their devotion and faithful 
services, had received them with a kindness and cor- 
diality which had delighted them. 

Lizzie, whose appearance at home had been unex- 
pected by Charlie, for her husband was a landed gentle- 
man at Sevenoaks in Kent, was, it appeared, paying a 
visit of a week to her mother, and her three children, two 
boys and a little girl, were duly brought down to be 
shown to, and admired by, their Uncle Charles. 

“ And how is it you haven’t married, Katie? With 
such a pretty face as yours, it is scandalous that the men 
have ‘allowed you to reach the mature age of twenty-two 
unmarried.” 

“ It is the fault of the hussy herself,” Mr. Tufton said. 
“ It is not from want of offers, for she has had a dozen, 
and among them some of the nobility at court; for it is 
well known that John Tufton’s niece will have a dowry 


HOME. 


335 


such as many of the nobles could not give to their 
daughters.” 

“ This is too bad, Kate,” Charlie said, laughing. 
“ What excuse have you to make for yourself for re- 
maining single with all these advantages of face and 
fortune? ” 

“ Simply that I didn’t like any of them,” Katie said. 
u The beaux of the present day are contemptible. I 
would as soon think of marrying a wax doll. When I 
do marry, that is, if ever I do, it shall be a man, and not 
a mere tailor’s dummy.” 

“ You are pert, miss,” her uncle said. “ Do what I 
will, Charlie, I cannot teach the hussy to order her 
tongue.” 

“ Katie’s quite right, uncle,” Charlie laughed. “ And 
I must make it my duty to find a man who will suit her 
taste, though, according to your account of her, he will 
find it a hard task to keep such a Xantippe in order.” 

Katie tossed her head. 

“ He’d better not try,” she said saucily, “ or it will be 
worse for him.” 

Two days later Charlie’s elder sister returned with her 
family to her house at Sevenoaks, where Charlie prom- 
ised before long to pay her a visit. After she had gone, 
Charlie and Peters, with Katie, made a series of excur- 
sions to all the points of interest round London, and on 
these occasions Ada usually accompanied them. The 
natural consequences followed. Charlie had for years 
been the hero of Ada’s thoughts, while Katie had heard 
so frequently of Peters that she was from the first dis- 
posed to regard him in the most favorable light. Be- 
fore the end of two months both couples were engaged, 
and as both the young officers possessed ample means, 
and the ladies were heiresses, there was no obstacle to an 
early union. The weddings took place a month later, 
and Tim was, in the exuberance of his delight, hilari- 
ously drunk for the first and only time during his serv- 
ice with Charlie. Both gentlemen bought estates in the 
country, and later took their seats in Parliament, where 


33*5 


WITH CLIVE IN INDIA. 


they vigorously defended their former commander, Lord 
Clive, in the assaults which were made upon him. 

Tim married seven or eight years after his master, and 
settled down in a nice little house upon the estate. Al- 
though henceforth he did no work whatever, he insisted 
to the end of his life that he was still in Colonel Marryat’s 
service. Hossein, to the great amusement of his master 
and mistress, followed Tim’s example. The pretty cook 
of Charlie’s establishment made no objection to his 
swarthy hue. Charlie built a snug cottage for them close 
to the house, where they took up their residence, but 
Hossein, though the happy father of a large family, con- 
tinued to the end of a long life to discharge the duties 
of valet to his master. Both he and Tim were immense 
favorites with the children of Charlie and Peters, who 
were never tired of listening to their tales of the exploits 
of their fathers when with Clive in India. 


THE END. 






































































■ ' 

, . 

. V ■' 


























l ' 










































































































































- 


















































































* 












« 





V 





















































» » 












































































* 













. 








































. 












. 

j s 









typ m e. mm 


















































































• 








































































LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




